Santerno

• 15P0176B100 •
SINUS H
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE
USER MANUAL
-Installation and Programming Instructions-
Issued on 07/03/17
R.02
Software Version 32.51 English
• This manual is integrant and essential to the product. Carefully read the instructions
contained herein as they provide important hints for use and maintenance safety.
• This device is to be used only for the purposes it has been designed to. Other uses should be
considered improper and dangerous. The manufacturer is not responsible for possible
damages caused by improper, erroneous and irrational uses.
• Elettronica Santerno is responsible for the product in its original setting.
• Any changes to the structure or operating cycle of the product must be performed or
authorized by Elettronica Santerno.
• Elettronica Santerno assumes no responsibility for the consequences resulting by the use of
non-original spare-parts.
• Elettronica Santerno reserves the right to make any technical changes to this manual and to
the product without prior notice. If printing errors or similar are detected, the corrections
will be included in the new releases of the manual.
• The information contained herein is the property of Elettronica Santerno and cannot be
reproduced. Elettronica Santerno enforces its rights on the drawings and catalogues
according to the law.
Elettronica Santerno S.p.A.

Via della Concia, 7 - 40023 Castel Guelfo (BO) Italy
Tel. +39 0542 489711 - Fax +39 0542 489722
santerno.com info@santerno.com
Safety Information
Revision Index
The following subjects covered in this User Manual (Installation and Programming
Instructions) R.02 have been added or changed in respect to revision R.01:
• Information about the protection level for connection terminals and devices added.
• Cable Wiring detailed for IP20 0034 model too.
• Figures for Terminals in IP20 0034 model and IP66 models added.
• References to AO2 Analog Output and A2/C2 Digital Output added [0034 model only].
• Bracket dimensions and mounting for LCD keypad added.
• Section about Sensorless Vector Control for PM (Permanent-Magnet) Syn Motors
added.
• Table for the recommended MCCB for RMS symmetrical amperes added.
• Statement about maximum distance (3m) for remoting the graphic keypad added.
• References to PTC Trip and MC Fail Trip removed.
• Some measures in External Dimensions table fixed.
• RS-232/RS-485 converter replaced by USB/RS-485 converter.
• Values of Heat Emission updated.
• Section about Applying Drives to Single-Phase Input Application added.
• EMC footprint and standard filters: “EN55011 (B class)” changed to “EN55011 (Group 1
Class A)” and “EN55011 (A class)” changed to “EN55011 (Group 2 Class A)”
• Unused EMC filter models removed (2S from the footprint filters and 4T from the
standard filters).
• Stated that the Output Ferrite is required also for the drive models featuring built-in filters.
Santerno User Manuals mentioned in this

Instructions Guide
The following Santerno User Manuals are mentioned throughout this Instructions Guide:
• 15W0102B500 Motor Drives Accessories - User Manual
• 15W0176B100 Sinus H - Conduit Kit and Flange Kit Manual
ii
Safety Information
Safety Information
Read and follow all safety instructions in this manual precisely to avoid unsafe operating
conditions, property damage, personal injury, or death.
Safety symbols in this manual
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in severe injury or
death.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in injury or death.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in minor injury or
property damage.
Safety information
• Do not open the cover of the equipment while it is on or operating. Likewise, do not
operate the inverter while the cover is open. Exposure of high voltage terminals or charging
area to the external environment may result in an electric shock. Do not remove any covers
or touch the internal circuit boards (PCBs) or electrical contacts on the product when the
power is on or during operation. Doing so may result in serious injury, death, or serious
property damage.
• Do not open the cover of the equipment even when the power supply to the inverter has
been turned off unless it is necessary for maintenance or regular inspection. Opening the
cover may result in an electric shock even when the power supply is off.
• The equipment may hold charge long after the power supply has been turned off. Use a multi-
meter to make sure that there is no voltage before working on the inverter, motor or motor cable.
iii
Safety Information
• This equipment must be grounded for safe and proper operation.

• Do not supply power to a faulty inverter. If you find that the inverter is faulty, disconnect
the power supply and have the inverter professionally repaired.
• The inverter becomes hot during operation. Avoid touching the inverter until it has cooled
to avoid burns.
• Do not allow foreign objects, such as screws, metal chips, debris, water, or oil to get inside
the inverter. Allowing foreign objects inside the inverter may cause the inverter to
malfunction or result in a fire.
• Do not operate the inverter with wet hands. Doing so may result in electric shock.
• Check the information about the protection level for the circuits and devices.
The following connection terminals and devices are the Electrical Protection level 0. It
means that the circuit protection level depends on the basic insulation. If there is no basic
insulation or it has failed, electric shock accident may occur. When installing or wiring the
connection terminals and devices, take the same protective action as for the power wiring.
- Multi-function Input: P1-P7 for IP20 models, P1-P5 for IP66 models, CM
- Analog Frequency Input: VR, V1, I2, TI
- Safety Function: SA, SB, SC
- Analog Output: AO, AO2 [0034 model only], TO
- Digital Output: Q1, EG, 24, A1/C1/B1, A2/C2 [0034 model only]
- Communication: S+/S-/SG
- Fan
• The protection level of this equipment (inverter) is the Electrical Protection level 1.
• Do not modify the interior workings of the inverter. Doing so will void the warranty.
• The inverter is designed for 3-phase motor operation. Do not use the inverter to operate a
single phase motor.
• Do not place heavy objects on top of electric cables. Doing so may damage the cable and
result in an electric shock.
iv
Safety Information
Note
Maximum allowed prospective short-circuit current at the input power connection is
defined in IEC 60439-1 as 100 kA. Depending on the selected MCCB, the SINUS H Series is
suitable for use in circuits capable of delivering a maximum of 100 kA RMS symmetrical
amperes at the drive's maximum rated voltage. The following table lists the recommended
MCCB for RMS symmetrical amperes.
ABB Tmax LSIS Susol LSIS Metasol

Working TIB160 UTE100 UTS150 ABS33c ABS53c ABS63c ABS103c
Voltage (B/C/N) [kA] (E/N) [kA] (N/H/L) [kA] [kA] [kA] [kA] [kA]
240V(50/60Hz) 25/40/50 50/65 65/100/150 30 35 35 85
480V(50/60Hz) 8/10/15 25/35 35/65/100 7.5 10 10 26
v
Quick Reference Table
Quick Reference Table

The following table contains situations frequently encountered by users while working with
inverters. Refer to the typical and practical situations in the table to quickly and easily locate
answers to your questions.
Situation Reference
I want to run a slightly higher rated motor than the inverter’s rated capacity. p. 275
I want to configure the inverter to start operating as soon as the power source is
p. 139
applied.
I want to configure the motor’s parameters. p.204
I want to set up sensorless vector control. p.207
Something seems to be wrong with the inverter or the motor. p. 294, p.404
What is auto tuning? p.204
What are the recommended wiring lengths? p. 294, p.404
The motor is too noisy. p. 239
I want to apply PID control on my system. p. 196
What are the factory default settings for P1-P7 (IP20 models) or P1-P5 ( IP66
p. 51
models) multi-function terminals?
I want to view all of the parameters I have modified. p. 248
I want to review recent fault trip and warning histories. p. 370
I want to change the inverter’s operation frequency using a potentiometer. p. 81
I want to install a frequency meter using an analog terminal. p. 53
I want to display the supply current to motor. p. 84
I want to operate the inverter using a multi-step speed configuration. p. 131
The motor runs too hot. p. 273
The inverter is too hot. p. 282
The cooling fan does not work. p. 410
I want to change the items that are monitored on the keypad. p. 269
vi
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1 Preparing the Installation ......................................................................................... 16
1.1 Product Identification................................................................................................................ 16
1.2 Part Names for IP20 models ................................................................................................... 18
1.3 Part Names for IP66 models ................................................................................................... 21
1.4 Installation Considerations ..................................................................................................... 23
1.5 Selecting and Preparing a Site for Installation.............................................................. 24
1.6 Cable Selection ............................................................................................................................. 28
2 Installing the Inverter ................................................................................................ 30
2.1 Mounting the Inverter .............................................................................................................. 32
2.2 Cable Wiring ................................................................................................................................... 36
2.3 Post-Installation Checklist ....................................................................................................... 63
2.4 Test Run ............................................................................................................................................ 65
3 Learning to Perform Basic Operations ................................................................... 67
3.1 About the Keypad ....................................................................................................................... 67
3.1.1 About the Display .............................................................................................................. 68
3.1.2 Operation Keys .................................................................................................................... 69
3.1.3 Control Menu ....................................................................................................................... 70
3.2 Learning to Use the Keypad................................................................................................... 71
3.2.1 Group and Code Selection............................................................................................ 71
3.2.2 Navigating Directly to Different Codes ................................................................... 72
3.2.3 Setting Parameter Values ............................................................................................... 73
3.2.4 Configuring the [ESC] Key.............................................................................................. 74
3.3 Actual Application Examples................................................................................................. 76
3.3.1 Acceleration Time Configuration............................................................................... 76
3.3.2 Frequency Reference Configuration........................................................................ 77
3.3.3 Jog Frequency Configuration...................................................................................... 78
3.3.4 Initializing All Parameters ............................................................................................... 79
3.3.5 Frequency Setting (Potentiometer) and Operation (Terminal Input).... 81
vii
Table of Contents
3.3.6 Frequency Setting (Potentiometer) and Operation (Keypad) ................... 82

3.4 Monitoring the Operation ...................................................................................................... 84
3.4.1 Output Current Monitoring.......................................................................................... 84
3.4.2 Fault Trip Monitoring ........................................................................................................ 85
3.5 About the LCD keypad (graphic keypad)........................................................................ 87
3.5.1 Operation Keys .................................................................................................................... 87
3.5.2 Bracket dimensions and mounting.......................................................................... 89
3.5.3 About the Display .............................................................................................................. 90
3.5.4 Display Modes...................................................................................................................... 93
3.6 Learning to Use the LCD keypad (graphic keypad) ................................................... 96
3.6.1 Display Mode Selection .................................................................................................. 96
3.6.2 Switching Groups............................................................................................................... 99
3.6.3 Navigating through the Codes (Functions) ...................................................... 101
3.6.4 Navigating Directly to Different Codes ................................................................ 103
3.6.5 Parameter settings.......................................................................................................... 104
3.6.6 Monitoring the Operation.......................................................................................... 106
3.7 Fault Monitoring ........................................................................................................................109
3.7.1 Monitoring Faults during Inverter Operation .................................................. 109
3.7.2 Monitoring Multiple Fault Trips.................................................................................110
3.8 Parameter Initialization........................................................................................................... 112
4 Learning Basic Features........................................................................................... 113
4.1 Setting Frequency Reference .............................................................................................. 116
4.1.1 Keypad as the Source (KeyPad-1 setting)............................................................117
4.1.2 Keypad as the Source (KeyPad-2 setting)............................................................117
4.1.3 V1 Terminal as the Source............................................................................................118
4.1.4 Setting a Frequency Reference with Input Voltage (Terminal I2).......... 125
4.1.5 Setting a Frequency with TI Pulse Input.............................................................. 127
4.1.6 Setting a Frequency Reference via RS-485 Communication................... 129
4.2 Frequency Hold by Analog Input ......................................................................................130
4.3 Changing the Displayed Units (Hz↔Rpm) ....................................................................131
4.4 Setting Multi-step Frequency .............................................................................................131
viii
Table of Contents
4.5 Command Source Configuration ......................................................................................133

4.5.1 The Keypad as a Command Input Device ......................................................... 133
4.5.2 Terminal Block as a Command Input Device (Fwd/Rev Run Commands)
................................................................................................................................................. 134
4.5.3 Terminal Block as a Command Input Device (Run and Rotation
Direction Commands) ................................................................................................ 135
4.5.4 RS-485 Communication as a Command Input Device............................... 136
4.6 Local/Remote Mode Switching..........................................................................................136
4.7 Forward or Reverse Run Prevention ................................................................................138
4.8 Power-on Run..............................................................................................................................139
4.9 Reset and Restart .......................................................................................................................140
4.10 Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times .............................................................141
4.10.1 Acc/Dec Time Based on Maximum Frequency............................................... 141
4.10.2 Acc/Dec Time Based on Operation Frequency ............................................... 143
4.10.3 Multi-step Acc/Dec Time Configuration.............................................................. 144
4.10.4 Configuring Acc/Dec Time Switch Frequency................................................. 146
4.11 Acc/Dec Pattern Configuration ..........................................................................................147
4.12 Stopping the Acc/Dec Operation ......................................................................................149
4.13 V/F(Voltage/Frequency) Control .......................................................................................150
4.13.1 Linear V/F Pattern Operation..................................................................................... 150
4.13.2 Square Reduction V/F pattern Operation .......................................................... 151
4.13.3 User V/F Pattern Operation ........................................................................................ 152
4.14 Torque Boost ................................................................................................................................153
4.14.1 Manual Torque Boost .................................................................................................... 153
4.14.2 Auto Torque Boost .......................................................................................................... 154
4.15 Output Voltage Setting ..........................................................................................................155
4.16 Start Mode Setting....................................................................................................................155
4.16.1 Acceleration Start ............................................................................................................ 156
4.16.2 Start After DC Braking ................................................................................................... 156
4.17 Stop Mode Setting....................................................................................................................157
4.17.1 Deceleration Stop ........................................................................................................... 157
4.17.2 Stop After DC Braking ................................................................................................... 157
ix
Table of Contents
4.17.3 Free Run Stop .................................................................................................................... 159

4.17.4 Power Braking ................................................................................................................... 159
4.18 Frequency Limit..........................................................................................................................160
4.18.1 Frequency Limit Using Maximum Frequency and Start Frequency ... 160
4.18.2 Frequency Limit Using Upper and Lower Limit Frequency Values ...... 161
4.18.3 Frequency Jump.............................................................................................................. 162
4.19 2nd Operation Mode Setting ..............................................................................................163
4.20 Multi-function Input Terminal Control ...........................................................................164
4.21 P2P Setting....................................................................................................................................166
4.22 Multi-keypad Setting ...............................................................................................................167
4.23 User Sequence Setting ...........................................................................................................168
4.24 Fire Mode Operation................................................................................................................176
5 Learning Advanced Features .................................................................................. 178
5.1 Operating with Auxiliary References ...............................................................................179
5.2 Jog operation ..............................................................................................................................184
5.2.1 Jog Operation 1-Forward Jog by Multi-function Terminal ....................... 185
5.2.2 Jog Operation 2-Fwd/Rev Jog by Multi-function Terminal ...................... 186
5.2.3 Jog Operation by Keypad ........................................................................................... 187
5.3 Up-down Operation ................................................................................................................188
5.4 3-Wire Operation .......................................................................................................................189
5.5 Safe Operation Mode ..............................................................................................................190
5.6 Dwell Operation .........................................................................................................................192
5.7 Slip Compensation Operation ............................................................................................194
5.8 PID Control ....................................................................................................................................196
5.8.1 PID Basic Operation........................................................................................................ 197
5.8.2 Pre-PID Operation ........................................................................................................... 202
5.8.3 PID Operation Sleep Mode ........................................................................................ 202
5.8.4 PID Switching (PID Openloop) ................................................................................. 203
5.9 Auto Tuning ..................................................................................................................................204
5.10 Sensorless Vector Control for Induction Motors........................................................207
5.10.1 Sensorless Vector Control Operation Setting for Induction Motors .... 210
5.10.2 Sensorless Vector Control Operation Guide for Induction Motors....... 214
x
Table of Contents
5.11 Sensorless Vector Control for PM (Permanent-Magnet) Syn Motors ..............216

5.11.1 Detecting the Initial Pole Position .......................................................................... 218
5.11.2 Sensorless Vector Control Mode Settings for PM Synchronous Motors
................................................................................................................................................. 219
5.11.3 Guidelines for Running a PM Synchronous Motor in Sensorless Vector
Control Mode................................................................................................................... 224
5.12 Kinetic Energy Buffering Operation .................................................................................227
5.13 Torque Control ............................................................................................................................228
5.14 Energy Saving Operation ......................................................................................................232
5.14.1 Manual Energy Saving Operation .......................................................................... 232
5.14.2 Automatic Energy Saving Operation.................................................................... 232
5.15 Speed Search Operation........................................................................................................233
5.16 Auto Restart Settings ...............................................................................................................237
5.17 Operational Noise Settings (carrier frequency settings) .......................................239
5.18 2nd Motor Operation .................................................................................................................240
5.19 Supply Power Transition ........................................................................................................242
5.20 Cooling Fan Control .................................................................................................................243
5.21 Input Power Frequency and Voltage Settings ............................................................244
5.22 Read, Write, and Save Parameters .....................................................................................244
5.23 Parameter Initialization...........................................................................................................245
5.24 Parameter View Lock................................................................................................................246
5.25 Parameter Lock ...........................................................................................................................247
5.26 Changed Parameter Display ................................................................................................248
5.27 User Group ....................................................................................................................................248
5.28 Easy Start On ................................................................................................................................250
5.29 Config(CNF) Mode ....................................................................................................................251
5.30 Timer Settings .............................................................................................................................252
5.31 Brake Control ...............................................................................................................................253
5.32 Multi-Function Output On/Off Control ..........................................................................255
5.33 Press Regeneration Prevention ..........................................................................................256
5.34 Analog Output ............................................................................................................................257
5.34.1 Voltage and Current Analog Output..................................................................... 257
xi
Table of Contents
5.34.2 Analog Pulse Output ..................................................................................................... 260

5.35 Digital Output .............................................................................................................................262
5.35.1 Multi-function Output Terminal and Relay Settings .................................... 262
5.35.2 Fault Trip Output using Multi-Function Output Terminal and Relay ... 266
5.35.3 Multi-function Output Terminal Delay Time Settings.................................. 267
5.36 Keypad Language Settings ..................................................................................................268
5.37 Operation State Monitor........................................................................................................269
5.38 Operation Time Monitor ........................................................................................................271
6 Learning Protection Features ................................................................................. 273
6.1 Motor Protection .......................................................................................................................273
6.1.1 Electronic Thermal Motor Overheating Prevention (ETH) ........................ 273
6.1.2 Overload Early Warning and Trip ............................................................................ 275
6.1.3 Stall Prevention and Flux Braking ........................................................................... 276
6.2 Inverter and Sequence Protection....................................................................................280
6.2.1 Open-phase Protection ............................................................................................... 280
6.2.2 External Trip Signal.......................................................................................................... 281
6.2.3 Inverter Overload Protection .................................................................................... 282
6.2.4 Speed Command Loss ................................................................................................. 283
6.2.5 Dynamic Braking (DB) Resistor Configuration................................................. 285
6.3 Under load Fault Trip and Warning...................................................................................286
6.3.1 Fan Fault Detection ........................................................................................................ 288
6.3.2 Lifetime Diagnosis of Components....................................................................... 288
6.3.3 Low Voltage Fault Trip ................................................................................................... 291
6.3.4 Output Block by Multi-Function Terminal.......................................................... 291
6.3.5 Trip Status Reset ............................................................................................................... 292
6.3.6 Inverter Diagnosis State............................................................................................... 292
6.3.7 Operation Mode on Option Card Trip .................................................................. 293
6.3.8 No Motor Trip..................................................................................................................... 293
6.3.9 Low Voltage Trip 2 ........................................................................................................... 294
6.4 Fault/Warning List .....................................................................................................................294
7 RS-485 Communication Features .......................................................................... 297
7.1 Communication Standards ..................................................................................................297
xii
Table of Contents
7.2 Communication System Configuration .........................................................................298

7.2.1 Communication Line Connection ......................................................................... 298
7.2.2 Setting Communication Parameters.................................................................... 299
7.2.3 Setting Operation Command and Frequency ................................................ 300
7.2.4 Command Loss Protective Operation.................................................................. 301
7.2.5 Setting Virtual Multi-Function Input ..................................................................... 302
7.2.6 Saving Parameters Defined by Communication ........................................... 302
7.2.7 Total Memory Map for Communication............................................................. 303
7.2.8 Parameter Group for Data Transmission............................................................. 304
7.3 Communication Protocol ......................................................................................................305
7.3.1 Modbus-RTU Protocol .................................................................................................. 305
7.4 Compatible Common Area Parameter ...........................................................................308
7.5 Sinus H Expansion Common Area Parameter............................................................. 311
7.5.1 Monitoring Area Parameter (Read Only) .............................................................311
7.5.2 Control Area Parameter (Read/ Write) .................................................................. 316
7.5.3 Inverter Memory Control Area Parameter (Read and Write).................... 318
8 Table of Functions .................................................................................................... 321
8.1 Operation Group .......................................................................................................................321
8.2 Drive group (PAR→dr) ............................................................................................................323
8.3 Basic Function group (PAR→bA).......................................................................................328
8.4 Expanded Function group (PAR→Ad)............................................................................333
8.5 Control Function group (PAR→Cn)..................................................................................339
8.6 Input Terminal Block Function group (PAR→In) .......................................................347
8.7 Output Terminal Block Function group (PAR→OU) ................................................352
8.8 Communication Function group (PAR→CM) .............................................................357
8.9 Application Function group (PAR→AP).........................................................................362
8.10 Protection Function group (PAR→Pr) .............................................................................365
8.11 2nd Motor Function group (PAR→M2)..........................................................................370
8.12 User Sequence group (US)....................................................................................................373
8.13 User Sequence Function group(UF) ................................................................................376
8.14 Groups for LCD Keypad Only...............................................................................................396
xiii
Table of Contents
8.14.1 Trip Mode (TRP Last-x) .................................................................................................. 396

8.14.2 Config Mode (CNF)......................................................................................................... 396
9 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................... 400
9.1 Trips and Warnings ...................................................................................................................400
9.1.1 Fault Trips ............................................................................................................................. 400
9.1.2 Warning Messages ......................................................................................................... 403
9.2 Troubleshooting Fault Trips..................................................................................................404
9.3 Troubleshooting Other Faults .............................................................................................406
10 Maintenance .............................................................................................................. 411
10.1 Regular Inspection Lists ......................................................................................................... 411
10.1.1 Daily Inspections...............................................................................................................411
10.1.2 Annual Inspections......................................................................................................... 412
10.1.3 Bi-annual Inspections.................................................................................................... 414
10.2 Storage and Disposal...............................................................................................................415
10.2.1 Storage.................................................................................................................................. 415
10.2.2 Disposal ................................................................................................................................ 415
11 Technical Specification ............................................................................................ 416
11.1 Input and Output Specification .........................................................................................416
11.2 Product Specification Details ..............................................................................................426
11.3 External Dimensions (IP 20 Type) ......................................................................................429
11.4 External Dimensions (IP 66 Type) ......................................................................................434
11.5 Peripheral Devices Specification .......................................................................................437
11.6 Fuse and Reactor Specifications ........................................................................................438
11.7 Terminal Screw Specification...............................................................................................441
11.8 Braking Resistor Specification .............................................................................................442
11.9 Continuous Rated Current Derating................................................................................445
11.10 Heat Emission ..............................................................................................................................448
12 Applying 2T and 4T Drives to Single-Phase Input Application ........................ 450
12.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................450
12.2 Power(HP), Input Current and Output Current ..........................................................451
12.3 Input Frequency and Voltage Tolerance........................................................................452
xiv
Table of Contents
13 Marking ...................................................................................................................... 453

13.1 UL mark...........................................................................................................................................453
13.2 CE mark...........................................................................................................................................453
13.2.1 Low Voltage Directive ................................................................................................... 453
13.2.2 EMC Directive .................................................................................................................... 453
Index ................................................................................................................................... 458
xv
Installing the Inverter
1 Preparing the Installation

This chapter provides details on product identification, part names, correct installation and
cable specifications. To install the inverter correctly and safely, carefully read and follow the
instructions.
1.1 Product Identification

The SINUS H Inverter is manufactured in a range of product groups based on drive capacity
and power source specifications. Product name and specifications are detailed on the rating
plate. The illustration on the next page shows the location of the rating plate. Check the
rating plate before installing the product and make sure that the product meets your
requirements. For more detailed product specifications, refer to 11.1 Input and Output
Specification on page 416.
Note
Check the product name, open the packaging, and then confirm that the product is free from
defects. Contact your supplier if you have any issues or questions about your product.
Inverter Type
Code
Input Power Rating
Outp. voltage, frequency,
current, power
16
SINUS H 0001 4T B A2 K 2
Product Identification
Input
Size Size Brake Filter Keypad Enclosure
Code kW power
IP20 IP66
0001 0.4 Eu_A n.a. 2S B A1 K 2
0002 0.75 Eu_B n.a. 2S 1 phase B A1 K 2
200-
0003 1.5 Eu_B n.a. 2S 240 Vac B A1 K 2
0005 2.2 Eu_C n.a. 2S B A1 K 2
A2= Integrated Filter for Second Environment, C3 Category

0001 0.4 A1 IP66_A 2T B I K 2/6
A1= Integrated Filter for First Environment, C2 Category

0002 0.75 A2 IP66_A 2T B I K 2/6
0003 1.5 B1 IP66_B 2T B I K 2/6
ELETTRONICA SANTERNO inverter
B= Brake included X=Brake not included
0005 2.2 B2 IP66_B 2T 3 phase B I K 2/6

0007 4 C IP66_B 2T 200- B I K 2/6
0011 5.5 D IP66_C 2T 240 Vac B I K 2/6
I= No filter integrated
K= Keypad included
0014 7.5 D IP66_C 2T B I K 2/6
2= IP20 6=IP66
0017 11 E IP66_D 2T B I K 2/6
0020 15 F IP66_E 2T B I K 2/6
0001 0.4 Eu_A IP66_A 4T B A2 K 2/6
0002 0.75 Eu_A IP66_A 4T B A2 K 2/6
0003 1.5 Eu_B IP66_B 4T B A2 K 2/6
0005 2.2 Eu_B IP66_B 4T B A2 K 2/6
0007 4 Eu_C IP66_B 4T B A2 K 2/6
0011 5.5 D IP66_C 4T 3 phase B A2 K 2/6
380-
0014 7.5 D IP66_C 4T 480 Vac B A2 K 2/6
0017 11 E IP66_D 4T B A2 K 2/6
0020 15 E IP66_D 4T B A2 K 2/6
0025 18.5 F IP66_E 4T B A2 K 2/6
0030 22 F IP66_E 4T B A2 K 2/6
0034 30 G n.a. 4T X A2 K 2
The motor power is based on 230Vac for models “2S/T” and on 400Vac for models “4T”,
considering the Heavy load condition.
17
1.2 Part Names for IP20 models

The illustration below displays part names for IP20 models. Details may vary between
product groups.
Sizes Eu_A, Eu_B, Eu_C1, Eu_C2, A1, A2, B1, B2, C2
18
Sizes D, E, F
19
Size G
20
1.3 Part Names for IP66 models

The illustration below displays part names for IP66 models. Details may vary between
product groups.
Full product
Do not operate Disconnect Switch when motor is operating.
Cooling fan is only supported to 5.5~7.5kW products.
21
Front cover removed
22
1.4 Installation Considerations

Inverters are composed of various precision, electronic devices, and therefore the
installation environment can significantly impact the lifespan and reliability of the product.
The table below details the ideal operation and installation conditions for the inverter.
Items Description
Ambient Temperature* Heavy Duty: -10–50°C (14–104°F) Normal Duty: -10– 40°C (14–122°F)
Ambient Humidity 90% relative humidity (no condensation)
Storage Temperature -20–65°C (-4–149°F)
An environment free from corrosive or flammable gases, oil residue
Environmental Factors
or dust
Altitude/Vibration Lower than 1000m (3280ft) above sea level/less than 1G (9.8m/sec2)
Air Pressure 70 –106kPa
* The ambient temperature is the temperature measured at a point 5cm (2”) from the
surface of the inverter.
5cm 5cm
Do not allow the ambient temperature to exceed the allowable range while operating the
inverter.
23
1.5 Selecting and Preparing a Site for Installation

When selecting an installation location consider the following points:
• The inverter must be installed on a wall that can support the inverter’s weight.
• The location must be free from vibration. Vibration can adversely affect the operation of
the inverter.
• The inverter can become very hot during operation. Install the inverter on a surface
that is fire-resistant or flame-retardant and with sufficient clearance around the inverter
to allow air to circulate. The illustrations below detail the required installation
clearances.
10cm
5cm 5cm
5cm
10cm
• Ensure sufficient air circulation is provided around the inverter when it is installed. If the
inverter is to be installed inside a panel, enclosure, or cabinet rack, carefully consider
the position of the inverter’s cooling fan and the ventilation louver. The cooling fan
must be positioned to efficiently transfer the heat generated by the operation of the
inverter.
24
25
If you are installing multiple inverters in one location, arrange them side-by-side and
remove the top covers. The top covers MUST be removed for side-by-side installations. Use a
flat head screwdriver to remove the top covers.
25mm
25mm
26
• If you are installing multiple inverters, of different ratings, provide sufficient clearance
to meet the clearance specifications of the largest inverter.
10cm
5cm 5cm
10cm
27
1.6 Cable Selection

When you install power and signal cables in the terminal blocks, only use cables that meet
the required specification for the safe and reliable operation of the product. Refer to the
following information to assist you with cable selection.
• Wherever possible use cables with the largest cross-sectional area for mains power
wiring, to ensure that voltage drop does not exceed 2%.
• Use copper cables rated for 600V, 75°C for power terminal wiring.
• Use copper cables rated for 300V, 75°C for control terminal wiring.
Ground Cable and Power Cable Specifications
Sinus H Model Ground Power I/O
(Voltage / Code / kW) mm2 AWG mm2 AWG
R/S/T U/V/W R/S/T U/V/W
0001
2S 0002 0.75 0.4 3.5 12 2 2 14 14
0003 1.5
0005 2.2 3.5 3.5 12 12
2T 0001 0.4
0002 0.75
2 2 14 14
0003 1.5
0005 2.2
0007 4 3.5 3.5 12 12
0011 5.5 5.5 10 6 6 10 10
0014 7.5
0017 11 14 6 10 10 8 8
0020 15 16 16 6 6
4T 0001 0.4
0002 0.75
2 14 2 2 14 14
0003 1.5
0005 2.2
0007 4
0011 5.5 3.5 12 2.5 2.5 14 14
0014 7.5 4 4 12 12
0017 11 8 8
0020 15 6 6 10 10
0025 18.5 14 6 10 10 8 8
0030 22
0034 30 16 5 25 25 4 4
28
Signal (Control) Cable Specifications
Terminals Signal Cable

Without Crimp With Crimp
Terminal Connectors Terminal Connectors
(Bare wire) (Bootlace Ferrule)
mm2 AWG mm2 AWG
P1-P7*/CM/VR/V1/I2 0.75 18 0.5 20
/AO/AO2 [0034
model only]/
Q1/EG/24/TI/TO*
/SA,SB,SC/S+,S-,SG
A1/C1/B1,A2/C2
1.0 17 1.5 15
[0034 model only]
* IP66 models do not support P6/P7/TI/TO terminal. Refer to Step 4 Control Terminal Wiring on
page 47.
29
2 Installing the Inverter

This chapter describes the physical and electrical installation methods, including mounting
and wiring of the product. Refer to the flowchart and basic configuration diagram provided
below to understand the procedures and installation methods to be followed to install the
product correctly.
Installation Flowchart (Basic Configuration Diagram)
The flowchart lists the sequence to be followed during installation. The steps cover
equipment installation and testing of the product. More information on each step is
referenced in the steps.
Product Identification (p.16)
Select the Installation Location (p.21)
Mounting the Inverter (p.32)
Wiring the Ground Connection (p.42)
Power and Signal Wiring (p.43)
Post-Installation Checks (p.63)
Turning on the Inverter
Parameter Configuration (p.76)
Testing (p.65)
30
The reference diagram below shows a typical system configuration showing the inverter
and peripheral devices.
Prior to installing the inverter, ensure that the product is suitable for the application (power
rating, capacity, etc). Ensure that all of the required peripherals and optional devices
(resistor brakes, contactors, noise filters, etc.) are available. For more details on peripheral
devices, refer to 11.5 Peripheral Devices Specification on page 437.
• Figures in this manual are shown with covers or circuit breakers removed to show a more
detailed view of the installation arrangements. Install covers and circuit breakers before
operating the inverter. Operate the product according to the instructions in this manual.
• Do not start or stop the inverter using a magnetic contactor, installed on the input power
supply.
• If the inverter is damaged and loses control, the machine may cause a dangerous situation.
Install an additional safety device such as an emergency brake to prevent these situations.
• High levels of current draw during power-on can affect the system. Ensure that
correctly rated circuit breakers are installed to operate safely during power-on
situations.
• Reactors can be installed to improve the power factor. Note that reactors may be
installed within 10m (33ft) from the power source if the input power exceeds 10 times
of inverter capacity. Refer to 11.6 Fuse and Reactor Specifications on page 438 and
carefully select a reactor that meets the requirements.
31
2.1 Mounting the Inverter

Mount the inverter on a wall or inside a panel following the procedures provided below.
Before installation, ensure that there is sufficient space to meet the clearance specifications,
and that there are no obstacles impeding the cooling fan’s air flow.
Select a wall or panel suitable to support the installation. Refer to 11.3 External Dimensions
(IP 20 Type) on page 429 and check the inverter’s mounting bracket dimensions.
1 Use a level to draw a horizontal line on the mounting surface, and then carefully mark
the fixing points.
2 Drill the two upper mounting bolt holes, and then install the mounting bolts. Do not
fully tighten the bolts at this time. Fully tighten the mounting bolts after the inverter
has been mounted.
32
3 Mount the inverter on the wall or inside a panel using the two upper bolts, and then
fully tighten the mounting bolts. Ensure that the inverter is placed flat on the mounting
surface, and that the installation surface can securely support the weight of the
inverter.
33
Note
The quantity and dimensions of the mounting brackets vary based on frame size. Refer to 11.3
External Dimensions (IP 20 Type) on page 429 for detailed information about your model.
Inverters with small frame sizes Eu_A, Eu_B, A1, A2 (0.4–0.8kW) have only two mounting
brackets. Inverters with large frame sizes have 4 mounting brackets.
34
• Do not transport the inverter by lifting with the inverter’s covers or plastic surfaces. The
inverter may tip over if covers break, causing injuries or damage to the product. Always
support the inverter using the metal frames when moving it.
• Hi-capacity inverters are very heavy and bulky. Use an appropriate transport method that is
suitable for the weight.
• Do not install the inverter on the floor or mount it sideways against a wall. The inverter
MUST be installed vertically, on a wall or inside a panel, with its rear flat on the mounting
surface.
35
2.2 Cable Wiring

Open the front cover, remove the cable guides and control terminal cover, and then install
the ground connection as specified. Complete the cable connections by connecting an
appropriately rated cable to the terminals on the power and control terminal blocks.
Read the following information carefully before carrying out wiring connections to the
inverter. All warning instructions must be followed.
• Install the inverter before carrying out wiring connections.

• Ensure that no small metal debris, such as wire cut-offs, remain inside the inverter. Metal
debris in the inverter may cause inverter failure.
• Tighten terminal screws to their specified torque. Loose terminal block screws may allow
the cables to disconnect and cause short circuit or inverter failure. Refer to 11.7 Terminal
Screw Specification on page 441 for torque specifications.
• Do not place heavy objects on top of electric cables. Heavy objects may damage the cable
and result in electric shock.
• The power supply system for this equipment (inverter) is a grounded system. Only use a
grounded power supply system for this equipment (inverter). Do not use a TT, TN, IT, or
corner grounded system with the inverter.
• The equipment may generate direct current in the protective ground wire. When installing
the residual current device (RCD) or residual current monitoring (RCM), only Type B RCDs
and RCMs can be used.
• Use cables with the largest cross-sectional area, appropriate for power terminal wiring, to
ensure that voltage drop does not exceed 2%.
• Use copper cables rated at 600V, 75°C for power terminal wiring.
• Use copper cables rated at 300V, 75°C for control terminal wiring.
• If you need to re-wire the terminals due to wiring-related faults, ensure that the inverter
keypad display is turned off and the charge lamp under the front cover is off before working
on wiring connections. The inverter may hold a high voltage electric charge long after the
power supply has been turned off.
36
Step 1 Front Cover, Control Terminal Cover and Cable Guide
The front cover, control terminal cover and cable guide must be removed to install cables.
Refer to the following procedures to remove the covers and cable guide. The steps to
remove these parts may vary depending on the inverter model.
Sizes A, A1, A2, B, C
For the Inverter Size definition refer to page 16.

1 Loosen the bolt that secures the front cover (right side). Push and hold the latch on the
right side of the cover. Then remove the cover by lifting it from the bottom and moving
it away from the front of the inverter.
2 Remove the bolt that secures the front cover (left side) (❶). Push and hold the latch on
the left side of the cover. Then remove the cover by lifting it from the bottom and
moving it away from the front of the inverter (❷).
37
3 Connect the cables to the power terminals and the control terminals. For cable
specifications, refer to 1.6 Cable Selection on page 28.
38
Sizes D, E, F
For the Inverter Size identification refer to page 16.

1 Loosen the bolt that secures the front cover. Then remove the cover by lifting it from
the bottom and away from the front.
2 Push and hold the levers on both sides of the cable guide (❶) and then remove the
cable guide by pulling it directly away from the front of the inverter (❷). In some
models where the cable guide is secured by a bolt, remove the bolt first.
39
3 Push and hold the tab on the right side of the control terminal cover. Then remove the
cover by lifting it from the bottom and moving it away from the front of the inverter.
40
Size G
For the Inverter Size identification refer to page 16.

1 Loosen the bolt that secures the terminal cover (). Push and hold the latch on the
right side of the cover (). Then remove the cover by lifting it from the bottom and
moving it away from the front of the inverter.
Note
To connect an LCD keypad, remove the plastic knock-out from the bottom of the front cover
(right side) or from the control terminal cover. Then connect the signal cable to the RJ-45 port
on the control board.
See the picture in Step 4 Control Terminal Wiring.
41
Step 2 Ground Connection
Remove the front cover(s), cable guide, and the control terminal cover. Then follow the
instructions below to install the ground connection for the inverter.
1 Locate the ground terminal and connect an appropriately rated ground cable to the
terminals. Refer to 1.6 Cable Selection on page 28 to find the appropriate cable
specification for your installation.
2 Connect the other ends of the ground cables to the supply earth (ground) terminal.
42
Note
• 2T products require Class 3 grounding. Resistance to ground must be < 100Ω.

• 4T products require Special Class 3 grounding. Resistance to ground must be < 10Ω.
Install ground connections for the inverter and the motor by following the correct specifications
to ensure safe and accurate operation. Using the inverter and the motor without the specified
grounding connections may result in electric shock.
Step 3 Power Terminal Wiring
The following illustration shows the terminal layout on the power terminal block. Refer to
the detailed descriptions to understand the function and location of each terminal before
making wiring connections. Ensure that the cables selected meet or exceed the
specifications in 1.6 Cable Selection on page 28 before installing them.
• Tighten terminal screws to their specified torque. Loose terminal screws may allow the
cables to disconnect and cause short circuit or inverter failure. Over tightening
terminal screws may damage the terminals and cause short circuits and malfunctions.
• Use copper cables rated for 600V, 75°C for power terminal wiring.
• Use copper cables rated for 300V, 75°C for control terminal wiring.
• Do not connect two wires in a single terminal for power cable connections.
• Power supply cables must be connected to the R, S, and T terminals. Connecting
power cables to the U, V, and W terminals will cause internal damage to the inverter.
Connect motors to the U, V, and W terminals. Phase sequence arrangement is not
necessary.
43
Sizes A, A1, A2
Sizes B, B1, B2, C
44
Sizes D, E, F
Size G
45
Power Terminal Labels and Descriptions
Terminal Labels Name Description

R(L1)/S(L2)/T(L3) AC power input terminal Mains supply AC power connections.
P2(+)/N(-) DC link terminal DC voltage terminals.
DC reactor wiring connection. (When you use
P1(+)/P2(+) DC reactor terminal the DC reactor, must remove short-bar) [all
models except for 0034 model]
P2(+)/B Brake resistor terminals Brake resistor wiring connection.
P3(+)/N(-) Brake unit terminals Brake unit wiring connection. [0034 model only]
U/V/W Motor output terminals 3-phase induction motor wiring connections.
Note
• For SINUS H 2S line (Single Phase), the AC Power input terminals to be use are R(L1) and
T(L3).
On this line Terminal S(L2) is providerd with no screw.
Note
• Use STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) cables to connect a remotely located motor with the
inverter. Do not use 3 core cables.
• Make sure that the total cable length does not exceed 200m ( 660ft). For inverters < = 4.0kW
capacity, ensure that the total cable length does not exceed 50m (165ft).
• Long cable runs can cause reduced motor torque in low frequency applications due to
voltage drop. Long cable runs also increase a circuit’s susceptibility to stray capacitance and
may trigger over-current protection devices or result in malfunction of equipment
connected to the inverter.
• Voltage drop is calculated by using the following formula:
Voltage Drop (V) = [ X cable resistance (mΩ/m) X cable length (m) X current(A)] / 1000
• Use cables with the largest possible cross-sectional area to ensure that voltage drop is
minimized over long cable runs. Lowering the carrier frequency and installing a micro surge
filter may also help to reduce voltage drop.
Distance < 50m (165ft) < 100m (330ft) > 100m (330ft)
Allowed Carrier Frequency < 15 kHz < 5 kHz < 2.5 kHz
Do not connect power to the inverter until installation has been fully completed and the
inverter is ready to be operated. Doing so may result in electric shock.
46
• Power supply cables must be connected to the R, S, and T terminals. Connecting power
cables to other terminals will damage the inverter.
• Use insulated ring lugs when connecting cables to R/S/T and U/V/W terminals.
• The inverter’s power terminal connections can cause harmonics that may interfere with
other communication devices located near to the inverter. To reduce interference the
installation of noise filters or line filters may be required.
• To avoid circuit interruption or damaging connected equipment, do not install phase-
advanced condensers, surge protection, or electronic noise filters on the output side of the
inverter.
• To avoid circuit interruption or damaging connected equipment, do not install magnetic
contactors on the output side of the inverter.
Step 4 Control Terminal Wiring
The illustrations below show the detailed layout of control wiring terminals, and control
board switches. Refer to the detailed information provided below and 1.6 Cable Selection on
page 28 before installing control terminal wiring and ensure that the cables used meet the
required specifications.
<Terminals in IP20 models except for 0034 model (Multiple I/O)>
47
<Terminals in IP20 model 0034 only (Standard I/O (M))>
< Terminals in IP66 models (Standard I/O) >
48
Control Board Switches
Switch Description
SW1 NPN/PNP mode selection switch
SW2 analog voltage/current input terminal selection switch
SW3 analog voltage/current output terminal selection switch
SW4 Terminating Resistor selection switch
Connector
Name Description
Connector Connect to LCD keypad
< Terminals in IP20 models except for 0034 model >
49
< Terminals in IP20 model 0034 only >
50
< Terminals in IP66 models >
Input Terminal Labels and Descriptions
Function Label Name Description

Configurable for multi-function input terminals.
Factory default terminals and setup are as follows:
P1-P7 in • P1: Fx
IP20
models, • P2: Rx
Multi- P1-P5 in Multi-function • P3: BX
function IP66 Input • P4: RST
terminal models • P5: Speed-L
configuration
• P6: Speed-M
• P7: Speed-H
(P6 and P7 not available in IP66 models).
Common Common terminal for analog terminal inputs and
CM
Sequence outputs.
51

Used to setup or modify a frequency reference via
Potentiometer analog voltage or current input.
Analog input VR • Maximum Voltage Output: 12V
frequency
configuration
reference input • Maximum Current Output: 100mA,
• Potentiometer: 1–5kΩ
Voltage input for analog voltage input terminal.
V1 frequency
• Unipolar: 0–10V (12V Max.)
reference input
• Bipolar: -10–10V (±12V Max.)
analog voltage or current input terminals.
Switch between voltage (V2) and current (I2)
modes using a control board switch (SW2).
Voltage/current
V2 Mode:
input for
I2 • Unipolar: 0–10V (12V Max.)
frequency
Analog input I2 Mode
reference input
configuration
• Input current: 4–20mA
• Maximum Input current: 24mA
• Input resistance: 249Ω
Setup or modify frequency references using pulse
inputs from 0 to 32kHz.
Pulse input for
• Low Level: 0–0.8V
frequency
TI • High Level: 3.5–12V
reference input
(pulse train) (In case of IP66 models, Pulse input TI and Multi-
function terminal P5 share the same terminal. Set the
ln.69 P5 Define to 54(TI).)
Used to block the output from the inverter in an
emergency.
SA Safety input A Conditions:
• Normal Operation: Both the SA and SB
Safety
terminals are connected to the SC terminal.
functionality
configuration SB • Output Block: One or both of the SA and SB
Safety input B
terminals lose connection with the SC
terminal.
Safety input
SC DC 24V, < 25mA
power source
52
Output/Communication Terminal Labels and Descriptions

Used to send inverter output information to
external devices: output frequency, output
current, output voltage, or a DC voltage.
Operate switch (SW3) to select the signal
output type (voltage or current) at the AO
terminal.
Output Signal Specifications:
Voltage/Current
AO
Output • Output voltage: 0–10V
• Maximum output voltage/current:
12V/10mA
• Output current: 0–20mA (Load resistance:
Less than 500 Ω)
• Maximum output current: 24mA
• Factory default output: Frequency
Use to send inverter output information, such as
AO2 [0034 output frequency, output current, output voltage,
Analog voltage or DC voltage to external devices.
model
output terminal • Output voltage: 0–10 V
only]
Analog output • Maximum output voltage/current: 12V/10 mA
Sends pulse signals to external devices to
provide a single output value from the inverter
of either: output frequency, output current,
output voltage, or DC voltage.
Output Signal Specifications:
• Output frequency: 0–32kHz
• Output voltage: 0–12V
• Factory default output: Frequency
TO Pulse Output (In case of IP66 models, Pulse output TO and Multi-
function output Q1 share the same terminal. Set
the OU.33Q1 Define to 38(TO).)
When connecting to a pulse between the inus H
inverters,
• IP20 model ↔ IP20 model: Connect TO →
TI, CM → CM
• IP66 model ↔ IP66 model: Connect Q1 →
P5, EG → CM
• IP20 model ↔ IP66 model: Not supported.
53

Multi-functional DC 26V, 100mA or less
Q1
(open collector) Factory default output: Run
Common ground contact for an open collector
EG Common
(with external power source)
External 24V
24 Maximum output current: 150mA
power source
Sends out alarm signals when the inverter’s
safety features are activated (AC 250V <1A, DC
Digital output 30V < 1A).
Fault signal
A1/C1/B1 • Fault condition: A1 and C1 contacts are
output
connected (B1 and C1 open connection)
• Normal operation: B1 and C1 contacts are
connected (A1 and C1 open connection)
A2/C2 The signal is generated while operating. Define
Multi-functional
[0034 and use the multi-functional relay output
relay output
model terminal (Less than AC250 V 5A, Less than DC30
terminal
only] V 5A).
Used to send or receive RS-485 signals. Refer to
Communication S+/S-/SG RS-485 signal line 7 RS-485 Communication Features on page 297
for more details.
54
Preinsulated Crimp Terminal Connectors (Bootlace Ferrule)
Use preinsulated crimp terminal connectors to increase reliability of the control terminal
wiring. Refer to the specifications below to determine the crimp terminals to fit various
cable sizes.
Cable Spec. Dimensions (mm/inches)

AWG mm2 L* P d1 D
10.4 / 0.40 6.0 / 0.23
26 0.25 1.1 / 0.042 2.5 / 0.1
12.4 / 0.48 8.0 / 0.31
22 0.50 12.0 / 0.46 6.0 / 0.23 1.3 / 0.051 3.2 / 0.12
20 0.75 12.0 /0.46 6.0 / 0.23 1.5 / 0.058 3.4 / 0.13
* If the length (L) of the crimp terminals exceeds 12.7mm (0.5”) after wiring, the control
terminal cover may not close fully.
To connect cables to the control terminals without using crimp terminals, refer to the
following illustration detailing the correct length of exposed conductor at the end of the
control cable.
50mm
Note
• While making wiring connections at the control terminals, ensure that the total cable
length does not exceed 50m (165ft).
• Ensure that the length of any safety related wiring does not exceed 30m (100ft).
55
• Ensure that the cable length between an LCD keypad and the inverter does not exceed 3m
(10ft). Cable connections longer than 3m (10ft) may cause signal errors.
• Use ferrite material to protect signal cables from electro-magnetic interference.
• Take care when supporting cables using cable ties, to apply the cable ties no closer than
15cm (6 inches) from the inverter. This provides sufficient access to fully close the front
cover.
• When making control terminal cable connections, use a small flat-tip screw driver (2.5mm
wide (0.1”) and 0.4mm thick (0.015”) at the tip).
2,5mm
0.4mm
Step 5 PNP/NPN Mode Selection
The Sinus H inverter supports both PNP (Source) and NPN (Sink) modes for sequence inputs
at the terminal. Select an appropriate mode to suit requirements using the PNP/NPN
selection switch (SW1) on the control board. Refer to the following information for detailed
applications.
PNP Mode (Source)
Select PNP using the PNP/NPN selection switch (SW1). Note that the factory default setting
is NPN mode. CM is is the common ground terminal for all analog inputs at the terminal,
and P24 is 24V internal source. If you are using an external 24V source, build a circuit that
connects the external source (-) and the CM terminal.
56
NPN Mode (Sink)
Select NPN using the PNP/NPN selection switch (SW1). Note that the factory default setting
is NPN mode. CM is is the common ground terminal for all analog inputs at the terminal,
and P24 is 24V internal source.
57
Step 6 Disabling the EMC Filter for Power Sources with Asymmetrical
Grounding
EMC filter is built in the two products Sinus H 2S (EN55011 Group 1 Class A = EN 61800-3
C2) and Sinus H 4T (EN55011 Group 2 Class A = EN61800-3 C3). An EMC filter prevents
electromagnetic interference by reducing radio emissions from the inverter. EMC filter use
is not always recommended, as it increases leakage current. If an inverter uses a power
source with an asymmetrical grounding connection, the EMC filter MUST be turned off.
Asymmetrical Grounding Connection

One phase Intermediate
of a delta grounding
connection point on one
is grounded phase of a
delta
connection
The end of a A 3-phase

single connection
phase is without
grounded grounding
• Do not activate the EMC filter if the inverter uses a power source with an asymmetrical
grounding structure, for example a grounded delta connection. Personal injury or death by
electric shock may result.
• Wait at least 10 minutes before opening the covers and exposing the terminal connections.
Before starting work on the inverter, test the connections to ensure all DC voltage has been
fully discharged. Personal injury or death by electric shock may result.
58
Sizes A, A1, A2, B, B1, B2, C, D, E, F
Before using the inverter, confirm the power supply’s grounding system. Disable the EMC
filter if the power source has an asymmetrical grounding connection. Refer to the figures
below to locate the EMC filter on/off terminal and replace the metal bolt with the plastic
bolt. If the EMC filter is required in the future, reverse the steps and replace the plastic bolt
with the metal bolt to reconnect the EMC filter.
Size G
Refer to the figures below to locate the EMC filter on/off terminal and replace the metal bolt
with the plastic bolt. If the EMC filter is required in the future, reverse the steps and replace
the plastic bolt with the metal bolt to reconnect the EMC filter.
Follow the instructions listed below to disable the EMC filters.
59
Remove the EMC ground cover located at the bottom of the inverter.
Remove the EMC ground cable from the right terminal (EMC filter-ON / factory default), and
connect it to the left terminal (EMC filter-OFF / for power sources with asymmetrical
grounding).
If the EMC filter is required in the future, reverse the steps and connect the EMC ground
cable to the right terminal to enable the EMC filter.
60
Note
The terminal on the right is used to ENABLE the EMC filter (factory default). The terminal on
the left is used to DISABLE the EMC filter (for power sources with asymmetrical grounding).
Step 7 Selecting the BU200 brake unit [0034 model only]
For the 0034 model inverter an external BU200 brake unit shall be used.
See the following picture for the recommended connection: RE is the brake resistor, FU is a
protection fuse.
See 15W0102B500 Motor Drives Accessories - User Manual for further details about BU200.
61
Step 8 Re-assembling the Covers and Routing Bracket
Re-assemble the cable routing bracket and the covers after completing the wiring and basic
configurations. Note that the assembly procedure may vary according to the product group
or frame size of the product.
62
2.3 Post-Installation Checklist

After completing the installation, check the items in the following table to make sure that
the inverter has been safely and correctly installed.
Items Check Point Ref. Result

Is the installation location appropriate? p.21
Does the environment meet the inverter’s operating
p.24
conditions?
Installation Does the power source match the inverter’s rated input? p.416
Location/Power Is the inverter’s rated output sufficient to supply the
I/O Verification equipment?
(Degraded performance will result in certain p.416
circumstances. Refer to 11.9 Continuous Rated Current
Derating on page 445 for details.
Is a circuit breaker installed on the input side of the
p.30
inverter?
Is the circuit breaker correctly rated? p.416
Are the power source cables correctly connected to the
R/S/T terminals of the inverter?
p.43
(Caution: connecting the power source to the U/V/W
terminals may damage the inverter.)
Are the motor output cables connected in the correct
phase rotation (U/V/W)?
p.43
(Caution: motors will rotate in reverse direction if three
phase cables are not wired in the correct rotation.)
Are the cables used in the power terminal connections
Power Terminal correctly rated? p.28
Wiring Is the inverter grounded correctly? p.42
Are the power terminal screws and the ground
p. 43
terminal screws tightened to their specified torques?
Are the overload protection circuits installed correctly
on the motors (if multiple motors are run using one -
inverter)?
Is the inverter separated from the power source by a
p.30
magnetic contactor (if a braking resistor is in use)?
Are advanced-phase capacitors, surge protection and
electromagnetic interference filters installed correctly?
p.43
(These devices MUST not be installed on the output side
of the inverter.)
63
Items Check Point Ref. Result

Are STP (shielded twisted pair) cables used for control
-
terminal wiring?
Is the shielding of the STP wiring properly grounded? -
If 3-wire operation is required, are the multi-function
input terminals defined prior to the installation of the p.47
Control control wiring connections?
Terminal Wiring Are the control cables properly wired? p.47
Are the control terminal screws tightened to their
p.36
specified torques?
Is the total cable length of all control wiring < 50m
p.55
(165ft)?
Is the total length of safety wiring < 30m (100ft)? p.55
Are optional cards connected correctly? -
Is there any debris left inside the inverter? p.36
Are any cables contacting adjacent terminals, creating
-
a potential short circuit risk?
Are the control terminal connections separated from
-
the power terminal connections?
Miscellaneous Have the capacitors been replaced if they have been in
-
use for > 2 years?
Have the fans been replaced if they have been in use
-
for > 3 years?
Has a fuse been installed for the power source? p.438
Are the connections to the motor separated from other
-
connections?
Note
STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) cable has a highly conductive, shielded screen around twisted cable
pairs. STP cables protect conductors from electromagnetic interference.
64
2.4 Test Run

After the post-installation checklist has been completed, follow the instructions below to
test the inverter.
1 Turn on the power supply to the inverter. Ensure that the keypad display light is on.
2 Select the command source.
3 Set a frequency reference, and then check the following:
• If V1 is selected as the frequency reference source, does the reference change
according to the input voltage at VR?
• If V2 is selected as the frequency reference source, is the voltage/current selector
switch (SW2) set to voltage, and does the reference change according to the input
voltage?
• If I2 is selected as the frequency reference source, is the voltage/current selector
switch (SW2) set to current, and does the reference change according to the input
current?
4 Set the acceleration and deceleration time.
5 Start the motor and check the following:
• Ensure that the motor rotates in the correct direction (refer to the note below).
• Ensure that the motor accelerates and decelerates according to the set times, and
that the motor speed reaches the frequency reference.
Note
If the forward command (Fx) is on, the motor should rotate counterclockwise when viewed
from the load side of the motor. If the motor rotates in the reverse direction, switch the
cables at the U and V terminals.
Verifying the Motor Rotation

1 On the keypad, set the drv (Frequency reference source) code in the Operation group to 0
(Keypad).
2 Set a frequency reference.
3 Press the [RUN] key. Motor starts forward operation.
65
4 Observe the motor’s rotation from the load side and ensure that the motor rotates
counterclockwise (forward).
If the motor rotates in the reverse direction, two of the U/V/W terminals need to be switched.
• Check the parameter settings before running the inverter. Parameter settings may have to
be adjusted depending on the load.
• To avoid damaging the inverter, do not supply the inverter with an input voltage that
exceeds the rated voltage for the equipment.
• Before running the motor at maximum speed, confirm the motor’s rated capacity. As
inverters can be used to easily increase motor speed, use caution to ensure that motor
speeds do not accidently exceed the motor’s rated capacity.
66
Learning to Perform Basic Operations
3 Learning to Perform Basic Operations

This chapter describes
• the keypad layout and functions
• the LCD keypad (graphic keypad) layout and functions [*]
It also introduces parameter groups and codes, required to perform basic operations. The
chapter also outlines the correct operation of the inverter before advancing to more
complex applications. Examples are provided to demonstrate how the inverter actually
operates.
Note [*]
The LCD keypad is standard in the 0034 model and is an option in all the other models.
3.1 About the Keypad

The keypad is composed of two main components – the display and the operation (input)
keys. Refer to the following illustration to identify part names and functions.
Keys
67
3.1.1 About the Display

The following table lists display part names and their functions.
No. Name Function

Displays current operational status and parameter
❶ 7-Segment Display
information.
LED flashes during parameter configuration and when the
❷ SET Indicator
ESC key operates as the multi-function key.
LED turns on (steady) during an operation, and flashes
❸ RUN Indicator
during acceleration or deceleration.
❹ FWD Indicator LED turns on (steady) during forward operation.
❺ REV Indicator LED turns on (steady) during reverse operation.
The table below lists the way that the keypad displays characters (letters and numbers).
0 0 A A K K U U
1 1 B B L L V V
2 2 C C M M W W
3 3 D D N N X X
4 4 E E O O Y Y
5 5 F F P P Z Z
6 6 G G Q Q - -
7 7 H H R R - -
8 8 I I S S - -
9 9 J J T T - -
68
3.1.2 Operation Keys

The following table lists the names and functions of the keypad’s operation keys.
Key Name Description

[RUN] key Used to run the inverter (inputs a RUN command).
STOP: stops the inverter.
[STOP/RESET] key
RESET: resets the inverter following fault or failure condition.
Switch between codes, or to increase or decrease parameter
[▲] key, [▼] key
values.
Switch between groups, or to move the cursor during
[◀] key, [▶] key
parameter setup or modification.
[ENT] key Used to select, confirm, or save a parameter value.
A multi-function key used to configure different functions,
such as:
[ESC] key • Jog operation
• Remote/Local mode switching
• Cancellation of an input during parameter setup
Install a separate emergency stop switch in the circuit. The [STOP/RESET] key on the keypad
works only when the inverter has been configured to accept an input from the keypad.
69
3.1.3 Control Menu

The Sinus H inverter control menu uses the following groups.
Group Display Description

Configures basic parameters for inverter operation.
These include reference frequencies and
Operation - acceleration or deceleration times. Frequencies will
only be displayed if an LCD keypad is in use.
Configures parameters for basic operations. These
Drive DR include jog operation, motor capacity evaluation,
torque boost, and other keypad related parameters.
Configures basic parameters, including motor-
Basic BA
related parameters and multi-step frequencies.
Configure acceleration or deceleration patterns
Advanced AD
and to setup frequency limits.
Control CN Configures sensorless vector - related features.
Configures input terminal–related features,
Input Terminal IN including digital multi–functional inputs and
analog inputs.
Configures output terminal–related features such
Output Terminal OU
as relays and analog outputs.
Configures communication features for RS-485 or
Communication CM
other communication options.
Configures PID control–related sequences and
Application AP
operations.
Protection PR Configures motor or inverter protection features.
Configures secondary motor related features. The
secondary motor (M2) group appears on the
Motor 2 (Secondary Motor) M2 keypad only when one of the multi-function input
terminals (In.65-71 in IP20 models, In.65-69 in IP66
models) has been set to 26 (Secondary motor).
User Sequence US Used to implement simple sequences with various
User Sequence Function UF function blocks.
70
3.2 Learning to Use the Keypad

The keypad enables movement between groups and codes. It also enables users to select
and configure functions. At code level, you can set parameter values to turn on or off
specific functions, or decide how the functions will be used. Refer to 8 Table of Functions on
page 321 to find the functions you need.
Confirm the correct values (or the correct range of the values), and then follow the
examples below to configure the inverter with the keypad.
3.2.1 Group and Code Selection

Follow the examples below to learn how to switch between groups and codes.
Step Instruction Keypad Display
Move to the group you

1 want using the [◀] and [▶]
keys.
Move up and down

through the codes using
2 the [▲] and [▼] keys until
you locate the code that
you require.
Press the [ENT] key to

3 -
save the change.
71
Note
For some settings, pressing the [▲] or [▼] key will not increase or decrease the code number by 1.
Code numbers may be skipped and not be displayed. This is because certain code numbers
have been intentionally left blank (or reserved) for new functions to be added in the future. Also
some features may have been hidden (disabled) because a certain code has been set to disable
the functions for relevant codes.
As an example, if Ad.24 (Frequency Limit) is set to 0 (No), the next codes, Ad.25 (Freq Limit Lo)
and Ad.26 (Freq Limit Hi), will not be displayed. If you set code Ad.24 to 1 (Yes) and enable the
frequency limit feature, codes Ad.25 and 26 will appear to allow the maximum and minimum
frequency limitations to be set up.
3.2.2 Navigating Directly to Different Codes

The following example details navigating to code dr. 95, from the initial code in the Drive
group (dr. 0). This example applies to all groups whenever you would like to navigate to a
specific code number.

Ensure that you are currently at the first code of the Drive DR.0
1
group (dr.0).
Press the [ENT] key. (
2
Number ‘9’ will flash.
Press the [▼] key to display ‘5,’ the first 1s’ place of the group %
3
destination, ’95.’
Press the [◀] key to move to the 10s’ place. )5
4 The cursor will move to the left and ‘05’ will be displayed. This
time, the number ‘0’ will be flashing.
72

Press the [▲] key to increase the number from ‘0’ to ‘9,’ the 10s 95
5
place digit of the destination, ’95.’
Press the [ENT] key. DR.95
6
Code dr.95 is displayed.
3.2.3 Setting Parameter Values

Enable or disable features by setting or modifying parameter values for different codes.
Directly enter setting values, such as frequency references, supply voltages, and motor
speeds. Follow the instructions below to learn to set or modify parameter values.

Select the group and code to setup or 5.)
modify parameter settings, and then press
1 the [ENT] key.
The first number on the right side of the
display will flash.
Press the [◀] or [▶] key to move the cursor

2 to the number that you would like to
modify.
Press the [▲] or [▼] key to adjust the value,

3 and then press the [ENT] key to confirm it.
The selected value will flash on the display.
Press the [ENT] key again to save the

4 -
change.
73
Note
• A flashing number on the display indicates that the keypad is waiting for an input from the
user. Changes will be saved when the [ENT] key is pressed while the number is flashing.
The setting change will be canceled if you press any other key.
• Each code’s parameter values have default features and ranges specified. Refer to 8 Table of
Functions on page 321 for information about the features and ranges before setting or
modifying parameter values.
3.2.4 Configuring the [ESC] Key

The [ESC] key is a multi-functional key that can be configured to carry out a number of
different functions. Refer to 4.6 Local/Remote Mode Switching on page 136 for more
information about the other functions of the [ESC] key. The following example shows how
to configure the [ESC] key to perform a jog operation.
74

Ensure that you are currently at the first code of the Operation 0.00
1
group, and that code 0.00 (Command Frequency) is displayed.
Press the [▶] key. DR.0
2
You have moved to the initial code of the Drive group (dr.0).
Press the [▲] or [▼] key to select code 90 (ESC key DR.90
3 configuration), and then press the [ENT] key.
Code dr.90 currently has an initial parameter value of, 0 )
(adjust to the initial position).
Press the [▲] key to modify the value to 1 (Jog key) and then
4 press the [ENT] key.
The new parameter value will flash.
5 Press the [ENT] key again to save changes. -
Note
• If the code dr. 90 (ESC key configuration) is set to 1 (JOG Key) or 2 (Local/Remote), the SET
indicator will flash when the [ESC] key is pressed.
• The factory default setting for code dr. 90 is 0 (move to the initial position). You can
navigate back to the initial position (code 0.00 of the Operation group) immediately, by
pressing the [ESC] key while configuring any codes in any groups.
75
3.3 Actual Application Examples
3.3.1 Acceleration Time Configuration

The following is an example demonstrating how to modify the ACC (Acceleration time)
code value (from 5.0 to 16.0) from the Operation group.

Ensure that the first code of the Operation group is selected, 0.00
1
and code 0.00 (Command Frequency) is displayed.
Press the [▲] key. ACC
2 The display will change to the second code in the Operation
group, the ACC (Acceleration Time) code.
Press the [ENT] key. 5.)
The number ‘5.0’ will be displayed, with ‘0’ flashing. This
3 indicates that the current acceleration time is set to 5.0
seconds. The flashing value is ready to be modified by using
the keypad.
Press the [◀] key to change the first place value. %.0
4 ‘5’ will be flashing now. This indicates the flashing value, ‘5’ is
ready to be modified.
Press the [▲] key to change the number ‘5’ into ‘6’, the first ^.0
5
place value of the target number ’16.’
Press the [◀] key to move to the 10s, place value. )6.0
6
The number in the 10s position, ‘0’ in ‘06’ will start to flash
76
Press the [▲] key to change the number from ‘0’ to ‘1’, to !^,)
7 match the 10s place value of the target number’16,’ and then
press the [ENT] key.
Both digits will flash on the display.
Press the [ENT] key once again to save changes. ACC
8 ‘ACC’ will be displayed. The change to the acceleration time
setup has been completed.
3.3.2 Frequency Reference Configuration

The following is an example to demonstrate configuring a frequency reference of 30.05 (Hz)
from the first code in the Operation group (0.00).

1
and the code 0.00 (Command Frequency) is displayed.
Press the [ENT] key. 0.0)
2 The value, 0.00 will be displayed with the ‘0’ in the 1/100s
place value flashing.
Press the [◀] key 3 times to move to the 10s place value. )0.00
3
The ‘0’ at the 10s place value will start to flash.
Press the [▲] key to change it to ‘3,’ the 10s place value of the #0.00
4
target frequency, ‘30.05.’
Press the [▶] key 3 times. 30.0)
5
The ‘0’ at the 1/100s place position will flash.
Press the [▲] key to change it to ‘5,’ the 1/100 place value of #),)%
6 the target frequency, ‘30.05,’ and then press the [ENT] key.
The parameter value will flash on the display.
Press the [ENT] key once again to save changes. 30.05
7 Flashing stops. The frequency reference has been configured
to 30.05 Hz.
77
Note
• A flashing number on the display indicates that the keypad is waiting for an input from the
user. Changes are saved when the [ENT] key is pressed while the value is flashing. Changes
will be canceled if any other key is pressed.
• The Sinus H inverter keypad display can display up to 4 digits. However, 5-digit figures can
be used and are accessed by pressing the [◀] or [▶] key, to allow keypad input.
3.3.3 Jog Frequency Configuration

The following example demonstrates how to configure Jog Frequency by modifying code
11 in the Drive group (Jog Frequency) from 10.00(Hz) to 20.00(Hz). You can configure the
parameters for different codes in any other group in exactly the same way.

1 Go to code 11(Jog Frequency) in the Drive group. DR.1
Press the [ENT] key. 10.0)
2 The current Jog Frequency value (10.00) for code dr.11 is
displayed.
Press the [◀] key 3 times to move to the 10s place value. !0.00
3
Number ‘1’ at the 10s place position will flash.
Press the [▲] key to change the value to ‘2,’ to match the 10s @),))
4 place value of the target value’20.00,’ and then press the
[ENT] key.
All parameter digits will flash on the display.
Press the [ENT] key once again to save the changes. DR.1
5 Code dr.11 will be displayed. The parameter change has been
completed.
78
3.3.4 Initializing All Parameters

The following example demonstrates parameter initialization using code dr.93 (Parameter
Initialization) in the Drive group. Once executed, parameter initialization will delete all
modified values for all codes and groups.

1 Go to code 0 (Jog Frequency) in the Drive group. DR.0
Press the [ENT] key. (
2
The current parameter value (9) will be displayed.
Press the [q] key to change the first place value to ‘3’ of the #
3
target code, ’93.’
Press the [◀] key to move to the 10s place position. )3
4
‘03’ will be displayed.
Press the [▲] or [▼] key to change the ‘0’ to ‘9’ of the target (3
5
code, ’93.’
Press the [ENT] key. DR.93
6
Code dr.93 will be displayed.
Press the [ENT] key once again. )
7 The current parameter value for code dr.93 is set to 0 (Do not
initialize).
Press the [▲] key to change the value to 1 (All Grp), and then
8 press the [ENT] key.
The parameter value will flash.
Press the [ENT] key once again. DR.93
9 Parameter initialization begins. Parameter initialization is
complete when code dr.93 reappears on the display.
Note
Following parameter initialization, all parameters are reset to factory default values. Ensure that
parameters are reconfigured before running the inverter again after an initialization.
79
Frequency Setting (Keypad) and Operation (via Terminal Input)
1 Turn on the inverter. -
Ensure that the first code of the Operation group is selected, 0.0)
and code 0.00 (Command Frequency) is displayed, then press
2
the [ENT] key.
The first digit on the right will flash.
Press the [◀] key 3 times to go to the 10s place position. )0.00
3
The number ‘0’ at the 10s place position will flash.
Press the [▲] key to change it to 1, and then press the [ENT] !),))
4 key.
The parameter value (10.00) will flash.
Press the [ENT] key once again to save changes. 10.00
5 A change of reference frequency to 10.00 Hz has been
completed.
Refer to the wiring diagram at the bottom of the table, and
close the switch between the P1 (FX) and CM terminals.
6 The RUN indicator light flashes and the FWD indicator light
comes on steady. The current acceleration frequency is
displayed.
When the frequency reference is reached (10Hz), open the
switch between the P1 (FX) and CM terminals.
The RUN indicator light flashes again and the current
7
deceleration frequency is displayed. When the frequency
reaches 0Hz, the RUN and FWD indicator lights turn off, and
the frequency reference (10.00Hz) is displayed again.
[Wiring Diagram] [Operation Pattern]
Note
The instructions in the table are based on the factory default parameter settings. The inverter
may not work correctly if the default parameter settings are changed after the inverter is
purchased. In such cases, initialize all parameters to reset the values to factory default parameter
settings before following the instructions in the table (refer to 5.23 Parameter Initialization on
page 245).
80
3.3.5 Frequency Setting (Potentiometer) and Operation (Terminal

Input)
2
and the code 0.00 (Command Frequency) is displayed.
Press the [▲] key 4 times to go to the Frq (Frequency FRQ
3
reference source) code.
Press the [ENT] key. )
4 The Frq code in the Operation group is currently set to 0
(keypad).
Press the [▲] key to change the parameter value to 2 @
5 (Potentiometer), and then press the [ENT] key.
Press the [ENT] key once again. FRQ
6 The Frq code will be displayed again. The frequency input has
been configured for the potentiometer.
Press the [▼] key 4 times. 0.00
7 Returns to the first code of the Operation group (0.00).From
here frequency setting values can be monitored.
Adjust the potentiometer to increase or decrease the
8 -
frequency reference to 10Hz.
Refer to the wiring diagram at the bottom of the table, and
close the switch between the P1 (FX) and CM terminals.
9 The RUN indicator light flashes and the FWD indicator light
comes on steady. The current acceleration frequency is
displayed.
When the frequency reference is reached (10Hz), open the
switch between the P1 (FX) and CM terminals.
10
deceleration frequency is displayed. When the frequency
reaches 0Hz, the RUN and FWD indicators turn off, and the
frequency reference (10.00Hz) is displayed again.
81
Note
purchased. In such cases, initialize all parameters to reset the factory default parameter settings
before following the instructions in the table (refer to 5.23 Parameter Initialization on page 245).
3.3.6 Frequency Setting (Potentiometer) and Operation (Keypad)

Ensure that the first code of the Operation group is 0.00
2 selected, and the code 0.00 (Command Frequency) is
displayed.
3 Press the [▲] key 4 times to go to the drv code. DRV
Press the [ENT] key.
4 The drv code in the Operation group is currently set to 1
(Analog Terminal).
Press the [▼] key to change the parameter value to 0 )
5 (Keypad), and then press the [ENT] key.
Press the [ENT] key once again. DRV
6 The drv code is displayed again. The frequency input has
been configured for the keypad.
Press the [▲] key. FRQ
7
To move to the Frq (Frequency reference source) code.
82

Press the [ENT] key. )
8
The Frq code in the Operation group is set to 0 (Keypad).
Press the [▲] key to change it to 2 (Potentiometer), and @
9 then press the [ENT] key.
Press the [ENT] key once again. FRQ
10 The Frq code is displayed again. The frequency input has
been configured for potentiometer.
Press the [▼] key 4 times. 0.00
11 Returns to the first code of the Operation group (0.00).
From here frequency setting values can be monitored.
Adjust the potentiometer to increase or decrease the
12 -
frequency reference to 10Hz.
Press the [RUN] key on the keypad.
The RUN indicator light flashes and the FWD indicator
13
light comes on steady. The current acceleration
frequency is displayed.
When the frequency reaches the reference (10Hz), press
the [STOP/RESET] key on the keypad.
14 deceleration frequency is displayed. When the
frequency reaches 0Hz, the RUN and FWD indicator
lights turn off, and the frequency reference (10.00Hz) is
displayed again.
Note
purchased. In such cases, initialize all parameters to reset the factory default parameter settings
before following the instructions in the table (refer to 5.23 Parameter Initialization on page 245).
83
3.4 Monitoring the Operation
3.4.1 Output Current Monitoring

The following example demonstrates how to monitor the output current in the Operation
group using the keypad.

Ensure that the first code of the Operation group is 0.00
1 selected, and the code 0.00 (Command Frequency) is
displayed.
2 Press the [▲] or [▼] key to move to the Cur code. CUR
Press the [ENT] key. 5.0
3
The output current (5.0A) is displayed.
Press the [ENT] key again. CUR
4
Returns to the Cur code.
Note
You can use the dCL (DC link voltage monitor) and vOL (output voltage monitor) codes in the
Operation group in exactly the same way as shown in the example above, to monitor each
function’s relevant values.
84
3.4.2 Fault Trip Monitoring

The following example demonstrates how to monitor fault trip conditions in the Operation
group using the keypad.

Refer to the example keypad display. OCT
1
An over current trip fault has occurred.
Press the [ENT] key, and then the [▲] key. 30.00
2 The operation frequency at the time of the fault (30.00Hz) is
displayed.
Press the [▲] key. 5.0
3
The output current at the time of the fault (5.0A) is displayed.
Press the [▲] key. ACC
4 The operation status at the time of the fault is displayed. ACC
on the display indicates that the fault occurred during
acceleration.
Press the [STOP/RESET] key. 30.00
5 The inverter resets and the fault condition is cleared. The
frequency reference is displayed on the keypad.
85
Note
• If multiple fault trips occur at the same time, a maximum of 3 fault trip records can be
retrieved as shown in the following example.
• If a warning condition occurs while running at a specified frequency, the current frequency
and the WARN signal will be displayed alternately, at 1 second intervals. Refer to 6.3
Under load Fault Trip and Warning on page 286 for more details.
86
3.5 About the LCD keypad (graphic keypad)

The LCD keypad (graphic keypad) is composed of two main components – the LCD graphic
display and the operation (input) keys. Refer to the following illustration to identify part
names and functions.
3.5.1 Operation Keys

The following table lists the names and functions of the keypad’s operation keys.
87
Key Name Description
[MODE] Key Used to switch between modes.
[PROG / Ent] Key Used to select, confirm, or save a parameter value.
[UP] key Switch between codes or increase or decrease parameter

[DOWN] key values.
[LEFT] key Switch between groups or move the cursor during parameter
[RIGHT] key setup or modification.
Used to perform special functions, such as user code
[MULTI] Key
registration.
Used to cancel an input during parameter setup.
• Pressing the [ESC] key before pressing the [PROG / ENT]
key reverts the parameter value to the previously set value.
[ESC] Key • Pressing the [ESC] key while editing the codes in any
function group makes the keypad display the first code of
the function group.
• Pressing the [ESC] key while moving through the modes
makes the keypad display Monitor mode.
[FWD] Key Used to operate the motor in the forward direction.
[REV] Key Used to operate the motor in the reversed direction.
[STOP/RESET] Used to stop motor operation.

Key Used to reset the inverter following fault or failure condition.
88
3.5.2 Bracket dimensions and mounting
89
3.5.3 About the Display

Monitor mode display
Parameter settings display
90
Names displayed in monitor mode and parameter settings

No. Names displayed in monitor mode No. Names displayed in parameter
settings
1 Mode 1 Mode
2 Operating/frequency command 2 Group
3 Multi-functional key settings 3 Multi-functional key settings
4 Inverter operation status 4 Inverter operation status
5 Items displayed in the status window 5 Items displayed in the status window
6 Monitor mode display 1 6 Display parameters
7 Monitor mode display 2 7 Available settings range
8 Monitor mode display 3 8 Existing setting values
9 Monitor mode cursor 9 Factory default values
10 Code numbers and names
Display details
No. Name Display Description
MON Monitor Mode
PAR Parameter Mode
1 Mode
TRP Trip Mode
CNF Config Mode
K Keypad operation command
Field Bus communication option operation
O
command
Operation
commands A Application option operation command
R Internal 485 operation command
T Terminal operation command
2 K Keypad frequency command
V V1 input frequency command
Frequency P Pulse input frequency command

commands Frequency command for UP operation (Up - Down
U
operation)
Frequency command for DOWN operation (Up -
D
Down operation)
91
No. Name Display Description

Frequency command for STOP operation (Up - Down
S
operation)
O FBus Option frequency command
J Jog frequency command
R Int 485 frequency command
1 ~9, A~F Multi-step frequency command
JOG Key Keypad JOG operation mode
Multi-
3 functional key Local/Remote Able to select either local or remote operation
settings Register or delete user group parameters in
UserGrpSelKey
parameter mode
STP Motor stopped
FWD Operating in forward direction
REV Operating in reverse direction
DC DC output
Inverter WAN Warning
4 operation
status STL Stall
SPS Speed Search
OSS S/W overcurrent protective function is on
OSH H/W overcurrent protective function is on
TUN Auto Tuning
92
3.5.4 Display Modes

The Sinus H inverter uses 5 modes to monitor or configure different functions. The
parameters in Parameter mode are divided into smaller groups of relevant functions. Press
the [Mode] key to change to Parameter mode.
93
Table of Display Modes
The following table lists the 5 display modes used to control the inverter functions.
Keypad
Mode Name Description
Display
Displays the inverter’s operation status information. In
this mode, information including the inverter’s frequency
Monitor mode MON
reference, operation frequency, output current, and
voltage may be monitored.
Used to configure the functions required to operate the
Parameter mode PAR inverter. These functions are divided into 14 groups
based on purpose and complexity.
Used to monitor the inverter’s fault trip information,
including the previous fault trip history.
When a fault trip occurs during inverter operation, the
Trip mode TRP operation frequency, output current, and output voltage
of the inverter at the time of the fault may be monitored.
This mode is not displayed if the inverter is not at fault
and fault trip history does not exist.
Used to configure the inverter features that are not
directly related to the operation of the inverter. The
settings you can configure in the Config mode include
Config mode CNF
keypad display language options, monitor mode
environment settings, communication module display
settings, and parameter duplication and initialization.
94
Parameter Setting Mode
The following table lists the functions groups under Parameter mode.
Function Group Keypad

Description
Name Display
Configures basic operation parameters. These include
Drive DRV ACC/Dec time settings, operation command settings,
and functions necessary for operation.
Configures basic operation parameters. These
Basic BAS parameters include motor parameters and multi-step
frequency parameters.
Configures acceleration or deceleration patterns,
Advanced ADV frequency limits, energy saving features, and,
regeneration prevention features.
Configures the features related to speed search and
Control CON
KEB (kinetic energy buffering).
Configures input terminal–related features, including
Input Terminal IN
digital multi–functional inputs and analog inputs.
Configures output terminal–related features,
Output Terminal OUT including digital multi–functional outputs and analog
outputs.
Configures the communication features for the RS-
485, Modbus-RTU.
Communication COM
Optional communication module related features
may be configured as well, if one is installed.
Configures functions related to auto sequence
Application APP
operation and PID control.
Protection PRT Configures motor and inverter protection features.
Motor 2 (Secondary
M2 Configures the secondary motor-related features.
motor)
User Sequence USS
Used to implement simple sequences with various
User Sequence
USF function blocks.
Function
95
3.6 Learning to Use the LCD keypad (graphic keypad)

The LCD keypad (graphic keypad) enables movement between groups and codes. It also
enables users to select and configure functions. At code level, you can set parameter values
to turn specific functions on or off or decide how the functions will be used. For detailed
information on the codes in each function group, refer to 8. Table of Functions on page 321.
Confirm the correct values (or the correct range of the values), then follow the examples
below to configure the inverter with the keypad.
Note
• The graphic keypad may be remoted up to a maximum allowable distance of 3m.
3.6.1 Display Mode Selection

The following figure illustrates how the display modes change when you press the [Mode]
button on the keypad. You can continue to press the [Mode] key until you get to the
desired mode.
User mode and Trip mode are not displayed when all the inverter settings are set to the
factory default (User mode must be configured before it is displayed on the keypad, and
Trip mode is displayed only when the inverter is at fault, or has previous trip fault history).
96
Mode selection in factory default condition
• When the power is turned on, Monitor mode is

displayed.
• Press the [MODE] key.
• Parameter mode
• Config (CNF) mode

• Monitor mode is displayed again.
97
Switching between groups when Trip mode is added
Trip mode is accessible only when the inverter has trip fault history. Refer to 4. Learning
Basic Features on page 113 for information about monitoring faults.

displayed.
• Parameter mode
• Trip mode
• CNF mode
• Monitor mode is displayed again.
98
3.6.2 Switching Groups

Press the [MODE] key to display a specific mode. Modes displayed change in the following
order:
99
Switching between Groups in Parameter Display Mode

After entering Parameter mode from Monitor mode, press the [ ▶]key to change the display
as shown below. Press the [◀]key to return to the previous mode.

displayed.
• Parameter mode
• Drive group is displayed.
• Press the [▶] key.
• Basic group (BAS)

• Advanced group (ADV)

• Press the [▶] key seven times.
• Protection group (PRT)

• Parameter mode Drive group (DRV) is displayed again.
100
3.6.3 Navigating through the Codes (Functions)

Code Navigation in Monitor mode
In monitor mode, press the [▲], [▼]key to display frequency, the output current, or voltage
according to the cursor position.

displayed.
• The cursor appears to the left of the frequency
information.
• Press the [▼] key.
• Information about the second item in Monitor mode

(Output Current) is displayed.
• Wait for 2 seconds until the information on the display
disappears.
• Information about the second item in Monitor mode

(Output Current) disappears and the cursor reappears
to the left of the second item.
• Information about the third item in Monitor mode

(Output Voltage) is displayed.
• Wait for 2 seconds until the information on the display
disappears.
• Information about the third item in Monitor mode

(Output Voltage) disappears and the cursor appears to
the left of the third item.
• Press the [▼] key twice.
101
• Information about the first item in Monitor mode

(Frequency) is displayed.
• Information about the first item in Monitor mode

(Frequency) disappears and the cursor appears to the
left of the first item.
Code Navigation in Parameter mode

The following examples show you how to move through codes in different function groups
(Drive group and Basic group) in Parameter mode. In parameter mode, press the [▲] or [▼]
key to move to the desired functions.
• When the power is on, monitor mode is displayed.

• Drive group (DRV) in Parameter mode is displayed. If

any other group is displayed, press the [MODE] key
until the Drive group is displayed, or press the [ESC]
key.
• Press the [▼] key to move to the second code (DRV-

01) of Drive group.
• Press the [▶] key
• Basic group is displayed.

• Press the [▲] or [▼] key to move to the desired codes
and configure the inverter functions.
102
3.6.4 Navigating Directly to Different Codes

Parameter mode and Config mode allow direct jumps to specific codes. The code used for
this feature is called the Jump Code. The Jump Code is the first code of each mode. The
Jump Code feature is convenient when navigating for a code in a function group that has
many codes.
The following example shows how to navigate directly to code DRV- 09 from the initial
code (DRV-00 Jump Code) in the Drive group.
• The Drive group (DRV) is displayed in Parameter

mode. Make sure that the fist code in the Drive group
(DRV 00 Jump Code) is currently selected.
• Press the [PROG/ENT] key.
• The Code input screen is displayed and the cursor

flashes. A flashing cursor indicates that it is waiting for
user input.
• Press the [▲] key to increase the number to 9, and

then press the [PROG/ENT] key.
• DRV-09 (Control Mode) is displayed.
• Press the [ESC] key to go back to the initial code of the

Drive group.
103
3.6.5 Parameter settings

Parameter settings available in Monitor mode
The Sinus H inverter allows basic parameters to be modified in Monitor mode. The
following example shows how to set the frequency.
• Make sure that the cursor is at the frequency

reference item and that the frequency setting is set to
‘Keypad’ in DRV-09.
• When the cursor is on the frequency reference item,

detailed information is displayed and the cursor
flashes on the input line.
• Press the shift key to go to the desired frequency.
• Press the [▲] key to set the frequency to 10 Hz.

• The frequency is set to 10 Hz.
104
Parameter settings in other modes and groups
The following example shows how to change the frequency in the Drive group. This
example can also be applied to other modes and groups.
• This is the initial display for Parameter mode.

• DRV-01 code is selected.

• The frequency can be changed at the flashing digit.

• Press the [◀]/ [▶] key to move the cursor to the
desired digit.
• Press the [▲] key to enter 10 Hz, and then press the
[PROG/ENT] key.
• The frequency is changed to 10 Hz.
105
3.6.6 Monitoring the Operation

How to use Monitor mode
There are 3 types of items that may be monitored in Monitor mode. Some items, including
frequency, may be modified. Users can select the items to be displayed in Config mode
(CNF).
• Monitor mode
• Frequency, current, and voltage are set as the default
monitored items.
• The target frequency is displayed when the inverter is
stopped. The operation frequency is displayed while
operating.
• Configure the items to be displayed in Config mode
(CNF) 21~23.
• Press the [▼] key to go to 23.
• Press the[PROG/ENT] key to change 23 to output

power.
• Press the[ESC] key to ensure that the third item in

Monitor mode is changed to output power.
106
Items available for monitoring

Mode Number Display Setting Range Initial value
20 Anytime Para 0 Frequency 0: Frequency
21 Monitor Line-1 1 Speed 0: Frequency
22 Monitor Line-2 2 Output Current 2:Output Current
3 Output Voltage
4 Output Power
5 WHour Counter
6 DCLink Voltage
7 DI State
8 DO State
9 V1 Monitor[V]
10 V1 Monitor[%]
CNF
13 V2 Monitor[V]
23 Monitor Line-3 14 V2 Monitor[%] 3:Output Voltage
15 I2 Monitor[mA]
16 I2 Monitor[%]
17 PID Output
18 PID ref Value
19 PID Fbk Value
20 Torque
21 Torque Limit
22 Trq Bias Ref
23 Speed Limit
107
How to use the status bar
On the top-right corner of the display, there is a display item. This item is displayed as long
as the inverter is on, regardless of the mode the inverter is operating in.
• Monitor mode
• In the top-right corner of the display, the frequency
reference is displayed (factory default).
• Enter Config mode and go to CNF-20 to select the

item to display.
• Press the [PROG/ENT] key to change the item to
‘Output Current.’
• On the top-right corner of the display, the unit
changes from ‘Frequency’ to ‘Current.’
• In monitor mode, the status bar item is changes to
‘Current.’
108
3.7 Fault Monitoring
3.7.1 Monitoring Faults during Inverter Operation

The following example shows how to monitor faults that occurred during inverter
operation.
• If a fault trip occurs during inverter operation, the

inverter enters Trip mode automatically and displays the
type of fault trip that occurred.
• Press the [▼] key to view the information on the

inverter at the time of fault, including the output
frequency, output current, and operation type.
• When the inverter is reset and the fault trip is released,

the keypad display returns to the screen it was at when
the fault trip occurred.
109
3.7.2 Monitoring Multiple Fault Trips

The following example shows how to monitor multiple faults that occur at the same time.
• If multiple fault trips occur at the same time, the

number of fault trips occurred is displayed on the right
side of the fault trip type.
• The types of fault trips that occurred are displayed.

• The display returns to the screen it was at when the

fault trip occurred.
110
Fault trip history saving and monitoring
When fault trips occur, the trip mode saves the content. Up to five fault trips are saved in
the history. Trip mode saves when the inverter is reset, and when a Low Voltage fault trip
occurs due to power outages. If a trip occurs more than five times, the information for the
five previous trips are automatically deleted.
• If a fault trip occurs during inverter operation, the

inverter enters Trip mode automatically and displays
the type of fault trip that occurred.
• After the [RESET] key or terminal is pressed, the fault

trip is saved automatically and returns to the screen it
was on before the fault trip occurred.
• Press the [MODE] key toenterTrip mode.
• The most recent fault trip is saved in Last-1 code.

• The fault trip changes position and is saved in Last-2

code.
• When a fault trip occurs again, the content in Last-2 is
moved to Last-3.
111
3.8 Parameter Initialization

The following example demonstrates how to revert all the parameter settings back to the
factory default (Parameter Initialization). Parameter initialization may be performed for
separate groups in Parameter mode as well.
• Monitor mode is displayed.
• Press the [MODE] key to move to the Config (CNF)

mode.
• Press the [▼] key to go to CNF-40 (Parameter Init).

• In the list of options, select All Groups, and then press

the [PROG/ENT] key.
• The parameter initialization option is displayed again

when the initialization is complete.
112
Learning Basic Features
4 Learning Basic Features

This chapter describes the basic features of the Sinus H inverter. Check the reference page
in the table to see the detailed description for each of the advanced features.
Basic Tasks Description Ref.

Frequency reference
Configures the inverter to allow you to setup or modify
source configuration for p.117
frequency reference using the Keypad.
the keypad
Frequency reference
Configures the inverter to allow input voltages at the
source configuration for p.118,
terminal block (V1, V2) and to setup or modify a frequency
the terminal block (input p.125
reference.
voltage)
Frequency reference
Configures the inverter to allow input currents at the
source configuration for
terminal block (I2) and to setup or modify a frequency p.124
the terminal block (input
reference.
current)
Frequency reference
source configuration for Configures the inverter to allow input pulse at the terminal
p.127
the terminal block (input block (TI) and to setup or modify a frequency reference.
pulse)
Frequency reference Configures the inverter to allow communication signals
source configuration for from upper level controllers, such as PLCs or PCs, and to p.129
RS-485 communication setup or modify a frequency reference.
Frequency control using Enables the user to hold a frequency using analog inputs
p.130
analog inputs at terminals.
Configures the display of motor operation values. Motor
Motor operation display
operation is displayed either in frequency (Hz) or speed p.131
options
(rpm).
Multi-step speed Configures multi-step frequency operations by receiving
p.131
(frequency) configuration an input at the terminals defined for each step frequency.
Command source
Configures the inverter to allow the manual operation of
configuration for keypad p.133
the [FWD], [REV] and [Stop] keys.
buttons
Command source
Configures the inverter to accept inputs at the FX/RX
configuration for terminal p.134
terminals.
block inputs
Command source
Configures the inverter to accept communication signals
configuration for RS-485 p.136
from upper level controllers, such as PLCs or PCs.
communication
113

Configures the inverter to switch between local and
remote operation modes when the [ESC] key is pressed.
When the inverter is operated using remote inputs (any
Local/remote switching input other than one from the keypad), this configuration
p.136
via the [ESC] key can be used to perform maintenance on the inverter,
without losing or altering saved parameter settings. It can
also be used to override remotes and use the keypad
immediately in emergencies.
Configures the inverter to limit a motor’s rotation
Motor rotation control p.138
direction.
Configures the inverter to start operating at power-on.
With this configuration, the inverter begins to run and the
Automatic start-up at motor accelerates as soon as power is supplied to the
p.139
power-on inverter. To use automatic start-up configuration, the
operation command terminals at the terminal block must
be turned on.
Configures the inverter to start operating when the
inverter is reset following a fault trip. In this configuration,
Automatic restart after the inverter starts to run and the motor accelerates as
reset of a fault trip soon as the inverter is reset following a fault trip condition. p.139
condition For automatic start-up configuration to work, the
operation command terminals at the terminal block must
be turned on.
Acc/Dec time
Configures the acceleration and deceleration times for a
configuration based on p.141
motor based on a defined maximum frequency.
the Max. Frequency
Acc/Dec time
Configures acceleration and deceleration times for a
configuration based on p.143
motor based on a defined frequency reference.
the frequency reference
Multi-stage Acc/Dec time Configures multi-stage acceleration and deceleration
configuration using the times for a motor based on defined parameters for the p.144
multi-function terminal multi-function terminals.
Acc/Dec time transition Enables modification of acceleration and deceleration
speed (frequency) gradients without configuring the multi-functional p.146
configuration terminals.
Enables modification of the acceleration and deceleration
Acc/Dec pattern
gradient patterns. Basic patterns to choose from include p.147
configuration
linear and S-curve patterns.
Stops the current acceleration or deceleration and controls
Acc/Dec stop command motor operation at a constant speed. Multi-function p.149
terminals must be configured for this command .
Configures the inverter to run a motor at a constant
Linear V/F pattern
torque. To maintain the required torque, the operating p.150
operation
frequency may vary during operation.
114

Configures the inverter to run the motor at a square
Square reduction V/F
reduction V/F pattern. Fans and pumps are appropriate p.151
pattern operation
loads for square reduction V/F operation.
Enables the user to configure a V/F pattern to match the
User V/F pattern characteristics of a motor. This configuration is for special-
p.152
configuration purpose motor applications to achieve optimal
performance.
Manual configuration of the inverter to produce a
momentary torque boost. This configuration is for loads
Manual torque boost p.153
that require a large amount of starting torque, such as
elevators or lifts.
Automatic configuration of the inverter that provides
“auto tuning” that produces a momentary torque boost.
Automatic torque boost p.154
This configuration is for loads that require a large amount
of starting torque, such as elevators or lifts.
Adjusts the output voltage to the motor when the power
Output voltage
supply to the inverter differs from the motor’s rated input p.155
adjustment
voltage.
Accelerating start is the general way to start motor
operation. The typical application configures the motor to
Accelerating start accelerate to a target frequency in response to a run p.156
command, however there may be other start or
acceleration conditions defined.
Configures the inverter to perform DC braking before the
motor starts rotating again. This configuration is used
Start after DC braking p.156
when the motor will be rotating before the voltage is
supplied from the inverter.
Deceleration stop is the typical method used to stop a
motor. The motor decelerates to 0Hz and stops on a stop
Deceleration stop p.157
command, however there may be other stop or
deceleration conditions defined.
Configures the inverter to apply DC braking during motor
deceleration. The frequency at which DC braking occurs
Stopping by DC braking p.157
must be defined and during deceleration, when the motor
reaches the defined frequency, DC braking is applied.
Configures the inverter to stop output to the motor using
Free-run stop a stop command. The motor will free-run until it slows p.159
down and stops.
Configures the inverter to provide optimal, motor
Power braking p.159
deceleration, without tripping over-voltage protection.
Start/maximum frequency Configures the frequency reference limits by defining a
p.160
configuration start frequency and a maximum frequency.
Upper/lower frequency Configures the frequency reference limits by defining an
p.161
limit configuration upper limit and a lower limit.
115

Configures the inverter to avoid running a motor in
Frequency jump p.162
mechanically resonating frequencies.
Used to configure the 2nd operation mode and switch
2nd Operation
between the operation modes according to your p.163
Configuration
requirements.
Multi-function input
Enables the user to improve the responsiveness of the
terminal control p.164
multi-function input terminals.
configuration
P2P communication Configures the inverter to share input and output devices
p.166
configuration with other inverters.
Multi-keypad Enables the user to monitor multiple inverters with one
p.167
configuration monitoring device.
User sequence Enables the user to implement simple sequences using
p.168
configuration various function blocks.
4.1 Setting Frequency Reference

The Sinus H inverter provides several methods to setup and modify a frequency reference
for an operation. The keypad, analog inputs [for example voltage (V1, V2) and current (I2)
signals], or RS-485 (digital signals from higher-level controllers, such as PC or PLC) can be
used.
LCD Parameter
Group Code Name Setting Range Unit
Display Setting
0 KeyPad-1
1 KeyPad-2
2 V1
Frequency 4 V2
Operation Frq Ref Freq Src 0–12 -
reference source 5 I2
6 Int 485
8 Field Bus
12 Pulse
116
4.1.1 Keypad as the Source (KeyPad-1 setting)

You can modify frequency reference by using the keypad and apply changes by pressing
the [ENT] key. To use the keypad as a frequency reference input source, go to the Frq
(Frequency reference source) code in the Operation group and change the parameter value
to 0 (Keypad-1). Input the frequency reference for an operation at the 0.00(Command
Frequency) code in the Operation group.)
LCD Parameter
Display Setting
Frequency
Frq Freq Ref Src 0 KeyPad-1 0–12
reference source
Operation
Frequency
0.00 0.00 Min to Max Frq* Hz
reference
* You cannot set a frequency reference that exceeds the Max. Frequency, as configured with
dr.20.
4.1.2 Keypad as the Source (KeyPad-2 setting)

You can use the [▲] and [▼] keys to modify a frequency reference. To use this as a second
option, set the keypad as the source of the frequency reference, by going to the Frq
(Frequency reference source) code in the Operation group and change the parameter value
to 1 (Keypad-2). This allows frequency reference values to be increased or decreased by
pressing the [▲] and [▼] keys.
LCD Parameter
Display Setting
Frequency
Frq Freq Ref Src 1 KeyPad-2 0–12 -
reference source
Operation
Frequency
0.00 0.00 Min to Max Frq* Hz
reference
* You cannot set a frequency reference that exceeds the Max. Frequency, as configured with
dr.20.
117
4.1.3 V1 Terminal as the Source

You can set and modify a frequency reference by setting voltage inputs when using the V1
terminal. Use voltage inputs ranging from 0 to 10V (unipolar) for forward only operation.
Use voltage inputs ranging from -10 to +10V (bipolar) for both directions, where negative
voltage inputs are used reverse operations.
4.1.3.1 Setting a Frequency Reference for 0–10V Input

Set code 06 (V1 Polarity) to 0 (unipolar) in the Input Terminal group (IN). Use a voltage
output from an external source or use the voltage output from the VR terminal to provide
inputs to V1. Refer to the diagrams below for the wiring required for each application.
[External source application] [Internal source (VR) application]
118
Parameter Setting
Group Code Name LCD Display Unit
Setting Range
Frequency reference
Operation Frq Freq Ref Src 2 V1 0–12 -
source
Frequency at 0.00–
Maximum
01 maximum analog Freq at 100% Max. Hz
frequency
input Frequency
V1 Monitor
05 V1 input monitor 0.00 0.00–12.00 V
[V]
06 V1 polarity options V1 Polarity 0 Unipolar 0–1 -
V1 input filter time
07 V1 Filter 100 0–10000 ms
constant
V1 minimum input
08 V1 volt x1 0.00 0.00–10.00 V
voltage
In V1 output at
09 V1 Perc y1 0.00 0.00–100.00 %
minimum voltage (%)
V1 maximum input
10 V1 Volt x2 10.00 0 .00– 12.00 V
voltage
V1 output at
11 maximum voltage V1 Perc y2 100.00 0–100 %
(%)
Rotation direction
16 V1 Inverting 0 No 0–1 -
options
V1 0.00*, 0.04–
17 V1 Quantizing level 0.04 %
Quantizing 10.00
* Quantizing is disabled if ‘0’ is selected.
0–10V Input Voltage Setting Details
Code Description
Configures the frequency reference at the maximum input voltage when a
potentiometer is connected to the control terminal block. A frequency set
with code In.01 becomes the maximum frequency only if the value set in
code In.11 (or In.15) is 100(%).
In.01 Freq at 100%

• Set code In.01 to 40.00 and use default values for codes In.02–In.16.
Motor will run at 40.00Hz when a 10V input is provided at V1.
• Set code In.11 to 50.00 and use default values for codes In.01–In.16.
Motor will run at 30.00Hz (50% of the default maximum frequency–
60Hz) when a 10V input is provided at V1.
In.05 V1
Configures the inverter to monitor the input voltage at V1.
Monitor[V]
119
Code Description
V1 Filter may be used when there are large variations between reference
frequencies. Variations can be mitigated by increasing the time constant,
but this will require an increased response time.
The value t (time) indicates the time required for the frequency to reach
63% of the reference, when external input voltages are provided in multiple
steps.
In.07 V1 Filter
[V1 Filter ]
These parameters are used to configure the gradient level and offset values
of the Output Frequency, based on the Input Voltage.
In.08 V1 Volt x1–

In.11 V1 Perc y2
[Volt x1–In.11 V1 Perc y2]
Inverts the direction of rotation. Set this code to 1 (Yes) if you need the
In.16 V1 Inverting
motor to run in the opposite direction from the current rotation.
120
Code Description
Quantizing may be used when the noise level is high in the analog input
(V1 terminal) signal.
Quantizing is useful when you are operating a noise-sensitive system,
because it suppresses any signal noise. However, quantizing will diminish
system sensitivity (resultant power of the output frequency will decrease
based on the analog input).
You can also turn on the low-pass filter using code In.07 to reduce the noise,
but increasing the value will reduce responsiveness and may cause
pulsations (ripples) in the output frequency.
Parameter values for quantizing refer to a percentage based on the

maximum input. Therefore, if the value is set to 1% of the analog maximum
input (60Hz), the output frequency will increase or decrease by 0.6Hz per
0.1V difference.
When the analog input is increased, an increase to the input equal to 75%
of the set value will change the output frequency, and then the frequency
will increase according to the set value. Likewise, when the analog input
decreases, a decrease in the input equal to 75% of the set value will make
an initial change to the output frequency.
In.17.V1
Quantizing
As a result, the output frequency will be different at acceleration and
deceleration, mitigating the effect of analog input changes over the output
frequency.
[V1 Quantizing]
121
4.1.3.2 Setting a Frequency Reference for -10–10V Input

Set the Frq (Frequency reference source) code in the Operation group to 2 (V1), and then
set code 06 (V1 Polarity) to 1 (bipolar) in the Input Terminal group (IN). Use the output
voltage from an external source to provide input to V1.
[V1 terminal wiring]
[Bipolar input voltage and output frequency]
LCD Parameter Setting

Group Code Name Unit
Display Setting Range
Frequency reference
Operation Frq Freq Ref Src 2 V1 0–12 -
source
Frequency at
Freq at 0– Max
01 maximum analog 60.00 Hz
100% Frequency
input
05 V1 input monitor V1 Monitor 0.00 0.00–12.00V V
06 V1 polarity options V1 Polarity 1 Bipolar 0–1 -
In
V1 minimum input
12 V1- volt x1 0.00 10.00–0.00V V
voltage
V1 output at
-100.00–
13 minimum voltage V1- Perc y1 0.00 %
0.00%
(%)
122
V1maximum input
14 V1- Volt x2 -10.00 -12.00 –0.00V V
voltage
V1 output at
-100.00–
15 maximum voltage V1- Perc y2 -100.00 %
0.00%
(%)
Rotational Directions for Different Voltage Inputs
Command / Input voltage

Voltage Input 0–10V -10–0V
FWD Forward Reverse
REV Reverse Forward
-10–10V Voltage Input Setting Details
Code Description
Sets the gradient level and off-set value of the output frequency in relation
to the input voltage. These codes are displayed only when In.06 is set to 1
(bipolar).
As an example, if the minimum input voltage (at V1) is set to -2 (V) with 10%
output ratio, and the maximum voltage is set to -8 (V) with 80% output ratio
respectively, the output frequency will vary within the range of 6 - 48 Hz.
In.12 V1- volt x1–

In.15 V1- Perc y2
[In.12 V1-volt X1–In.15 V1 Perc y]

For details about the 0–+10V analog inputs, refer to the code descriptions
In.08 V1 volt x1–In.11 V1 Perc y2 on page 120.
123
4.1.3.3 Setting a Reference Frequency using Input Current (I2)

You can set and modify a frequency reference using input current at the I2 terminal after
selecting current input at SW 2. Set the Frq (Frequency reference source) code in the
Operation group to 5 (I2) and apply 4–20mA input current to I2.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
Frequency reference
Operation Frq Freq Ref Src 5 I2 0–12 -
source
Frequency at
Freq at 0– Maximum
01 maximum analog 60.00 Hz
100% Frequency
input
In
50 I2 input monitor I2 Monitor 0.00 0.00–24.00 mA
I2 input filter time
52 I2 Filter 100 0–10000 ms
constant
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
I2 minimum input
53 I2 Curr x1 4.00 0.00–20.00 mA
current
I2 output at minimum
54 I2 Perc y1 0.00 0–100 %
current (%)
I2 maximum input
55 I2 Curr x2 20.00 0.00–24.00 mA
current
In
I2 output at
56 I2 Perc y2 100.00 0.00–100.00 %
maximum current (%)
I2 rotation direction
61 I2 Inverting 0 No 0–1 -
options
0*, 0.04–
62 I2 Quantizing level I2 Quantizing 0.04 %
10.00
124
Input Current (I2) Setting Details
Code Description
Configures the frequency reference for operation at the maximum current
(when In.56 is set to 100%).
• If In.01 is set to 40.00Hz, and default settings are used for In.53–56,
In.01 Freq at 20mA input current (max) to I2 will produce a frequency reference of
100% 40.00Hz.
• If In.56 is set to 50.00 (%), and default settings are used for In.01 (60Hz)
and In.53–55, 20mA input current (max) to I2 will produce a frequency
reference of 30.00Hz (50% of 60Hz).
In.50 I2 Monitor Used to monitor input current at I2.
Configures the time for the operation frequency to reach 63% of target
In.52 I2 Filter
frequency based on the input current at I2.
Configures the gradient level and off-set value of the output frequency.
In.53 I2 Curr x1–

In.56 I2 Perc y2
[Gradient and off-set configuration based on output frequency]
4.1.4 Setting a Frequency Reference with Input Voltage (Terminal

I2)
Set and modify a frequency reference using input voltage at I2 (V2) terminal by setting SW2
to V2. Set the Frq (Frequency reference source) code in the Operation group to 4 (V2) and
apply 0–12V input voltage to I2 (=V2, Analog current/voltage input terminal). Codes In.35–
47 will not be displayed when I2 is set to receive current input (Frq code parameter is set to
5).
125
Cod Parameter Setting

Group Name LCD Display Unit
e Setting Range
Operatio Frequency
Frq Freq Ref Src 4 V2 0–12 -
n reference source
35 V2 input display V2 Monitor 0.00 0.00–12.00 V
V2 input filter time
37 V2 Filter 100 0–10000 ms
constant
Minimum V2 input
38 V2 Volt x1 0.00 0.00–10.00 V
voltage
Output% at
39 minimum V2 V2 Perc y1 0.00 0.00–100.00 %
voltage
Maximum V2
In 40 V2 Volt x2 10.00 0.00–10.00 V
input voltage
Output% at
41 maximum V2 V2 Perc y2 100.00 0.00–100.00 %
voltage
Invert V2
46 rotational V2 Inverting 0 No 0–1 -
direction
V2 quantizing 0.00*, 0.04–
47 V2 Quantizing 0.04 %
level 10.00
126
4.1.5 Setting a Frequency with TI Pulse Input

Set a frequency reference by setting the Frq (Frequency reference source) code in
Operation group to 12 (Pulse). In case of IP66 models, set the In.69 P5 Define to 54(TI) and
provide 0–32.00kHz pulse frequency to P5.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
Frequency
Operation Frq Freq Ref Src 12 Pulse 0–12 -
reference source
P5 terminal
69 P5 Define 54 TI 0-54 -
function setting
Frequency at 0.00–
01 maximum analog Freq at 100% 60.00 Maximum Hz
input frequency
Pulse input
91 Pulse Monitor 0.00 0.00–50.00 kHz
display
TI input filter time
92 TI Filter 10 0–9999 ms
constant
TI input minimum
93 TI Pls x1 0.00 0.00–32.00 kHz
In pulse
Output% at TI
94 TI Perc y1 0.00 0.00–100.00 %
minimum pulse
TI Input
95 TI Pls x2 32.00 0.00–32.00 kHz
maximum pulse
Output% at TI
96 TI Perc y2 100.00 0.00–100.00 %
maximum pulse
Invert TI direction
97 TI Inverting 0 No 0–1 -
of rotation
TI quantizing 0.00*, 0.04–
98 TI Quantizing 0.04 %
level 10.00
* Data shaded in grey is applied only for IP66 models.
*Quantizing is disabled if ‘0’ is selected.
127
TI Pulse Input Setting Details
Code Description
In case of IP66 models, Pulse input TI and Multi-function terminal P5 share the
In.69 P5 Define same terminal.
Set the In.69 P5 Define to 54(TI).
Configures the frequency reference at the maximum pulse input. The
frequency reference is based on 100% of the value set with In.96.
In.01 Freq at • If In.01 is set to 40.00 and codes In.93–96 are set at default, 32kHz input
100% to TI yields a frequency reference of 40.00Hz.
• If In.96 is set to 50.00 and codes In.01, In.93–95 are set at default, 32kHz
input to the TI terminal yields a frequency reference of 30.00Hz.
In.91 Pulse
Displays the pulse frequency supplied at TI.
Monitor
Sets the time for the pulse input at TI to reach 63% of its nominal frequency
In.92 TI Filter
(when the pulse frequency is supplied in multiple steps).
Configures the gradient level and offset values for the output frequency.
In.93 TI Pls x1–

In.96 TI Perc y2
In.97 TI Inverting–
Identical to In.16–17 (refer to In.16 V1 Inverting/In.17.V1 Quantizing on page
In.98 TI
Quantizing 120).
128
4.1.6 Setting a Frequency Reference via RS-485 Communication

Control the inverter with upper-level controllers, such as PCs or PLCs, via RS-485
communication. Set the Frq (Frequency reference source) code in the Operation group to 6
(Int 485) and use the RS-485 signal input terminals (S+/S-/SG) for communication. Refer to 7
RS-485 Communication Features on page 297.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
Frequency reference
Operation Frq Freq Ref Src 6 Int 485 0–12 -
source
Integrated RS-485
01 communication Int485 St ID - 1 1–250 -
inverter ID
Integrated
03 communication Int485 BaudR 3 9600 bps 0–7 -
CM
speed
0 D8/PN/S1
Integrated
1 D8/PN/S2
04 communication Int485 Mode 0–3 -
2 D8/PE/S1
frame configuration
3 D8/PO/S1
129
4.2 Frequency Hold by Analog Input

If you set a frequency reference via analog input at the control terminal block, you can hold
the operation frequency of the inverter by assigning a multi-function input as the analog
frequency hold terminal. The operation frequency will be fixed upon an analog input signal.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
0 Keypad-1
1 Keypad-2
2 V1
Frequency 4 V2
Operation Frq Freq Ref Src 0–12 -
reference source 5 I2
6 Int 485
8 Field Bus
12 Pulse
65-71
Px Define(Px:
in IP20
P1-P7 in IP20
models, Px terminal
In models, 21 Analog Hold 0–54 -
65-69 configuration
P1-P5 in IP66
in IP66
models)
models
130
4.3 Changing the Displayed Units (Hz↔Rpm)

You can change the units used to display the operational speed of the inverter by setting
Dr. 21 (Speed unit selection) to 0 (Hz) or 1 (Rpm). This function is available only with the LCD
keypad.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Speed unit 0 Hz Display
dr 21 Hz/Rpm Sel 0–1 -
selection 1 Rpm Display
4.4 Setting Multi-step Frequency

Multi-step operations can be carried out by assigning different speeds (or frequencies) to
the Px terminals. Step 0 uses the frequency reference source set with the Frq code in the
Operation group. Px terminal parameter values 7 (Speed-L), 8 (Speed-M) and 9 (Speed-H)
are recognized as binary commands and work in combination with Fx or Rx run commands.
The inverter operates according to the frequencies set with St.1–3 (multi-step frequency 1–
3) , bA.53–56 (multi-step frequency 4–7) and the binary command combinations.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
Operation St1–St3 Multi-step Step Freq - 1– 0–Maximum
3 - Hz
frequency 1–3 frequency
bA 53–56 Multi-step Step Freq - 4– 0–Maximum
7 - Hz
frequency 4–7 frequency
65-71 7 Speed-L -
Px Define(Px:
in IP20 8 Speed-M -
P1-P7 in IP20
models, Px terminal 9 Speed-H
models, 0–54
65-69 configuration
P1-P5 in IP66 -
In in IP66
models)
models
Multi-step
89 command delay InCheck Time 1 1–5000 ms
time
131
Multi-step Frequency Setting Details
Code Description
Operation group Configure multi-step frequency1–3.
St 1–St3 If an LCD keypad is in use, bA.50–52 is used instead of St1–St3 (multi-step
Step Freq - 1–3 frequency 1–3).
bA.53–56 Configure multi-step frequency 4–7.
Step Freq - 4–7
Choose the terminals to setup as multi-step inputs, and then set the
relevant codes (In.65-71 for P1-P7 in IP20 models, In.65-69 for P1-P5 in IP66
models) to 7(Speed-L), 8(Speed-M), or 9(Speed-H).
Provided that terminals P3, P4 and P5 have been set to Speed-L, Speed-M
and Speed-H respectively, the following multi-step operation will be
available.
In.65-71 for P1-P7

in IP20 models,
In.65-69 for P1-P5
in IP66 models
Px Define
[An example of a multi-step operation]

Speed Fx/Rx P5 P4 P3
0  - - -
1  - - 
2  -  -
3  -  
4   - -
5   - 
6    -
7    
132
Code Description
Set a time interval for the inverter to check for additional terminal block
inputs after receiving an input signal.
In.89 InCheck
Time After adjusting In.89 to 100ms and an input signal is received at P5, the
inverter will search for inputs at other terminals for 100ms, before
proceeding to accelerate or decelerate based on P5’s configuration.
4.5 Command Source Configuration

Various devices can be selected as command input devices for the Sinus H inverter. Input
devices available to select include keypad, multi-function input terminal, RS-485
communication and field bus adapter.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
0 Keypad
1 Fx/Rx-1
Command
Operation drv Cmd Source* 2 Fx/Rx-2 0–4 -
Source
3 Int 485
4 Field Bus
* Displayed under DRV-06 on the LCD keypad.
4.5.1 The Keypad as a Command Input Device

The keypad can be selected as a command input device to send command signals to the
inverter. This is configured by setting the drv (command source) code to 0 (Keypad). Press
the [RUN] key on the keypad to start an operation, and the [STOP/RESET] key to end it.
Parameter Setting
group Code Name LCD Display Unit
Setting Range
Operation drv Command source Cmd Source* 0 KeyPad 0–4 -
133
4.5.2 Terminal Block as a Command Input Device (Fwd/Rev Run

Commands)
Multi-function terminals can be selected as a command input device. This is configured by
setting the drv (command source) code in the Operation group to 1(Fx/Rx). Select 2
terminals for the forward and reverse operations, and then set the relevant codes (2 of the 5
multi-function terminal codes, In.65-71 for P1-P7 in IP20 models, In.65-69 for P1-P5 in IP66
models) to 1(Fx) and 2(Rx) respectively. This application enables both terminals to be
turned on or off at the same time, constituting a stop command that will cause the inverter
to stop operation.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
drv Command Cmd Source* 1 Fx/Rx-1
Operation 0–4 -
source
65-71 1 Fx
Px Define(Px:
in IP20 2 Rx
P1-P7 in IP20
models, Px terminal
In models, 0–54 -
65-69 configuration
P1-P5 in IP66
in IP66
models)
models
Fwd/Rev Command by Multi-function Terminal – Setting Details
Code Description
Operation group
Set to 1(Fx/Rx-1).
drv– Cmd Source
In.65-71 (P1-P7 in
IP20 models),
Assign a terminal for forward (Fx) operation.
In.65-69 (P1-P5 in
Assign a terminal for reverse (Rx) operation.
IP66 models)
Px Define
134
4.5.3 Terminal Block as a Command Input Device (Run and Rotation

Direction Commands)
Multi-function terminals can be selected as a command input device. This is configured by
setting the drv (command source) code in the Operation group to 2(Fx/Rx-2). Select 2
terminals for run and rotation direction commands, and then select the relevant codes (2 of
the 5 multi-function terminal codes, In.65-71 for P1-P7 in IP20 models, In.65-69 for P1-P5 in
IP66 models) to 1(Fx) and 2(Rx) respectively. This application uses an Fx input as a run
command, and an Rx input to change a motor’s rotation direction (On-Rx, Off-Fx).
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
Operation Drv Command source Cmd Source* 2 Fx/Rx-2 0–4 -
65-71 1 Fx
Px Define(Px:
in IP20 2 Rx
P1-P7 in IP20
models, Px terminal
In models, 0–54 -
65-69 configuration
P1-P5 in IP66
in IP66
models)
models
Run Command and Fwd/Rev Change Command Using Multi-function Terminal –

Setting Details
Code Description
Operation group
Set to 2(Fx/Rx-2).
drv Cmd Source
In.65-71 (P1-P7 in
IP20 models),
Assign a terminal for run command (Fx).
In.65-69 (P1-P5 in
Assign a terminal for changing rotation direction (Rx).
IP66 models)
Px Define
135
4.5.4 RS-485 Communication as a Command Input Device

Internal RS-485 communication can be selected as a command input device by setting the
drv (command source) code in the Operation group to 3(Int 485). This configuration uses
upper level controllers such as PCs or PLCs to control the inverter by transmitting and
receiving signals via the S+, S-, and Sg terminals at the terminal block. For more details,
refer to 7 RS-485 Communication Features on page 297.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
drv Command source Cmd 3 Int 485
Operation 0–4 -
Source*
01 Integrated Int485 St ID 1
communication inverter 1–250 -
ID
02 Integrated Int485 Proto 0 ModBus
communication RTU 0 -
CM protocol
03 Integrated Int485 3 9600 bps
0–7 -
communication speed BaudR
04 Integrated Int485 Mode 0 D8 / PN /
communication frame S1 0–3 -
setup
4.6 Local/Remote Mode Switching

Local/remote switching is useful for checking the operation of an inverter or to perform an
inspection while retaining all parameter values. Also, in an emergency, it can also be used
to override control and operate the system manually using the keypad.
The [ESC] key is a programmable key that can be configured to carry out multiple functions.
For more details, refer to 3.2.4 Configuring the [ESC] Key on page 74.

dr 90 [ESC] key functions - 2 Local/Remote 0–2 -
Operation drv Command source Cmd 1 Fx/Rx-1 0–4
-
Source*
136
Local/Remote Mode Switching Setting Details
Code Description
Set dr.90 to 2(Local/Remote) to perform local/remote switching using the
[ESC] key. Once the value is set, the inverter will automatically begin
operating in remote mode. Changing from local to remote will not alter any
previously configured parameter values and the operation of the inverter
dr.90
will not change.
[ESC] key
Press the [ESC] key to switch the operation mode back to “local.” The SET
functions
light will flash, and the inverter will operate using the [RUN] key on the
keypad. Press the [ESC] key again to switch the operation mode back to
“remote.” The SET light will turn off and the inverter will operate according
to the previous drv code configuration.
Note
Local/Remote Operation
• Full control of the inverter is available with the keypad during local operation (local
operation).
• During local operation, jog commands will only work if one of the multi-function terminals
(codes In.65-71 for P1-P7 in IP20 models, In.65-69 for P1-P5 in IP66 models) is set to 13(RUN
Enable) and the relevant terminal is turned on.
• During remote operation (remote operation), the inverter will operate according to the
previously set frequency reference source and the command received from the input
device.
• If Ad.10 (power-on run) is set to 0(No), the inverter will NOT operate on power-on even
when the following terminals are turned on:
- Fwd/Rev run (Fx/Rx) terminal
- Fwd/Rev jog terminal (Fwd jog/Rev Jog)
- Pre-Excitation terminal
To operate the inverter manually with the keypad, switch to local mode. Use caution when
switching back to remote operation mode as the inverter will stop operating. If Ad.10
(power-on run) is set to 0(No), a command through the input terminals will work ONLY
AFTER all the terminals listed above have been turned off and then turned on again.
• If the inverter has been reset to clear a fault trip during an operation, the inverter will switch
to local operation mode at power-on, and full control of the inverter will be with the
keypad. The inverter will stop operating when operation mode is switched from “local” to
“remote”. In this case, a run command through an input terminal will work ONLY AFTER all
the input terminals have been turned off.
137
Inverter Operation During Local/Remote Switching

Switching operation mode from “remote” to “local” while the inverter is running will cause the
inverter to stop operating. Switching operation mode from “local” to “remote” however, will
cause the inverter to operate based on the command source:
• Analog commands via terminal input: the inverter will continue to run without interruption
based on the command at the terminal block. If a reverse operation (Rx) signal is ON at the
terminal block at startup, the inverter will operate in the reverse direction even if it was
running in the forward direction in local operation mode before the reset.
• Digital source commands: all command sources except terminal block command sources
(which are analog sources) are digital command sources that include the keypad, LCD
keypad, and communication sources. The inverter stops operation when switching to
remote operation mode, and then starts operation when the next command is given.
Use local/remote operation mode switching only when it is necessary. Improper mode
switching may result in interruption of the inverter’s operation.
4.7 Forward or Reverse Run Prevention

The rotation direction of motors can be configured to prevent motors to only run in one
direction. Pressing the [REV] key on the LCD keypad when direction prevention is
configured, will cause the motor to decelerate to 0Hz and stop. The inverter will remain on.

0 None
Run prevention
Ad 09 Run Prevent 1 Forward Prev 0–2 -
options
2 Reverse Prev
Forward/Reverse Run Prevention Setting Details
Code Description
Choose a direction to prevent.
Setting Description
Ad.09 Run 0 None Do not set run prevention.
Prevent 1 Forward Prev Set forward run prevention.
2 Reverse Prev Set reverse run prevention.
138
4.8 Power-on Run

A power-on command can be setup to start an inverter operation after powering up, based
on terminal block operation commands (if they have been configured). To enable power-on
run set the drv (command source) code to 1(Fx/Rx-1) or 2 (Fx/Rx-2) in the Operation group.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
1, Fx/Rx-1 or
Operation drv Command source Cmd Source* 0–4 -
2 Fx/Rx-2
Power-on
Ad 10 Power-on run 1 Yes 0–1 -
Run
Note
• A fault trip may be triggered if the inverter starts operation while a motor’s load (fan-type
load) is in free-run state. To prevent this from happening, set bit4 to 1 in Cn. 71 (speed
search options) of the Control group. The inverter will perform a speed search at the
beginning of the operation.
• If the speed search is not enabled, the inverter will begin its operation in a normal V/F
pattern and accelerate the motor. If the inverter has been turned on without power-on run
enabled, the terminal block command must first be turned off, and then turned on again to
begin the inverter’s operation.
Use caution when operating the inverter with Power-on Run enabled as the motor will begin
rotating when the inverter starts up.
139
4.9 Reset and Restart

Reset and restart operations can be setup for inverter operation following a fault trip, based
on the terminal block operation command (if it is configured). When a fault trip occurs, the
inverter cuts off the output and the motor will free-run. Another fault trip may be triggered
if the inverter begins its operation while motor load is in a free-run state.

drv Command source Cmd 1 Fx/Rx-1 or 0–4
Operation -
Source* 2 Fx/Rx-2
08 Reset restart setup RST Restart 1 Yes 0–1
09 No. of auto restart Retry 0–10
0
Pr Number
10 Auto restart delay Retry Delay 0–60
1.0 sec
time
* Displayed under DRV-06 in an LCD keypad.
Note
• To prevent a repeat fault trip from occurring, set Cn.71 (speed search options) bit 2 equal to
1. The inverter will perform a speed search at the beginning of the operation.
• If the speed search is not enabled, the inverter will start its operation in a normal V/F
pattern and accelerate the motor. If the inverter has been turned on without ‘reset and
restart’ enabled, the terminal block command must be first turned off, and then turned on
again to begin the inverter’s operation.
Use caution when operating the inverter with Power-on Run enabled as the motor will begin
rotating when the inverter starts up.
140
4.10 Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times
4.10.1 Acc/Dec Time Based on Maximum Frequency

Acc/Dec time values can be set based on maximum frequency, not on inverter operation
frequency. To set Acc/Dec time values based on maximum frequency, set bA. 08 (Acc/Dec
reference) in the Basic group to 0 (Max Freq).
Acceleration time set at the ACC (Acceleration time) code in the Operation group (dr.03 in
an LCD keypad) refers to the time required for the inverter to reach the maximum
frequency from a stopped (0Hz) state. Likewise, the value set at the dEC (deceleration time)
code in the Operation group (dr.04 in an LCD keypad) refers to the time required to return
to a stopped state (0Hz) from the maximum frequency.
Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
ACC Acceleration time Acc Time 20.0 0.0–600.0 sec
Deceleration
dEC Dec Time 30.0 0.0–600.0 sec
Operation time
Maximum
20 Max Freq 60.00 40.00–400.00 Hz
frequency
Acc/Dec
08 reference Ramp T Mode 0 Max Freq 0–1 -
bA
frequency
09 Time scale Time scale 1 0.1sec 0–2 -
141
Acc/Dec Time Based on Maximum Frequency – Setting Details
Code Description
Set the parameter value to 0 (Max Freq) to setup Acc/Dec time based on
maximum frequency.
Configuration Description
0 Max Freq Set the Acc/Dec time based on
maximum frequency.
1 Delta Freq Set the Acc/Dec time based on
operating frequency.
If, for example, maximum frequency is 60.00Hz, the Acc/Dec times are set
bA.08 to 5 seconds, and the frequency reference for operation is set at 30Hz (half
Ramp T Mode of 60Hz), the time required to reach 30Hz therefore is 2.5 seconds (half of 5
seconds).
Use the time scale for all time-related values. It is particularly useful when a
more accurate Acc/Dec times are required because of load characteristics,
or when the maximum time range needs to be extended.
bA.09 Time scale Configuration Description

0 0.01sec Sets 0.01 second as the minimum unit.
1 0.1sec Sets 0.1 second as the minimum unit.
2 1sec Sets 1 second as the minimum unit.
Note that the range of maximum time values may change automatically when the units are
changed. If for example, the acceleration time is set at 6000 seconds, a time scale change from 1
second to 0.01 second will result in a modified acceleration time of 60.00 seconds.
142
4.10.2 Acc/Dec Time Based on Operation Frequency

Acc/Dec times can be set based on the time required to reach the next step frequency from
the existing operation frequency. To set the Acc/Dec time values based on the existing
operation frequency, set bA. 08 (acc/dec reference) in the Basic group to 1 (Delta Freq).
Cod Parameter
Group Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
e Setting
Operatio
n dEC Deceleration time Dec Time 30.0 0.0–600.0 sec
bA 08 Acc/Dec Ramp T Mode 1 Delta Freq
0–1 -
reference
Acc/Dec Time Based on Operation Frequency – Setting Details
Code Description
Set the parameter value to 1 (Delta Freq) to set Acc/Dec times based on
Maximum frequency.
0 Max Freq Set the Acc/Dec time based on Maximum
frequency.
1 Delta Freq Set the Acc/Dec time based on Operation
frequency.
If Acc/Dec times are set to 5 seconds, and multiple frequency references are
bA.08 used in the operation in 2 steps, at 10Hz and 30 Hz, each acceleration stage
Ramp T Mode will take 5 seconds (refer to the graph below).
143
4.10.3 Multi-step Acc/Dec Time Configuration

Acc/Dec times can be configured via a multi-function terminal by setting the ACC
(acceleration time) and dEC (deceleration time) codes in the Operation group.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
Operat ACC Acceleration time Acc Time 20.0 0.0–600.0 sec
ion dEC Deceleration time Dec Time 30.0 0.0–600.0 sec
Multi-step
70–82 Acc Time 1–7 x.xx 0.0–600.0 sec
acceleration time1–7
bA Multi-step
Dec Time 1–
71–83 deceleration time1– x.xx 0.0–600.0 sec
7
7
65-71 11 XCEL-L
Px Define(Px:
in IP20
P1-P7 in IP20 1 XCEL-M
models, Px terminal 2
models, 0–54 -
65-69 configuration
In P1-P5 in IP66 4
in IP66 XCEL-H
models) 9
models
Multi-step command In Check
89 1 1–5000 ms
delay time Time
Acc/Dec Time Setup via Multi-function Terminals – Setting Details
Code Description
bA. 70–82 Acc Time
Set multi-step acceleration time1–7.
1–7
bA.71–83 Dec Time
Set multi-step deceleration time1–7.
1–7
144
Code Description
Choose and configure the terminals to use for multi-step Acc/Dec time
inputs.
11 XCEL-L Acc/Dec command-L
12 XCEL-M Acc/Dec command-M
49 XCEL-H Acc/Dec command-H
Acc/Dec commands are recognized as binary code inputs and will

control the acceleration and deceleration based on parameter values
set with bA.70–82 and bA.71–83.
If, for example, the P4 and P5 terminals are set as XCEL-L and XCEL
respectively, the following operation will be available.
In.65-71 (P1-P7 in
IP20 models),
In.65-69 (P1-P5 in
IP66 models)
Px Define
Acc/Dec time P5 P4
0 - -
1 - 
2  -
3  
Set the time for the inverter to check for other terminal block inputs. If
In.89 is set to 100ms and a signal is supplied to the P4 terminal, the
In.89 In Check Time
inverter searches for other inputs over the next 100ms. When the time
expires, the Acc/Dec time will be set based on the input received at P4.
145
4.10.4 Configuring Acc/Dec Time Switch Frequency

You can switch between two different sets of Acc/Dec times (Acc/Dec gradients) by
configuring the switch frequency without configuring the multi-function terminals.

e Setting Range
Operation
dEC Deceleration time Dec Time 10.0 0.0–600.0 sec
Multi-step
70 Acc Time-1 20.0 0.0–600.0 sec
acceleration time1
bA
Multi-step
71 Dec Time-1 20.0 0.0–600.0 sec
deceleration time1
Acc/Dec time Xcel Change 0–Maximum
Ad 60 30.00 Hz
switch frequency Frq frequency
Acc/Dec Time Switch Frequency Setting Details
Code Description
After the Acc/Dec switch frequency has been set, Acc/Dec gradients
configured at bA.70 and 71 will be used when the inverter’s operation
frequency is at or below the switch frequency. If the operation frequency
exceeds the switch frequency, the configured gradient level, configured for
Ad.60
the ACC and dEC codes, will be used.
Xcel Change Fr
If you configure the multi-function input terminals P1-P7 (IP20 models), P1-
P5 (IP66 models) for multi-step Acc/Dec gradients (XCEL-L, XCEL-M, XCEL-H),
the inverter will operate based on the Acc/Dec inputs at the terminals
instead of the Acc/Dec switch frequency configurations.
146
4.11 Acc/Dec Pattern Configuration

Acc/Dec gradient level patterns can be configured to enhance and smooth the inverter’s
acceleration and deceleration curves. Linear pattern features a linear increase or decrease
to the output frequency, at a fixed rate. For an S-curve pattern a smoother and more
gradual increase or decrease of output frequency, ideal for lift-type loads or elevator doors,
etc. S-curve gradient level can be adjusted using codes Ad. 03–06 in the Advanced group.
Grou Parameter
Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
p Setting
08 Acc/Dec reference Ramp T 0 Max Freq
bA 0–1 -
mode
01 Acceleration pattern Acc Pattern 0 Linear -
0–1
02 Deceleration pattern Dec Pattern 1 S-curve -
03 S-curve Acc start Acc S Start
40 1–100 %
gradient
04 S-curve Acc end Acc S End
Ad 40 1–100 %
gradient
05 S-curve Dec start Dec S Start 40 1–100 %
gradient
06 S-curve Dec end Dec S End 40 1–100 %
gradient
Acc/Dec Pattern Setting Details
Code Description
Sets the gradient level as acceleration starts when using an S-curve,
Acc/Dec pattern. Ad. 03 defines S-curve gradient level as a percentage, up
to half of total acceleration.
If the frequency reference and maximum frequency are set at 60Hz and
Ad.03 Acc S Start Ad.03 is set to 50%, Ad. 03 configures acceleration up to 30Hz (half of
60Hz).The inverter will operate S-curve acceleration in the 0-15Hz frequency
range (50% of 30Hz). Linear acceleration will be applied to the remaining
acceleration within the 15–30Hz frequency range.
Sets the gradient level as acceleration ends when using an S-curve Acc/Dec
pattern. Ad. 03 defines S-curve gradient level as a percentage, above half of
total acceleration.
If the frequency reference and the maximum frequency are set at 60Hz and
Ad.04 Acc S End Ad.04 is set to 50%, setting Ad. 04 configures acceleration to increase from
30Hz (half of 60Hz) to 60Hz (end of acceleration). Linear acceleration will be
applied within the 30-45Hz frequency range. The inverter will perform an S-
curve acceleration for the remaining acceleration in the 45-60Hz frequency
range.
147
Ad.05 Dec S Start Sets the rate of S-curve deceleration. Configuration for codes Ad.05 and
– Ad.06 may be performed the same way as configuring codes Ad.03 and
Ad.06 Dec S End Ad.04.
[Acceleration / deceleration pattern configuration]
[Acceleration / deceleration S-curve parrten configuration]
148
Note
The Actual Acc/Dec time during an S-curve application
Actual acceleration time = user-configured acceleration time + user-configured acceleration
time x starting gradient level/2 + user-configured acceleration time x ending gradient level/2.
Actual deceleration time = user-configured deceleration time + user-configured deceleration
time x starting gradient level/2 + user-configured deceleration time x ending gradient level/2.
Note that actual Acc/Dec times become greater than user defined Acc/Dec times when S-curve
Acc/Dec patterns are in use.
4.12 Stopping the Acc/Dec Operation

Configure the multi-function input terminals to stop acceleration or deceleration and
operate the inverter at a fixed frequency.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
In 65-71 25 XCEL Stop 0–54 -
in IP20 Px Define(Px: P1-
models, Px terminal P7 in IP20 models,
65-69 configuration P1-P5 in IP66
in IP66 models)
models
149
4.13 V/F(Voltage/Frequency) Control

Configure the inverter’s output voltages, gradient levels and output patterns to achieve a
target output frequency with V/F control. The amount of of torque boost used during low
frequency operations can also be adjusted.
4.13.1 Linear V/F Pattern Operation

A linear V/F pattern configures the inverter to increase or decrease the output voltage at a
fixed rate for different operation frequencies based on V/F characteristics. A linear V/F
pattern is partcularly useful when a constant torque load is applied.
dr 09 Control mode Control Mode 0 V/F 0–6 -
18 Base frequency Base Freq 50.00 30.00–400.00 Hz
19 Start frequency Start Freq 0.50 0.01–10.00 Hz
bA 07 V/F pattern V/F Pattern 0 Linear 0–3 -
Linear V/F Pattern Setting Details
Code Description
Sets the base frequency. A base frequency is the inverter’s output frequency
dr.18 Base Freq when running at its rated voltage. Refer to the motor’s rating plate to set
this parameter value.
Sets the start frequency. A start frequency is a frequency at which the
inverter starts voltage output. The inverter does not produce output voltage
while the frequency reference is lower than the set frequency. However, if a
deceleration stop is made while operating above the start frequency, output
voltage will continue until the operation frequency reaches a full-stop (0Hz).
dr.19 Start Freq
150
4.13.2 Square Reduction V/F pattern Operation

Square reduction V/F pattern is ideal for loads such as fans and pumps. It provides non-
linear acceleration and deceleration patterns to sustain torque throughout the whole
frequency range.
Grou Parameter Setting

Code Name LCD Display Unit
p Setting Range
1 Square
bA 07 V/F pattern V/F Pattern 0–3 -
3 Square2
Square Reduction V/F pattern Operation - Setting Details
Code Description
Sets the parameter value to 1(Square) or 3(Square2) according to the load’s
start characteristics.
Setting Function
1 Square The inverter produces output voltage proportional
bA.07 V/F Pattern
to 1.5 square of the operation frequency.
3 Square2 The inverter produces output voltage proportional
to 2 square of the operation frequency. This setup is
ideal for variable torque loads such as fans or pumps.
151
4.13.3 User V/F Pattern Operation

The Sinus H inverter allows the configuration of user-defined V/F patterns to suit the load
characteristics of special motors.
Cod Parameter
Group Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
e Setting
07 V/F pattern V/F Pattern 2 User V/F 0–3 -
0–Maximum
41 User Frequency1 User Freq 1 15.00 Hz
frequency
42 User Voltage1 User Volt 1 25 0–100 %
0–Maximum
frequency
bA 44 User Voltage2 User Volt 2 50 0–100 %
0–Maximum
frequency
Maximum 0–Maximum
47 User Frequency4 User Freq 4 Hz
frequency frequency
User V/F pattern Setting Details
Code Description
bA.41 User Freq Set the parameter values to assign arbitrary frequencies (User Freq 1–4) for
1– start and maximum frequencies. Voltages can also be set to correspond
bA.48 User Volt 4 with each frequency, and for each user voltage (User Volt 1–4).
152
The 100% output voltage in the figure below is based on the parameter settings of bA.15
(motor rated voltage). If bA.15 is set to 0 it will be based on the input voltage.
• When a normal induction motor is in use, care must be taken not to configure the output
pattern away from a linear V/F pattern. Non-linear V/F patterns may cause insufficient motor
torque or motor overheating due to over-excitation.
• When a user V/F pattern is in use, forward torque boost (dr.16) and reverse torque boost
(dr.17) do not operate.
4.14 Torque Boost
4.14.1 Manual Torque Boost

Manual torque boost enables users to adjust output voltage during low speed operation or
motor start. Increase low speed torque or improve motor starting properties by manually
increasing output voltage. Configure manual torque boost while running loads that require
high starting torque, such as lift-type loads.
Grou Parameter
p Setting
15 Torque boost options Torque Boost 0 Manual 0–1 -
Forward torque
Dr 16 Fwd Boost 2.0 0.0–15.0 %
boost
17 Reverse torque boost Rev Boost 2.0 0.0–15.0 %
153
Manual Torque Boost Setting Details
Code Description
dr.16 Fwd Boost Set torque boost for forward operation.
dr.17 Rev Boost Set torque boost for reverse operation.
Excessive torque boost will result in over-excitation and motor overheating .
4.14.2 Auto Torque Boost

Auto torque boost enables the inverter to automatically calculate the amount of output
voltage required for torque boost based on the entered motor parameters. Because auto
torque boost requires motor-related parameters such as stator resistance, inductance, and
no-load current, auto tuning (bA.20) has to be performed before auto torque boost can be
configured [Refer to 5.9 Auto Tuning on page 204]. Similarly to manual torque boost,
configure auto torque boost while running a load that requires high starting torque, such as
lift-type loads.
Grou Parameter
p Setting
Dr 15 torque boost mode Torque Boost 1 Auto 0–1 -
bA 20 auto tuning Auto Tuning 3 Rs+Lsigma 0–6 -
154
4.15 Output Voltage Setting

Output voltage settings are required when a motor’s rated voltage differs from the input
voltage to the inverter. Set bA.15 to configure the motor’s rated operating voltage. The set
voltage becomes the output voltage of the inverter’s base frequency. When the inverter
operates above the base frequency, and when the motor’s voltage rating is lower than the
input voltage at the inverter, the inverter adjusts the voltage and supplies the motor with
the voltage set at bA.15 (motor rated voltage). If the motor’s rated voltage is higher than
the input voltage at the inverter, the inverter will supply the inverter input voltage to the
motor.
If bA.15 (motor rated voltage) is set to 0, the inverter corrects the output voltage based on
the input voltage in the stopped condition. If the frequency is higher than the base
frequency, when the input voltage is lower than the parameter setting, the input voltage
will be the inverter output voltage.
Grou Parameter
p Setting
bA 15 Motor rated voltage Rated Volt 0 0, 170–480 V
4.16 Start Mode Setting

Select the start mode to use when the operation command is input with the motor in the
stopped condition.
155
4.16.1 Acceleration Start

Acceleration start is a general acceleration mode. If there are no extra settings applied, the
motor accelerates directly to the frequency reference when the command is input.
Grou Parameter
p Setting
Ad 07 Start mode Start mode 0 Acc 0–1 -
4.16.2 Start After DC Braking

This start mode supplies a DC voltage for a set amount of time to provide DC braking before
an inverter starts to accelerate a motor. If the motor continues to rotate due to its inertia,
DC braking will stop the motor, allowing the motor to accelerate from a stopped condition.
DC braking can also be used with a mechanical brake connected to a motor shaft when a
constant torque load is applied, if a constant torque is required after the the mechanical
brake is released.
Grou Setting
Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
p Range
07 Start mode Start Mode 1 DC-Start 0–1 -
Start DC braking
Ad 12 DC-Start Time 0.00 0.00–60.00 sec
time
13 DC Injection Level DC Inj Level 50 0–200 %
The amount of DC braking required is based on the motor’s rated current. Do not use DC
braking resistance values that can cause current draw to exceed the rated current of the inverter.
If the DC braking resistance is too high or brake time is too long, the motor may overheat or be
damaged.
156
4.17 Stop Mode Setting

Select a stop mode to stop the inverter operation.
4.17.1 Deceleration Stop

Deceleration stop is a general stop mode. If there are no extra settings applied, the motor
decelerates down to 0Hz and stops, as shown in the figure below.
Grou Parameter
p Setting
Ad 08 Stop mode Stop Mode 0 Dec 0–4 -
4.17.2 Stop After DC Braking

When the operation frequency reaches the set value during deceleration (DC braking
frequency), the inverter stops the motor by supplying DC power to the motor. With a stop
command input, the inverter begins decelerating the motor. When the frequency reaches
the DC braking frequency set at Ad.17, the inverter supplies DC voltage to the motor and
stops it.

p Setting Range
08 Stop mode Stop Mode 0 Dec 0–4 -
Output block time
14 DC-Block Time 0.10 0.00–60.00 sec
before braking
Ad 15 DC braking time DC-Brake Time 1.00 0–60 sec
16 DC braking amount DC-Brake Level 50 0–200 %
DC braking
17 DC-Brake Freq 5.00 0.00–60.00 Hz
frequency
157
DC Braking After Stop Setting Details
Code Description
Set the time to block the inverter output before DC braking. If the inertia
of the load is great, or if DC braking frequency (Ad.17) is set too high, a
Ad.14 DC-Block Time fault trip may occur due to overcurrent conditions when the inverter
supplies DC voltage to the motor. Prevent overcurrent fault trips by
adjusting the output block time before DC braking.
Ad.15 DC-Brake Time Set the time duration for the DC voltage supply to the motor.
Set the amount of DC braking to apply. The parameter setting is based
Ad.16 DC-Brake Level
on the rated current of the motor.
Set the frequency to start DC braking. When the frequency is reached,
the inverter starts deceleration. If the dwell frequency is set lower than
Ad.17 DC-Brake Freq
the DC braking frequency, dwell operation will not work and DC braking
will start instead.
• Note that the motor can overheat or be damaged if excessive amount of DC braking is
applied to the motor, or DC braking time is set too long.
• DC braking is configured based on the motor’s rated current. To prevent overheating or
damaging motors, do not set the current value higher than the inverter’s rated current.
158
4.17.3 Free Run Stop

When the Operation command is off, the inverter output turns off, and the load stops due
to residual inertia.
Grou Parameter
p Setting
Ad 08 Stop Method Stop Mode 2 Free-Run 0–4 -
Note that when there is high inertia on the output side and the motor is operating at high
speed, the load’s inertia will cause the motor to continue rotating even if the inverter output is
blocked.
4.17.4 Power Braking

When the inverter’s DC voltage rises above a specified level due to motor regenerated
energy, a control is made to either adjust the deceleration gradient level or reaccelerate the
motor in order to reduce the regenerated energy. Power braking can be used when short
deceleration times are needed without brake resistors, or when optimum deceleration is
needed without causing an over voltage fault trip.
Setting
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
Range
Ad 08 Stop mode Stop Mode 4 Power Braking 0–4 -
159
• To prevent overheating or damaging the motor, do not apply power braking to the loads
that require frequent deceleration.
• Stall prevention and power braking only operate during deceleration, and power braking
takes priority over stall prevention. In other words, when both Pr.50 (stall prevention and flux
braking) and Ad.08 (power braking) are set, power braking will take precedence and operate.
• Note that if deceleration time is too short or inertia of the load is too great, an overvoltage
fault trip may occur.
• Note that if a free run stop is used, the actual deceleration time can be longer than the pre-
set deceleration time.
4.18 Frequency Limit

Operation frequency can be limited by setting maximum frequency, start frequency, upper
limit frequency and lower limit frequency.
4.18.1 Frequency Limit Using Maximum Frequency and Start

Frequency
Parameter
Setting
19 Start frequency Start Freq 0.50 0.01–10.00 Hz
dr Maximum
20 Max Freq 50.00 40.00–400.00 Hz
frequency
Frequency Limit Using Maximum Frequency and Start Frequency - Setting Details
Code Description
Set the lower limit value for speed unit parameters that are expressed in Hz
dr.19 Start Freq or rpm. If an input frequency is lower than the start frequency, the
parameter value will be 0.00.
Set upper and lower frequency limits. All frequency selections are restricted
to frequencies from within the upper and lower limits.
dr.20 Max Freq
This restriction also applies when you in input a frequency reference using
the keypad.
160
4.18.2 Frequency Limit Using Upper and Lower Limit Frequency

Values
Grou Parameter
p Setting
24 Frequency limit Freq Limit 0 No 0–1 -
Frequency lower 0.0–maximum
25 Freq Limit Lo 0.50 Hz
limit value frequency
Ad
minimum–
Frequency upper Maximum
26 Freq Limit Hi maximum Hz
limit value frequency
frequency
Frequency Limit Using Upper and Lower Limit Frequencies - Setting Details
Code Description
The initial setting is 0(No). Changing the setting to 1(Yes) allows the
setting of frequencies between the lower limit frequency (Ad.25) and the
Ad.24 Freq Limit
upper limit frequency (Ad.26). When the setting is 0(No), codes Ad.25 and
Ad.26 are not visible.
Set an upper limit frequency to all speed unit parameters that are
Ad.25 Freq Limit Lo,
expressed in Hz or rpm, except for the base frequency (dr.18). Frequency
Ad.26 Freq Limit Hi
cannot be set higher than the upper limit frequency.
161
4.18.3 Frequency Jump

Use frequency jump to avoid mechanical resonance frequencies. Jump through frequency
bands when a motor accelerates and decelerates. Operation frequencies cannot be set
within the pre-set frequency jump band.
When a frequency setting is increased, while the frequency parameter setting value
(voltage, current, RS-485 communication, keypad setting, etc.) is within a jump frequency
band , the frequency will be maintained at the lower limit value of the frequency band.
Then, the frequency will increase when the frequency parameter setting exceeds the range
of frequencies used by the frequency jump band.
LCD Parameter
Display Setting
Frequency
27 Jump Freq 0 No 0–1 -
jump
Jump
0.00–Jump frequency
28 frequency Jump Lo 1 10.00 Hz
upper limit 1
lower limit1
Jump Jump frequency lower
29 frequency Jump Hi 1 15.00 limit 1–Maximum Hz
upper limit1 frequency
Jump
Ad upper limit 2
lower limit 2
upper limit 2 frequency
Jump
upper limit 3
lower limit 3
upper limit 3 frequency
162
4.19 2nd Operation Mode Setting

Apply two types of operation modes and switch between them as required. For both the
first and second command source, set the frequency after shifting operation commands to
the multi-function input terminal. Mode swiching can be used to stop remote control
during an operation using the communication option and to switch operation mode to
operate via the local panel, or to operate the inverter from another remote control location.
Select one of the multi-function terminals from codes In. 65–71 and set the parameter value
to 15 (2nd Source).
Grou Parameter Setting Uni

Code Name LCD Display
p Setting Range t
drv Command source Cmd Source* 1 Fx/Rx-1 0–4 -
Oper
Frequency reference
ation Frq Freq Ref Src 2 V1 0–12 -
source
04 2nd Command source Cmd 2nd Src 0 Keypad 0–4 -
bA 2nd Frequency
05 Freq 2nd Src 0 KeyPad-1 0–12 -
reference source
65-71
Px Define(Px:
in IP20
P1-P7 in IP20
models, Px terminal
In models, 15 2nd Source 0–54 -
65-69 configuration
P1-P5 in IP66
in IP66
models)
models
163
2nd Operation Mode Setting Details
Code Description
If signals are provided to the multi-function terminal set as the 2nd
bA.04 Cmd 2nd command source (2nd Source), the operation can be performed using the
Src set values from bA.04-05 instead of the set values from the drv and Frq
bA.05 Freq 2nd codes in the Operation group.
Src The 2nd command source settings cannot be changed while operating with
the 1st command source (Main Source).
• When setting the multi-function terminal to the 2nd command source (2nd Source) and input
(On) the signal, operation state is changed because the frequency setting and the Operation
command will be changed to the 2nd command. Before shifting input to the multi-function
terminal, ensure that the 2nd command is correctly set. Note that if the deceleration time is
too short or inertia of the load is too high, an overvoltage fault trip may occur.
• Depending on the parameter settings, the inverter may stop operating when you switch the
command modes.
4.20 Multi-function Input Terminal Control

Filter time constants and the type of multi-function input terminals can be configured to
improve the response of input terminals
Grou Parameter
p Setting
85 Multi-function input DI On Delay 10 0–10000 ms
terminal On filter
86 Multi-function input DI Off Delay 3 0–10000 ms
terminal Off filter
In 87 Multi-function input DI NC/NO Sel 0 0000* - -
terminal selection
90 Multi-function input DI Status 0 0000* - -

terminal status
* Displayed as on the keypad.
164
Multi-function Input Terminal Control Setting Details
Code Description
In.85 DI On Delay, If the input terminal’s state is not changed during the set time, when the
In.86 DI Off Delay terminal receives an input, it is recognized as On or Off.
Select terminal contact types for each input terminal. The position of the
indicator light corresponds to the segment that is on as shown in the table
below. With the bottom segment on, it indicates that the terminal is
configured as a A terminal (Normally Open) contact. With the top segment
on, it indicates that the terminal is configured as a B terminal (Normally
Closed) contact. Terminals are numbered P1-P7 in IP20 models, P1-P5 in IP66
In.87 DI NC/NO models, from right to left.
Sel
Type B terminal status (Normally A terminal status (Normally
Closed) Open)
Keypad
LCD
keypad
Display the configuration of each contact. When a segment is configured as
A terminal using dr.87, the On condition is indicated by the top segment
turning on. The Off condition is indicated when the bottom segment is
turned on. When contacts are configured as B terminals, the segment lights
behave conversely. Terminals are numbered P1-P7 in IP20 models, P1-P5 in
IP66 models, from right to left.
In.90 DI Status
Type A terminal setting (On) A terminal setting (Off )

Keypad
LCD
keypad
165
4.21 P2P Setting

The P2P function is used to share input and output devices between multiple inverters. To
enable P2P setting, RS-485 communication must be turned on .
Inverters connected through P2P communication are designated as either a master or a

slave . The master inverter controls the input and output of the slave inverter. The slave
inverter provides input and output actions. When using the multi-function output, the slave
inverter can select to use either the master inverter’s output or its own output. When using
P2P communication, first designate the slave inverter and then the master inverter. If the
master inverter is designated first, connected inverters may interpret the condition as a loss
of communication.
Master Parameter
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
P2P
CM 95 Communication Int 485 Func 1 P2P Master 0–3 -
selection
80 Analog input1 P2P In V1 0 0–12,000 %
-12,000–
81 Analog input2 P2P In I2 0 %
12,000
US
82 Digital input P2P In DI 0 0–0x7F bit
85 Analog output P2P Out AO1 0 0–10,000 %
88 Digital output P2P Out DO 0 0–0x03 bit
Slave Parameter
Grou Cod Parameter Setting
Name LCD Display Unit
p e Setting Range
P2P
95 Communication Int 485 Func 2 P2P Slave 0–3 -
CM selection
P2P DO setting
96 P2P OUT Sel 0 No 0–2 bit
selection
P2P Setting Details

Code Description
CM.95 Int 485 Func Set master inverter to 1(P2P Master), slave inverter to 2(P2P Slave).
US.80–82 P2P Input Data Input data sent from the slave inverter.
US.85, 88 P2P Output Data Output data transmitted to the slave inverter.
166
4.22 Multi-keypad Setting

Use multi-keypad settings to control more than one inverter with one keypad. To use this
function, first configure RS-485 communication.
The group of inverters to be controlled by the keypad will include a master inverter. The
master inverter monitors the other inverters, and slave inverter responds to the master
inverter’s input. When using multi-function output, a slave inverter can select to use either
the master inverter’s output or its own output. When using the multi keypad, first designate
the slave inverter and then the master inverter. If the master inverter is designated first,
connected inverters may interpret the condition as a loss of communication.
Master Parameter
p Setting Range
P2P
CM 95 Communication Int 485 Func 3 KPD-Ready 0–3 -
selection
03 Multi-keypad ID Multi KPD ID 3 3–99 -
CNF Multi-function key
42 Multi Key Sel 4 Multi KPD 0–4 -
selection
Slave Parameter
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
01 Station ID Int485 St ID 3 3–99 -
CM P2P
95 communication Int 485 Func 3 KPD-Ready 0–3 -
options
Multi-keypad Setting Details

Code Description
Prevents conflict by designating a unique identification value to an
CM.01 Int485 St ID inverter.
Values can be selected from numbers between 3–99.
CM.95 Int 485 Func Set the value to 3(KPD-Ready) for both master and slave inverter
CNF-03 Multi KPD
Select an inverter to monitor from the group of inverters.
ID
CNF-42 Multi key
Select a multi-function key type 4(Multi KPD) .
Sel
167
• The multi-keypad feature will not work when the multi-keypad ID (CNF-03 Multi-KPD ID)
setting is identical to the RS-485 communication station ID (CM-01 Int485 st ID) setting.
• The master/slave setting cannot be changed while the inverter is operating in slave mode.
4.23 User Sequence Setting

User Sequence creates a simple sequence from a combination of different function blocks.
The sequence can comprise of a maximum of 18 steps using 29 function blocks and 30 void
parameters.
1 Loop refers to a single execution of a user configured sequence that contains a maximum
of 18 steps. Users can select a Loop Time of between 10-1,000ms.
The codes for user sequences configuration can be found in the US group (for user
sequence settings) and the UF group (for function block settings).
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
User sequence
AP 02 User Seq En 0 0–1 -
activation
User sequence
01 User Seq Con 0 0–2 -
operation command
User sequence
02 User Loop Time 0 0–5 -
operation time
11– Link UserOut1–
Output address link1–18 0 0–0xFFFF -
28 18
31–
US Input value setting1–30 Void Para1–30 0 -9999–9999 -
60
P2P In V1(-10–
80 Analog input 1 0 0–12,000 %
10 V)
81 Analog input 2 P2P In I2 0 -12,000 %
82 Digital input P2P In D 0 –12,000 bit
85 Analog output P2P Out AO1 0 0–0x7F %
88 Digital output P2P Out DO 0 0–0x03 bit
01 User function 1 User Func1 0 0–28 -
UF
02 User function input 1-A User Input 1-A 0 0–0xFFFF -
168
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
03 User function input 1-B User Input 1-B 0 0–0xFFFF -
04 User function input 1-C User Input 1-C 0 0–0xFFFF -
-32767–
05 User function output 1 User Output 1 0 -
32767
-32767–
32767
-32767–
32767
16 Uer function 4 User Func4 0 0–28 -
UF 19 User function input 4-C User Input 4-C 0 0–0xFFFF -
-32767–
32767
-32767–
32767
169
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
-32767–
32767
-32767–
32767
38 User function input8-B User Input 8-B 0 0–0xFFFF -
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
-32767–
32767
-32767–
UF 45 User function output 9 User Output 9 0 -
32767
-32767–
32767
170
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
-32767–
32767
-32767–
32767
-32767–
32767
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
68 User function input14-B User Input 14-B 0 0–0xFFFF -
-32767–
70 User function output14 User Output 14 0 -
32767
UF
171
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
-32767–
32767
-32767–
32767
-32767–
32767
-32767–
32767
User Sequence Setting Details
Code Description
AP.02 User Seq En Display the parameter groups related to a user sequence.
Set Sequence Run and Sequence Stop with the keypad.
US.01 User Seq Con Parameters cannot be adjusted during an operation. To adjust
parameters, the operation must be stopped.
Set the user sequence Loop Time.
US.02 User Loop Time
User sequence loop time can be set to 0.01s/0.02s/ 0.05s/0.1s/0.5s/1s.
Set parameters to connect 18 Function Blocks. If the input value is
0x0000, an output value cannot be used.
US.11–28
To use the output value in step 1 for the frequency reference (Cmd
Link UserOut1–18
Frequency), input the communication address(0x1101) of the Cmd
frequency as the Link UserOut1 parameter.
172
Code Description
US.31–60 Void Para1– Set 30 void parameters. Use when constant (Const) parameter input is
30 needed in the user function block.
Set user defined functions for the 18 function blocks.
If the function block setting is invalid, the output of the User Output@
UF.01–90 is -1.
All the outputs from the User Output@ are read only, and can be used
with the user output link@ (Link UserOut@) of the US group.
Function Block Parameter Structure

Type Description
User Func @* Choose the function to perform in the function block.
User Input @-A Communication address of the function’s first input parameter.
User Input @-B Communication address of the function’s second input parameter.
User Input @-C Communication address of the function’s third input parameter.
User Output @ Output value (Read Only) after performing the function block.
* @ is the step number (1-18).
User Function Operation Condition

Number Type Description
0 NOP No Operation.
Addition operation, (A + B) + C
1 ADD
If the C parameter is 0x0000, it will be recognized as 0.
Subtraction operation, (A - B) – C
2 SUB
Addition andsubtraction compound operation, (A + B) – C
3 ADDSUB
Output the smallest value of the input values, MIN(A, B, C).
4 MIN
If the C parameter is 0x0000, operate only with A, B.
Output the largest value of the input values, MAX(A, B, C).
5 MAX
Output the absolute value of the A parameter, | A |.
6 ABS
This operation does not use the B, or C parameter.
Output the negative value of the A parameter, -( A ).
7 NEGATE
This operation does not use the B, or C parameter.
Remainder operation of A and B, A % B
8 REMAINDER
This operation does not use the C parameter.
Multiplication, division compound operation, (A x B)/C.
9 MPYDIV If the C parameter is 0x0000, output the multiplication operation of
(A x B).
173

Comparison operation: if (A > B) the output is C; if (A </=B) the
output is 0.
COMPARE-GT
10 If the condition is met, the output parameter is C. If the condition is
(greater than)
not met, the output is 0(False). If the C parameter is 0x0000 and if
the condition is met, the output is 1(True).
Comparison operation; if (A >/= B) output is C; if (A<B) the output is
COMPARE-
0.
GTEQ
(great than or
equal to)
Comparison operation, if(A == B) then the output is C. For all other
values the output is 0.
COMPARE-
12 If the condition is met, the output parameter is C. if the condition is
EQUAL
Comparison operation, if(A != B) then the output is C. For all other
values the output is 0.
COMPARE-
NEQUAL
Adds 1 each time a user sequence completes a loop.
A: Max Loop, B: Timer Run/Stop, C: Choose output mode.
If input of B is 1, timer stops (output is 0). If input is 0, timer runs.
14 TIMER If input of C is 1, output the current timer value.
If input of C is 0, output 1 when timer value exceeds A(Max) value.
If the C parameter is 0x0000, C will be recognized as 0.
Timer overflow Initializes the timer value to 0.
Sets a limit for the A parameter.
If input to A is between B and C, output the input to A.
15 LIMIT If input to A is larger than B, output B. If input of A is smaller than C,
output C.
B parameter must be greater than or equal to the C parameter.
Output the AND operation, (A and B) and C.
16 AND
Output the OR operation, (A | B) | C.
17 OR
Output the XOR operation, (A ^ B) ^ C.
18 XOR
Output the AND/OR operation, (A andB) | C.
19 AND/OR
Output a value after selecting one of two inputs, if (A) then B
otherwise C.
20 SWITCH
If the input at A is 1, the output will be B. If the input at A is 0, the
output parameter will be C.
174

Test the B bit of the A parameter, BITTEST(A, B).
If the B bit of the A input is 1, the output is 1. If it is 0, then the output
21 BITTEST is 0. The input value of B must be between 0–16. If the value is
higher than 16, it will be recognized as 16. If input at B is 0, the
output is always 0.
Set the B bit of the A parameter, BITSET(A, B). Output the changed
value after setting the B bit to input at A.
22 BITSET The input value of B must be between 0–16. If the value is higher
than 16, it will be recognized as 16. If the input at B is 0, the output is
always 0. This operation does not use the C parameter.
Clear the B bit of the A parameter, BITCLEAR(A, B). Output the
changed value after clearing the B bit to input at A.
23 BITCLEAR The input value of B must be between 0–16. If the value is higher
than 16, it will be recognized as 16. If the input at B is 0, the output is
always 0. This operation does not use the C parameter.
Output the input at A as the B filter gains time constant, B x US-02
(US Loop Time.
24 LOWPASSFILTER In the above formula, set the time when the output of A reaches
63.3%
C stands for the filter operation. If it is 0, the operation is started.
P, I gain = A, B parameter input, then output as C.
Conditions for PI_PROCESS output: C = 0: Const PI,
C = 1: PI_PROCESS-B >= PI_PROCESS-OUT >= 0,
25 PI_CONTROL
C = 2: PI_PROCESS-B >= PI_PROCESS-OUT >= -(PI_PROCESS-B),
P gain = A/100, I gain = 1/(Bx Loop Time),
If there is an error with PI settings, output -1.
A is an input error, B is an output limit, C is the value of Const PI
26 PI_PROCESS output.
Range of C is 0–32,767.
Upcounts the pulses and then output the value- UPCOUNT(A, B, C).
After receiving a trigger input (A), outputs are upcounted by C
conditions. If the B inputs is 1, do not operate and display 0. If the B
inputs is 0, operate.
If the C parameter is 0, upcount when the input at A changes from 0
27 UPCOUNT to 1.
If the C parameter is 1, upcount when the input at A is changed from
1 to 0.
If the C parameter is 2, upcount whenever the input at A changes.
Output range is: 0–32767
175

Downcounts the pulses and then output the value- DOWNCOUNT(A,
B, C).
After receiving a trigger input (A), outputs are downcounted by C
28 DOWNCOUNT
conditions. If the B input is 1, do not operate and display the initial
value of C. If the B input is 0, operate.
Downcounts when the A parameter changes from 0 to 1.
Note
The Pl process block (Pl_PROCESS Block) must be used after the PI control block (PI_CONTROL
Block) for proper Pl control operation. Pl control operation cannot be performed if there is
another block between the two blocks, or if the blocks are placed in an incorrect order.
4.24 Fire Mode Operation

This function is used to allow the inverter to ignore minor faults during emergency
situations, such as fire, and provides continuous operation to fire pumps.
When turned on, Fire mode forces the inverter to ignore all minor fault trips and repeat a
Reset and Restart for major fault trips, regardless of the restart trial count limit. The retry
delay time set at PR. 10 (Retry Delay) still applies while the inverter performs a Reset and
Restart.
Fire Mode Parameter Settings
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Unit

Range
Ad 80 Fire Mode selection Fire Mode 1 Fire Mode 0–2 -
Sel
81 Fire Mode frequency Fire Mode 0-60 0–60
Freq
82 Fire Mode run Fire Mode 0–1 0–1
direction Dir
83 Fire Mode operation Fire Mode Not configurable - -
count Cnt
In 65-71 Px terminal Px Define 51 Fire Mode 0–54 -
in IP20 configuration (Px: P1-P7 in
models, IP20 models,
65-69 P1-P5 in IP66
in IP66 models)
models
176
The inverter runs in Fire mode when Ad. 80 (Fire Mode Sel) is set to ‘2 (Fire Mode)’, and the
multi-function terminal (In. 65-71) configured for Fire mode (51: Fire Mode) is turned on.
The Fire mode count increases by 1 at Ad. 83 (Fire Mode Count) each time a Fire mode
operation is run.
Fire mode operation may result in inverter malfunction. Note that Fire mode operation voids the
product warranty – the inverter is covered by the product warranty only when the Fire mode
count is ‘0.’
Fire Mode Function Setting Details

Code Description Details
Ad.81 Fire Fire mode The frequency set at Ad. 81 (Fire mode frequency) is used for
Mode frequency the inverter operation in Fire mode. The Fire mode frequency
frequency reference takes priority over the Jog frequency, Multi-step frequencies,
and the keypad input frequency.
Dr.03 Acc Fire mode When Fire mode operation is turned on, the inverter
Time / Acc/Dec times accelerates for the time set at Dr.03 (Acc Time), and then
Dr.04 Dec decelerates based on the deceleration time set at Dr.04 (Dec
Time Time). It stops when the Px terminal input is turned off (Fire
mode operation is turned off ).
PR.10 Retry Fault trip process Some fault trips are ignored during Fire mode operation. The
Delay fault trip history is saved, but trip outputs are disabled even
when they are configured at the multi-function output
terminals.
Fault trips that are ignored in Fire mode

BX, External Trip, Low Voltage Trip, Inverter Overheat, Inverter
Overload, Overload, Electrical Thermal Trip, Input/Output
Open Phase, Motor Overload, Fan Trip, No Motor Trips, and
other minor fault trips.
For the following fault trips, the inverter performs a Reset and
Restart until the trip conditions are released. The retry delay
time set at PR. 10 (Retry Delay) applies while the inverter
performs a Reset and Restart.
Fault trips that force a Reset Restart in Fire mode

Over Voltage, Over Current1(OC1), Ground Fault Trip
The inverter stops operating when the following fault trips

occur:
Fault trips that stop inverter operation in Fire mode

H/W Diag, Over Current 2 (Arm-Short)
177
Learning Advanced Features
5 Learning Advanced Features

This chapter describes the advanced features of the Sinus H inverter. Check the reference
page in the table to see the detailed description for each of the advanced features.
Advanced Tasks Description Ref.

Use the main and auxiliary frequencies in the predefined
Auxiliary frequency formulas to create various operating conditions. Auxiliary
p.179
operation frequency operation is ideal for Draw Operation* as this feature
enables fine-tuning of operation speeds.
Jog operation is a kind of a manual operation. The inverter
Jog operation operates to a set of parameter settings predefined for Jog p.184
operation, while the Jog command button is pressed.
Uses the upper and lower limit value switch output signals (i.e.
Up-down operation p.188
signals from a flow meter) as Acc/Dec commands to motors.
3-wire operation is used to latch an input signal. This
3-wire operation p.189
configuration is used to operate the inverter by a push button.
This safety feature allows the inverter’s operation only after a
signal is input to the multi-function terminal designated for the
Safety operation
safety operation mode. This feature is useful when extra care is p.190
mode
needed in operating the inverter using the multi-purpose
terminals.
Use this feature for the lift-type loads such as elevators, when
Dwell operation the torque needs to be maintained while the brakes are applied p.192
or released.
This feature ensures that the motor rotates at a constant speed,
Slip compensation p.194
by compensating for the motor slip as a load increases.
PID control provides constant automated control of flow,
PID control pressure, and temperature by adjusting the output frequency p.196
of the inverter.
Used to automatically measure the motor control parameters
Auto-tuning p.204
to optimize the inverter’s control mode performance.
An efficient mode to control magnetic flux and torque without
Sensorless vector special sensors. Efficiency is achieved through the high torque
p.207
control characteristics at low current when compared with the V/F
control mode.
Used to maintain the DC link voltage for as long as possible by
Energy buffering
controlling the inverter output frequency during power p.227
operation
interruptions, thus to delay a low voltage fault trip.
Energy saving Used to save energy by reducing the voltage supplied to
p.228
operation motors during low-load and no-load conditions.
178
Advanced Tasks Description Ref.

Speed search Used to prevent fault trips when the inverter voltage is output
p.233
operation while the motor is idling or free-running.
Auto restart configuration is used to automatically restart the
Auto restart inverter when a trip condition is released, after the inverter
p.237
operation stops operating due to activation of protective devices (fault
trips).
Used to switch equipment operation by connecting two
Second motor motors to one inverter. Configure and operate the second
p.240
operation motor using the terminal input defined for the second motor
operation.
Commercial power
Used to switch the power source to the motor from the inverter
source switch p.242
output to a commercial power source, or vice versa.
operation
Cooling fan control Used to control the cooling fan of the inverter. p.243
Set the timer value and control the On/Off state of the multi-
Timer settings p.252
function output and relay.
Used to control the On/Off operation of the load’s electronic
Brake control p.253
braking system.
Multi-function
Set standard values and turn On/Off the output relays or multi-
output On/Off p.255
function output terminals according to the analog input value.
control
Regeneration
Used during a press operation to avoid motor regeneration, by
prevention for press p.256
increasing the motor operation speed.
operation.
* Draw operation is an openloop tension control. This feature allows a constant tension to
be applied to the material that is drawn by a motor-driven device, by fine-tuning the
motor speed using operation frequencies that are proportional to a ratio of the main
frequency reference.
5.1 Operating with Auxiliary References

Frequency references can be configured with various calculated conditions that use the
main and auxiliary frequency references simultaneously. The main frequency reference is
used as the operating frequency, while auxiliary references are used to modify and fine-
tune the main reference.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
Frequency reference
Operation Frq Freq Ref Src 0 Keypad-1 0–12 -
source
179
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
Auxiliary frequency
01 Aux Ref Src 1 V1 0–4 -
reference source
Auxiliary frequency
Aux Calc
bA 02 reference calculation 0 M+(G*A) 0–7 -
Type
type
Auxiliary frequency
03 Aux Ref Gain 0.0 -200.0–200.0 %
reference gain
65– Px terminal
In Px Define 40 dis Aux Ref 0~54 -
71 configuration
The table above lists the available calculated conditions for the main and auxiliary
frequency references. Refer to the table to see how the calculations apply to an example
where the Frq code has been set to 0(Keypad-1), and the inverter is operating at a main
reference frequency of 30.00Hz. Signals at -10 – +10V are received at terminal V1, with the
reference gain set at 5%. In this example, the resulting frequency reference is fine-tuned
within the range of 27.00–33.00Hz [Codes In.01–16 must be set to the default values, and
In.06 (V1 Polarity), set to 1 (Bipolar)].
Auxiliary Reference Setting Details
Code Description
Set the input type to be used for the auxiliary frequency reference.
0 None Auxiliary frequency reference is disabled.
1 V1 Sets the V1 (voltage) terminal at the control terminal
block as the source of auxiliary frequency reference.
3 V2 Sets the V2 (voltage) terminal at the control terminal
bA.01 Aux Ref Src
block as the source of auxiliary frequency reference
(SW2 must be set to “voltage”).
4 I2 Sets the I2 (current) terminal at the control terminal
block as the source of auxiliary frequency reference
(SW2 must be set to “current”).
5 Pulse Sets the TI (pulse) terminal at the control terminal
block as the source of auxiliary frequency reference.
180
Code Description
Set the auxiliary reference gain with bA.03 (Aux Ref Gain) to configure the
auxiliary reference and set the percentage to be reflected when
calculating the main reference. Note that items 4–7 below may result in
either plus (+) or minus (-) references (forward or reverse operation) even
when unipolar analog inputs are used.
Configuration Formula for frequency reference

0 M+(G*A) Main reference+(bA.03xbA.01xIn.01)
1 M*(G*A) x(bA.03xbA.01)
2 M/(G*A) Main reference/(bA.03xbA.01)
bA.02 Aux Calc 3 M+{M*(G*A)} Main reference+{Main reference x(bA.03xbA.01)}
Type 4 M+G*2*(A-50) Main reference+bA.03x2x(bA.01–50)x In.01
5 M*{G*2*(A-50)} Main reference x{bA.03x2x(bA.01–50)}
6 M/{G*2*(A-50)} Main reference/{bA.03x2x(bA.01–50)}
7 M+M*G*2*(A- Main reference+Main reference x
50) bA.03x2x(bA.01–50)
M: Main frequency reference (Hz or rpm)

G: Auxiliary reference gain (%)
A: Auxiliary frequency reference (Hz or rpm) or gain (%)
Adjust the size of the input (bA.01 Aux Ref Src) configured for auxiliary
bA.03 Aux Ref Gain
frequency.
In.65-71 (P1-P7 in
IP20 models), Set one of the multi-function input terminals to 40(dis Aux Ref ) and turn
In.65-69 (P1-P5 in it on to disable the auxiliary frequency reference. The inverter will operate
IP66 models) using the main frequency reference only.
Px Define
181
Auxiliary Reference Operation Ex #1
Keypad Frequency Setting is Main Frequency and V1 Analog Voltage is Auxiliary

Frequency
• Main frequency: Keypad (operation frequency 30Hz)
• Maximum frequency setting (dr.20): 400Hz
• Auxiliary frequency setting (bA.01): V1[Display by percentage(%) or auxiliary frequency
(Hz) depending on the operation setting condition]
• Auxiliary reference gain setting (bA.03): 50%
• In.01–32: Factory default
Example: an input voltage of 6V is supplied to V1, and the frequency corresponding to 10V is
60Hz. The table below shows the auxiliary frequency A as 36Hz[=60Hz X (6V/10V)] or 60%[=
100% X (6V/10V)].
Setting* Calculating final command frequency**
0 M[Hz]+(G[%]*A[Hz]) 30Hz(M)+(50%(G)x36Hz(A))=48Hz
1 M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%]) 30Hz(M)x(50%(G)x60%(A))=9Hz
2 M[Hz]/(G[%]*A[%]) 30Hz(M)/(50%(G)x60%(A))=100Hz
3 M[Hz]+{M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%])} 30Hz(M)+{30[Hz]x(50%(G)x60%(A))}=39Hz
4 M[Hz]+G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])[Hz] 30Hz(M)+50%(G)x2x(60%(A)–50%)x60Hz=36Hz
5 M[HZ]*{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])} 30Hz(M)x{50%(G)x2x(60%(A)–50%)}=3Hz
6 M[HZ]/{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])} 30Hz(M)/{50%(G)x2x(60%–50%)}=300Hz
7 M[HZ]+M[HZ]*G[%]*2*(A[%]- 30Hz(M)+30Hz(M)x50%(G)x2x(60%(A)–
50[%]) 50%)=33Hz
*M: main frequency reference (Hz or rpm)/G: auxiliary reference gain (%)/A: auxiliary
frequency reference (Hz or rpm) or gain (%).
**If the frequency setting is changed to rpm, it is converted to rpm instead of Hz.
Keypad Frequency Setting is Main Frequency and I2 Analog Voltage is Auxiliary Frequency
• Main frequency: Keypad (Operation frequency 30Hz)
• Auxiliary frequency setting (bA.01): I2 [Display by percentage(%) or auxiliary frequency(Hz)
depending on the operation setting condition]
• Auxiliary reference gain setting (bA.03): 50%
182
Example: an input current of 10.4mA is applied to I2, with the frequency corresponding to
20mA of 60Hz. The table below shows auxiliary frequency A as 24Hz(=60[Hz] X {(10.4[mA]-
4[mA])/(20[mA] - 4[mA])} or 40%(=100[%] X {(10.4[mA] - 4[mA])/(20[mA] - 4[mA])}.

1 M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%]) 30Hz(M)x(50%(G)x40%(A))=6Hz
2 M[Hz]/(G[%]*A[%]) 30Hz(M)/(50%(G)x40%(A))=150Hz
5 M[HZ]*{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%]) 30Hz(M)x{50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–50%)} = -
3Hz(Reverse)
6 M[HZ]/{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])} 30Hz(M)/{50%(G)x2x(60%–40%)} = -
300Hz(Reverse)
7 M[HZ]+M[HZ]*G[%]*2*(A[%]- 30Hz(M)+30Hz(M)x50%(G)x2x (40%(A)–
50[%]) 50%)=27Hz
* M: main frequency reference (Hz or rpm)/G: auxiliary reference gain (%)/A: auxiliary
frequency reference Hz or rpm) or gain (%).
V1 is Main Frequency and I2 is Auxiliary Frequency

• Main frequency: V1 (frequency command setting to 5V and is set to 30Hz)
• Auxiliary frequency (bA.01): I2[Display by percentage (%) or auxiliary frequency (Hz)
depending on the operation setting condition]
• Auxiliary reference gain (bA.03): 50%
183
Example: an input current of 10.4mA is applied to I2, with the frequency corresponding to
20mA of 60Hz. The table below shows auxiliary frequency Aas 24Hz(=60[Hz]x{(10.4[mA]-
4[mA])/(20[mA]-4[mA])} or 40%(=100[%] x {(10.4[mA] - 4[mA]) /(20 [mA] - 4[mA])}.

1 M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%]) 30Hz(M)x(50%(G)x40%(A))=6Hz
2 M[Hz]/(G[%]*A[%]) 30Hz(M)/(50%(G)x40%(A))=150Hz
5 M[HZ]*{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])} 30Hz(M)x{50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–50%)}=-
3Hz(Reverse)
6 M[HZ]/{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])} 30Hz(M)/{50%(G)x2x(60%–40%)}=-
300Hz(Reverse)
7 M[HZ]+M[HZ]*G[%]*2*(A[%]- 30Hz(M)+30Hz(M)x50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–
50[%]) 50%)=27Hz
* M: main frequency reference (Hz or rpm)/G: auxiliary reference gain (%)/A: auxiliary
frequency reference (Hz or rpm) or gain (%).
Note
When the maximum frequency value is high, output frequency deviation may result due to
analog input variation and deviations in the calculations.
5.2 Jog operation

The jog operation allows for a temporary control of the inverter. You can enter a jog
operation command using the multi-function terminals or by using the [ESC] key on the
keypad.
The jog operation is the second highest priority operation, after the dwell operation. If a jog
operation is requested while operating the multi-step, up-down, or 3-wire operation
modes, the jog operation overrides all other operation modes.
184
5.2.1 Jog Operation 1-Forward Jog by Multi-function Terminal

The jog operation is available in either forward or reverse direction, using the keypad or
multi-function terminal inputs. The table below lists parameter setting for a forward jog
operation using the multi-function terminal inputs.

Setting Range
dr 11 Jog frequency JOG Frequency 10.00 0.50- Hz
Maximum
frequency
12 Jog operation JOG Acc Time 20.00 0.00-600.00 sec
acceleration time
13 Jog operation JOG Dec Time 30.00 0.00-600.00 sec
deceleration time
In 65-71 Px terminal Px Define 6 JOG - -
65-69 P1-P5 in IP66
in IP66 models)
models
Forward Jog Description Details
Code Description
In.65-71 (P1-P7 in IP20 models), Select the jog frequency from
In.65-69 (P1-P5 in IP66 models) P1- P7 in IP20 models and then select 6. Jog from In.65-71
Px Define P1- P5 in IP66 models and then select 6. Jog from In.65-69
[Terminal settings for jog operation]

dr.11 JOG Frequency Set the operation frequency.
dr.12 JOG Acc Time Set the acceleration speed.

dr.13 JOG Dec Time Set the deceleration speed.
185
If a signal is entered at the jog terminal while an FX operation command is on, the
operation frequency changes to the jog frequency and the jog operation begins.
5.2.2 Jog Operation 2-Fwd/Rev Jog by Multi-function Terminal

For jog operation 1, an operation command must be entered to start operation, but while
using jog operation 2, a terminal that is set for a forward or reverse jog also starts an
operation. The priorities for frequency, Acc/Dec time and terminal block input during
operation in relation to other operating modes (Dwell, 3-wire, up/down, etc.) are identical
to jog operation 1. If a different operation command is entered during a jog operation, it is
ignored and the operation maintains the jog frequency.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Range Unit

setting
dr 11 Jog frequency JOG Frequency 10.00 0.50-Maximum Hz
frequency
12 Jog operation JOG Acc Time 20.00 0.00-600.00 sec
acceleration time
13 Operation JOG Dec Time 30.00 0.00-600.00 sec
deceleration time
In 65-71 Px terminal Px Define 46 FWD JOG - -
in IP20 configuration (Px: P1-P7 in IP20 47 REV JOG
models, models,
65-69 P1-P5 in IP66
in IP66 models)
models
186
5.2.3 Jog Operation by Keypad

Setting Range
Dr 90 [ESC] key functions - 1 JOG - -
Key
06 Command source Cmd Source* 0 Keypad - -
Set dr.90 to 1(JOG Key) and set the drv code in the Operation group to 0(Keypad). When the
[ESC] key is pressed, the SET display light flashes and the jog operation is ready to start.
Pressing the [RUN] key starts the operation and the inverter accelerates or decelerates to
the designated jog frequency. Releasing the [RUN] key stops the jog operation. Set the
Acc/Dec time for the jog operation frequency at dr.12 and dr.13.
187
5.3 Up-down Operation

The Acc/Dec time can be controlled through input at the multi-function terminal block.
Similar to a flowmeter, the up-down operation can be applied easily to a system that uses
the upper-lower limit switch signals for Acc/Dec commands.

Setting Range
Ad 65 Up-down U/D Save Mode 1 Yes 0-1 -
operation
frequency save
In 65-71 Px terminal Px Define 17 Up - -
in IP20 configuration (Px: P1-P7 in IP20 18 Down
models, models, 20 U/D Clear
65-69 P1-P5 in IP66
in IP66 models)
models
Up-down Operation Setting Details
Code Description
In.65-71 (P1-P7 in Select two terminals for up-down operation and set them to 17 (Up) and
IP20 models), 18 (Down), respectively. With the operation command input, acceleration
In.65-69 (P1-P5 in begins when the Up terminal signal is on. Acceleration stops and constant
IP66 models) speed operation begins when the signal is off.
Px Define
During operation, deceleration begins when the Down signal is on.
Deceleration stops and constant speed operation begins when both Up
and Down signals are entered at the same time.
188
Code Description
Ad.65 U/D Save During a constant speed operation, the operating frequency is saved
Mode automatically in the following conditions: the operation command (Fx or
Rx) is off, a fault trip occurs, or the power is off.
When the operation command is turned on again, or when the inverter

regains the power source or resumes to a normal operation from a fault
trip, it resumes operation at the saved frequency. To delete the saved
frequency, use the multi-function terminal block. Set one of the multi-
function terminals to 20 (U/D Clear) and apply signals to it during
constant speed operation. The saved frequency and the up-down
operation configuration will be deleted.
5.4 3-Wire Operation

The 3-wire operation latches the signal input (the signal stays on after the button is
released), and is used when operating the inverter with a push button.

Setting Range
Operation drv Command Cmd Source* 1 Fx/Rx - 1 - -
source
In 65-71 Px terminal Px Define 14 3-Wire - -
65-69 P1-P5 in IP66
in IP66 models)
models
189
To enable the 3-wire operation, the following circuit sequence is necessary. The minimum
input time (t) for 3-wire operation is 1ms, and the operation stops when both forward and
reverse operation commands are entered at the same time.
[Terminal connection for 3-wire operation]
[3-wire operation]
5.5 Safe Operation Mode

When the multi-function terminals are configured to operate in safe mode, operation
commands can be entered in the Safe operation mode only. Safe operation mode is used to
safely and carefully control the inverter through the multi-function terminals.

Setting Range
Ad 70 Safe operation Run En Mode 1 DI - -
selection Dependent
71 Safe operation stop Run Dis Stop 0 Free-Run 0-2 -
mode
72 Safe operation Q-Stop Time 5.0 0.0-600.0 sec
deceleration time
190

Setting Range
In 65-71 Px terminal Px Define 13 RUN Enable - -
65-69 P1-P5 in IP66
in IP66 models)
models
Safe Operation Mode Setting Details
Code Description
In.65-71 (P1-P7 in From the multi-function terminals, select a terminal to operate in safe
IP20 models), operation mode and set it to 13 (RUN Enable).
In.65-69 (P1-P5 in
IP66 models)
Px Define
Ad.70 Run En Mode Setting Function
0 Always Enable Enables safe operation mode.
1 DI Dependent Recognizes the operation command from a
multi-function input terminal.
Ad.71 Run Dis Stop Set the operation of the inverter when the multi-function input terminal
in safe operation mode is off.
Setting Function
1 Free-Run Blocks the inverter output when the multi-
function terminal is off.
2 Q-Stop The deceleration time (Q-Stop Time) used in
safe operation mode. It stops after deceleration
and then the operation can resume only when
the operation command is entered again. The
operation will not begin if only the multi-
function terminal is on.
3 Q-Stop The inverter decelerates to the deceleration
Resume time (Q-Stop Time) in safe operation mode. It
stops after deceleration. Then if the multi-
function terminal is on, the operation resumes
as soon as the operation command is entered
again.
Ad.72 Q-Stop Time Sets the deceleration time when Ad.71 (Run Dis Stop) is set to 1 (Q-Stop)
or 2 (Q-Stop Resume).
191
5.6 Dwell Operation

The dwell operation is used to manitain torque during the application and release of the
brakes on lift-type loads. Inverter dwell operation is based on the Acc/Dec dwell frequency
and the dwell time set by the user. The following points also affect dwell operation:
• Acceleration Dwell Operation: When an operation command runs, acceleration

continues until the acceleration dwell frequency and constant speed is reached within
the acceleration dwell operation time (Acc Dwell Time). After the Acc Dwell Time has
passed, acceleration is carried out based on the acceleration time and the operation
speed that was originally set.
• Deceleration Dwell Operation: When a stop command is run, deceleration continues
until the deceleration dwell frequency and constant speed is reached within the
deceleration dwell operation time (Dec Dwell Freq). After the set time has passed,
deceleration is carried out based on the deceleration time that was originally set, then
the operation stops.
When dr.09 (Control Mode) is set to 0 (V/F), the inverter can be used for operations with
dwell frequency before opening the mechanical brake of lift-type loads, such as an elevator.

Setting
Ad 20 Dwell frequency during Acc Dwell 5.00 Start frequency Hz
acceleration Freq – Maximum
frequency
21 Operation time during Acc Dwell 0.0 0.0–10.0 s
acceleration Time
22 Dwell frequency during Dec Dwell 5.00 Start frequency Hz
deceleration Freq – Maximum
frequency
23 Operation time during Dec Dwell 0.0 0 .0-60.0 s
deceleration Time
192
Note
Dwell operation does not work when:
• Dwell operation time is set to 0 sec or dwell frequency is set to 0 Hz.

• Re-acceleration is attempted from stop or during deceleration, as only the first acceleration
dwell operation command is valid.
[Acceleration dwell operation]
Although deceleration dwell operation is carried out whenever stop commands are entered
and the deceleration dwell frequency is passed through, it does not work during a
deceleration by simple frequency change (which is not a deceleration due to a stop
operation), or during external brake control applications.
[Deceleration dwell operation]
193
When a dwell operation is carried out for a lift - type load before its mechanical brake is released,
motors can be damaged or their lifecyle reduced due to overflow current in the motor.
5.7 Slip Compensation Operation

Slip refers to the variation between the setting frequency (synchronous speed) and motor
rotation speed. As the load increases there can be variations between the setting frequency
and motor rotation speed. Slip compensation is used for loads that require compensation
of these speed variations.

Range
dr 09 Control mode Control Mode 2 Slip Compen - -
14 Motor capacity Motor 2 0.75 kW (0.75 0-15 -
Capacity kW based)
bA 11 Number of motor Pole Number 4 2-48 -
poles
12 Rated slip speed Rated Slip 90 (0.75 kW based) 0-3000 rpm
13 Rated motor Rated Curr 3.6 (0.75 kW based) 1.0-1000.0 A
current
14 Motor no-load Noload Curr 1.6 (0.75 kW based) 0.5-1000.0 A
current
16 Motor efficiency Efficiency 72 (0.75 kW based) 64-100 %
17 Load inertia rate Inertia Rate 0 (0.75 kW based) 0-8 -
194
Slip Compensation Operation Setting Details
Code Description
dr.09 Control Mode Set dr.09 to 2 (Slip Compen) to carry out the slip compensation operation.
dr.14 Motor Set the capacity of the motor connected to the inverter.
Capacity
bA.11 Pole Number Enter the number of poles from the motor rating plate.
bA.12 Rated Slip Enter the number of rated rotations from the motor rating plate.
bA.13 Rated Curr Enter the rated current from the motor rating plate.
bA.14 Noload Curr Enter the measured current when the load on the motor axis is removed
and when the motor is operated at the rated frequency. If no-load current
is difficult to measure, enter a current equivalent to 30-50% of the rated
motor current.
bA.16 Efficiency Enter the efficiency from the motor rating place.
bA.17 Inertia Rate Select load inertia based on motor inertia.
Setting Function
0 Less than 10 times motor inertia
1 10 times motor inertia
2-8 More than 10 times motor inertia
=Rated slip frequency

=Rated frequency
=Number of the rated motor rotations
=Number of motor poles
195
5.8 PID Control

Pid control is one of the most common auto-control methods. It uses a combination of
proportional, integral, and differential (PID) control that provides more effective control for
automated systems. The functions of PID control that can be applied to the inverter
operation are as follows:
Purpose Function
Speed control Controls speed by using feedback about the existing speed level
of the equipment or machinery to be controlled. Control
maintains consistent speed or operates at the target speed.
Pressure control Controls pressure by using feedback about the existing pressure
level of the equipment or machinery to be controlled. Control
maintains consistent pressure or operates at the target pressure.
Flow control Controls flow by using feedback about the amount of existing
flow in the equipment or machinery to be controlled. Control
maintains consistent flow or operates at a target flow.
Temperature control Controls temperature by using feedback about the existing
temperature level of the equipment or machinery to be
controlled. Control maintains a consistent temperature or
operates at a target termperature.
196
5.8.1 PID Basic Operation

PID operates by controlling the output frequency of the inverter, through automated
system process control to maintain speed, pressure, flow, temperature and tension.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Uni

Range t
AP 01 Application App Mode 2 Proc PID 0–2 -
function selection
16 PID output monitor PID Output - - -
17 PID reference PID Ref Value - - -
monitor
18 PID feedback PID Fdb Value - - -
monitor
19 PID reference PID Ref Set 50.00 -100.00- %
setting 100.00
20 PID reference PID Ref Source 0 Keypad 0-11 -
source
21 PID feedback PID F/B Source 0 V1 0-10 -
source
22 PID controller PID P-Gain 50.0 0.0-1000.0 %
proportional gain
23 PID controller PID I-Time 10.0 0.0-200.0 sec
integral time
24 PID controller PID D-Time 0 0-1000 mse
differential time c
25 PID controller feed- PID F-Gain 0.0 0-1000 %
forward
compensation gain
26 Proportional gain P Gain Scale 100.0 0.0-100.0 %
scale
27 PID output filter PID Out LPF 0 0-10000 ms
29 PID maximum PID Limit Hi 50.00 -300.00- Hz
frequency 300.00
30 PID minimum PID Limit Lo -50.00 -300.00- Hz
frequency 300.00
31 PID output reverse PID Out Inv 0 No 0-1 -
32 PID output scale PID Out Scale 100.0 0.1-1000.0 %
34 PID controller Pre-PID Freq 0.00 0–Maximum Hz
motion frequency frequency
35 PID controller Pre-PID Exit 0.0 0.0-100.0 %
motion level
36 PID controller Pre-PID Delay 600 0-9999 sec
motion delay time
197
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Uni

Range t
AP 37 PID sleep mode PID Sleep DT 60.0 0-999.9 sec
delay time
38 PID sleep mode PID Sleep Freq 0.00 0–Maximum Hz
frequency frequency
39 PID wake-up level PID WakeUp 35 0-100 %
Lev
40 PID wake-up mode PID WakeUp 0 Below Level 0-2 -
selection Mod
42 PID controller unit PID Unit Sel 0 % 0-12 -
selection
43 PID unit gain PID Unit Gain 100.0 0-300 %
44 PID unit scale PID Unit Scale 2 x1 0-4 -
45 PID 2nd PID P2-Gain 100.00 0-1000 %
proportional gain
In 65-71 Px terminal Px Define 22 I-Term Clear - -
in IP20 configuration (Px: P1-P7 in 23 PID Openloop
model IP20 models, 24 P Gain2
s, P1-P5 in IP66
65-69 models)
in IP66
model
s
PID Basic Operation Setting Details
Code Description
AP.01 App Mode Set the code to 2 (Proc PID) to select functions for the process PID.
AP.16 PID Output Displays the existing output value of the PID controller. The unit, gain, and
scale that were set at AP. 42-44 are applied on the display.
AP.17 PID Ref Value Displays the existing reference value set for the PID controller. The unit,
gain, and scale that were set at AP. 42-44 are applied on the display.
AP.18 PID Fdb Value Displays the input value of the PID controller that is included in the latest
feedback. The unit, gain, and scale that were set at AP. 42-44 are applied
on the display.
AP.19 PID Ref Set When AP.20 (PID control reference source) is set to 0 (Keypad), the
reference value can be entered. If the reference source is set to any other
value, the setting values for AP.19 are void.
198
Code Description
AP.20 PID Ref Source Selects the reference input for the PID control. If the V1 terminal is set to
PID feedback source (PID F/B Source), the V1 terminal cannot be set to the
PID reference source (PID Ref Source). To set V1 as a reference source,
change the feedback source.
Setting Function
0 Keypad Keypad
1 V1 -10-10V input voltage terminal
3 V2 I2 analog input terminal
4 I2 [When analog voltage/current input terminal selection
switch (SW2) at the terminal block is set to I (current),
input 4-20mA current. If it is set to V (voltage), input 0–
10V voltage]
5 Int. 485 RS-485 input terminal
7 FieldBus Communication command via a communication option
card
11 Pulse TI Pulse input terminal (0-32kHz Pulse input)
When using the keypad, the PID reference setting can be displayed at
AP.17. When using the LDC keypad, the PID reference setting can be
monitored from the config mode (CNF) -06-08, set to 17 (PID Ref Value).
AP.21 PID F/B Source Selects feedback input for PID control. Items can be selected as reference
input, except the keypad input (Keypad-1 and Keypad-2). Feedback
cannot be set to an input item that is identical to the item selected as the
reference. For example, when Ap.20 (Ref Source) is set to 1 (V1), for AP. 21
(PID F/B Source), an input other than the V1 terminal must be selected.
When using the LCD keypad, the volume of feedback can be monitored
using a code from the config mode (CNF) -06-08, by setting it to 18 (PID
Fbk Value).
AP.22 PID P-Gain, Sets the output ratio for differences (errors) between reference and
AP.26 P Gain Scale feedback. If the Pgain is set to 50%, then 50% of the error is output. The
setting range for Pgain is 0.0-1,000%. For ratios below 0.1%, use AP.26 (P
Gain Scale).
AP.23 PID I- Time Sets the time to output accumulated errors. When the error is 100%, the
time taken for 100% output is set. When the integral time (PID I-Time) is
set to 1 second, 100% output occurs after 1 second of the error remaining
at 100%. Differences in a normal state can be reduced by PID I Time. When
the multi-function terminal block is set to 21(I-Term Clear) and is turned
on, all of the accumulated errors are deleted.
AP.24 PID D-Time Sets the output volume for the rate of change in errors. If the differential
time (PID D-Time) is set to 1ms and the rate of change in errors per sec is
100%, output occurs at 1% per 10ms.
199
Code Description
AP.25 PID F-Gain Sets the ratio that adds the target to the PID output. Adjusting this value
leads to a faster response.
AP.27 PID Out LPF Used when the output of the PID controller changes too fast or the entire
system is unstable, due to severe oscillation. In general, a lower value
(default value=0) is used to speed up response time, but in some cases a
higher value increases stability. The higher the value, the more stable the
PID controller output is, but the slower the response time.
AP.29 PID Limit Hi, Limits the output of the controller.
AP.30 PID Limit Lo
AP.32 PID Out Scale Adjusts the volume of the controller output.
AP.42 PID Unit Sel Sets the unit of the control variable (available only on the LCD keypad).
Setting Function
0 % Displays a percentage without a physical quantity given.
1 Bar Various units of pressure can be selected.
2 mBar
3 Pa
4 kPa
5 Hz Displays the inverter output frequency or the motor
6 rpm rotation speed.
7 V
8 I
9 kW
10 HP
11 °C Displays in Celsius or Fahrenheit.
12 °F
AP.43 PID Unit Gain, Adjusts the size to fit the unit selected at AP.41 PID Unit Sel.
AP.44 PID Unit Scale
AP.45 PID P2-Gain The PID controller’s gain can be adjusted using the multi-function
terminal. When a terminal is selected from In.65-71 in IP20 models, In.65-
69 in IP66 models and set to 24 (P Gain2), and if the selected terminal is
entered, the gain set in AP.22 and AP.23 can be switched to the gain set in
AP.45.
200
[PID control block diagram]
Note
When the PID switch operation (switching from PID operation to general operation) enters the
multi-function input, [%] values are converted to [Hz] values. The normal PID output, PID OUT, is
unipolar, and is limited by AP.29 (PID Limit Hi) and AP.30 (PID Limit Lo). A calculation of 100.0% is
based on the dr.20 (Max Freq) parameter setting.
201
5.8.2 Pre-PID Operation

When an operation command is entered that does not include PID control, general
acceleration occurs until the set frequency is reached. When the controlled variables
increase to a particular point, the PID operation begins.
Pre-PID Operation Setting Details
Code Description
AP.34 Pre-PID Freq When general acceleration is required, the frequency up to general
acceleration is entered. If Pre-PID Freq is set to 30Hz, the general operation
continues until the control variable (PID feedback variable) set at AP. 35 is
exceeded.
AP.35 Pre-PID Exit, When the feedback variable of the PID controller is higher than the value
AP.36 Pre-PID set at AP. 35, the PID control operation begins. However, when a value is set
Delay for AP.36 (Pre-PID Delay) and a feedback variable less than the value set at
AP.35 is maintained for a set amount of time, the “pre-PID Fail” fault trip will
occur and the output will be blocked.
5.8.3 PID Operation Sleep Mode

If the operation continues at a frequency lower than the set condition for PID operation, the
PID operation sleep mode starts. When PID operation sleep mode starts, the operation will
stop until the feedback exceeds the parameter value set at AP.39 (PID WakeUp Lev).
202
PID Operation Sleep Mode Setting Details
Code Description
AP.37 PID Sleep DT, If an operation frequency lower than the value set at AP.38 is maintained
AP.38 PID Sleep Freq for the time set at AP.37, the operation stops and the PID operation sleep
mode starts.
AP.39 PID WakeUp Starts the PID operation when in PID operation sleep mode.
Lev, If AP. 40 is set to 0 (Below Level), the PID operation starts when the
AP.40 PID WakeUp feedback variable is less than the value set as the AP. 39 parameter
Mod setting. If AP. 40 is set to 1 (Above Level), the operation starts when the
feedback variable is higher than the value set at AP. 39. If AP. 40 is set to 2
(Beyond Level), the operation starts when the difference between the
reference value and the feedback variable is greater than the value set at
AP. 39.
5.8.4 PID Switching (PID Openloop)

When one of the multi-function terminals (In. 65-71) is set to 23 (PID Openloop) and is
turned on, the PID operation stops and is switched to general operation. When the terminal
turns off, the PID operation starts again.
203
5.9 Auto Tuning

The motor parameters can be measured automatically and can be used for auto torque
boost or sensorless vector control.
Example - Auto Tuning Based on 0.75 kW, 230 V Motor

Setting
dr 14 Motor capacity Motor 2 0.75 kW 0-16 -
Capacity
bA 11 Motor pole number Pole Number 4 2-48 -
12 Rated slip speed Rated Slip 40 0-3000 rpm
13 Rated motor Rated Curr 3.6 1.0-1000.0 A
current
14 Motor no-load Noload curr 1.6 0.5-1000.0 A
current
15 Motor rated voltage Rated Volt 230 0, 170-480 V
16 Motor efficiency Efficiency 72 64-100 %
20 Auto tuning Auto Tuning 0 None - -
21 Stator resistance Rs 2.60 Depends on the Ω
motor setting
22 Leakage Lsigma 17.94 Depends on the mH
inductance motor setting
23 Stator inductance Ls 174.4 Depends on the mH
motor setting
24 Rotor time constant Tr 145 25-5000 ms
204
Auto Tuning Default Parameter Setting
Motor Rated No-load Rated Slip Stator Leakage Stator

Capacity Current Current Frequency Resistance Inductance Inductance
( kW) (A) (A) (Hz) (Ω) (mH) (mH)
2S 0: 0.2
1: 0.4
1.1
2.4
0.8
1.4
3.33
3.33
14.0
6.70
40.4
26.9
385
206
2T 2: 0.75 3.4 1.7 3.00 2.60 17.94 174.4
3: 1.1 4.7 2.3 2.84 1.89 13.05 126.8
4: 1.5 6.4 2.6 2.67 1.17 9.29 115.8
5: 2.2 8.6 3.3 2.33 0.84 6.63 90.7
6: 3 8.6 3.3 2.33 0.84 6.63 90.7
7: 3.7 13.8 5.0 2.33 0.50 4.48 59.7
8: 4 14.9 5.4 2.15 0.463 4.14 55.2
9: 5.5 21.0 7.1 1.50 0.314 3.19 41.5
10: 7.5 28.2 9.3 1.33 0.169 2.844 31.86
11: 11 40.0 12.4 1.00 0.120 1.488 23.91
12: 15 53.6 15.5 1.00 0.084 1.118 19.07
13: 18.5 65.6 19.0 1.00 0.0676 0.819 15.59
4T 0: 0.2
1: 0.4
0.7
1.4
0.5
0.8
3.33
3.33
28.0
14.0
121.2
80.8
1045
610
2: 0.75 2.0 1.0 3.00 7.81 53.9 512
3: 1.1 2.8 1.4 2.84 5.68 39.2 372
4: 1.5 3.7 1.5 2.67 3.52 27.9 346
5: 2.2 5.0 1.9 2.33 2.520 19.95 269.5
6: 3 5.0 1.9 2.33 2.520 19.95 269.5
7: 3.7 8.0 2.9 2.33 1.500 13.45 177.8
8: 4 8.6 3.1 2.15 1.388 12.44 164.5
9: 5.5 12.1 4.1 1.50 0.940 9.62 124.5
10: 7.5 16.3 5.4 1.33 0.520 8.53 95.2
11: 11 23.2 7.2 1.00 0.360 4.48 71.2
12: 15 31.0 9.0 1.00 0.250 3.38 57
13: 18.5 38.0 11.0 1.00 0.168 2.457 46.47
14: 22 44.5 12.5 1.00 0.168 2.844 41.10
15: 30 60.5 16.9 1.00 0.126 2.133 30.23
16: 37 74.4 20.1 1.00 0.101 1.704 25.49
*When Dr.09 (Control Mode) is set to 6 (PM Sensorless), auto tuning will configure the rated
current and the stator resistor values by default.
205
Auto Tuning Parameter Setting Details
Code Description
Select an auto tuning type and run it. Select one of the options and then press the
[ENT] key to run the auto tuning.
Setting Function
0 None Auto tuning function is not enabled. Also, if you select one
of the auto tuning options and run it, the parameter value
will revert back to “0” when the auto tuning is complete.
1 All (rotating Measures all motor parameters, including stator resistance
type) (Rs), stator inductance (Lsigma), no-load current (Noload
Curr), rotor time constant (Tr), etc., while the motor is
rotating. As the motor is rotating while the parameters are
being measured, if the load is connected to the motor
spindle, the parameters may not be measured accurately.
For accurate measurements, remove the load attached to
the motor spindle.
However, note that the rotor time constant (Tr) must be
measured in a stopped position.
2 All (static Measures all parameters while the motor is in the stopped
type) position. Measures stator resistance (Rs), stator inductance
bA.20 Auto (Lsigma), no-load current (Noload Curr), rotor time
Tuning constant (Tr), etc., while the motor is in the stopped
position. As the motor is not rotating while the parameters
are measured, the measurements are not affected when
the load is connected to the motor spindle. However,
when measuring parameters, do not rotate the motor
spindle on the load side.
3 Rs+Lsigma Measures parameters while the motor is rotating. The
(rotating measured motor parameters are used for auto torque
type) boost or sensorless vector control.
6 Tr (static Measures the rotor time constant (Tr) with the motor in
type) the stopped position and Control Mode (dr.09) is set to IM
Sensorless.
7 All (PM) When dr.09 (Control Mode) is set to 6 (PM Sensorless), the
motor parameters are measured in the stopped position.
Check the motor’s rating plate for motor specifications, such as
the base frequency (dr.18), rated voltage (bA.15), pole number
(bA.11). Then, perform auto tuning by setting bA.20 to 7 [All
(PM)]. The auto tuning operation will configure the bA.21 (Rs),
bA.28 [Ld (PM)], bA.29 [Lq (PM)], and bA.30 (PM Flux Ref)
parameters.
206
Code Description
bA.14
Displays motor parameters measured by auto tuning. For parameters that are not
Noload
included in the auto tuning measurement list, the default setting will be
Curr, bA.21
displayed.
Rs–bA.24 Tr
• Perform auto tuning ONLY after the motor has completely stopped running.
• Before you run auto tuning, check the motor pole number, rated slip, rated current, rated
volage and efficiency on the motor’s rating plate and enter the data. The default parameter
setting is used for values that are not entered.
• When measuring all parameters after selecting 2 ( All - static type) at bA20: compared with
rotation type auto tuning where parameters are measured while the motor is rotating,
parameter values measured with static auto tuning may be less accurate. Inaccuracy of the
measured parameters may degrade the performance of sensorless operation. Therefore, run
static type auto tuning by selecting 2 (All) only when the motor cannot be rotated (when
gearing and belts cannot be separated easily, or when the motor cannot be separated
mechanically from the load).
• In PM synchronous motor sensorless control mode, check the motor’s rating plate and enter the
motor specifications, such as the base frequency, pole number, rated current and voltage, and
efficiency, before performing auto tuning and detecting other motor parameters by setting bA.20
(Auto Tuning) to 7 [All (PM)]. The detected parameter values may not be accurate if the motor’s base
specifications are not entered.
5.10 Sensorless Vector Control for Induction Motors

Sensorless vector control is an operation to carry out vector control without the rotation
speed feedback from the motor but with an estimation of the motor rotation speed
calculated by the inverter. Compared to V/F control, sensorless vector control can generate
greater torque at a lower level of current.

Setting Range
dr 09 Control mode Control Mode 4 IM Sensorless - -
14 Motor capacity Motor Depends on the 0-15 -
Capacity motor capacity
18 Base frequency Base Freq 50 30-400 Hz
207

Setting Range
bA 11 Motor pole number Pole Number 4 2-48 -
12 Rated slip speed Rated Slip Depends on the 0-3000 Hz
motor capacity
13 Rated motor current Rated Curr Depends on the 1-1000 A
motor capacity
14 Motor no-load current Noload curr Depends on the 0.5-1000 A
motor capacity
15 Rated motor voltage Rated Volt 220/380/440/480 0, 170-480 V
16 Motor efficiency Efficiency Depends on the 64-100 %
motor capacity
20 Auto tuning Auto Tuning 1 All - -
Cn 09 Pre-Excite time PreExTime 1.0 0.0-60.0 s
10 Pre-Excite amount Flux Force 100.0 100.0-300.0 %
20 Sensorless second gain SL2 G View Sel 1 Yes 0-1 -
display setting
21 Sensorless speed ASR-SL P Depends on the 0-5000 %
controller proportional Gain1 motor capacity
gain1
22 Sensorless speed ASR-SL I Gain1 Depends on the 10-9999 ms
controller integral gain motor capacity
1
23* Sensorless speed ASR-SL P Depends on the 1-1000 %
controller proportional Gain2 motor capacity
gain 2
24* Sensorless speed ASR-SL I Gain2 Depends on the 1-1000 %
controller integral gain motor capacity
2
26* Flux estimator Flux P Gain Depends on the 10-200 %
proportional gain motor capacity
27* Flux estimator integral Flux I Gain Depends on the 10-200 %
gain motor capacity
28* Speed estimator S-Est P Gain1 Depends on the 0-32767 -
proportional gain motor capacity
208
Group Code Name LCD Parameter Setting Unit

Cn 29* Speed estimator integral S-Est I Depends on the 100-1000 -
gain1 Gain1 motor capacity
30* Speed estimator integral S-Est I Depends on the 100-10000 -
gain2 Gain2 motor capacity
31* Sensorless current ACR SL P 75 10-1000 -
controller proportional Gain
gain
32* Sensorless current ACR SL I 120 10-1000 -
controller integral gain Gain
52 Torque controller output Torque 0 0-2000 ms
filter Out LPF
53 Torque limit setting Torque 0 Keypad-1 0-12 -
Lmt Src
54 Forward direction FWD +Trq 180.0 0.0-200.0 %
retrograde torque limit Lmt
55 Forward direction FWD -Trq 180.0 0.0-200.0 %
regenerative torque limit Lmt
56 Reverse direction REV +Trq 180.0 0.0-200.0 %
regenerative torque limit Lmt
57 Reverse direction REV -Trq 180.0 0.0-200.0 %
retrograde torque limit Lmt
85* Flux estimator Flux P 370 100-700 -
proportional gain 1 Gain1
88* Flux estimator integral Flux I 50 0-200 -
gain 1 Gain1
gain2 Gain2
gain 3 Gain3
91* Sensorless voltage SL Volt 30 0-60 -
compensation 1 Comp1
94* Sensorless field SL FW Freq 95.0 80.0-110.0 %
weakening start
frequency
209
Group Code Name LCD Parameter Setting Unit

95* Sensorless gain switching SL Fc Freq 2.00 0.00-8.00 Hz
frequency
*Cn.23-32 and Cn.85-95 can be displayed only when Cn.20 is set to 1 (Yes).
For high-performance operation, the parameters of the motor connected to the inverter output
must be measured. Use auto tuning (bA.20 Auto Tuning) to measure the parameters before you
run sensorless vector operation. To run high-performance sensorless vector control, the inverter
and the motor must have the same capacity. If the motor capacity is smaller than the inverter
capacity by more than two levels, control may be inaccurate. In that case, change the control
mode to V/F control. When operating with sensorless vector control, do not connect multiple
motors to the inverter output.
5.10.1 Sensorless Vector Control Operation Setting for Induction

Motors
To run sensorless vector control operation, set dr.09 (Control Mode) to 4 (IM sensorless),
select the capacity of the motor you will use at dr.14 (Motor Capacity), and select the
appropriate codes to enter the rating plate information of the motor.
Code Input (Motor Rating Plate Information)

drv.18 Base Freq Base frequency
bA.11 Pole Number Motor pole number
bA.12 Rated Slip Rated slip
bA.13 Rated Curr Rated current
bA.15 Rated Volt Rated voltage
bA.16 Efficiency Efficiency (when no information is on the rating plate, default values are
used.)
After setting each code, set bA.20 (Auto tuning) to 1 (All - rotation type) or 2 (All - static
type) and run auto tuning. Because rotation type auto tuning is more accurate than static
type auto tuning, select 1 (All - rotation type) and run auto tuning if you can rotate the
motor.
Note
Excitation Current
A motor can be operated only after magnetic flux is generated by current flowing through a coil.
The power supply used to generate the magnetic flux is called the excitation current. The stator
coil that is used with the inverter does not have a permanent magnetic flux, so the magnetic
flux must be generated by supplying an excitation current to the coil before operating the
motor.
210
Sensorless Vector Control Operation Setting Details for Induction Motors
Code Description
Cn.20 SL2 G View Sel Setting Function
0 No Does not display sensorless (II) vector control gain code.
1 Yes Allows the user to set various gains applied when the
motor rotates faster than medium speed (approx. 1/2 of
the base frequency) through sensorless (II) vector
control.
Codes available when setting to 1 (Yes): Cn.23 ASR-SL P Gain2/Cn.24
ASR-SL I Gain2/Cn.26 Flux P Gain/Cn.27 Flux I Gain Gain3/Cn.28 S-Est P
Gain1/Cn.29 S-Est I Gain1/Cn.30 S-Est I Gain1/Cn.31 ACR SL P Gain/Cn.32
ACR SL I Gain
Cn.09 PreExTime Sets pre-excitation time. Pre-excitation is used to start the operation
after performing excitation up to the motor’s rated flux.
Cn.10 Flux Force Allows for the reduction of the pre-excitation time. The motor flux
increases up to the rated flux with the time constant as shown in the
following figure. To reduce the time taken to reach the rated flux, a
higher motor flux base value than the rated flux must be provided.
When the magnetic flux reaches the rated flux, the provided motor flux
base value is reduced.
Cn.11 Hold Time Sets the zero-speed control time (hold time) in the stopped position.
The output is blocked after zero-speed operation for a set period when
the motor decelerates and is stopped by a stop command.
211
Code Description
Cn.21 ASR-SL P Gain1, Changes the speed PI controller gain during sensorless vector control.
Cn.22 ASR-SL I Gain1 For a PI speed controller, P gain is a proportional gain for the speed
deviation. If speed deviation becomes higher than the torque the
output command increases accordingly. As the value increases, the
faster the speed deviation decreases. The speed controller I gain is the
integral gain for speed deviation. It is the time taken for the gain to
reach the rated torque output command while a constant speed
deviation continues. The lower the value becomes, the faster the speed
deviation decreases.
Cn.23 ASR-SL P Gain2, Appears only when 1 (Yes) is selected for Cn.20 (SL2 G view Sel). The
Cn.24 ASR-SL I Gain2 speed controller gain can be increased to more than the medium speed
for sensorless vector control. Cn.23 ASR-SL P Gain2 is set as a percentage
of the low speed gain Cn.21 ASR-SL P Gain1 - if P Gain 2 is less than
100.0%, the responsiveness decreases. For example, if Cn.21 ASR-SL P
Gain1 is 50.0% and Cn.23 ASR-SL P Gain2 is 50.0%, the actual middle
speed or faster speed controller P gain is 25.0%.
Cn.24 ASR-SL I Gain2 is also set as a percentage of the Cn.22 ASR-SL I

Gain1. For I gain, the smaller the I gain 2 becomes, the slower the
response time becomes. For example, if Cn.22 ASR-SL I Gain1 is 100ms
and Cn.24 ASR-SL I Gain2 is 50.0%, the middle speed or faster speed
controller I gain is 200 ms. The controller gain is set according to the
default motor parameters and Acc/Dec time.
Cn.26 Flux P Gain, Sensorless vector control requires the rotor flux estimator. For the
Cn.27 Flux I Gain, adjustment of flux estimator gain, refer to 5.10.2 Sensorless Vector
Cn.85-87 Flux P Control Operation on page 214.
Gain13,
Cn.88-90 Flux I Gain1-
3
Cn.28 S-Est P Gain1, Speed estimator gain for sensorless vector control can be adjusted. To
Cn.29 S-Est I Gain1, adjust speed estimator gain, refer 5.10.2 Sensorless Vector Control
Cn.30 S-Est I Gain2 Operation on page 214.
Cn.31 ACR SL P Gain, Adjusts the P and I gains of the sensorless current controller. For the
Cn.32 ACR SL I Gain adjustment of sensorless current controller gain, refer to 5.10.2
Sensorless Vector Control Operation on page 214.
212
Code Description
Cn.53 Torque Lmt Src Select a type of torque limit setting, using the keypad, terminal block
analog input (V1 and I2) or communication power. When setting torque
limit, adjust the torque size by limiting the speed controller output. Set
the retrograde and regenerative limits for forward and reverse
operation.
Setting Function
0 KeyPad-1 Sets the torque limit with the keypad.
1 KeyPad-2
2 V1 Sets the torque limit with the analog input
4 V2 terminal of the terminal block.
5 I2
6 Int 485 Sets the torque limit with the communication
terminal of the terminal block.
8 FieldBus Sets the torque limit with the FieldBus
communication option.
12 Pulse Sets the torque limit with the pulse input of the
terminal block.
The torque limit can be set up to 200% of the rated motor torque.
Cn.54 FWD +Trq Lmt Sets the torque limit for forward retrograde (motoring) operation.
Cn.55 FWD –Trq Lmt Sets the torque limit for forward regenerative operation.
Cn.56 REV +Trq Lmt Sets the torque limit for reverse regenerative operation.
Cn.57 REV –Trq Lmt Sets the torque limit for reverse retrograde (motoring) operation.
In.02 Torque at 100% Sets the maximum torque. For example, if In.02 is set to 200% and an
input voltage (V1) is used, the torque limit is 200% when 10V is entered.
However, when the VI terminal is set up with the factory default setting
and the torque limit setup uses a method other than the keypad, check
the parameter settings in the monitor mode. In the Config Mode
CNF.21-23 (only displayed when using LCD keypad), select 21(Torque
limit).
Cn.91-93 Adjust output voltage compensation values for sensorless vector
SL Volt Comp1-3 control. For output voltage compensation, refer to 5.10.2 Sensorless
Vector Control Operation to on page 214.
Cn.52 Torque Out LPF Sets the time constant for torque command by setting the torque
controller output filter.
Adjust the controller gain according to the load’s characteristics. However, the motor can
overheat or the system may become unstable depending on the controller gain settings.
213
Note
Speed controller gain can improve the speed control waveform while monitoring the changes in
speed. If speed deviation does not decrease quickly, increase the speed controller P gain or
decrease I gain (time in ms). However, if the P gain is increased too high or I gain is decreased
too low, severe vibration may occur. If oscillation occurs in the speed waveform, try to increase I
gain (ms) or reduce P gain to adjust the waveform.
5.10.2 Sensorless Vector Control Operation Guide for Induction

Motors
Relevant function
Problem Troubleshooting
code
Set the value of Cn. 90 to be more than 3
times the value of bA.24 or increase the
bA.24 Tr value of Cn.10 by increments of 50%. If the
Cn.09 PreExTime value of Cn.10 is high, an overcurrent trip at
The amount of starting Cn.10 Flux Force start can occur. In this case, reduce the value
torque is insufficient. Cn.31 ACR SL P Gain of Cn.31 by decrements of 10.
Cn.54–57 Trq Lmt Increase the value of Trg Lmt (Cn.54-57) by
Cn.93 SL Volt Comp3 increments of 10%.
Increase the value of Cn.93 by increments of
5
The output frequency is
higher than the base
Decrease the value of Cn.91 by decrements
frequency during no-load Cn.91 SL Volt Comp1
of 5.
operation at low speed
(10Hz or lower).
If the motor hunts at low speed, increase the
value of Cn.22 by increments of 50m/s, and if
hunting does not occur, increase the value of
Cn.21 to find the optimal operating
The motor hunts* or the
Cn.04 Carrier Freq condition.
amount of torque is not
Cn.21 ASR-SL P Gain1 If the amount of torque is insufficient,
sufficient while the load is
Cn.22 ASR-SL I Gain1 increase the value of Cn.93 by increments of
increasing at low speed
Cn.93 SL Volt Comp3 5.
(10Hz or lower).
If the motor hunts or the amount of torque is
insufficient in the 5-10Hz range, decrease the
value of Cn.04 by increments of 1kHz (if
Cn.04 is set to exceed 3kHz).
214
Relevant function
code
The motor hunts or
overcurrent trip occurs in Cn.92 SL Volt Comp2 Increase the value of Cn.92-93 by increments
regenerative load at low Cn.93 SL Volt Comp3 of 5 at the same time.
speed (10 Hz or lower).
Over voltage trip occurs
due to sudden
acceleration/deceleration
Decrease the value of Cn.2 by decrements of
or sudden load fluctuation Cn.24 ASR-SL I Gain2
5%.
(with no brake resistor
installed) at mid speed
(30Hz or higher).
Decrease the value of Cn.54-57 by
Over current trip occurs decrements of 10% (if the parameter setting
due to sudden load Cn.54–57 Trq Lmt is 150% or higher).
fluctuation at high speed Cn.94 SL FW Freq Increase/decrease the value of Cn.94 by
(50 Hz or higher). increments/decrements of 5% (set below
100%).
The motor hunts when the Increase the value of Cn.22 by increments of
Cn.22 ASR-SL I Gain1
load increases from the 50m/s or decrease the value of Cn.24 by
Cn.23 ASR-SL I Gain2
base frequency or higher. decrements of 5%.
At low speed (10Hz or lower), increase the
value of Cn.29 by increments of 5.
The motor hunts as the Cn.28 S-Est P Gain1 At mid speed (30 Hz or higher), increase the
load increases. Cn.29 S-Est I Gain1 value of Cn.28 by increments of 500. If the
parameter setting is too extreme, over
current trip may occur at low speed.
The motor speed level Select 6. Tr (static type) from bA. 24 and run
bA.20 Auto Tuning
decreases. bA.24 Rotor time constant tuning.
*Hunting: Symptom of irregular vibration of the equipment.
215
5.11 Sensorless Vector Control for PM

(Permanent-Magnet) Syn Motors
Sensorless vector control is an operation that carries out vector control without rotation
speed feedback from the motor but, instead, with an estimation of the motor rotation
speed calculated by the inverter.
09 Control mode Control Mode 6 PM Sensorless - -
Motor Depends on the
14 Motor capacity 0–15 -
Capacity motor capacity
dr Depends on the PM
18 Base frequency Base Freq 30–180 Hz
motor capacity
Depends on the PM
20 Maximum frequency Max Freq 40–180 Hz
motor capacity
11 Motor pole number Pole Number 4 2–48 -
Depends on the
13 Rated motor current Rated Curr 1–1000 A
motor capacity
15 Motor-rated voltage Rated Volt 220/380/440/480 170–480 V
Depends on the
16 Motor efficiency Efficiency 64–100 %
motor capacity
19 Motor input voltage AC Input Volt 230/400 170–480
bA 20 Auto tuning Auto Tuning 7 All (PM) -
Q-axis inductance
32 Lq (PM) Scale 100% 50–150 %
scale
Auto tuning level for Ld,Lq Tune
34 33.3% 20.0–50.0 %
Ld and Lq Lev
Auto tuning
35 frequency for Ld and Ld,Lq Tune Hz 100.0% 80.0–150.0 %
Lq
PM speed controller
12 P gain 1 ASR P Gain 1 100 0–5000 -
PM speed controller
13 I gain 1 ASR I Gain 1 150 0–5000 -
PM speed controller
15 P gain 2 ASR P Gain 2 100 0–5000 -
Cn
PM speed controller
16 I gain 2 ASR I Gain 2 150 0–9999 -
PM D-axis back-EMF PM EdGain
33 100.0 0–300.0 %
estimated gain (%) Perc
34 PM Q-axis back-EMF PM EqGain 100.0 0–300.0 %
216
estimated gain (%) Perc
Initial pole position PD Repeat
35 2 0–10 -
estimation retry Num
Initial pole position
36 Pulse Interval 20 1–100 ms
estimation interval
37 estimation pulse Pulse Curr % 15 10–100 %
current (%)
38 estimation pulse Pulse Volt % 500 100–4000 -
voltage (%)
PM dead-time range PMdeadBand
39 100.0 50.0–200.0 %
(%) Per
PM dead-time PMdeadVolt
40 100.0 50.0–200.0 %
voltage (%) Per
PM speed estimator
41 PM SpdEst Kp 100 0–32000 -
proportional gain
PM speed estimator
42 PM SpdEst Ki 10 0–32000 -
integral gain
PM speed estimator PM SpdEst Kp
43 300 0–32000 -
proportional gain 2 2
PM speed estimator PM SpdEst Ki
44 30 0–32000 -
integral gain 2 2
Speed estimator
45 feedforward high PM Flux FF % 300 0–1000 %
speed range (%)
46 Init Angle Sel 1: Angle Detect 0–2 0–2
estimation type
Current controller P
48 ACR P Gain 1200 0–10000 -
gain
Current controller I
49 ACR I Gain 120 0–10000 -
gain
Voltage controller
50 V Con HR 10.0% 0–1000 %
limit
Voltage controller I
51 V Con Ki 10.0% 0–20000 %
gain
Torque controller Torque Out
52 0 0–2000 msec
output filter LPF
Torque Lmt
53 Torque limit source 0 Keypad-1 0–12
Src
FWD reverse torque
54 FWD +Trq Lmt 180.0 0.0–200.0 %
limit
FWD regenerative
55 FWD -Trq Lmt 180.0 0.0–200.0 %
torque limit
217
REV regenerative
56 REV +Trq Lmt 180.0 0.0–200.0 %
torque limit
REV reverse torque
57 REV -Trq Lmt 180.0 0.0–200.0 %
limit
For high-performance operation, the parameter values of the motor connected to the inverter
output must be estimated. Configure the motor-related Basic function group parameters by
entering the motor specification values on the rating plate. Then, perform auto tuning by
setting bA. 20 (Auto Tuning) to 7 [All (PM)] to automatically measure other parameters before
operating a PM synchronous motor in sensorless vector control mode. For high-performance
PM sensorless vector control, the inverter and the motor must have the same capacity. The
inverter control may be inaccurate if the motor capacity and the inverter capacity do not match.
In sensorless vector control mode, do not connect multiple motors to the inverter output.
5.11.1 Detecting the Initial Pole Position

Initial pole position detection is a process to match the rotor position calculated by the
inverter and the actual rotor position in a motor. In a permanent-magnet (PM) synchronous
motor, rotor flux is generated from the permanent magnet attached to the rotor. Therefore,
to run the motor in vector control mode, the exact rotor position (flux position) must be
detected for accurate control of the torque generated by the motor.
At Cn. 46 (InitAngle Sel), select the type of initial pole position detection.
When Cn. 46 is set to 0 (None), the motor is operated according to the pole position
estimated by the inverter’s internal algorithm, instead of actually detecting the physical
position of the rotor pole.
When Cn. 46 is set to 1 (Angle Detect), the motor is operated according to the pole position
detected by changes in the current. The voltage pulse input is used to detect the pole
position and results in a small amount of noise at motor startup.
When Cn. 46 is set to 2 (Alignment), the inverter forcefully align the rotor position by
supplying DC current for a certain period of time.
218
Group Code Name LCD display Setting Setting range Unit

Pole position detection PD Repeat
35 1 0–10 -
retry count Num
Pole position detection
36 Pulse Interval 20 1–100 Ms
interval
37 Pulse Curr % 15 10–100 %
pulse current (%)
Cn
38 Pulse Volt % 500 100–4000 -
pulse voltage (%)
0 None
Pole position detection Angle
46 Init Angle Sel 1 0–2 -
type Detect
2 Alignment
5.11.2 Sensorless Vector Control Mode Settings for PM Synchronous

Motors
To operate a PM synchronous motor in sensorless vector control mode, set dr.09 (Control
Mode) to 6 (PM Sensorless), select the motor capacity at dr.14 (Motor Capacity), and enter
the appropriate codes in the Basic (bA) group with the motor specification values found on
the motor’s rating plate. If a specific motor capacity does not exist in the setting options,
select a higher motor capacity that is closest to the actual motor capacity.
Code Input Values (Motor’s Rating Plate Information)

dr.18 Base Freq Base frequency
dr.20 Max Freq Maximum frequency
bA.11 Pole Number Motor pole number
bA.13 Rated Curr Rated current
bA.15 Rated Volt Rate voltage
bA.16 Efficiency Efficiency
bA.19 AC Input Volt Input power voltage
After entering the codes, set bA.20 (Auto tuning) to 7 [All(PM)] and perform a static auto
tuning operation. When auto tuning is complete, the bA.21 (Rs), bA.28 Ld (PM), bA. 29 Lq
(PM), and bA. 30 (PM Flux Ref) parameters are automatically measured and saved.
219
Sensorless Vector Control Operation Setting Details
Code Description
Sets the PWM interrupter cycle and sampling frequency cycle for a PM
synchronous motor operation in sensorless vector control mode. The
Cn.4 Carrier Freq
default carrier frequency is set at 5 kHz, and the setting range is 2–10
kHz.
Sets the zero-speed control time (hold time) in the stopped
position. The output is blocked after zero-speed operation for a set
period when the motor decelerates and is stopped by a stop
command.
Cn.11 Hold Time
Changes the speed PI controller gain during a PM synchronous

motor operation in sensorless vector control mode. For a PI speed
controller, P gain is a proportional gain for the speed deviation. If
the speed deviation becomes greater than the torque, the output
command will increase accordingly. The higher the value becomes,
the faster the speed deviation will decrease.
Cn.12 ASR P Gain1,
Cn.13 ASR I Gain1 The speed controller I gain is the integral gain for speed deviation.
Cn.15 ASR P Gain2 It is the time taken for the gain to reach the rated torque output
Cn.16 ASR I Gain2 command while constant speed deviation continues. The lower
the value becomes, the faster the speed deviation will decrease.
As the motor inertia varies by motor, the gain values should be

changed according to the motor speeds. Cn.12 and Cn. 13 set the low
speed P/I controller gain values, while Cn.15 and Cn.16 set the high
speed P/I controller gain values, so that an appropriate gain value can
be used for different motor speeds.
220
Code Description
To ensure that the back-EMF with rotor position information can be
appropriately estimated during a PM synchronous motor operation in
sensorless vector control mode, set these values as a percentage of
the proportional gain, which is designed to have stable estimator
Cn.33 PM EdGain Perc,
polarity.
Cn.34 PM EqGain Perc
Higher values result in faster responses, with higher chances of
increased motor vibration.
Excessively low values may result in motor startup failure due to slow
response rate.
Set these parameters to change the speed estimator gain during a PM
synchronous motor operation in sensorless vector control mode.
If fault trips occur or excessive oscillation is observed at low speeds,
decrease the value at Cn.41 in 10% decrements until the motor
operates stably.
If ripples occur during normal operation, increase the value at Cn. 42.
In addition to this, the values at Cn.43 and Cn.44 are used in 2S/T
Sinus H models only, according to the following pictures.
Cn.41 PM SpdEst Kp,

Cn.42 PM SpdEst Ki
Cn.43 PM SpdEst Kp2
Cn.44 PM SpdEst Ki2
221
Code Description
Sets the output compensation values during a PM synchronous
motor operation in sensorless vector control mode.
Cn.39 PMdeadBand Per If the motor fails to operate at low speeds at or below 5% of the rated
Cn.40PMdeadVolt Per motor speed, increase the values set at Cn.39 and Cn.40 by 10%
increments. Decrease the values in 10% decrements if a clanking
noise occurs at motor startup and motor stop.
Sets the high-speed portion of the feed forward rate against the back-
EMF during a PM synchronous motor operation in sensorless vector
control mode. Feed forwarding enhances operation of the speed
Cn.45 PM Flux FF % estimator.
Increase the value at Cn.45 in 10% increments to suppress motor
oscillation under load. A fault trip may occur if this value is set too
high.
Sets the gain values for the PI current controller in a synchronous
motor.
The P gain is the proportional gain for the current deviation. The
current deviation decreases faster with higher values, as the deviation
Cn.48 ACR P-Gain in voltage output command increases with increased deviation.
Cn.49 ACR I-Gain The I gain is the integral gain for the current deviation. Deviation in
normal operation decreases with higher values.
However, the gain values are limited by the carrier frequency. A fault
trip may occur due to interference if you set the gain values too high.
Select a source for torque limit input: Keypad, terminal block analog
input (V1 and I2), or input via network communication.
The torque limit value is used to adjust the torque reference size by
limiting the speed controller output. The reverse and regenerative
torque limits may be set for operations in the forward or reverse
direction.
Setting Function
0 KeyPad-1 Sets the torque limit via the keypad.
1 KeyPad-2
2 V1 Sets the torque limit via the analog input
Cn.53 Torque Lmt Src 4 V2 terminals of the terminal block.
5 I2
6 Int 485 Sets the torque limit via the communication
8 FieldBus Sets the torque limit with the FieldBus
communication option.
9 UserSeqLink Sets the torque limit with a user sequence
output. The torque reference is received via
the common area addresses.
12 Pulse Sets the torque limit with the pulse input of
the terminal block.
The torque limit can be set up to 200% of the rated motor torque.
222
Code Description
Cn.54 FWD +Trq Lmt Sets the reverse torque limit for forward operation.
Cn.55 FWD –Trq Lmt Sets the regenerative torque limit for forward operation.
Cn.56 REV +Trq Lmt Sets the regenerative torque limit for reverse operation.
Cn.57 REV –Trq Lmt Sets the reverse torque limit for reverse operation.
Sets the maximum torque. For example, if In.02 is set to 200% and
an input voltage (V1) is used, the torque limit will be 200% when
10 V is entered. However, when the V1 terminal is set to the factory
In.02 Torque at 100% default setting and the torque limit input source is any device
other than the keypad, check the parameter settings in Monitor
mode. Set CnF.21–23 (only displayed when an LCD keypad is used)
to 21 (Torque limit).
Sets the time constant for torque command by setting the torque
Cn.52 Torque Out LPF controller output filter.
Adjust the controller gain according to the load’s characteristics. However, the motor can
overheat or the system can become unstable depending on the controller gain settings.
Note
Speed controller gain can improve the speed control waveform while monitoring the changes
in speed. If the speed deviation does not decrease fast enough, increase the speed controller P
gain or decrease I gain (time in ms). However, if the P gain value is increased too much or the I
gain value is decreased too much, severe vibrations may occur. If oscillation occurs in the speed
waveform, try to increase the I gain (ms) or reduce the P gain to adjust the waveform.
223
5.11.3 Guidelines for Running a PM Synchronous Motor in

Sensorless Vector Control Mode
Relevant function
code
If an overcurrent trip occurs at startup, try
Cn.48 ACR P-Gain decreasing the value at Cn.48 in 10%
Cn.39 PMdeadBand decrements.
Starting torque is insufficient. Per
Cn.40 PMdeadVolt Try increasing the value at Cn.39 or Cn.40
Per in 10% increments.
The motor hunts* when Cn.40 PMdeadVolt Try decreasing the value at Cn.40 in 10%
starting up. Per decrements.
The motor hunts with

Cn.40 PMdeadVolt
regenerative load at low speed Try increasing the value at Cn.40 in 10%
Per
(10Hz or lower), or an “OCT” increments.
fault trip occurs.
If the motor hunts at low speeds, try
increasing the value at Cn.13 in 50 msec
increments. If the motor does not hunt,
The motor hunts or the try increasing the value at Cn.12 in 10%
Cn.04 Carrier Freq
torque is not sufficient while increments until the motor runs in an
Cn.12 ASR P Gain 1
the load is increasing at low optimal operation condition.
Cn.13 ASR I Gain 1
speed (10Hz or lower). If the motor hunts and the torque is not
sufficient at 5–10Hz speed range, and if
the carrier frequency at Cn.04 is set to
more than 3 kHz, try decreasing the value
in 1 kHz decrements.
The motor hunts excessively Cn.12 ASR P Gain 1
during no-load operation when Cn.13 ASR I Gain 1 Try decreasing the speed controller gains
rated current is supplied to the Cn.15 ASR P Gain 2 at Cn. 12–16 in 30% decrements.
motor. Cn.16 ASR I Gain 2
Refer to the motor’s rating plate and set
the pole number at bA.11 (Pole Number),
or enter a calculated pole number: Pole
The value at bA.30 (PM Flux
Number = (120 x BaseFreq/BaseRPM)
Ref) becomes “0” after bA.11 Pole Number
performing an auto tuning bA.15 Rated Volt
Refer to the motor’s rating plate and set
operation by setting bA. 20 to 7 dr.18 Base Freq
the rated voltage and base frequency at
[All (PM)].
bA-15 (Rated Volt) and dr.18 (Base Freq),
and then run auto tuning again by setting
bA-20 (Auto Tuning) to 7 [All (PM)].
224
Relevant function
code
bA.21 Rs Motor operation may fail if a static PM
Fault trips occur after a static bA.28 Ld (PM) auto tuning result is not accurate. Refer to
auto tuning. bA.29 Lq (PM) the motor’s rating plate and set the
bA.30 PM Flux Ref motor-related parameters again.
“OVT” occurs due to abrupt
acceleration, deceleration, or
Try decreasing the value at Cn.16 in 5%
massive load change while the Cn.16 ASR I Gain 2
decrements.
motor is operated at mid-
speed (above 30Hz).
If the motor is operated at the rated
speed, try decreasing the value at Cn.50
Speed variation occurs during
Cn.45 PM Flux FF % in 5% increments.
an operation at rated motor
Cn.50 V Con HR If the motor response is slow, try
speed, or during an overloaded
Cn.51 V Con Ki increasing the value at Cn.51 in 5%
high speed operation.
increments (or, try increasing the value at
Cn.45 in 100% increments).
Try increasing the value at Cn. 41 in
increments of 10 and the value at Cn.42 in
“OC1” fault trip or jerking Cn.41 PM SpdEst increments of 1.
occurs during a high speed Kp
operation. Cn.42 PM SpdEst Ki Note that a fault trip may occur if the
values at Cn. 41 and Cn.42 are set too
high.
Try increasing the value at Cn.13 (low
Jerking occurs during a low
Cn.13 ASR I Gain 1 speed range speed controller I gain) to
speed operation.
eliminate jerking.
Cn.12 ASR P Gain 1 Try increasing the values at Cn.12 and
A “clanking” noise is heard at
Cn.13 ASR I Gain 1 Cn.13 in 10% increments, or try
the beginning of startup or
Cn.40 PMdeadVolt decreasing the value at Cn.40 in 10%
during deceleration.
Per decrements.
Try increasing the value at Cn.50 in 1%
The motor cannot reach the
increments if the motor cannot reach the
speed reference when it is
Cn.50 V Con HR speed reference.
operated at or above the rated
Cn.51 V Con Ki Try increasing the value at Cn.51 in 10%
speed, or when the
increments if the motor acceleration is
acceleration is not responsive.
not responsive.
“OC1” trip occurs after an
Cn.12 ASR P Gain 1 Try decreasing the values at Cn.12 and
abrupt regenerative load (over
Cn.13 ASR I Gain 1 Cn.13 in 10% decrements.
100%).
Try increasing the speed estimator
The motor jerks during
Cn.42 PM SpdEst Ki proportional gain at Cn.42 in increments
acceleration.
of 5.
225
Relevant function
code
A massive current rises when
Try increasing the value at Cn. 13 in 10%
the motor is stopped during a Cn.13 ASR I Gain 1
increments.
20:1 speed startup.
An oscillation occurs when an
Cn.41 PM SpdEst
abrupt load is applied to the Try increasing the values at Cn. 41 and
Kp
motor during a low speed Cn.42 in 10% increments.
Cn.42 PM SpdEst Ki
operation.
During a PM speed search, the
speed search stops at around
20% of the base frequency, and Try decreasing the value at Cn.69 in 5%
Cn.69 SS Pulse Curr
the motor is stopped and starts decrements.
again after a massive current
rises.
During a high-speed operation
in PM control mode utilizing Cn.78 KEB Start Lev
the kinetic energy buffering, a Cn.79 KEB Stop Lev Try increasing the values at Cn.78 and
massive current rises at around Cn.80 KEB P Gain Cn.79 in 5% increments, or try doubling
20% of the base frequency, the Cn.81 KEB I Gain the gain values at Cn.80 and Cn. 81.
motor is stopped, and it fails to
start.
1. When the motor is
overloaded, the maximum
torque limit current is supplied
to the motor at startup, and the This happens when the Lq parameter
motor fails to operate due to value is decreasing due to certain causes,
an inverter overload fault trip. such as self-saturation.
bA.29 Lq (PM)
2. Speed search fails when the
a load exceeding the rated load Try increasing the value (100%) at bA.32
is applied to the motor at each in 5% increments.
speed section, or a current
equal to or exceeding 150% of
the rated current is supplied to
the motor.
During a PM synchronous motor
operation in sensorless vector mode, the
A fault trip occurs when the motor starts up after the initial pole
Cn.71 Speed
motor tries to start up or position detection is made.
Search
accelerate from a free run at To accelerate the motor in a free-run
certain speed range. state, enable speed search at acceleration
by setting bit 0 (0001) at Cn.71 (Speed
Search).
226
Relevant function
code
During a low speed operation, The motor control may become unstable
the output speed search due to input voltage deviation during a
Cn.13 ASR I Gain 1
becomes unstable when a low-speed operation with low voltage
Cn.40 PMdeadVolt
massive load exceeding the input.
Per
rated load is abruptly applied Try decreasing the values at Cn.31 and
to the motor. Cn.40 in 10% decrements.
*Hunting: Symptom of irregular vibration of the equipment.
5.12 Kinetic Energy Buffering Operation

When the input power supply is disconnected, the inverter’s DC link voltage decreases, and
a low voltage trip occurs blocking the output. A kinetic energy buffering operation uses
regenerative energy generated by the motor during the blackout to maintain the DC link
voltage. This extends the time for a low voltage trip to occur, after an instantaneous power
interruption.

e Setting Range
Kinetic energy buffering
77 KEB Select 1 Yes - -
selection
78 KEB Start Lev 130 110–140 %
start level
Cn
79 KEB Stop Lev 135 125–145 %
stop level
80 KEB Gain 1000 1–20000 -
gain
227
Kinetic Energy Buffering Operation Setting Details
Code Description
Select the kinetic energy buffering operation when the input power is
disconnected.
Setting Function
Cn.77 KEB Select 0 No General deceleration is carried out until a low voltage trip
occurs.
1 Yes The inverter power frequency is controlled and the
regeneration energy from the motor is charged by the
inverter.
Sets the start and stop points of the kinetic energy buffering operation.
Cn.78 KEB Start Lev,
The set values must be based on the low voltage trip level as 100% and
Cn.79 KEB Stop Lev
the stop level (Cn. 79) must be set higher than the start level (Cn.78).
This is the gain used to control the kinetic energy buffering operation
using the amount of load-side inertia moment. If the load inertia is high,
use a lower gain value, and if the load inertia is low, use a higher gain
value.
Cn.80 KEB Gain If input power is disconnected and the motor vibrates severely while the
kinetic energy buffering operation is carried out, set the gain (Cn.80: KEB
Gain) at half the previously set value. If the gain is lowered too much, a
low voltage trip may occur during the kinetic energy buffering operation
(KEB).
Depending on the duration of Instantaneous power interruptions and the amount of load
inertia, a low voltage trip may occur even during a kinetic energy buffering operation. Motors
may vibrate during kinetic energy buffering operation for some loads except variable torque
load (for example, fan or pump loads).
5.13 Torque Control

When the motor output torque is greater than the load, the speed of motor becomes too
fast. To prevent this, set the speed limit. (The torque control function cannot be used while
the speed limit function is running.)
The torque control function controls the motor to maintain the preset torque value. The
motor rotation speed maintains the speed constantly when the output torque and load
torque of the motor keep a balance. Therefore, the motor rotation speed is decided by the
load when controlling the torque.
228
Torque control setting option
09 Control mode Control Mode 4 IM Sensorless -
dr
10 Torque control Torque Control 1 Yes -
Torque control setting option details

Group Code Name Parameter Setting Unit
02 Cmd Torque - 0.0 %
08 Trq Ref Src 0 Keypad-1 -
09 Control Mode 4 IM Sensorless -
dr
10 Torque Control 1 Yes -
22 (+) Trq Gain - 50-150 %
23 (-) Trq Gain - 50-150 %
bA 20 Auto Tuning 1 Yes -
62 Speed LmtSrc 0 Keypad-1 -
63 FWD Speed Lmt - 60.00 Hz
Cn
64 REV Speed Lmt - 60.00 Hz
65 Speed Lmt Gain - 100 %
In 65-71 Px Define 35 Speed/Torque -
31-33 Relay x or Q1 27 Torque Dect -
OU 59 TD Level - 100 %
60 TD Band - 5.0 %
Note
• To operate in torque control mode, basic operation conditions must be set. For more
information, refer to 5.10.2 Sensorless Vector Control Operation on page 214.
• The torque control cannot be used in a low speed regeneration area or low load conditions.
• If you change the rotation direction while operating, an over current trip or low speed
reverse direction error will be generated.
229
Torque reference setting option

The torque reference can be set using the same method as the target frequency setting. If
Torque Control Mode is selected, the target frequency is not used.
Grou Cod
Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
p e
0 Keypad-1
1 Keypad-2
dr 08 Torque reference setting Trq Ref Src -
2 V1
6 Int 485
02 Torque command Cmd Torque -180-180 %
0 Keypad-1
1 Keypad-2
2 V1
62 Speed limit setting Speed LmtSrc -
4 V2
Cn 5 I2
6 Int 485
Positive-direction speed
63 FWD Speed Lmt 0-Maximum frequency Hz
limit
Negative-direction speed
64 REV Speed Lmt 0- Maximum frequency Hz
limit
65 Speed limit operation gain Speed Lmt Gain 100-5000 %
Torque at maximum analog
In 02 Torque at 100% -12.00-12.00 mA
input
21 Monitor mode display 1 Monitor Line-1 1 Speed
CNF* 22 Monitor mode display 2 Monitor Line-2 2 Output Current
23 Monitor mode display 3 Monitor Line-3 3 Output Voltage
*Available on LCD keypad only.
230
Torque reference setting details

Code Description
Select an input method to use as the torque reference.
Parameter Description
Setting
0 Keypad-1 Sets the torque reference with the keypad.
dr-08
1 Keypad-2
2 V1 Sets the torque reference using the voltage or
current input terminal of the terminal block.
6 Int 485 Sets the torque reference with the communication
The torque reference can be set up to 180% of the maximum rated motor
Cn-02
torque.
Sets the maximum torque. You can check the set maximum torque in
In-02
Monitor (MON) mode.
Select a parameter from the Config(CNF) mode and then select(19 Torque
CNF-21–23
Ref ).
Speed limit details

Code Description
Select a method for setting the speed limit value.
Parameter Description
Setting
Cn-62 0 Keypad-1 Sets the speed limit value with the keypad.
1 Keypad-2
2 V1 Sets the speed limit value using the same method as
6 Int 485 the frequency command. You can check the setting in
Monitor (MON) mode.
Cn-63 Sets the positive-direction speed limit value.
Cn-64 Sets the negative-direction speed limit value.
Sets the decrease rate of the torque reference when the motor speed
Cn-65
exceeds the speed limit value.
Select a parameter from the Config (CNF) mode and then select21 Torque
CNF-21~23
Bias.
Select a multi-functional input terminal to set as the (35 Speed/Torque). If
In 65-71 you turn on the terminal while the operation is stopped, it operates in
vector control (speed limit) mode.
231
5.14 Energy Saving Operation
5.14.1 Manual Energy Saving Operation

If the inverter output current is lower than the current which is set at bA.14 (Noload Curr),
the output voltage must be reduced as low as the level set at Ad.51 (Energy Save). The
voltage before the energy saving operation starts will become the base value of the
percentage. Manual energy saving operation will not be carried out during acceleration and
deceleration.
Parameter
Setting
Energy saving
50 E-Save Mode 1 Manual - -
operation
Ad
Energy saving
51 Energy Save 30 0–30 %
amount
5.14.2 Automatic Energy Saving Operation

The amount of energy saving can be automatically calculated based on the rated motor
current (bA.13) and the no-load current (bA.14). From the calculations, the output voltage
can be adjusted.
Parameter
Setting
Energy saving
Ad 50 E-Save Mode 2 Auto - -
operation
If operation frequency is changed or acceleration and /deceleration is carried out by a stop

command during the energy saving operation, the actual Acc/Dec time may take longer than
the set Acc/Dec time due to the time required to return to the gerneral operation from the
energy saving operation.
232
5.15 Speed Search Operation

This operation is used to prevent fault trips that can occur while the inverter output voltage
is disconnected and the motor is idling. Because this feature estimates the motor rotation
speed based on the inverter output current, it does not give the exact speed.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
PM speed search pulse
69 SS Pulse Curr 15 10~100 %
current
0 Flying Start-1
Speed search mode
70 SS Mode 1 Flying Start-2 - -
selection
2 Flying Start-3
Speed search
71 Speed Search 0000* - bit
operation selection
Cn Speed search SS Sup-
72 - 80–200 %
reference current Current
Speed search
73 SS P-Gain 100 0–9999 -
proportional gain
Speed search integral
74 SS I-Gain 200 0–9999 -
gain
Output block time
75 SS Block Time 1.0 0–60 sec
before speed search
Multi-function relay 1
31 Relay 1
item Speed
OU 19 - -
Multi-function Search
33 Q1 Define
output 1 item
*Displayed as on the Keypad.
233
Speed Search Operation Setting Details
Code Description
Sets the speed search current based on the motor’s rated current. This
Cn.69 SS Pulse Curr parameter is only displayed when dr.09 (Control Mode) is set to 6 (PM
Sensorless).
Select a speed search type.
Setting Function
0 Flying Start- The speed search is carried out as it controls the
1 inverter output current during idling below the
Cn.72 (SS Sup-Current) parameter setting. If the
direction of the idling motor and the direction of
operation command at restart are the same, a
stable speed search function can be performed
at about 10 Hz or lower. However, if the direction
of the idling motor and the direction of
operation command at restart are different, the
speed search does not produce a satisfactory
result because the direction of idling cannot be
established.
1 Flying Start- The speed search is carried out as it PI controls
2 the ripple current which is generated by the
Cn.70 SS Mode
counter electromotive force during no-load
rotation. Because this mode establishes the
direction of the idling motor (forward/reverse),
the speed search function is stable regardless of
the direction of the idling motor and direction of
operation command. However because the
ripple current is used which is generated by the
counter electromotive force at idle (the counter
electromotive force is proportional to the idle
speed), the idle frequency is not determined
accurately and re-acceleration may start from
zero speed when the speed search is performed
for the idling motor at low speed (about 10 - 15
Hz, though it depends on motor characteristics).
2 Flying Start- This speed search is available when operating a PM
3 synchronous motor. It is used when dr.09 (Control
Mode) is set to 6 (PM Sensorless).
234
Code Description
Speed search can be selected from the following 4 options. If the top
display segment is on it is enabled (On), and if the bottom segment is on
it is disabled (Off).
Item Bit Setting On Status Bit setting Off Status

Keypad
LCD keypad
Type and Functions of Speed Search Setting

Setting Function
bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1
 Speed search for general
acceleration
 Initialization after a fault trip
Cn.71 Speed Search  Restart after instantaneous power
interruption
 Starting with power-on
• Speed search for general acceleration: If bit 1 is set to 1 and the

inverter operation command runs, acceleration starts with speed
search operation. When the motor is rotating under load, a fault trip
may occur if the operation command is run for the inverter to
provide output voltage. The speed search function prevents such
fault trip from occurring.
• Initialization after a fault trip: If Bit 2 is set to 1 and Pr.08 (RST

Restart) is set to 1 (Yes), the speed search operation automatically
accelerates the motor to the operation frequency used before the
fault trip, when the [Reset] key is pressed (or the terminal block is
initialized) after a fault trip.
• Automatic restart after reset of a fault trip: If bit 3 is set to 1, and

if a low voltage trip occurs due to a power interruption but the
power is restored before the internal power shuts down, the speed
search operation accelerates the motor back to its frequency
235
Code Description
reference before the low voltage trip.
If an instantaneous power interruption occurs and the input power is

disconnected, the inverter generates a low voltage trip and blocks
the output. When the input power returns, the operation frequency
before the low voltage trip and the voltage is increased by the
inverter’s inner PI control.
If the current increases above the value set at Cn.72, the voltage stops
increasing and the frequency decreases (t1 zone). If the current
decreases below the value set at Cn.27, the voltage increases again
and the frequency stops decelerating (t2 zone). When the normal
frequency and voltage are resumed, the speed search operation
accelerates the motor back to its frequency reference before the fault
trip.
• Starting with power-on: Set bit 4 to 1 and Ad.10 (Power-on Run) to 1

(Yes). If inverter input power is supplied while the inverter operation
command is on, the speed search operation will accelerate the motor
up to the frequency reference.
236
Code Description
The amount of current flow is controlled during speed search operation
Cn.72 SS Sup-Current based on the motor’s rated current. If Cn.70 (SS mode) is set to 1 (Flying
Start-2), this code is not visible.
The P/I gain of the speed search controller can be adjusted. If Cn.70 (SS
Cn.73 SS P/I-Gain,
Mode) is set to 1 (Flying Start-2), different factory defaults based on
Cn.75 SS Block Time
motor capacity are used and defined in dr.14 (Motor Capacity).
Note
• If operated within the rated output, the Sinus H series inverter is designed to withstand
instantaneous power interruptions within 15 ms and maintain normal operation. Based on
the rated heavy load current, safe operation during an instantaneous power interruption is
guaranteed for 2S, 2T and 4T inverters (whose rated input voltages are 200-240 VAC and 380-
480 VAC respectively).
• The DC voltage inside the inverter may vary depending on the output load. If the power
interruption time is longer than 15 ms, a low voltage trip may occur.
When operating in sensorless II mode while the starting load is in free-run, the speed search
function (for general acceleration) must be set for smooth operation. If the speed search
function is not set, an overcurrent trip or overload trip may occur.
5.16 Auto Restart Settings

When inverter operation stops due to a fault and a fault trip is activated, the inverter
automatically restarts based on the parameter settings.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
08 Select start at trip reset RST Restart 0 No 0–1 -
Retry
Pr 09 Auto restart count 0 0–10 -
Number
10 Auto restart delay time Retry Delay 1.0 0.0–60.0 s
Select speed search Speed
71 - 0000*–1111 bit
operation Search
Speed search startup SS Sup-
72 150 80–200 %
current Current
Cn Speed search proportional
73 SS P-Gain 100 0–9999
gain
74 Speed search integral gain SS I-Gain 200 0–9999
Output block time before SS Block
75 1.0 0.0–60.0 s
speed search. Time
*Displayed as on the keypad.
237
Auto Restart Setting Details
Code Description
Only operates when Pr.08 (RST Restart) is set to 1(Yes). The number of
attempts to try the auto restart is set at Pr.09 (Auto Restart Count).
If a fault trip occurs during operation, the inverter automatically restarts
after the set time programmed at Pr.10 (Retry Delay). At each restart, the
inverter counts the number of tries and subtracts it from the number set
at Pr.09 until the retry number count reaches 0.
Pr.08 RST Restart, After an auto restart, if a fault trip does not occur within 60 sec, it will
Pr.09 Retry Number, increase the restart count number. The maximum count number is limited
Pr.10 Retry Delay by the number set at Pr.09 (Auto Restart Count).
If the inverter stops due to low voltage, emergency stop (Bx), inverter
overheating, or hardware diagnosis, an auto restart is not activated. At
auto restart, the acceleration options are identical to those of speed
search operation. Codes Cn.72–75 can be set based on the load.
Information about the speed search function can be found at 5.15 Speed
Search Operation on page 233.
[Example of auto restart with a setting of 2]
If the auto restart number is set, be careful when the inverter resets from a fault trip. The motor
may automatically start to rotate.
238
5.17 Operational Noise Settings (carrier

frequency settings)
Setting
Range
04 Carrier Frequency Carrier Freq 3.0 1.0–15.0 kHz
Cn
05 Switching Mode PWM* Mode 0 Normal PWM 0–1 -
* PWM: Pulse width modulation
Operational Noise Setting Details
Code Description
Adjust motor operational noise by changing carrier frequency settings.
Power transistors (IGBT) in the inverter generate and supply high frequency
switching voltage to the motor. The switching speed in this process refers to
Cn.04 Carrier Freq
the carrier frequency. If the carrier frequency is set high, it reduces
operational noise from the motor, and if the carrier frequency is set low, it
increases operational noise from the motor.
The heat loss and leakage current from the inverter can be reduced by
changing the load rate option at Cn.05 (PWM Mode). Selecting 1
(LowLeakage PWM) reduces heat loss and leakage current, compared to
when 0 (Normal PWM) is selected. However, it increases the motor noise.
Low leakage PWM uses 2 phase PWM modulation mode, which helps
minimize degradation and reduces switching loss by approximately 30%.
Item Carrier frequency

Cn.05 PWM Mode 1.0kHz 15kHz
Low Leakage PWM Normal PWM
Motor noise ↑ ↓
Heat generation ↓ ↑
Noise ↓ ↑
generation
Leakage current ↓ ↑
239
Note
Carrier Frequency at Factory Default Settings (all models)
• Normal load: 2kHz (Max 5kHz)
• Heavy load: 3kHz (Max 15kHz)
Sinus H Series Inverter Derating Standard

• Sinus H inverter is designed to respond to two types of load rates. Heavy load (heavy duty)
and normal load (normal duty). The overload rate represents an acceptable load amount that
exceeds rated load, and is expressed in a ratio based on the rated load and the duration. The
overload capacity on the Sinus H series inverter is 150%/1min for heavy loads, and
120%/1min for normal loads.
• The current rating differs from the load rating, as it also has an ambient temperature limit.
For derating specifications, refer to 11.9 Continuous Rated Current Derating on page 445.
• Current rating for ambient temperature at normal load operation.
[Ambient temperature versus current rating at normal load]
• Guaranteed carrier frequency for current rating by load.

Inverter capacity Normal load Heavy load
0.4–30kW 2kHz 6kHz
5.18 2nd Motor Operation

The 2nd motor operation is used when a single inverter switch operates two motors. Using
the 2nd motor operation, a parameter for the 2nd motor is set. The 2nd motor is operated
when a multi-function terminal input defined as a 2nd motor function is turned on.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
65-71
models, Px terminal P7 for IP20 2nd
In 26 - -
65-69 configuration models, P1-P5 for Motor
in IP66 IP66 models)
models
240
2nd Motor Operation Setting Details
Code Description
Set one of the the multi-function input terminals to 26 (2nd Motor) to display
M2 (2nd motor group) group. An input signal to a multi-function terminal set
In.65-71 (P1-P7 in
to 2nd motor will operate the motor according to the code settings listed
IP20 models),
below. However, if the inverter is in operation, input signals to the multi-
In.65-69 (P1-P5 in
function terminals will not read as a 2nd motor parameter.
IP66 models)
Pr.50 (Stall Prevent) must be set first, before M2.28 (M2-Stall Lev) settings
Px Define
can be used. Also, Pr.40 (ETH Trip Sel) must be set first, before M2.29 (M2-
ETH 1min) and M2.30 (M2.ETH Cont) settings.
Parameter Setting at Multi-function Terminal Input on a 2nd Motor

Code Description Code Description
M2.04 Acc Time Acceleration time M2.16 Inertia Rt Load inertia rate
M2.05 Dec Time Deceleration time M2.17 Rs Stator resistance
M2.06 Capacity Motor capacity M2.18 Lsigma Leakage inductance
M2.07 Base Freq Motor base frequency M2.19 Ls Stator inductance
M2.08 Ctrl Mode Control mode M2.20 Tr Rotor time constant
M2.10 Pole Num Pole number M2.25 V/F Patt V/F pattern
M2.11 Rate Slip Rated slip M2.26 Fwd Boost Forward torque boost
M2.12 Rated Curr Rated current M2.27 Rev Boost Reverse torque boost
M2.13 Noload Curr No-load current M2.28 Stall Lev Stall prevention level
M2.14 Rated Volt Motor rated voltage M2.29 ETH 1min Motor heat protection
1min rating
M2.15 Efficiency Motor efficiency M2.30 ETH Cont Motor heat protection
continuous rating
Example - 2nd Motor Operation
Use the 2nd motor operation when switching operation between a 7.5kW motor and a
secondary 3.7kW motor connected to terminal P3. Refer to the following settings.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
Terminal P3
In 67 P3 Define 26 2nd Motor - -
configuration
06 Motor capacity M2-Capacity - 3.7kW - -
M2
08 Control mode M2-Ctrl Mode 0 V/F - -
241
5.19 Supply Power Transition

Supply power transition is used to switch the power source for the motor connected to the
inverter from the inverter output power to the main supply power source (commercial
power source), or vice versa.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
65-71
Px Define(Px:
in IP20
P1-P7 in IP20
models, Px terminal
In models, 16 Exchange - -
65-69 configuration
P1-P5 in IP66
in IP66
models)
models
Multi-function Inverter
31 Relay1 17 - -
relay1 items Line
OU
Multi-function Comm
33 Q1 Define 18 - -
output1 items Line
Supply Power Transition Setting Details
Code Description
In.65-71 (P1-P7 in
When the motor power source changes from inverter output to main
IP20 models),
supply power, select a terminal to use and set the code value to 16
In.65-69 (P1-P5 in
(Exchange). Power will be switched when the selected terminal is on. To
IP66 models)
reverse the transition, switch off the terminal.
Px Define
Set multi-function relay or multi-function output to 17 (Inverter Line) or
18 (COMM line). Relay operation sequence is as follows.
OU.31 Realy 1
Define,
OU.33 Q1 Define
242
5.20 Cooling Fan Control

This function turns the inverter’s heat-sink cooling fan on and off. It is used in situations
where the load stops and starts frequently, or noise free environment is required. The
correct use of cooling fan control can extend the cooling fan’s life.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
Ad 64 Cooling fan control FAN Control 0 During Run 0–2 -
Cooling Fan Control Detail Settings
Code Description
Settings Description
0 During Run Cooling fan runs when the power is supplied to the
inverter and the operation command is on. The cooling
fan stops when the power is supplied to the inverter
and the operation command is off. When the inverter
heat sink temperature is higher than its set value, the
Ad.64 Fan cooling fan operates automatically regardless of its
Control operation status.
1 Always On Cooling fan runs constantly if the power is supplied to
the inverter.
2 Temp With power connected and the run operation
Control command on, if the setting is in Temp Control, the
cooling fan will not operate unless the temperature in
the heat sink reaches the set temperature.
Note
Despite setting Ad.64 to 0(During Run), if the heat sink temperature reaches a set level by
current input harmonic wave or noise, the cooling fan may run as a protection function.
243
5.21 Input Power Frequency and Voltage Settings

Select the frequency for inverter input power. If the frequency changes from 50Hz to 60Hz,
all other frequency (or RPM) settings including the maximum frequency, base frequency
etc., will change to 60Hz. Likewise, changing the input power frequency setting from 50Hz
to 60Hz will change all related function item settings from 50Hz to 60Hz.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
bA 10 Input power frequency 60/50 Hz Sel 1 50Hz 0–1 -
Set Inverter input power voltage at bA.19. Low voltage fault trip level changes
automatically to the set voltage standard.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
2S/T 230 170–240
bA 19 Input power voltage AC Input Volt V
4T 400 320–480
5.22 Read, Write, and Save Parameters

Use read, write and save function parameters on the inverter to copy parameters from the
inverter to the keypad or from the keypad to the inverter.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
46 Parameter read Parameter Read 1 Yes - -
CNF* 47 Parameter write Parameter Write 1 Yes - -
48 Parameter save Parameter Save 1 Yes - -
Read, Write, and Save Parameter Setting Details
Code Description
Copies saved parameters from the inverter to the keypad. Saved
CNF-46 Parameter
parameters on the keypad will be deleted and replaced with copied
Read
parameters.
Copies saved parameters from the keypad to the inverter. Saved
parameters on the inverter will be deleted and replaced with copied
CNF-47 Parameter parameters. If an error occurs during parameter writing, previous saved
Write data will be used. If there is no saved data on the Keypad, ‘EEP Rom
Empty’ message will be displayed.
244
Code Description
As parameters set during communication transmission are saved to
CNF-48 Parameter RAM, the setting values will be lost if the power goes off and on. When
Save setting parameters during communication transmission, select 1 (Yes)
from CNF-48 code to save the set parameter.
5.23 Parameter Initialization

User changes to parameters can be initialized (reset) to factory default settings on all or
selected groups. However, during a fault trip situation or operation, parameters cannot be
initialized.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
Parameter
dr* 93 - 0 No 0–16
initialization
Parameter
CNF** 40 Parameter Init 0 No 0–16
initialization
* For keypad
** For LCD keypad
Parameter Initialization Setting Details
Code Description
Setting LCD Display Function
0 No No -
Initialize all data. Select 1(All
Grp) and press [PROG/ENT]
Initialize all
1 All Grp key to start initialization. On
groups
completion, 0(No) will be
displayed.
2 Initialize dr group DRV Grp Initialize data by groups.
dr.93, 3 Initialize bA group BAS Grp Select initialize group and
CNF-40 Parameter Init 4 Initialize Ad group ADV Grp press [PROG/ENT] key to
5 Initialize Cn group CON Grp start initialization. On
6 Initialize In group IN Grp completion, 0(No) will be
7 Initialize OU group OUT Grp displayed.
8 Initialize CM group COM Grp
9 Initialize AP group APP Grp
12 Initialize Pr group PRT Grp
13 Initialize M2 group M2 Grp
Initialize
16 SPS Grp
OperationGroup
245
5.24 Parameter View Lock

Use parameter view lock to hide parameters after registering and entering a user password.
Setting
Range
Parameter view
50 View Lock Set Unlocked 0–9999
lock
CNF*
Parameter view
51 View Lock Pw Password 0–9999
lock password
* Available on LCD keypad only.
Parameter View Lock Setting Details

Code Description
Register a password to allow access to parameter view lock. Follow the
steps below to register a password.
No Procedure
1 [PROG/ENT] key on CNF-51 code will show the previous
password input window. If registration is made for the first
CNF-51 View Lock Pw time, enter 0. It is the factory default.
2 If a password had been set, enter the saved password.
3 If the entered password matches the saved password, a new
window prompting the user to enter a new password will be
displayed (the process will not progress to the next stage until
the user enters a valid password).
4 Register a new password.
5 After registration, code CNF-51 will be displayed.
To enable parameter view lock, enter a registered password. [Locked]

sign will be displayed on the screen to indicate that parameter view lock
CNF-50 View Lock Set
is enabled. To disable parameter view lock, re-enter the password. The
[locked] sign will disappear.
246
5.25 Parameter Lock

Use parameter lock to prevent unauthorized modification of parameter settings. To enable
parameter lock, register and enter a user password first.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
94 Password registration - - 0–9999 -
dr Parameter lock
95 - - 0–9999 -
password
52 Parameter lock Key Lock Set Unlocked 0–9999 -
CNF* Parameter lock
53 Key Lock PW Password 0–9999 -
password
Parameter Lock Setting Details

Code Description
Register a password to prohibit parameter modifications. Follow the
procedures below to register a password.
No Procedures
1 Press the [PROG/ENT] key on CNF-53 code and the saved
password input window will be displayed. If password
registration is being made for the first time, enter 0. It is the
factory default.
CNF-53 Key Lock Pw
2 If a saved password has been set, enter the saved password.
3 If the entered password matches the saved password, then a
new window to enter a new password will be displayed. (The
process will not move to next stage until the user enters a valid
password).
4 Register a new password.
5 After registration, Code CNF-51 will be displayed.
To enable parameter lock, enter the registered password. [Locked] sign
will be displayed on the screen to indicate that prohibition is enabled.
CNF-52 Key Lock Set Once enabled, Pressing the [PROG/ENT] key on function code will not
allow the display edit mode to run. To disable parameter modification
prohibition, re-enter the password. The [Locked] sign will disapear.
If parameter view lock and parameter lock functions are enabled, no inverter operation related
function changes can be made. It is very important that you memorize the password.
247
5.26 Changed Parameter Display

This feature displays all the parameters that are different from the factory defaults. Use this
feature to track changed parameters.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
Changed parameter
CNF* 41 Changed Para 0 View All - -
display
Changed Parameter Display Setting Details

Code Description
Setting Function
CNF-41 Changed
Para 0 View All Display all parameters
1 View Changed Display changed parameters only
5.27 User Group

Create a user defined group and register user-selected parameters from the existing
function groups. The user group can carry up to a maximum of 64 parameter registrations.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
Multi-function key UserGrp
42 Multi Key Sel 3 - -
settings SelKey
CNF*
Delete all user registered UserGrp
45 0 No - -
codes AllDel
248
User Group Setting Details

Code Description
Select 3(UserGrp SelKey) from the multi-function key setting options. If user
group parameters are not registered, setting the multi-function key to the
user group select key (UserGrp SelKey) will not display user group (USR Grp)
item on the Keypad.
Follow the procedures below to register parameters to a user group.
No Procedure
1 Set CNF- 42 to 3(UserGrp SelKey). A icon will be displayed at the
top of the LCD display.
2 In the parameter mode (PAR Mode), move to the parameter you
need to register and press the [MULTI] key. For example, if the
[MULTI] key is pressed in the frequency reference in DRV 01 (Cmd
Frequency), the screen below will be displayed.
CNF-42 Multi-Key Sel
❶ Group name and code number of the parameter

❷ Name of the parameter
❸ Code number to be used in the user group. Pressing the
[PROG/ENT] key on the code number (40 Code) will register
DRV-01 as code 40 in the user group.
❹ Existing parameter registered as the user group code 40
❺ Setting range of the user group code. Entering 0 cancels the
settings.
3 Set a code number (❸) to use to register the parameter in the
user group. Select code number and press [PROG/ENT] key.
4 Changing the value in ❸ will also change the value in ❹. If no
code is registered, ‘Empty Code’ will be displayed. Entering 0
cancels the settings.
5 The registered parameters are listed in the user group in U&M
mode. You can register one parameter multiple times if necessary.
For example, a parameter can be registered as code 2, code 11,
and more in the user group.
249
Code Description
Follow the procedures below to delete parameters in the user group.
No. Settings
1 Set CNF- 42 to 3(UserGrp SelKey). A icon will be displayed at the
top of the LCD display.
2 In the USR group in U&M mode, move the cursor to the code that is
to be deleted.
3 Press the [MULTI] key.
4 Move to YES on the deletion confirmation screen, and press the
[PROG/ENT] key.
5 Deletion completed.
CNF-25 UserGrp
Set to 1(Yes) to delete all registered parameters in the user group.
AllDel
5.28 Easy Start On

Run Easy Start On to easily setup the basic motor parameters required to operate a motor in
a batch. Set CNF-61(Easy Start On) to 1(Yes) to activate the feature, initialize all parameters
by setting CNF-40 (Parameter Init) to 1 (All Grp), and restart the inverter to activate Easy
Start On.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
Parameter easy start
CNF* 61 Easy Start On 1 Yes - -
settings
Easy Start On Setting Details
Code Description
Follow the procedures listed below to set parameter easy start.
No Procedures
1 Set CNF-61 (Easy Start On) to 1(Yes).
2 Select 1(All Grp) in CNF-40 (Parameter Init) to initialize all
CNF-61 Easy Start
parameters in the inverter.
On
3 Restarting the inverter will activate the Easy Start On. Set the
values in the following screens on the LCD keypad. To escape
from the Easy Start On, press the [ESC] key.
250
Code Description
• Start Easy Set: Select Yes.
• DRV-14 Motor Capacity: Set motor capacity.
• BAS-11 Pole Number: Set motor pole number.
• BAS-15 Rated Volt: Set motor rated voltage.
• BAS-10 60/50Hz Sel: Set motor rated frequency.
• BAS-19 AC Input Volt: Set input voltage.
• DRV-06 Cmd Source: Set command source.
• DRV-01 Cmd Frequency: Set operation frequency.
When the settings are completed, the minimum parameter

setting on the motor has been made. The LCD keypay will
return to a monitoring display. Now the motor can be operated
with the command source set at DRV-06.
5.29 Config(CNF) Mode

The config mode parameters are used to configure the LCD keypad related features.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
LCD
2 brightness/contrast LCD Contrast - -
adjustment
10 Inverter S/W version Inv S/W Ver x.xx -
Keypad S/W
11 Keypad S/W version x.xx - -
Ver
CNF*
12 Keypad title version KPD Title Ver x.xx - -
30–32 Power slot type Option-x Type None - -
44 Erase trip history Erase All Trip No - -
60 Add title update Add Title Up No - -
Initialize accumulated WH Count
62 No - -
electric energy Reset
* Available on the LCD keypad only.
251
Config Mode Parameter Setting Details

Code Description
CNF-2 LCD contrast Adjusts LCD brightness/contrast on the LCD keypad.
CNF-10 Inv S/W Ver,

Check OS version in the inverter and on the LCD keypad.
CNF-11 Keypad S/W Ver
CNF-12 KPD title Ver Checks title version on the LCD keypad.
CNF-30–32 Option-x
Checks type of powerboard installed in 1–3 power slot.
type
CNF-44 Erase all trip Deletes stored trip history.
When inverter SW version is updated and more code is added, CNF-
60 settings will add, display, and operate the added codes. Set CNF-
CNF-60 Add Title Up
60 to 1(Yes) and disconnect the LCD keypad from the inverter.
Reconnecting the LCD keypad to the inverter updates titles.
CNF-62 WH Count Reset Initialize accumulated electric energy consumption count.
5.30 Timer Settings

Set a multi-function input terminal to a timer and On/Off control the multi-function output
and relay according to the timer settings.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
65-71
models, Px terminal P7 in IP20 models,
In 38 Timer In - -
65-69 configuration P1-P5 in IP66
in IP66 models)
models
31 Multi-function relay1 Relay 1
Multi-function 28 Timer Out - -
33 Q1 Define
OU output1
55 Timer on delay Timer on delay 3.00 0.00–100 sec
56 Timer off delay Timer off delay 1.00 0.00–100 sec
252
Timer Setting Details

Code Description
In.65-71 (P1-P7 in
IP20 models),
Choose one of the multi-function input terminals and change it to a timer
In.65-69 (P1-P5 in
terminal by setting it to 38 (Timer In).
IP66 models)
Px Define
OU.31 Relay1, Set multi-function output terminal or relay to be used as a timer to 28
OU.33 Q1 Define (Timer out).
OU.55 TimerOn Input a signal (On) to the timer terminal to operate a timer output (Timer
Delay, out) after the time set at OU.55 has passed. When the multi-function
OU.56 TimerOff input terminal is off, multi-function output or relay turns off after the time
Delay set at OU.56.
5.31 Brake Control

Brake control is used to control the On/Off operation of electronic brake load system.
Parameter
Setting
dr 09 Control mode Control Mode 0 V/F - -
41 Brake open current BR Rls Curr 50.0 0.0–180% %
42 Brake open delay time BR Rls Dly 1.00 0.0–10.0 sec
Brake open forward 0–Maximum
44 BR Rls Fwd Fr 1.00 Hz
frequency frequency
Ad Brake open reverse 0–Maximum
45 BR Rls Rev Fr 1.00 Hz
frequency frequency
46 Brake close delay time BR Eng Dly 1.00 0.00–10.00 sec
0–Maximum
47 Brake close frequency BR Eng Fr 2.00 Hz
frequency
Multi-function relay1
31 Relay 1
item
OU 35 BR Control: - -
Multi-function
33 Q1 Define
output1 item
253
When brake control is activated, DC braking (Ad.12) at inverter start and dwell operation
(Ad.20–23) do not operate.
• Brake release sequence: During motor stop state, if an operation command is entered,
the inverter accelerates up to brake release frequency (Ad.44– 45) in forward or in
reverse direction. After reaching brake release frequency, if motor current reaches brake
release current (BR Rls Curr), the output relay or multi function output terminal for
brake control sends a release signal. Once the signal has been sent, acceleration will
begin after maintaining frequency for brake release delay time (BR Rls Dly).
• Brake engage sequence: If a stop command is sent during operation, the motor
decelerates. Once the output frequency reaches brake engage frequency (BR Eng Fr),
the motor stops deceleration and sends out a brake engage signal to a preset output
terminal. Frequency is maintained for the brake engage delay time (BR Eng Dly) and will
become 0 afterwards. If DC braking time (Ad.15) and DC braking resistance (Ad.16) are
set, inverter output is blocked after DC braking. For DC braking, refer to 4.17.2 Stop After
DC Braking on page 157.
254
5.32 Multi-Function Output On/Off Control

Set reference values (on/off level) for analog input and control output relay or multi-
function output terminal on/off status accordingly.
Parameter
Setting
Output terminal
66 On/Off Ctrl Src 1 V1 - -
on/off control mode
Output terminal
Output terminal on
Ad 67 On-C Level 90.00 off level– %
level
100.00%
Output terminal off 0.00–Output
68 Off-C Level 10.00 %
level terminal on level
31 Relay 1
item
OU 34 On/Off - -
Multi-function
33 Q1 Define
output1 item
Multi-function Output On/Off Control Setting Details
Code Description
Ad.66 On/Off Ctrl Src Select analog input On/Off control.
Ad.67 On-C Level ,

Set On/Off level at the output terminal.
Ad.68 Off-C Level
255
5.33 Press Regeneration Prevention

Press regeneration prevention is used during press operations to prevent braking during the
regeneration process. If motor regeneration occurs during a press operation, motor operation
speed automatically goes up to avoid the regeneration zone.
Grou Cod Parameter

Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
p e Setting
Select press
74 regeneration RegenAvd Sel 0 No 0–1 -
prevention for press
Press regeneration 350V 2S/T: 300–400V
75 prevention operation RegenAvd Level V
voltage level 700V 4T: 600–800V
Press regeneration
Ad
prevention
76 CompFreq Limit 1.00(Hz) 0.00– 10.00Hz Hz
compensation
frequency limit
Press regeneration RegenAvd
77 50.0(%) 0 .0– 100.0% %
prevention P gain Pgain
Press regeneration
78 RegenAvd Igain 500(ms) 20–30000ms ms
prevention I gain
Press Regeneration Prevention Setting Details

Code Description
Frequent regeneration voltage from a press load during constant speed
motor operation may force excessive work on the brake unit which may
Ad.74 RegenAvd Sel damage or shorten the brake life. To prevent this situation, select Ad.74
(RegenAvd Sel) to control DC link voltage and disable the brake unit
operation.
Ad.75 RegenAvd Set brake operation prevention level voltage when the DC link voltage
Level goes up due to regeneration.
Ad.76 CompFreq Set alternative frequency width that can replace actual operation
Limit frequency during regeneration prevention.
Ad.77 RegenAvd
To prevent regeneration zone, set P gain/I gain in the DC link voltage
Pgain, Ad.78
supress PI controller.
RegenAvd Igain
256
Note
Press regeneration prevention does not operate during accelerations or decelerations, but it
only operates during constant speed motor operation. When regeneration prevention is
activated, output frequency may change within the range set at Ad.76 (CompFreq Limit).
5.34 Analog Output

An analog output terminal provides output of 0–10V voltage, 4–20mA current, or 0–32kHz
pulse.
5.34.1 Voltage and Current Analog Output

An output size can be adjusted by selecting an output option at AO(Analog Output)
terminal. Set the analog voltage/current output terminal setting switch (SW3) to change the
output type (voltage/current).
AO1: 0–10 V Voltage / 4–20 mA Current Output

01 Analog output1 AO1 Mode 0 Frequency 0–15 -
02 Analog output1 gain AO1 Gain 100.0 -1000.0–1000.0 %
03 Analog output1 bias AO1 Bias 0.0 -100.0–100.0 %
OU 04 Analog output1 filter AO1 Filter 5 0–10000 ms
05 Analog constant output1 AO1 Const % 0.0 0.0–100.0 %
06 Analog output1 monitor AO1 Monitor 0.0 0.0–1000.0 %
257
AO2: 0–10 V Current output [0034 model only]

07 Analog output2 AO2 Mode 0 Frequency 0–15 -
08 Analog output2 gain AO2 Gain 100.0 -1000.0–1000.0 %
09 Analog output2 bias AO2 Bias 0.0 -100.0–100.0 %
OU 10 Analog output2 filter AO2 Filter 5 0–10000 ms
11 Analog constant output2 AO2 Const % 0.0 0.0–100.0 %
12 Analog output2 monitor AO2 Monitor 0.0 0.0–1000.0 %
Voltage and Current Analog Output Setting Details
Code Description
Select a constant value for output. The following example for output voltage setting.
Setting Function
0 Frequency Outputs operation frequency as a standard. 10V output is made
from the frequency set at dr.20(Max Freq)
1 Output 10V output is made from 200% of inverter rated current (heavy
Current load).
2 Output Sets the outputs based on the inverter output voltage. 10V
Voltage output is made from a set voltage in bA.15 (Rated V).
If 0V is set in bA.15, 2S/T and 4T models output 10V based on the
actual input voltages (240V and 480V respectively).
3 DC Link Outputs inverter DC link voltage as a standard.
Volt Outputs 10V when the DC link voltage is 410Vdc for 2S/T models,
and 820Vdc for 4T models.
OU.01 4 Torque Outputs the generated torque as a standard. Outputs 10V at
AO1 250% of motor rated torque.
Mode 5 Ouput Monitors output wattage. 200% of rated output is the maximum
Power display voltage (10V).
6 Idse Outputs the maximum voltage at 200% of no load current.
7 Iqse Outputs the maximum voltage at 250% of rated torque current
8 Target Outputs set frequency as a standard. Outputs 10V at the

Freq maximum frequency (dr.20).
9 Ramp Outputs frequency calculated with Acc/Dec function as a
Freq standard. May vary with actual output frequency. Outputs 10V.
12 PID Ref Outputs command value of a PID controller as a standard.
Value Outputs approximately 6.6V at 100%.
13 PID Fdk Outputs feedback volume of a PID controller as a standard.
Value Outputs approximately 6.6V at 100%.
258
14 PID Outputs output value of a PID controller as a standard. Outputs

Output approximately 10V at 100%.
15 Constant Outputs OU.05 (AO1 Const %) value as a standard.
Adjusts output value and offset. If frequency is selected as an output item, it will
operate as shown below.
The graph below illustrates the analog voltage output (AO1) changes depend on
OU.02 (AO1 Gain) and OU.3 (AO1 Bias) values. Y-axis is analog output voltage (0–10V),
and X-axis is % value of the output item.
Example, if the maximum frequency set at dr.20 (Max Freq) is 60Hz and the present
output frequency is 30Hz, then the x-axis value on the next graph is 50%.
OU.02
AO1
Gain,
OU.03
AO1
Bias
OU.04
AO1 Set filter time constant on analog output.
Filter
OU.05 If analog output at OU.01 (AO1 Mode) is set to 15(Constant), the analog voltage
A01
output is dependent on the set parameter values (0–100%).
Const %
OU.06
Monitors analog output value. Displays the maximum output voltage as a percentage
AO1
(%) with 10V as the standard.
Monitor
259
5.34.2 Analog Pulse Output

Output item selection and pulse size adjustment can be made for the TO (Pulse Output)
terminal.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
33 Multi-function output 1 Q1 define 38 TO 0–38 -
61 Pulse output setting TO Mode 0 Frequency 0–15 -
-1000.0–
62 Pulse output gain TO Gain 100.0 %
1000.0
OU 63 Pulse output bias TO Bias 0.0 -100.0-100.0 %
64 Pulse output filter TO Filter 5 0–10000 ms
Pulse output constant
65 TO Const % 0.0 0.0-100.0 %
output2
66 Pulse output monitor TO Monitor 0.0 0.0–1000.0 %
Analog Pulse Output Setting Details
Code Description
In case of IP66 models, pulse output TO and multi-function output Q1 share the
same terminal. Set OU.33 to 32kHz pulse output and follow the instructions
below to make wiring connections that configure the open collector output
circuit.
1. Connect a 1/4W, 560Ω resistor between VR and Q1 terminals.
2. Connect EG and CM terminals.
When wiring the resistor, a resistance of 560Ω or less is recommended to
stably provide 32kHz pulse output.
OU.33 Q1 Define
260
When connecting to a pulse between the Sinus H inverters, please connect pulse
output(Q1-EG) to pulse input(TI-CM) directly without resistor and wire.
• IP20 model ↔ IP20 model: Connect TO → TI, CM → CM
• IP66 model ↔ IP66 model: Connect Q1 → P5, EG → CM
• IP20 model ↔ IP66 model: Not supported.
Adjusts output value and offset. If frequency is selected as an output, it will
operate as shown below.
The following graph illustrates that the pulse output (TO) changes depend
on OU.62 (TO Gain) and OU.63 (TO Bias) values. The Y-axis is an analog
output current(0–32kHz), and X-axis is % value on output item.
For example, if the maximum frequency set with dr.20 (Max Freq) is 60Hz
and present output frequency is 30Hz, then the x-axis value on the next
graph is 50%.
OU.62 TO Gain,
OU.63 TO Bias
OU.64 TO Filter Sets filter time constant on analog output.

If analog output item is set to constant, the analog pulse output is
OU.65 TO Const %
dependent on the set parameter values.
Monitors analog output value. Displays the maximum output pulse (32kHz)
OU.66 TO Monitor
as a percentage (%) of the standard.
261
Note
OU.08 AO2 Gain and OU.09 AO2 Bias Tuning Mode on 4–20mA output
1 Set OU.07 (AO2 Mode) to constant, and set OU.11 (AO2 Const %) to 0.0 %.
2 Set OU.09 (AO2 Bias) to 20.0% and then check current output. 4mA output should be
displayed.
3 If the value is less than 4mA, gradually increase OU.09 (AO2 Bias) until 4mA is measured. If
the value is more than 4mA, gradually decrease OU.09 (AO2 Bias) until 4mA is measured.
4 Set OU.11 AO2 Const % to 100.0%
Set OU.08 (AO2 Gain) to 80.0% and measure current output at 20mA. If the value is less than
20mA, gradually increase OU.08 (AO2 Gain) until 20mA is measured. If the value is more
than 20mA, gradually decrease OU.08 (AO2 Gain) until 20mA is measured.
The functions for each code are identical to the descriptions for the 0–10V voltage outputs with
an output range 4–20mA.
5.35 Digital Output

5.35.1 Multi-function Output Terminal and Relay Settings
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
30 Fault output item Trip Out Mode 010* - bit
31 Relay 1 29 Trip - -
setting
Multi-function
33 Q1 Define 14 Run - -
output1 setting
OU Multi-function output
41 DO Status - 00– 11 bit
monitor
57 Detection frequency FDT Frequency 30.00 0.00–
Detection frequency Maximum Hz
58 FDT Band 10.00
band frequency
65-71
Px Define(Px:
in IP20
P1-P7 in IP20
models, Px terminal
In models, 16 Exchange - -
65-69 configuration
P1-P5 in IP66
in IP66
models)
models
*Displayed as on the keypad.
262
Multi-function Output Terminal and Relay Setting Details

Code Description
OU.31 Relay1 Set relay (Relay 1) output options.
Select output options for multi-function output terminal (Q1). Q1 is open
OU.33 Q1 Define
collector TR output.
Set output terminal and relay functions according to OU.57 FDT (Frequency),
OU.58 (FDT Band) settings and fault trip conditions.
Setting Function
0 None No output signal.
1 FDT-1 Detects inverter output frequency reaching the user
set frequency. Outputs a signal when the absolute
value (set frequency–output frequency) < detected
frequency width/2.
When detected frequency width is 10Hz, FDT-1
output is as shown in the graph below.
OU.41 DO Status
2 FDT-2 Outputs a signal when the user set frequency and

detected frequency (FDT Frequency) are equal, and
fulfills FDT-1 condition at the same time.
[Absolute value (set frequency-detected frequency)
< detected frequency width/2]&[FDT-1]
Detected frequency width is 10Hz. When the

detected frequency is set to 30Hz, FDT-2 output is
as shown in the graph below.
263
3 FDT-3 Outputs a signal when the Absolute value (output

frequency–operation frequency) < detected
frequency width/2.
Detected frequency width is 10Hz. When detected

frequency is set to 30Hz, FDT-3 output is as shown
in the graph below.
4 FDT-4 Output signal can be separately set for acceleration

and deceleration conditions.
• In acceleration: Operation frequency≧
Detected frequency
• In deceleration: Operation
frequency>(Detected frequency–Detected
frequency width/2)
Detected frequency width is 10Hz. When detected

frequency is set to 30Hz, FDT-4 output is as shown
in the graph below.
5 Overload Outputs a signal at motor overload.

6 IOL Outputs a signal when a fault is triggered from a
protective function operation by inverter overload
inverse proportion.
7 Underload Outputs a signal at load fault warning.
8 Fan Warning Outputs a signal at fan fault warning.
9 Stall Outputs a signal when a motor is overloaded and
stalled.
264
10 Over voltage Outputs a signal when the inverter DC link voltage

rises above the protective operation voltage.
11 Low Voltage Outputs a signal when the inverter DC link voltage
drops below the low voltage protective level.
12 Over Heat Outputs signal when the inverter overheats.
13 Lost Outputs a signal when there is a loss of analog
command input terminal and RS-485 communication
command at the terminal block.
Outputs a signal when communication power and
expansion an I/O power card is installed, and also
outputs a signal when losing analog input and
communication power commands.
14 RUN Outputs a signal when operation command is
entered and the inverter outputs voltage.
No signal output during DC braking.
15 Stop Outputs a signal at operation command off, and

when there is no inverter output voltage.
16 Steady Outputs a signal in steady operation.
17 Inverter line Outputs a signal while the motor is driven by the

inverter line.
18 Comm line Outputs a signal while the motor is driven by a
commercial power source. For details, refer to 5.19
Supply Power Transition on page 242.
19 Speed search Outputs a signal during inverter speed search
operation.
For details, refer to 5.15 Speed Search Operation on
page 233.
22 Ready Outputs signal when the inverter is in stand by
operation and ready to receive an external
operation command.
28 Timer Out A timer function to operate terminal output after a
certain time by using multi-function terminal block
input. For more details, refer to 5.30 Timer Settings on
page 252.
29 Trip Outputs a signal after a fault trip
Refer to 5.32 Multi-Function Output On/Off Control
on page 255.
265
31 DB Warn %ED Refer to 6.2.5 Dynamic Braking (DB) Resistor

Configuration on page 285.
34 On/Off Outputs a signal using an analog input value as a
Control standard.
Refer to 5.32 Multi-Function Output On/Off Control
on page 255.
35 BR Control Outputs a brake release signal.
Refer to 5.31 Brake Controlon page 253.
5.35.2 Fault Trip Output using Multi-Function Output Terminal and

Relay
The inverter can output fault trip state using multi-function output terminal (Q1) and relay
(Relay 1).
Parameter
Setting
Trip Out
30 Fault trip output mode 010 - bit
Mode
31 Multi-function relay1 Relay 1 29 Trip - -
33 Multi-function output1 Q1 Define 14 Run - -
OU
Fault trip output on TripOut
53 0.00 0.00–100.00 sec
delay OnDly
Fault trip output off TripOut
54 0.00 0.00–100.00 sec
delay OffDly
266
Fault Trip Output by Multi-function Output Terminal and Relay - Setting Details
Code Description
Fault trip relay operates based on the fault trip output settings.
Item bit on bit off
Keypad
LCD
keypad
Select fault trip output terminal/relay and select 29(Trip Mode) at codes
OU.30 Trip Out Mode OU. 31, 33. When a fault trip occurs in the inverter, the relevant terminal
and relay will operate. Depending on the fault trip type, terminal and
relay operation can be configured as shown in the table below.
Setting Function
bit3 bit2 bit1
 Operates when low voltage fault trips occur
 Operates when fault trips other than low
voltage occur
 Operates when auto restart fails (Pr. 08–09)
OU.31 Relay1 Set relay output (Relay 1).
Select output for multi-function output terminal (Q1). Q1 is open
OU.33 Q1 Define
collector TR output.
OU.53 TripOut On If a fault trip occurs, trip relay or multi-function output operates after the
Dly, time delay set in OU.53. Terminal is off with the input initialized after the
OU.54 TripOut OffDly time delay set in OU.53.
5.35.3 Multi-function Output Terminal Delay Time Settings

Set on-delay and off-delay times separately to control the output terminal and relay
operation times. The delay time set at codes OU.50–51 applies to multi-function output
terminal (Q1) and relay (Relay 1), except when the multi-function output function is in fault
trip mode.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
Multi-function output
50 DO On Delay 0.00 0.00–100.00 s
On delay
Multi-function output
OU 51 DO Off Delay 0.00 0.00–100.00 s
Off delay
Select multi-function
52 DO NC/NO Sel 00* 00–11 bit
output terminal
* Displayed as on keypad.
267
Output Terminal Delay Time Setting Details

Code Description
Select terminal type for relay and multi-function output terminal. An
additional three terminal type selection bits at the terminal block will be
added when an expansion I/O is added. By setting the relevant bit to 0, it
will operate A terminal (Normally Open), and setting it to 1 will operate B
terminal (Normally Closed). Shown below in the table are Relay 1 and Q1
OU.52 DO NC/NO settings starting from the right bit.
Sel
Item bit on bit off
Keypad
LCD keypad
5.36 Keypad Language Settings

The language to be displayed on the LCD keypad is English only.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
Select keypad
CNF* 01 Language Sel 0 English 0: English -
language
268
5.37 Operation State Monitor

The inverter’s operation condition can be monitored using the LCD keypad. If the
monitoring option is selected in config (CNF) mode, a maximum of four items can be
monitored simultaneously. Monitoring mode displays three different items on the LCD
keypad, but only one item can be displayed in the status window at a time.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
Display item condition
20 Anytime Para 0 Frequency - -
display window
Monitor Line-
21 Monitor mode display 1 0 Frequency - Hz
1
CNF* Monitor Line-
22 Monitor mode display 2 2 Output Current - A
2
Monitor Line-
23 Monitor mode display 3 3 Output Voltage - V
3
24 Monitor mode initialize Mon Mode Init 0 No - -
Operation State Monitor Setting Details

Code Description
Select items to display on the top-right side of the LCD keypad
screen. Choose the parameter settings based on the information to
be displayed. Codes CNF-20–23 share the same setting options as
listed in the table below.
Setting Function
0 Frequency On stop, displays the set frequency. During
operation, displays the actual output
frequency (Hz).
1 Speed On stop, displays the set speed (rpm).
CNF-20 AnyTime Para
During operation, displays the actual
operating speed (rpm).
2 Output Displays output current.
Current
3 Output Displays output voltage.
Voltage
4 Output Power Displays output power.
5 WHour Displays inverter power consumption.
Counter
6 DCLink Displays DC link voltage within the inverter.
269
Voltage
7 DI Status Displays input terminal status of the
terminal block. Starting from the right,
displays P1-P8.
8 DO Status Displays output terminal status of the
terminal block. Starting from the right,
Relay1, Relay2, and Q1.
9 V1 Monitor[V] Displays the input voltage value at terminal
V1 (V).
10 V1 Monitor[%] Displays input voltage terminal V1 value as
a percentage. If -10V, 0V, +10V is measured,
-100%, 0%, 100% will be displayed.
13 V2 Monitor[V] Displays input voltage terminal V2 value
(V).
14 V2 Monitor[%] Displays input voltage terminal V2 value as
a percentage.
15 I2 Displays input current terminal I2 value (A).
Monitor[mA]
16 I2 Monitor[%] Displays input current terminal I2 value as
a percentage.
17 PID Output Displays output of PID controller.
18 PID Ref Value Displays reference value of PID controller.
19 PID Fdb Value Displays feedback volume of PID controller.
20 Torque If the torque reference command mode
(DRV-08) is set to a value other than
keypad (0 or 1), the torque reference value
is displayed.
21 Torque Limit If torque limit setting (Cn.53) is set to a
value other than keypad (0 or 1), the
torque limit value is displayed.
23 Spd Limit If the speed limit setting (Cn.62) on torque
control mode is set to a value other than
keypad (0 or 1), the speed limit setting is
displayed.
Select the items to be displayed in monitor mode. Monitor mode is
CNF-21–23 Monitor Line- the first displayed mode when the inverter is powered on. A total of
x three items, from monitor line-1 to monitor line- 3, can be displayed
simultaneously.
CNF-24 Mon Mode Init Selecting 1(Yes) initializes CNF-20–23.
270
Note
Inverter power consumption
Values are calculated using voltage and current. Electric power is calculated every second and
the results are accumulated. Setting CNF-62 (WH Count Reset) value to 1(Yes) will reset
cumulated electric energy consumption. Power consumption is displayed as shown below:
• Less than 1,000 kW: Units are in kW, displayed in 999.9 kW format.
• 1–99 MW: Units are in MW, displayed in 99.99 MWh format.
• 100–999 MW: Units are in MW, displayed in 999.9 MWh format.
• More than 1,000 MW: Units are in MW, displayed in 9,999 MWh format and can be displayed
up to 65,535 MW. (Values exceeding 65,535MW will reset the value to 0, and units will return
to kW. It will be displayed in 999.9 kW format).
5.38 Operation Time Monitor

Monitors inverter and fan operation time.
Parameter Setting
Setting Range
Inverter operation
70 On-time 0/00/00 00:00 - min
accumulated time
Inverter operation
71 accumulated time Run-time 0/00/00 00:00 - min
Inverter operation
CNF* 72 accumulated time Time Reset 0 No 0–1 -
initialization
Cooling fan operation
74 accumulated time Fan time 0/00/00 00:00 - min
Cooling fan operation
Fan Time
75 accumulated time 0 No 0–1 -
initialization Reset
271
Operation Time Monitor Setting Details

Code Description
Displays accumulated power supply time. Information is displayed in
CNF-70 On-time
[YY/MM/DD Hr: Min (0/00/00 00: 00)] format.
Displays accumulated time of voltage output by operation command
CNF-71 Run-time input. Information is displayed in [YY/MM/DD Hr: Min (0/00/00 00: 00)]
format.
Setting 1(Yes) will delete power supply accumulated time (On-time) and
CNF-72 Time Reset operation accumulated time (Run-time) and is displayed as 0/00/00 00:00
format.
Displays accumulated time of inverter cooling fan operation. Information
CNF-74 Fan time
will be displayed in [YY/MM/DD Hr: Min (0/00/00 00: 00)] format.
Setting 1(Yes) will delete cooling fan operation accumulated time(on-
CNF-75 Fan Time
time) and operation accumulated time (Run-time) and will display it in
Reset
0/00/00 00:00 format.
272
Learning Protection Features
6 Learning Protection Features

Protection features provided by the Sinus H series inverter are categorized into two types:
protection from overheating damage to the motor, and protection against the inverter
malfunction.
6.1 Motor Protection
6.1.1 Electronic Thermal Motor Overheating Prevention (ETH)

ETH is a protective function that uses the output current of the inverter without a separate
temperature sensor, to predict a rise in motor temperature to protect the motor based on
its heat characteristics.

Setting range
Pr 40 Electronic thermal ETH Trip Sel 0 None 0-2 -
prevention fault trip
selection
41 Motor cooling fan Motor Cooling 0 Self-cool - -
type
42 Electronic thermal one ETH 1min 150 120-200 %
minute rating
43 Electronic thermal ETH Cont 120 50-150 %
prevention
continuous rating
Electronic Thermal (ETH) Prevention Function Setting Details

Code Description
Pr.40 ETH Trip Sel ETH can be selected to provide motor thermal protection. The LCD screen
displays “E-Thermal.”
Setting Function
0 None The ETH function is not activated.
1 Free-Run The inverter output is blocked. The motor coasts to
a halt (free-run).
2 Dec The inverter decelerates the motor to a stop.
273
Code Description
Pr.41 Motor Cooling Select the drive mode of the cooling fan, attached to the motor.
Setting Function
0 Self-cool As the cooling fan is connected to the motor axis,
the cooling effect varies, based on motor speed.
Most universal induction motors have this design.
1 Forced- Additional power is supplied to operate the cooling
cool fan. This provides extended operation at low speeds.
Motors designed for inverters typically have this
design.
Pr.42 ETH 1 min The amount of input current that can be continuously supplied to the
motor for 1 minute, based on the motor-rated current (bA.13).
Pr.43 ETH Cont Sets the amount of current with the ETH function activated. The range
below details the set values that can be used during continuous
operation without the protection function.
274
6.1.2 Overload Early Warning and Trip

A warning or fault ‘trip’ (cutoff) occurs when the motor reaches an overload state, based on
the motor’s rated current. The amount of current for warnings and trips can be set
separately.

Setting range
Pr 04 Load level setting Load Duty 1 Heavy - -
Duty
17 Overload warning OL Warn Select 1 Yes 0-1 -
selection
18 Overload warning level OL Warn Level 150 30-180 %
19 Overload warning time OL Warn Time 10.0 0-30 s
20 Motion at overload trip OL Trip Select 1 Free-Run - -
21 Overload trip level OL Trip Level 180 30-200 %
22 Overload trip time OL Trip Time 60.0 0-60.0 s
OU 31 Multi-function relay 1 Relay 1 5 Over - -
item Load
33 Multi-function output 1 Q1 Define
item
Overload Early Warning and Trip Setting Details
Code Description
Pr.04 Load Duty Select the load level.
Setting Function
Used in underloads, like fans and pumps (overload
Normal
0 tolerance: 120% of rated underload current for 1
Duty
minute).
Used in heavy loads, like hoists, cranes, and parking
1 Heavy Duty devices (overload tolerance: 150% of rated heavy load
current for 1 minute).
Pr.17 OL Warn If the overload reaches the warning level, the terminal block multi-function
Select output terminal and relay are used to output a warning signal. If 1 (Yes) is
selected, it will operate. If 0 (No) is selected, it will not operate.
Pr.18 OL Warn When the input current to the motor is greater than the overload warning
Level, level (OL Warn Level) and continues at that level during the overload
Pr.19 OL Warn Time warning time (OL Warn Time), the multi-function output (Relay 1, Q1) sends
a warning signal. When Over Load is selected at OU.31 and 33, the multi-
function output terminal or relay outputs a signal. The the signal output
does not block the inverter output.
275
Code Description
Pr.20 OL Trip Select Select the inverter protective action in the event of an overload fault trip.
Setting Function
0 None No protective action is taken.
In the event of an overload fault, inverter output is
1 Free-Run
blocked and the motor will free-run due to inertia.
3 Dec If a fault trip occurs, the motor decelerates and stops.
Pr.21 OL Trip Level, When the current supplied to the motor is greater than the preset value at
Pr.22 OL Trip Time the overload trip level (OL Trip Level) and continues to be supplied during
the overload trip time (OL Trip Time), the inverter output is either blocked
according to the preset mode from Pr. 17 or slows to a stop after
deceleration.
Note
Overload warnings warn of an overload before an overload fault trip occurs. The overload
warning signal may not work in an overload fault trip situation, if the overload warn level (OL
Warn Level) and the overload warn time (OL Warn Time) are set higher than the overload trip
level (OL Trip Level) and overload trip time (OL Trip Time).
6.1.3 Stall Prevention and Flux Braking

The stall prevention function is a protective function that prevents motor stall caused by
overloads. If a motor stall occurs due to an overload, the inverter operation frequency is
adjusted automatically. When stall is caused by overload, high currents are induced in the
motor may cause motor overheat or damage the motor and interrupt operation of the
motor-driven devices.
To protect the motor from overload faults, the inverter output frequency is adjusted
automatically, based on the size of load.
276
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting range Unit

Setting
Pr 50 Stall prevention and Stall Prevent 0000* - bit
flux braking
51 Stall frequency 1 Stall Freq 1 50.00 Start frequency– Hz
Stall Freq 1
52 Stall level 1 Stall Level 1 180 30-250 %
53 Stall frequency 2 Stall Freq 2 50.00 Stall Freq 1–Stall Hz
Freq 3
55 Stall frequency 3 Stall Freq 3 50.00 Stall Freq 2–Stall Hz
Freq 4
57 Stall frequency 4 Stall Freq 4 50.00 Stall Freq 3– Hz
Maximum
frequency
OU 31 Multi-function relay 1 Relay 1 9 Stall - -
item
33 Multi-function Q1 Define
output 1 item
* The value is displayed on the keypad as .
Stall Prevention Function and Flux Braking Setting Details
Code Description
Pr.50 Stall Prevent Stall prevention can be configured for acceleration, deceleration, or while
operating a motor at constant speed. When the top LCD segment is on, the
corresponding bit is set. When the bottom LCD segment is on, the
corresponding bit is off.
Item Bit Status (On) Bit Status (Off )
Keypad
LCD keypad
Setting Function
Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1
 Stall protection during acceleration
 Stall protection while operating at
a constant speed
 Stall protection during
deceleration
277
 Flux braking during deceleration
Setting Function
0001 Stall If inverter output current exceeds the preset stall
protection level (Pr. 52, 54, 56, 58) during acceleration, the
during motor stops accelerating and starts decelerating. If
acceleration current level stays above the stall level, the motor
decelerates to the start frequency (dr.19). If the
current level causes deceleration below the preset
level while operating the stall protection function,
the motor resumes acceleration.
0010 Stall Similar to stall protection function during
protection acceleration, the output frequency automatically
while decelerates when the current level exceeds the
operating at preset stall level while operating at constant
constant speed. When the load current decelerates below
speed the preset level, it resumes acceleration.
0100 Stall The inverter decelerates and keeps the DC link
protection voltage below a certain level to prevent an over
during voltage fault trip during deceleration. As a result,
deceleration deceleration times can be longer than the set time
depending on the load.
1000 Flux braking When using flux braking, deceleration time may be
during reduced because regenerative energy is expended
deceleration at the motor.
1100 Stall Stall protection and flux braking operate together
protection during deceleration to achieve the shortest and
and flux most stable deceleration performance.
braking
during
deceleration
278
Pr.51 Stall Freq 1- Additional stall protection levels can be configured for different frequencies,
Pr.58 Stall Level 4 based on the load type. As shown in the graph below, the stall level can be
set above the base frequency. The lower and upper limits are set using
numbers that correspond in ascending order. For example, the range for Stall
Frequency 2 (Stall Freq 2) becomes the lower limit for Stall Frequency 1 (Stall
Freq 1) and the upper limit for Stall Frequency 3 (Stall Freq 3).
279
Note
Stall protection and flux braking operate together only during deceleration. Turn on the third
and fourth bits of Pr.50 (Stall Prevention) to achieve the shortest and most stable deceleration
performance without triggering an overvoltage fault trip for loads with high inertia and short
deceleration times. Do not use this function when frequent deceleration of the load is required,
as the motor can overheat and may be damaged easily.
• Use caution when decelerating while using stall protection as depending on the load, the
deceleration time can take longer than the time set. Acceleration stops when stall
protection operates during acceleration. This may make the actual acceleration time longer
than the preset acceleration time.
• When the motor is operating, Stall Level 1 applies and determines the operation of stall
protection.
6.2 Inverter and Sequence Protection
6.2.1 Open-phase Protection

Open-phase protection is used to prevent overcurrent levels induced at the inverter inputs due
to an open-phase within the input power supply. Open-phase output protection is also
available. An open-phase at the connection between the motor and the inverter output may
cause the motor to stall, due to a lack of torque.

Setting range
Pr 05 Input/output open- Phase Loss Chk 10* - bit
phase protection
06 Open-phase input IPO V Band 40 1-100V V
voltage band
* The value is displayed on the keypad as .
280
Input and Output Open-phase Protection Setting Details
Code Description
Pr.05 Phase Loss When open-phase protection is operating, input and output
Chk, configurations are displayed differently. When the top LCD segment is On,
Pr.06 IPO V Band the corresponding bit is set to On. When the bottom LCD segment is On,
the corresponding bit is set to Off.
Item Bit status (On) Bit status (Off )
Keypad
LCD keypad
Setting Function
Bit 2 Bit 1
 Output open-phase protection
 Input open-phase protection
6.2.2 External Trip Signal

Set one of the multi-function input terminals to 4 (External Trip) to allow the inverter to
stop operation when abnormal operating conditions arise.

Setting range
In 65-71 Px terminal setting Px Define 4 External - -
in IP20 options (Px: P1-P7 in Trip
65-69 P1-P5 in IP66
in IP66 models)
models
87 Multi-function input DI NC/NO Sel - bit
contact selction
281
External Trip Signal Setting Details
Code Description
In.87 DI NC/NO Selects the type of input contact. If the mark of the switch is at the bottom
Sel (0), it operates as an A contact (Normally Open). If the mark is at the top (1), it
operates as a B contact (Normally Closed).
The corresponding terminals for each bit are as follows:
Bit 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Terminal P7 P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1
6.2.3 Inverter Overload Protection

When the inverter input current exceeds the rated current, a protective function is activated
to prevent damages to the inverter based on inverse proportional characteristics.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
OU 31 Multi-function relay 1 Relay 1 6 IOL - -
33 Multi-function output Q1 Define
1
Note
A warning signal output can be provided in advance by the multi-function output terminal
before the inverter overload protection function (IOLT) operates. When the overcurrent time
reaches 60% of the allowed overcurrent (150%, 1 min), a warning signal output is provided
(signal output at 150%, 36sec).
282
6.2.4 Speed Command Loss

When setting operation speed using an analog input at the terminal block, communication
options, or the keypad, speed command loss setting can be used to select the inverter
operation for situations when the speed command is lost due to the disconnection of signal
cables.

Setting
Pr 12 Speed command Lost Cmd 1 Free-Run - -
loss operation mode Mode
13 Time to determine Lost Cmd 1.0 0.1-120 s
speed command Time
loss
14 Operation frequency Lost Preset F 0.00 Start Hz
at speed command frequency–
loss Max.
frequency
15 Analog input loss AI Lost Level 0 Half of x1 -
decision level
OU 31 Multi-function Relay Relay 1 13 Lost - -
1 Command
output 1
Speed Command Loss Setting Details

Code Description
Pr.12 Lost Cmd In situations when speed commands are lost, the inverter can be
Mode configured to operate in a specific mode:
Setting Function
0 None The speed command immediately becomes the
operation frequency without any protection
function.
1 Free-Run The inverter blocks output. The motor performs
in free-run condition.
2 Dec The motor decelerates and then stops at the
time set at Pr.07 (Trip Dec Time).
3 Hold Input The inverter calculates the average input value
for 10 seconds before the loss of the speed
command and uses it as the speed reference.
4 Hold Output The inverter calculates the average output value
283
Code Description
5 Lost Preset The inverter operates at the frequency set at Pr.
14 (Lost Preset F).
Pr.15 AI Lost Level, Configure the voltage and decision time for speed command loss when
Pr.13 Lst Cmd Time using analog input.
Setting Function
0 Half of x1 Based on the values set at In.08 and In.12,
protective operation starts when the input
signal is reduced to half of the initial value of
the analog input set using the speed command
(Frq code of Operation group) and it continues
for the time (speed loss decision time) set at Pr.
13 (Lost Cmd Time). For example, set the speed
command to 2 (V1) at the Frq code in the
Operation group, and In.06 (V1 Polarity) to 0
(Unipolar). When the voltage input drops to less
than half of the value set at In.08 (V1 Volt x 1),
the protective function is activated.
1 Below x1 The protective operation starts when the signal
becomes smaller than the initial value of the
analog input set by the speed command and it
continues for the speed loss decision time set at
Pr.13 (Lost Cmd Time). Codes In.08 and In.12 are
used to set the standard values.
Pr.14 Lost Preset F In situations where speed commands are lost, set the operation mode
(Pr.12 Lost Cmd Mode) to 5 (Lost Preset). This operates the protection
function and sets the frequency so that the operation can continue.
Set Pr.15 (Al Lost Level) to 1 (Below x 1), Pr.12 (Lost Cmd Mode) to 2 (Dec), and Pr.13 (Lost
Cmd Time) to 5 sec. Then it operates as follows:
284
Note
If speed command is lost while using communication options or the integrated RS-485
communication, the protection function operates after the command loss decision time set at
Pr.13 (Lost Cmd Time) is passed.
6.2.5 Dynamic Braking (DB) Resistor Configuration

For Sinus H series, the braking resistor circuit is integrated inside the inverter.

range
Pr 66 Braking resistor DB Warn %ED 10 0-30 %
configuration
OU 31 Multi-function relay Relay 1 31 DB Warn - -
1 item %ED
output 1 item
Dynamic Braking Resistor Setting Details
Code Description
Pr.66 DB Warn %ED Set braking resistor configuration (%ED: Duty cycle). Braking resistor
configuration sets the rate at which the braking resistor operates for one
operation cycle. The maximum time for continuous braking is 15 sec and
the braking resistor signal is not output from the inverter after the 15 sec
period has expired. An example of braking resistor set up is as follows:
[Example 1]
285
Code Description
[Example 2]
• T_acc: Acceleration time to set frequency

• T_steady: Constant speed operation time at set frequency
• T_dec: Deceleration time to a frequency lower than constant speed
operation or the stop time from constant speed operation frequency
• T_stop: Stop time until operation resumes
Do not set the braking resistor to exceed the resistor’s power rating. If overloaded, it can
overheat and cause a fire. When using a resistor with a heat sensor, the sensor output can be
used as an external trip signal for the inverter’s multi-function input.
6.3 Under load Fault Trip and Warning

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Pr 04 Load level selection Load Duty 0 Normal Duty -
25 Under load UL Warn Sel 1 Yes 0-1 -
warning selection
26 Under load UL Warn 10.0 0-600 sec
warning time Time
27 Under load trip UL Trip Sel 1 Free-Run - -
selection
28 Under load trip UL Trip Time 30.0 0-600 sec
timer
29 Under load upper UL LF Level 30 10-100 %
limit level
30 Under load lower UL BF Level 30 10-100 %
limit level
286
Under Load Trip and Warning Setting Details
Code Description
Pr.27 UL Trip Sel Sets the underload fault trip occurs. If set to 0(None), does not detect
the underload fault trip. If set to 1 (Free-Run), the output is blocked in
an underload fault trip situation. If set to 2 (Dec), the motor decelerates
and stops when an underload trip occurs.
Pr.25 UL Warn Sel Sets the underload warning options. Set to 1(Yes) and set the multi-
function output terminals (at OU-31 and 33) to 7 (Underload). The
warning signals are output when an underload condition arises.
Pr.26 UL Warn Time, The protection function operates when the underload level condition
Pr.28 UL Trip Time explained above is maintained for a set warning time or fault trip time.
This function does not operate if energy-saving operation is activated
at Ad-50 (E-Save Mode).
Pr.29 UL LF Level, • Setting Heavy Duty
Pr.30 UL BF Level - Do not support Pr.29.
- At Pr.30, the underload level is decided based on the motor’s rated
current.
• Setting Normal Duty

- At Pr.29, the under load rate is decided based on twice the operation
frequency of the motor’s rated slip speed (bA.12 Rated Slip).
- At Pr.30, the under load rate is decided based on the base frequency set
at dr.18 (Base Freq).An upper limit and lower limit is based on the
inverter’s rated current.
287
6.3.1 Fan Fault Detection

Setting range
Pr 79 Cooling fan fault FAN Trip 1 Warning
selection Mode
OU 31 Multi-function relay 1 Relay 1 8 FAN Warning -
OU 33 Multi-function output 1 Q1 Define
Fan Fault Detection Setting Details
Code Description
Pr.79 FAN Trip Mode Set the cooling fan fault mode.
Setting Function
0 Trip The inverter output is blocked and the fan trip is
displayed when a cooling fan error is detected.
1 Warning When OU.33 (Q1 Define) and OU.31 (Relay1) are
set to 8 (FAN Warning), the fan error signal is
output and the operation continues.
OU.33 Q1 Define, When the code value is set to 8 (FAN Warning), the fan error signal is
OU.31 Relay1 output and operation continues. However, when the inverter inside
temperature rises above a certain level, output is blocked due to activation
of overheat protection.
6.3.2 Lifetime Diagnosis of Components

Registering a capacitance reference for inspection
Note
To perform a capacitor diagnosis, a capacitance reference must be measured and registered by
setting Pr-61 (CAP Diag) to 1 (Ref Diag) when the inverter is used for the first time. The measured
reference value is saved at Pr-63 and is used asthe reference for the capacitor life diagnosis.
Refer to the following instructions to measure a reference capacitance.

1 Set an appropriate capacitor diagnosis current based on the inverter’s rated output at
Pr-60 (CAP DiagCurr).
• The capacitor diagnosis current is a direct current that is applied to the capacitor for
inspection, and is defined asin a percentage of the rated inverter output. Because the
288
value is defined based on the inverter output, set an appropriate value if the motor
has smaller rated current.
2 At Pr-62 (CAP Exchange Level), set the capacitor replacement warning level to a value
between 50.0% and 95.0%
3 Set Pr-61 (CAP Diag) to “1” (Ref Diag). Then, the direct current set at Pr-60 (CAP
DiagCurr)is output.
• The capacitor diagnosis is only available when the inverter is stopped.
• If Pr-61is set to 1 (Ref Diag), the displayed value at Pr-63 reflects 100% of the
measured capacitance.
• If you plan to perform a capacitor diagnosis using Pr-61(CAP Diag), the initial
capacitance must be measured when the inverter is used for the first time. A
capacitance measured on a used inverter leads to inaccurate inspection results due
to an incorrect reference capacitance value.
4 Turn off the input to the inverter.
5 Turn on the inverter when a low voltage trip (LVT) occurs.
6 View the value displayed at Pr-63 (CAP Diag Level). When Pr-61 is set to “1” (Ref Diag),
Pr-63 displays 100% of the capacitance.
[Main Capacitor Diagnosis details]

Group Code Name LCD Display Setting value Setting Range Unit
Capacitance
60 Diagnose current CAP. DiagPerc 0.0 10.0-100.0 %
Level
0 None
CAP. Diagnosis 1 Ref Diag
61 CAP. Diag 0 %
Pr mode 2 Pre Diag
3 Init Diag
62 CAP Exchange CAP Exchange 0 %
50.0 ~ 95.0
Level Level
63 CAP Diag Level CAP Diag 0 %
0.0 ~ 100.0
Level
Inspecting the capacitor life and initializing the capacitance reference
Refer to the following instructions to inspect the capacitor life and initialize the capacitance
reference.
289
Note
To perform a capacitor diagnosis, a capacitance reference must be measured and registered by
setting Pr-61 (CAP Diag) to 1 (Ref Diag) when the inverter is used for the first time. The measured
reference value is registered at PRT-63, and is used asthe reference for the capacitor life
diagnosis.
1 On an inverter whose run time has reached the cumulated time for capacitor
replacement, set Pr-61 (CAP Diag) to 2 (Pre Diag).
2 Check the value displayed at Pr-63 (CAP Diag Level). If the value displayed at Pr-63 is
smaller than the value set at Pr-62 (CAP. Level 1), a capacitor replacement warning (CAP
Exchange) will occur.
3 While the capacitor replacement warning continues, confirm that the first bit at Pr-89
(Inverter State) is set.
4 Set Pr-62 to 0.0%. The capacitor replacement warning (CAP Exchange) will be released.
5 Set Pr-61 to 3 (CAP. Init) and make sure that the value displayed at Pr-63has changed to
0.0%.
Lifetime diagnosis for fans
Enter the Pr-87(Fan exchange warning level) code (%). After the selected usage (%) is
reached (out of 50,000 hours), the fan exchange warning message will appear in the multi-
functional output or keypad.
The total fan usage level (%) appears at Pr-86. When exchanging fans, you may initialize the
accumulated value to 0 by setting the CNF-75 (Initializing accumulated time for cooling
fans) to 1.
Grou Cod Name LCD Display Setting value Setting Unit

Accumulated 0.0-6553.5
86 FAN Time Perc 0.0 %
percentof fan usage
Pr
Fan exchange FAN Exchange
87 90.0 0.0-100.0 %
warning Level level
Initialize operation 0 No
CNF* 75 FAN Time Rst - -
time of cooling fans
1 Yes
31 Multi-function relay 1 Relay 1 -
32 Multi-function relay 2 Relay 2 FAN
OU 38
Multi-function output Exchange
33 Q1 Define
1
290
6.3.3 Low Voltage Fault Trip

When inverter input power is lost and the internal DC link voltage drops below a certain voltage
level, the inverter stops output and a low voltage trip occurs.

range
Pr 81 Low voltage trip LVT Delay 0.0 0-60 sec
decision delay time
OU 31 Multi-function relay 1 Relay 1 11 Low Voltage -
33 Multi-function output Q1 Define
1
Low Voltage Fault Trip Setting Details
Code Description
Pr.81 LVT Delay If the code value is set to 11 (Low Voltage), the inverter stops the output
first when a low voltage trip condition arises, then a fault trip occurs after
the low voltage trip decision time is passed. The warning signal for a low
voltage fault trip can be provided using the multi-function output or a
relay. However, the low voltage trip delay time (LVT Delay time) does not
apply to warning signals.
6.3.4 Output Block by Multi-Function Terminal

When the multi-function input terminal is set as the output block signal terminal and the
signal is input to the terminal, then the operation stops.

Setting range
In 65-71 Px terminal setting Px Define 5 BX - -
in IP20 options (Px: P1-P7 in IP20
models, models,
65-69 P1-P5 in IP66
in IP66 models)
models
291
Output Block by Multi-Function Terminal Setting Details
Code Description
In.65-71 (P1-P7 in When the operation of the multi-function input terminal is set to 5 (BX)
IP20 models), and is turned on during operation, the inverter blocks the output and ‘BX’
In.65-69 (P1-P5 in is displayed on the keypad display. While ‘BX’ is displayed on the keypad
IP66 models) screen, the inverter’s operation information including the operation
Px Define frequency and current at the time of BX signal can be monitored. The
inverter resumes operation when the BX terminal turns off and operation
command is input.
6.3.5 Trip Status Reset

Restart the inverter using the keypad or analog input terminal, to reset the trip status.

Setting range
In 65-71 Px terminal Px Define 3 RST - -
in IP20 setting options (Px: P1-P7 in IP20
models, models,
65-69 P1-P5 in IP66
in IP66 models)
models
Trip Status Reset Setting Details
Code Description
In.65-71 (P1-P7 in Press [Stop/Reset] key on the keypad or use the multi-function input
IP20 models), terminal to restart the inverter. Set the multi-function input terminal to 3
In.65-69 (P1-P5 in (RST) and turn on the terminal to reset the trip status.
IP66 models)
Px Define
6.3.6 Inverter Diagnosis State

Check the diagnosis of components or devices for inverter to check if they need to be
replaced.
Parameter
Setting
Bit 00-10
CAP, FAN
00 -
PRT 89 replacement Inverter State Bit
01 CAP Warning
warning
10 FAN Warning
292
6.3.7 Operation Mode on Option Card Trip

Option card trips may occur when an option card is used with the inverter. Set the operation
mode for the inverter when a communication error occurs between the option card and the
inverter body, or when the option card is detached during operation.
Setting range
Pr 80 Operation mode on Opt Trip Mode 0 None 0-3 -
option card trip 1 Free-Run
2 Dec
Operation Mode on Option Trip Setting Details
Code Description
Pr.80 Opt Trip Mode Setting Function
0 None No operation
The inverter output is blocked and fault trip
1 Free-Run
information is shown on the keypad.
The motor decelerates to the value set at Pr.07
2 Dec
(Trip Dec Time).
6.3.8 No Motor Trip

If an operation command is run when the motor is disconnected from the inverter output
terminal, a ‘no motor trip’ occurs and a protective operation is performed by the system.

Setting range
Pr 31 Operation on no motor No Motor Trip 0 None - -
trip
32 No motor trip current No Motor Level 5 1-100 %
level
33 No motor detection time No Motor Time 3.0 0.1-10 s
293
No Motor Trip Setting Details
Code Description
Pr.32 No Motor If the output current value [based on the rated current (bA.13)] is lower
Level, Pr.33 No than the value set at Pr.32 (No Motor Level), and if this continues for the
Motor Time time set at Pr.33 (No Motor Time), a ‘no motor trip’ occurs.
If bA.07 (V/F Pattern) is set to 1 (Square), set Pr.32 (No Motor Level) to a value lower than the
factory default. Otherwise, ‘no motor trip’ due to a lack of output current will result when the ‘no
motor trip’ operation is set.
6.3.9 Low Voltage Trip 2

If you set the Pr-82(LV2 Selection) code to Yes (1), the trip notification is displayed when a
low voltage trip occurs. In this case, even if the voltage of the DC Link condenser is higher
than the trip level, the LV2 trip will not be retrieved. To retrieve the trip, reset the inverter.
The trip history will not be saved.
Parameter
Setting
Pr 82 LV2 Selection LV2 Enable Yes(1) 0/1 -
6.4 Fault/Warning List

The following list shows the types of faults and warnings that can occur while using the
Sinus H inverter. Please refer to 6 Learning Protection Features on page 273 for details about
faults and warnings.
294
Category LCD Display Details

Major fault Latch type Over Current1 Over current trip
Over Voltage Over voltage trip
External Trip Trip due to an external signal
NTC Open Temperature sensor fault trip
Over Current2 ARM short current fault trip
Option Trip-x* Option fault trip*
Over Heat Over heat fault trip
Out Phase Open Output open-phase fault trip
In Phase Open Input open-phase fault trip
Inverter OLT Inverter overload fault trip
Ground Trip Ground fault trip
Fan Trip Fan fault trip
E-Thermal Motor overheat fault trip
Pre-PID Fail Pre-PID operation failure
IO Board Trip IO Board connection fault trip
Ext-Brake External brake fault trip
No Motor Trip No motor fault trip
Low Voltage 2 Low voltage fault trip during operation
ParaWrite Trip** Write parameter fault trip
Level type Low Voltage Low voltage fault trip
BX Emergency stop fault trip
Lost Command Command loss trip
Safety A(B) Err Safety A(B) contact trip
Hardware EEP Err External memory error
damage ADC Off Set Analog input error
Watch Dog-1 CPU Watch Dog fault trip
Watch Dog-2
Minor fault Over Load Motor overload fault trip
Under Load Motor underload fault trip
295
Category LCD Display Details

Warning Lost Command Command loss fault trip warning
Over Load Overload warning
Under Load Under load warning
Inverter OLT Inverter overload warning
Fan Warning Fan operation warning
DB Warn %ED Braking resistor braking rate warning
Retry Tr Tune Rotor time constant tuning error
CAP Exchange Capacitor replacement warning
FAN Exchange Fan replacement warning
* Applies only when an option board is used.
** Displayed on an LCD keypad only.
296
RS-485 Communication Features
7 RS-485 Communication Features

This section in the user manual explains how to control the inverter with a PLC or a
computer over a long distance using the RS-485 communication features. To use the RS-485
communication features, connect the communication cables and set the communication
parameters on the inverter. Refer to the communication protocols and parameters to
configure and use the RS-485 communication features.
7.1 Communication Standards

Following the RS-485 communication standards, Sinus H products exchange data with a
PLC and computer. The RS-485 communication standards support the Multi-drop Link
System and offer an interface that is strongly resistant to noise. Please refer to the following
table for details about the communication standards.
Item Standard
Communication RS-485/Bus type, Multi-drop Link System
method/ Transmission
type
Inverter type name Sinus H
Number of connected Maximum of 16 inverters / Maximum1,200m (recommended distance:
inverters/ Transmission within 700m)
distance
Recommended cable 0.75mm², (18AWG), Shielded Type Twisted-Pair (STP) Wire
size
Installation type Dedicated terminals (S+/S-/SG) on the control terminal block
Power supply Supplied by the inverter - insulated power source from the inverter’s
internal circuit
Communication speed 1,200/2,400/9,600/19,200/38,400/57,600/115,200 bps
Control procedure Asynchronous communications system
Communication system Half duplex system
Character system Modbus-RTU: Binary
Stop bit length 1-bit/2-bit
Frame error check 2 bytes
Parity check None/Even/Odd
297
7.2 Communication System Configuration

In an RS-485 communication system, the PLC or computer is the master device and the
inverter is the slave device. When using a computer as the master, the USB converter must
be integrated with the computer, so that it can communicate with the inverter through the
USB/RS-485 converter. Specifications and performance of converters may vary depending
on the manufacturer, but the basic functions are identical. Please refer to the converter
manufacturer’s user manual for details about features and specifications.
Connect the wires and configure the communication parameters on the inverter by
referring to the following illustration of the communication system configuration.
7.2.1 Communication Line Connection

Make sure that the inverter is turned off completely, and then connect the RS-485
communication line to the S+/S-/SG terminals of the terminal block. The maximum number
of inverters you can connect is 16. For communication lines, use shielded twisted pair (STP)
cables.
The maximum length of the communication line is 1,200 meters, but it is recommended to
use no more than 700 meters of communication line to ensure stable communication.
Please use a repeater to enhance the communication speed when using a communication
line longer than 1,200 meters or when using a large number of devices. A repeater is
effective when smooth communication is not available due to noise interference.
When wiring the communication line, make sure that the SG terminals on the PLC and inverter
are connected. SG terminals prevent communication errors due to electronic noise interference.
298
7.2.2 Setting Communication Parameters

Before proceeding with setting communication configurations, make sure that the
communication lines are connected properly. Turn on the inverter and set the
communication parameters.

Setting range
CM 01 Built-in Int485 St ID 1 1-250 -
communication
inverter ID
02 Built-in Int485 Proto 0 ModBus RTU 0 -
communication
protocol
03 Built-in Int485 3 9600 bps 0-7 -
communication speed BaudR
04 Built-in Int485 Mode 0 D8/PN/S1 0-3 -
communication frame
setting
05 Transmission delay Resp Delay 5 0-1000 ms
after reception
Communication Parameters Setting Details

Code Description
CM.01 Int485 St ID Set the inverter station ID between 1 and 250.
CM.03 Int485 BaudR Set a communication setting speed up to 115,200 bps.
Setting Function
0 1,200 bps
1 2,400 bps
2 4,800 bps
3 9,600 bps
4 19,200 bps
5 38,400 bps
6 56K bps
7 115 Kbps
299
Code Description
CM.04 Int485 Mode Set a communication configuration. Set the data length, parity check
method, and the number of stop bits.
Setting Function
0 D8/PN/S1 8-bit data / no parity check / 1 stop bit
1 D8/PN/S2 8-bit data / no parity check / 2 stop bits
2 D8/PE/S1 8-bit data / even parity / 1 stop bit
3 D8/PO/S1 8-bit data / odd parity / 1 stop bit
CM.05 Resp Delay Set the response time for the slave (inverter) to react to the request from
the master. Response time is used in a system where the slave device
response is too fast for the master device to process. Set this code to an
appropriate value for smooth master-slave communication.
7.2.3 Setting Operation Command and Frequency

To select the built-in RS485 communication as the source of command, set the Frq code to
6 (Int485) on the keypad (basic keypad with 7-segment display). On an LCD keypad, set the
DRV code to 3 (Int485). Then, set common area parameters for the operation command
and frequency via communication.

Setting
Pr 12 Speed command loss Lost Cmd 1 Free-Run 0-5 -
operation mode Mode
13 Time to determine Lost Cmd Time 1.0 0.1-120 s
speed command loss
14 Operation frequency at Lost Preset F 0.00 Start Hz
speed command loss frequency–
Maximum
frequency
300
Group Code Name LCD Parameter Setting Setting Unit

Display range
OU 31 Multi-function Relay 1 13 Lost 0-35 -
relay 1 Command
output 1
Operation DRV Command source Cmd 3 Int 485 0-4 -
Source*
Frq Frequency Freq Ref Src 6 Int 485 0-12 -
setting method
* Displayed in DRV-06 on an LCD keypad.
7.2.4 Command Loss Protective Operation

Configure the command loss decision standards and protective operations run when a
communication problem lasts for a specified period of time.
Command Loss Protective Operation Setting Details
Code Description
Pr.12 Lost Cmd Select the operation to run when a communication error has occurred and
Mode, lasted exceeding the time set at Pr. 13.
Pr.13 Lost Cmd Time
Setting Function
0 None The speed command immediately becomes the
operation frequency without any protection
function.
1 Free-Run The inverter blocks output. The motor performs
in free-run condition.
2 Dec The motor decelerates and then stops at the
time set at Pr.07 (Trip Dec Time).
3 Hold Input The inverter calculates the average input value
4 Hold Output The inverter calculates the average output value
5 Lost Preset The inverter operates at the frequency set at Pr.
14 (Lost Preset F).
301
7.2.5 Setting Virtual Multi-Function Input

Multi-function input can be controlled using a communication address (0h0385). Set codes
CM.70–77 to the functions to operate, and then set the BIT relevant to the function to 1 at
0h0322 to operate it. Virtual multi-function operates independently from In.65-71 in IP20
models, In.65-69 in IP66 models multi-function inputs and cannot be set redundantly.
Virtual multi-function input can be monitored using CM.86 (Virt Dl Status). Before you
configure the virtual multi-function inputs, set the DRV code according to the command
source.

CM 70-77 Communication Virtual DI x 0 None 0-49 -
multi-function input x (x: 1-8)
86 Communication Virt DI Status - - - -
multi-function input
monitoring
Example: When sending an Fx command by controlling virtual multi-function input in the

common area via Int485, set CM.70 to FX and set address 0h0322 to 0h0001.
Note
The following are values and functions that are applied to address 0h0322:.
Setting Function
0h0001 Forward operation (Fx)
0h0003 Reverse operation (Rx)
0h0000 Stop
7.2.6 Saving Parameters Defined by Communication

If you turn off the inverter after setting the common area parameters or keypad parameters
via communication and operate the inverter, the changes are lost and the values changed
via communication revert to the previous setting values when you turn on the inverter.
Set CNF-48 to 1 (Yes) to allow all the changes over comunication to be saved, so that the
inverter retains all the existing values even after the power has been turned off.
302
Setting address 0h03E0 to 0 and then setting it again to 1 via communication allows the
existing parameter settings to be saved. However, setting address 0h03E0 to 1 and then
setting it to 0 does not carry out the same function. Parameters defined by communication
can only be saved using an LCD keypad.

Setting range
CNF* 48 Save parameters Parameter 0 No 0 -1 -
Save 1 Yes
*Available on an LCD keypad only.
7.2.7 Total Memory Map for Communication

Communication Area Memory Map Details
Communication common compatible 0h0000- Sinus H compatible area
area 0h00FF
Parameter registration type area 0h0100- Areas registered at CM.31–38 and
0h01FF CM.51–58
0h0200- Area registered for User Group
0h023F
0h0240- Area registered for Macro Group
0h027F
0h0280- Reserved
0h02FF
Sinus H communication common area 0h0300- Inverter monitoring area
0h037F
0h0380- Inverter control area
0h03DF
0h03E0- Inverter memory control area
0h03FF
0h0400- Reserved
0h0FFF
0h1100 dr Group
0h1200 bA Group
0h1300 Ad Group
0h1400 Cn Group
0h1500 In Group
0h1600 OU Group
0h1700 CM Group
0h1800 AP Group
0h1B00 Pr Group
0h1C00 M2 Group
303
7.2.8 Parameter Group for Data Transmission

By defining a parameter group for data transmission, the communication addresses
registered in the communication function group (CM) can be used in communication.
Parameter group for data transmission may be defined to transmit multiple parameters at
once, into the communication frame.

Setting range
CM 31-38 Output Para Status-x - - 0000-FFFF Hex
communication
address x
51-58 Input communication Para Control-x - - 0000-FFFF Hex
address x
Currently Registered CM Group Parameter
Address Parameter Assigned content by bit

Status Parameter-
0h0100- Parameter communication code value registered at
1-
0h0107 CM.31-38 (Read-only)
Status Parameter-8
Control Parameter-
0h0110- 1- Parameter communication code value registered at
0h0117 Control Parameter- CM.51-58 (Read/Write access)
8
Note
When registering control parameters, register the operation speed (0h0005, 0h0380, 0h0381)
and operation command (0h0006, 0h0382) parameters at the end of a parameter control frame.
For example, when the parameter control frame has 5 parameter control items (Para Control - x),
register the operation speed at Para Control-4 and the operation command to Para Control-5.
304
7.3 Communication Protocol

The built-in RS-485 communication supports the Modbus-RTU protocol.
7.3.1 Modbus-RTU Protocol

7.3.1.1 Function Code and Protocol (unit: byte)
In the following section, station ID is the value set at CM.01 (Int485 St ID), and starting
address is the communication address (starting address size is in bytes). For more
information about communication addresses, refer to 7.4Compatible Common Area
Parameter on page 308.
Function Code #03: Read Holding Register

Query Field Name Response Field Name
Station ID Station ID
Function(0x03) Function (0x03)
Starting Address Hi Byte Count
Starting Address Lo Data Hi
# of Points Hi Data Lo
# of Points Lo … # number of Points
CRC Lo …
CRC Hi Data Hi
Data Lo
CRC Lo
CRC Hi
Function Code #04: Read Input Register

Function(0x04) Function (0x04)
Starting Address Hi Byte Count
Starting Address Lo Data Hi
# of Points Hi Data Lo
# of Points Lo … # number of Points
CRC Lo …
CRC Hi Data Hi
Data Lo
CRC Lo
CRC Hi
305
Function Code #06: Preset Single Register

Function (0x06) Function (0x06)
Starting Address Hi Register Address Hi
Register Address Lo Register Address Lo
Preset Data Hi Preset Data Hi
Preset Data Lo Preset Data Lo
CRC Lo CRC Lo
CRC Hi CRC Hi
Function Code #16 (hex 0h10): Preset Multiple Register

Function (0x10) Function (0x10)
Starting Address Hi Starting Address Hi
Starting Address Lo Starting Address Lo
# of Register Hi # of Register Hi
# of Register Lo # of Register Lo
Byte Count CRC Lo
Data Hi CRC Hi
Data Lo
… # number of Points
…
Data Hi
Data Lo
CRC Lo
CRC Hi
Exception Code
Code
01: ILLEGAL FUNCTION
02: ILLEGAL DATA ADRESS
03: ILLEGAL DATA VALUE
06: SLAVE DEVICE BUSY
306
Response
Field Name
Station ID
Function*
Exception Code
CRC Lo
CRC Hi
* The function value uses the top level bit for all query values.
Example of Modbus-RTU Communication in Use

When the Acc time (Communication address 0x1103) is changed to 5.0 sec and the Dec time
(Communication address 0x1104) is changed to 10.0 sec.
Frame Transmission from Master to Slave (Request)

Item Station Functio Starting # of Byte Data 1 Data 2 CRC
ID n Address Register Count
Hex 0x01 0x10 0x1102 0x0002 0x04 0x0032 0x0064 0x1202
Descriptio CM.01 Preset Starting - - 50 100 -
n Int485 Multiple Address -1 (ACC (DEC
St ID Register (0x1103-1) time time
5.0sec) 10.0sec)
Frame Transmission from Slave to Master (Response)

Item Station ID Function Starting Address # of CRC
Register
Hex 0x01 0x10 0x1102 0x0002 0xE534
Description CM.01 Preset Starting Address - - -
Int485 St ID Multiple 1
Register (0x1103-1)
307
7.4 Compatible Common Area Parameter

The following are common area parameters compatible with Sinus M.
Comm. Parameter Scale Unit R/W Assigned Content by Bit

Address
0h0000 Inverter model - - R 6: Sinus H
0h0001 Inverter capacity - - R 0: 0002 [0.75 kW], 1: 0003 [1.5 kW],
2: 0005 [2.2 kW], 4: 0011 [5.5 kW],
5: 0014 [7.5 kW], 6: 0017 [11 kW],
7: 0020 [15 kW], 8: 0025 [18.5 kW],
9: 0030 [22 kW], 10: 0034 [30 kW],
256: 0001 [0.4 kW], 259: 0007 [4.0 kW]
0h0002 Inverter input - - R 0: 2S/T product
voltage 1: 4T product
0h0003 Version - - R Example 0h0100: Version 1.00
Example 0h0101: Version 1.01
0h0004 Reserved - - R/W
0h0005 Command 0.01 Hz R/W
frequency
0h0006 Operation - - R B15 Reserved
command (option) B14 0: Keypad Freq,
B13 1: Keypad Torq
B12 2-16: Terminal block multi-
B11 step speed
B10 17: Up, 18: Down
B9 19: STEADY
22: V1, 24: V2, 25: I2,
26: Reserved
27: Built-in 485
28: Communication option
30: JOG, 31: PID
B8 0: Keypad
B7 1: Fx/Rx-1
B6 2: Fx/Rx-2
3: Built-in 485
4: Communication option
R/W B5 Reserved
B4 Emergency stop
B3 W: Trip initialization (01),
R: Trip status
B2 Reverse operation (R)
B1 Forward operation (F)
B0 Stop (S)
308

Address
0h0007 Acceleration time 0.1 s R/W -
0h0008 Deceleration time 0.1 s R/W -
0h0009 Output current 0.1 A R -
0h000A Output frequency 0.01 Hz R -
0h000B Output voltage 1 V R -
0h000C DC link voltage 1 V R -
0h000D Output power 0.1 kW R -
0h000E Operation status - - R B15 0: Remote, 1: Keypad Local
B14 1: Frequency command
source by communication
(built-in, option)
B13 1: Operation command
source by communication
(built-in, option)
B12 Reverse operation
command
B11 Forward operation
command
B10 Brake release signal
B9 Jog mode
B8 Drive stopped.
B7 DC Braking
B6 Speed reached
B5 Decelerating
B4 Accelerating
B3 Fault Trip - operates
according to Pr.30 setting
B2 Operating in reverse
direction
B1 Operating in forward
direction
B0 Stopped
0h000F Fault trip - - R B15 Reserved
information B14 Reserved
B13 Reserved
B12 Reserved
B11 Reserved
B10 H/W-Diag
B9 Reserved
B8 Reserved
B7 Reserved
B6 Reserved
B5 Reserved
309

Address
B4 Reserved
B3 Level Type trip
B2 Reserved
B1 Reserved
B0 Latch Type trip
0h0010 Input terminal - - R B15- Reserved
information B7
B6 P7
B5 P6
B4 P5
B3 P4
B2 P3
B1 P2
B0 P1
0h0011 Output terminal - - R B15 Reserved
B13 Reserved
B12 Reserved
B11 Reserved
B10 Reserved
B9 Reserved
B8 Reserved
B7 Reserved
B6 Reserved
B5 Reserved
B4 Reserved
B3 Reserved
B2 Reserved
B1 MO
B0 Relay 1
0h0012 V1 0.01 % R V1 input voltage
0h0013 V2 0.01 % R V2 input voltage
0h0014 I2 0.01 % R I2 input current
0h0015 Motor rotation 1 rpm R Displays existing motor rotation
speed speed
0h0016 Reserved - - - -
- 0h0019
0h001A Select Hz/rpm - - R 0: Hz unit, 1: rpm unit
0h001B Display the - - R Display the number of poles for the
number of poles selected motor
for the selected
motor
310
7.5 Sinus H Expansion Common Area Parameter
7.5.1 Monitoring Area Parameter (Read Only)

Comm. Parameter Scale Unit Assigned content by bit
Address
0h0300 Inverter model - - Sinus H: 0006h
0h0301 Inverter capacity - - 0001 [0.4 kW]: 1900h, 0002 [0.75 kW]: 3200h
0003 [1.5 kW]: 4015h, 0005 [2.2 kW]: 4022h
0007 [4.0 kW]: 4040h, 0011 [5.5 kW]: 4055h
0014 [7.5 kW]: 4075h, 0017 [11 kW]: 40B0h
0020 [15 kW]: 40F0h, 0025 [18.5 kW]: 4125h
0030 [22 kW]: 4160h, 0034 [30 kW]: 41E0h
0h0302 Inverter input - - 2S self cooling: 0220h,
voltage/power 2S forced cooling: 0221h
(Single phase, 3- 2T self cooling: 0230h,
phase)/cooling 2T forced cooling: 0231h
method 4T self cooling: 0430h,
4T forced cooling: 0431h
0h0303 Inverter S/W - - (Ex) 0h0100: Version 1.00
version 0h0101: Version 1.01
0h0304 Reserved - - -
0h0305 Inverter - - B15 0: Normal state
operation state B14 4: Warning occurred
8: Fault occurred [operates
B13 according to Pr. 30 (Trip Out
B12 Mode) setting.]
B11 - -
B8
B7 1: Speed searching
B6 2: Accelerating
3: Operating at constant rate
B5 4: Decelerating
B4 5: Decelerating to stop
6: H/W OCS
7: S/W OCS
8: Dwell operating
311

Address
B3 0: Stopped
B2 1: Operating in forward direction
2: Operating in reverse direction
B1 3: DC operating (0 speed control)
B0
0h0306 Inverter - - B15 Operation command source
operation B14 0: Keypad
frequency B13 1: Communication option
command B12 3: Built-in RS 485
source B11 4: Terminal block
B10
B9
B8
B7 Frequency command source
B6 0: Keypad speed
B5 1: Keypad torque
B4 2-4: Up/Down operation speed
B3 5: V1, 7: V2, 8: I2
B2 9: Pulse
B1 10: Built-in RS 485
B0 11: Communication option
13: Jog
14: PID
25-39: Multi-step speed
frequency
0h0307 LCD keypad S/W - - (Ex.) 0h0100: Version 1.00
version
0h0308 LCD keypad title - - (Ex.) 0h0101: Version 1.01
version
0h0309 -0h30F Reserved - - -
0h0310 Output current 0.1 A -
0h0311 Output 0.01 Hz -
frequency
0h0312 Output rpm 0 rpm -
0h0313 Motor feedback 0 rpm -32768 rpm-32767 rpm (directional)
speed
0h0314 Output voltage 1 V -
0h0315 DC Link voltage 1 V -
0h0316 Output power 0.1 kW -
0h0317 Output torque 0.1 % -
0h0318 PID reference 0.1 % -
0h0319 PID feedback 0.1 % -
312

Address
0h031A Display the - - Displays the number of poles for the first
number of poles motor
for the 1st motor
0h031B Display the - - Displays the number of poles for the 2nd
number of poles motor
for the 2nd motor
0h031C Display the - - Displays the number of poles for the
number of poles selected motor
for the selected
motor
0h031D Select Hz/rpm - - 0: Hz, 1: rpm
0h031E Reserved - - -
- 0h031F
0h0320 Digital input BI5 Reserved
information - -
B7 Reserved
B6 P7(I/O board)
B5 P6(I/O board)
B4 P5(I/O board)
B3 P4(I/O board)
B2 P3(I/O board)
B1 P2(I/O board)
B0 P1(I/O board)
0h0321 Digital output - - BI5 Reserved
information - Reserved
B4 Reserved
B3 Reserved
B2 Reserved
B1 Q1
B0 Relay 1
0h0322 Virtual digital - - B15 Reserved
input - Reserved
B7 Virtual DI 8(CM.77)
0h0323 Display the - - 0: 1st motor/1: 2nd motor
selected motor
313

Address
0h0324 AI1 0.01 % Analog input V1 (I/O board)
0h0325 Reserved 0.01 %
0h0326 AI3 0.01 % Analog input V2 (I/O board)
0h0327 AI4 0.01 % Analog input I2 (I/O board)
0h0328 AO1 0.01 % Analog output 1 (I/O board)
0h0329 AO2 0.01 % Analog output 2 (I/O board)
0h032A AO3 0.01 % Reserved
0h032B AO4 0.01 % Reserved
0h032C Reserved - - -
0h032D Inverter module
1 ℃ [0034 model only]
temperature
0h032E Inverter power
1 kWh [0034 model only]
consumption
0h032F Inverter power
1 MWh [0034 model only]
consumption
0h0330 Latch type trip - - BI5 Fuse Open Trip
information - 1 BI4 Over Heat Trip
BI3 Arm Short
BI2 External Trip
BI1 Overvoltage Trip
BI0 Overcurrent Trip
B9 NTC Trip
B8 Reserved
B7 Reserved
B6 Input open-phase trip
B5 Output open-phase trip
B4 Ground Fault Trip
B3 E-Thermal Trip
B2 Inverter Overload Trip
B1 Underload Trip
B0 Overload Trip
0h0331 Latch type trip - - BI5 Reserved
information - 2 BI4 Reserved
BI3 Safety B
BI2 Safety A
BI1 Reserved
BI0 Bad option card
B9 No motor trip
B8 External brake trip
B7 Bad contact at basic I/O
board
B6 Pre PID Fail
314

Address
B5 Error while writing parameter
B4 Reserved
B3 FAN Trip
B2 Reserved
B1 Reserved
B0 Reserved
0h0332 Level type trip - - B15 Reserved
information - -
B8 Reserved
B7 Reserved
B6 Reserved
B5 Reserved
B4 Reserved
B3 Keypad Lost Command
B2 Lost Command
B1 LV
B0 BX
0h0333 H/W Diagnosis - - B15 Reserved
Trip information - Reserved
B6 Reserved
B5 Queue Full
B4 Reserved
B3 Watchdog-2 error
B2 Watchdog-1 error
B1 EEPROM error
B0 ADC error
0h0334 Warning - - B15 Reserved
information - Reserved
B10 Reserved
B9 Auto Tuning failed
B8 Keypad lost
B7 Encoder disconnection
B6 Wrong installation of encoder
B5 DB
B4 FAN running
B3 Lost command
B2 Inverter Overload
B1 Underload
B0 Overload
315

Address
0h0335 -0h033F Reserved - - -
0h0340 On Time date 0 Day Total number of days the inverter has been
powered on
0h0341 On Time minute 0 Min Total number of minutes excluding the total
number of On Time days
0h0342 Run Time date 0 Day Total number of days the inverter has driven
the motor
0h0343 Run Time 0 Min Total number of minutes excluding the total
minute number of Run Time days
0h0344 Fan Time date 0 Day Total number of days the heat sink fan has
been running
0h0345 Fan Time minute 0 Min Total number of minutes excluding the total
number of Fan Time days
-0h0348
0h034A Option 1 - - 0: None, 9: CANopen
0h034B Reserved - -
0h034C Reserved
7.5.2 Control Area Parameter (Read/ Write)

Comm. Address Parameter Scale Unit Assigned Content by Bit
0h0380 Frequency 0.01 Hz Command frequency setting
command
0h0381 RPM 1 rpm Command rpm setting
command
0h0382 Operation - - B7 Reserved
command B6 Reserved
B5 Reserved
B4 Reserved
B3 0  1: Free-run stop
B2 0  1: Trip initialization
B1 0: Reverse command, 1: Forward
command
B0 0: Stop command, 1: Run command
Example: Forward operation command 0003h,
Reverse operation command 0001h
316

0h0383 Acceleration 0.1 s Acceleration time setting
time
0h0384 Deceleration 0.1 s Deceleration time setting
time
0h0385 Virtual digital - - BI5 Reserved
input control - Reserved
(0: Off, 1:On) B8 Reserved
0h0386 Digital - - BI5 Reserved
output BI4 Reserved
control BI3 Reserved
(0:Off, 1:On) BI2 Reserved
BI1 Reserved
BI0 Reserved
B9 Reserved
B8 Reserved
B7 Reserved
B6 Reserved
B5 Reserved
B4 Relay 4 (Ext I/O, OUT-31: None)
B3 Relay 3 (Ext I/O, OUT-31: None)
B2 Relay 2 (0034 model only, OUT-31: None)
B1 Q1 (all models, OUT-33: None)
B0 Relay 1 (all models, OUT-31: None)
0h0387 Reserved - - Reserved
0h0388 PID reference 0.1 % PID reference command
0h0389 PID feedback 0.1 % PID feedback value
value
0h038A Motor rated 0.1 A -
current
0h038B Motor rated 1 V -
voltage
0h038C- Reserved -
0h038F
0h0390 Torque Ref 0.1 % Torque command
0h0391 Fwd Pos 0.1 % Forward motoring torque limit
Torque Limit
317

0h0392 Fwd Neg 0.1 % Forward regenerative torque limit
Torque Limit
0h0393 Rev Pos 0.1 % Reverse motoring torque limit
Torque Limit
0h0394 Rev Neg 0.1 % Reverse regenerative torque limit
Torque Limit
0h0395 Torque Bias 0.1 % Torque bias
0h0396- 0h399 Reserved - - -
0h039A Anytime Para - - Set the CNF.20* value (refer to 5.37 Operation
State Monitor on page 269)
0h039B Monitor - - Set the CNF.21* value (refer to 5.37 Operation
Line-1
0h039C Monitor - - Set the CNF.22* value (refer to 5.37 Operation
Line-2
0h039D Monitor - - Set the CNF.23* value (refer to 5.37 Operation
Line-3
* Displayed on an LCD keypad only.
Note
A frequency set via communication using the common area frequency address (0h0380,
0h0005) is not saved even when used with the parameter save function. To save a changed
frequency to use after a power cycle, follow these steps:
1 Set dr.07 to Keypad-1 and select a random target frequency.
2 Set the frequency via communication into the parameter area frequency address (0h1101).
3 Perform the parameter save (0h03E0: '1') before turning off the power. After the power
cycle, the frequency set before turning off the power is displayed.
7.5.3 Inverter Memory Control Area Parameter (Read and Write)

Comm. Parameter Scale Unit Changeable Function
Address During
Operation
0h03E0 Save parameters - - X 0: No, 1:Yes
0h03E1 Monitor mode - - O 0: No, 1:Yes
initialization
318
Comm. Parameter Scale Unit Changeable Function

Address During
Operation
0h03E2 Parameter - - X 0: No, 1: All Grp, 2: Drv Grp
initialization 3: bA Grp, 4: Ad Grp, 5: Cn Grp
6: In Grp, 7: OU Grp, 8: CM Grp
9: AP Grp, 12: Pr Grp, 13: M2
Grp
Setting is prohibited during
fault trip interruptions.
0h03E3 Display changed - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
parameters
0h03E4 Reserved - - - -
0h03E5 Delete all fault - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
history
0h03E6 Delete user- - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
registrated
codes
0h03E7 Hide parameter 0 Hex O Write: 0-9999
mode Read: 0: Unlock, 1: Lock
0h03E8 Lock parameter 0 Hex O Write: 0-9999
mode Read: 0: Unlock, 1: Lock
0h03E9 Easy start on - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
(easy parameter
setup mode)
0h03EA Initializing - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
power
consumption
0h03EB Initialize inverter - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
operation
accumulative
time
0h03EC Initialize cooling - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
fan accumulated
operation time
319
Note
• When setting parameters in the inverter memory control area, the values are reflected
to the inverter operation and saved. Parameters set in other areas via communication
are reflected to the inverter operation, but are not saved. All set values are cleared
following an inverter power cycle and revert back to its previous values. When setting
parameters via communication, ensure that a parameter save is completed prior to
shutting the inverter down.
• Set parameters very carefully. After setting a parameter to 0 via communication, set it
to another value. If a parameter has been set to a value other than 0 and a non-zero
value is entered again, an error message is returned. The previously-set value can be
identified by reading the parameter when operating the inverter via communication.
• The addresses 0h03E7 and 0h03E8 are parameters for entering the password. When the
password is entered, the condition will change from Lock to Unlock, and vice versa.
When the same parameter value is entered continuously, the parameter is executed
just once. Therefore, if the same value is entered again, change it to another value first
and then re-enter the previous value. For example, if you want to enter 244 twice, enter
it in the following order: 244  0  244.
It may take longer to set the parameter values in the inverter memory control area because all
data is saved to the inverter. Be careful as communication may be lost during parameter setup if
parameter setup is continues for an extended period of time.
320
Table of Functions
8 Table of Functions
This chapter lists all the function settings for Sinus H series inverter. Set the parameters
required according to the following references. If a set value input is out of range, the
following messages will be displayed on the keyboard. In these cases, the inverter will not
operate with the [ENT] key.
• Set value not allocated: rd

• Set value repetition (multi-function input, PID reference, PID feedback related): OL
• Set value not allowed (select value, V2, I2): no
8.1 Operation Group

The Operation group is used only in the basic keypad mode. It will not be displayed on an
LCD keypad. If the LCD keypad is connected, the corresponding functions will be found in
the Drive(DRV) group.
SL: Sensorless vector control (dr.09) , I – IM Sensorless, P – PM Sensorless

*O/X: Write-enabled during operation, 7/L/A: Keypad/LCD keypad/Common
Code Comm. Name Keypad Setting Range Initial Property* V/F SL Ref.
Address Display Value
0h1F00 Target 0.00 0-Maximum 0.00 O/7 O I/P p.72
frequency frequency(Hz)
- 0h1F01 Acceleration ACC 0.0-600.0(s) 20.0 O/7 O I/P p.141
time
- 0h1F02 Deceleration dEC 0.0-600.0(s) 30.0 O/7 O I/P p.141
time
- 0h1F03 Command drv 0 Keypad 1: X/7 O I/P p.133
source 1 Fx/Rx-1 Fx/Rx-1
2 Fx/Rx-2
3 Int 485
4 Field
Bus 1
1 Table of options are provided separately in the option manual.
321
Table of Functions
Code Comm. Name Keypad Setting Range Initial Property* V/F SL Ref.
Address Display Value
- 0h1F04 Frequency Frq 0 Keypad- 0: X/7 O I/P p.116
reference 1 Keypad-
source 1 Keypad- 1
2
2 V1
4 V2
5 I2
6 Int 485
8 Field Bus
12 Pulse
- 0h1F05 Multi-step St1 0.00-Maximum 10.00 O/7 O I/P p.131
speed frequency(Hz)
frequency 1
speed frequency(Hz)
frequency 2
speed frequency(Hz)
frequency 3
- 0h1F08 Output CUr -/7 O I/P p.84
current
- 0h1F09 Motor Rpm -/7 O I/P -
revolutions
per minute
- 0h1F0A Inverter dCL - - -/7 O I/P p.84
direct
current
voltage
- 0h1F0B Inverter vOL -/7 O I/P p.84
output
voltage
- 0h1F0C Out of order nOn -/7 O I/P -
signal
- 0h1F0D Select drC F Forward run F O/7 O I/P -
rotation
r Reverse run
direction
322
Table of Functions
8.2 Drive group (PAR→dr)

In the following table, data shaded in grey will be displayed when the related code has
been selected.
SL: Sensorless vector control (dr.09), I – IM Sensorless, P – PM Sensorless
Code Comm Name LCD Setting Range Initial Property V/F SL Ref.
dr Addr Display value *
00 - Jump Code Jump 1-99 9 O/A O I/P p.72
Code
01 2 0h1101 Target Cmd Start frequency - 0.00 O/L O I/P p.77
frequency Freque Maximum
ncy frequency(Hz)
Torque Cmd
02 0h1102 -180~180[%] 0.0 O/A X I -
command Torque
032 0h1103 Acceleratio Acc 0.0-600.0(s) 20.0 O/L O I/P p.141
n time Time
042 0h1104 Deceleratio Dec 0.0-600.0(s) 30.0 O/L O I/P p.141
n time Time
062 0h1106 Command Cmd 0 Keypad 1: X/L O I/P p.133
source Source 1 Fx/Rx-1 Fx/Rx-1
2 Fx/Rx-2
3 Int 485
4 Field Bus
072 0h1107 Frequency Freq Ref 0 Keypad-1 0: X/L O I/P p.116
reference Src 1 Keypad-2 Keypad
source 2 V1 -1
4 V2
5 I2
6 Int 485
8 Field Bus
12 Pulse
08 0h1108 Torque Trq Ref 0 Keypad-1 0: X/A X I -
reference Src 1 Keypad-2 Keypad
setting 2 V1 -1
4 V2
5 I2
6 Int 485
8 FieldBus
12 Pulse
2 Displayed when an LCD keypad is in use.
323
Table of Functions
09 0h1109 Control Control 0 V/F 0: V/F X/A O I/P p.150
mode Mode 2 Slip Compen ,
4 IM Sensorless p.194
6 PM ,
Sensorless p.207
10 0h110A Torque Torque 0 No 0: No X/A X I/P -
Control Control 1 Yes
11 0h110B Jog Jog 0.00, Start frequency- 10.00 O/A O I/P p.185
frequency Freque Maximum
ncy frequency(Hz)
12 0h110C Jog run Jog Acc 0.0-600.0(s) 20.0 O/A O I/P p.185
acceleratio Time
n time
13 0h110D Jog run Jog Dec 0.0-600.0(s) 30.0 O/A O I/P p.185
deceleratio Time
n time
14 0h110E Motor Motor 0: 0.2 kW, Varies X/A O I/P p.204
capacity Capacit 1: 0.4 kW by
y 2: 0.75 kW, Motor
3: 1.1 kW capacit
4: 1.5 kW, y
5: 2.2 kW
6: 3.0 kW,
7: 3.7 kW
8: 4.0 kW,
9: 5.5 kW
10: 7.5 kW,
11: 11.0 kW
12: 15.0 kW,
13: 18.5 kW
14: 22.0 kW,
15: 30.0 kW
15 0h110F Torque Torque 0 Manual 0: X/A O X -
boost Boost 1 Auto Manual
options
16 3 0h1110 Forward Fwd 0.0-15.0(%) 2.0 X/A O X p.153
Torque Boost
boost
173 0h1111 Reverse Rev 0.0-15.0(%) 2.0 X/A O X p.153
Torque Boost
boost
3 Displayed when dr.15 is set to 0 (Manual)
324
Table of Functions
18 0h1112 Base Base 30.00-400.00(Hz) 50.00 X/A O I/P p.150
frequency Freq [V/F, Slip Compen]
40.00-120.00(Hz)
[IM Sensorless]
30.00-180.00(Hz)
[PM Sensorless]
19 0h1113 Start Start 0.01-10.00(Hz) 0.50 X/A O I/P p.150
frequency Freq
20 0h1114 Maximum Max 40.00-400.00(Hz) 50.00 X/A O I/P p.160
frequency Freq [V/F, Slip Compen]
40.00-120.00(Hz)
[IM Sensorless]
40.00-180.00(Hz)
[PM Sensorless]
21 0h1115 Select Hz/Rpm 0 Hz Display 0:Hz O/L O I/P p.131
speed unit Sel 1 Rpm Display Display
(+)Torque (+)Trq
22 4 0h1116 50.0 ~ 150.0[%] 100.0 O/A X I -
gain Gain
(-)Torque (-)Trq
234 0h1117 50.0 ~ 150.0[%] 100.0 O/A X I -
gain Gain
(-)Torque (-)Trq
244 0h1118 50.0 ~ 150.0[%] 80.0 O/A X I -
gain 0 Gain0
(-)Torque (-)Trq
254 0h1119 0.0 ~ 100.0[%] 40.0 O/A X I -
offset Offset
80 5 0h1150 Select - Select ranges inverter 0: run O/7 O I/P -
ranges at displays at power frequen
power input cy
input 0 Run frequency
1 Acceleration
time
2 Deceleration
time
3 Command
source
4 Frequency
reference source
5 Multi-step
speed
frequency1
4 Displayed when dr.10 is set to 1 (YES)

5 Will not be displayed when an LCD keypad is in use
325
Table of Functions
6 Multi-step
speed
frequency2
7 Multi-step
speed
frequency3
8 Output current
9 Motor RPM
10 Inverter DC
voltage
11 User select
signal (dr.81)
12 Currently out of
order
13 Select run
direction
14 output current2
15 Motor RPM2
16 Inverter DC
voltage2
17 User select
signal2 (dr.81)
815 0h1151 Select - Monitors user 0: O/7 O I/P -
monitor selected code output
code 0 Output voltage
voltage(V)
1 Output electric
power(kW)
2 Torque(kgf  m)
895 0h03E3 Display - 0 View All 0: O/7 O I/P p.248
changed 1 View Changed View All
parameter
905 0h115A [ESC] key - 0 Move to initial 0: X/7 O I/P p.74,
functions position None p.136
1 JOG Key p.187
2 Local/Remote
91 0h115B Smart copy SmartC 0 None 0:None X/A O I/P -
opy 1 SmartDownload
3 SmartUpLoad
935 0h115D Parameter - 0 No 0:No X/7 O I/P p.245
inizialization 1 All Grp
2 dr Grp
3 bA Grp
326
Table of Functions
4 Ad Grp
5 Cn Grp
6 In Grp
7 OU Grp
8 CM Grp
9 AP Grp
12 Pr Grp
13 M2 Grp
16 run Grp
945 0h115E Password 0- O/7 O I/P p.246
registration 9999
955 0h115F Parameter 0- O/7 O I/P p.247
lock 9999
settings
975 0h1161 Software - -/7 O I/P -
version
98 0h1162 Display I/O IO S/W -/A O I/P -
board Ver
version
99 0h1163 Display I/O IO H/W 0 Multiple IO -/A O I/P -
board H/W Ver 1 Standard IO
version 2 Standard IO (M)
Refer to Step 4
Control
Terminal
Wiring on
page 47.
327
Table of Functions
8.3 Basic Function group (PAR→bA)

In the following table, the data shaded in grey will be displayed when a related code has
been selected.
SL: Sensorless vector control function (dr.09) , I – IM Sensorless, P – PM Sensorless

Code CommA LCD Initial
Name Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref.
bA ddr Display Value
Jump
00 - Jump Code 1-99 20 O O I/P p.72
Code
0 None
Auxiliary 1 V1
Aux Ref
01 0h1201 reference 3 V2 0:None X/A O I/P p.179
Src
source 4 I2
6 Pulse
0 M+(G*A)
1 Mx (G*A)
2 M/(G*A)
3 M+[M*(G*A)]
Auxiliary M+G*2(A-
command Aux Calc 4 50%) 0:
02 6 0h1202 X/A O I/P p.179
calculation Type Mx[G*2(A- M+(GA)
type 5
50%)
M/[G*2(A-
6 50%)]
M+M*G*2(A-
7
50%)
036 0h1203 Auxiliary Aux Ref -200.0-200.0(%) 100.0 O/A O I/P p.179
command Gain
gain
0 Keypad
2nd 1 Fx/Rx-1
Cmd 2nd 1:
04 0h1204 command 2 Fx/Rx-2 X/A O I/P p.163
Src Fx/Rx-1
source 3 Int 485
4 FieldBus
0 Keypad-1
1 Keypad-2
2nd 0:
Freq 2nd 2 V1
05 0h1205 frequency Keypad- O/A O I/P p.163
Src 4 V2
source 1
5 I2
6 Int 485
6 Displayed if bA.01 is not set to 0 (None).
328
Table of Functions
8 FieldBus
12 Pulse
0 Keypad-1
1 Keypad-2
2 V1
2nd Torque 0:
Trq 2nd 4 V2
06 0h1206 command Keypad- O X I
Src 5 I2
source 1
6 Int 485
8 FieldBus
12 Pulse
0 Linear
V/F pattern V/F 1 Square 0:
07 0h1207 X/A O X p.150
options Pattern 2 User V/F Linear
3 Square 2
Acc/dec 0 Max Freq
Ramp T 0:
08 0h1208 standard X/A O I/P p.141
Mode 1 Delta Freq Max Freq
frequency
0 0.01 sec
Time scale Time
09 0h1209 1 0.1 sec 1:0.1 sec X/A O I/P p.141
settings Scale
2 1 sec
Input 0 60Hz
60/50 Hz
10 0h120A power 1:50Hz X/A O I/P p.244
Sel 1 50Hz
frequency
Number of
Pole
11 0h120B motor 2-48 4 X/A O I/P p.194
Number
poles
Rated slip
12 0h120C Rated Slip 0-3000(Rpm) X/A O I p.194
speed
Motor Depende
13 0h120D rated Rated Curr 1.0-1000.0(A) nt on X/A O I/P p.194
current motor
Motor setting
Noload
14 0h120E noload 0.0-1000.0(A) X/A O I p.194
Curr
current
Motor
15 0h120F rated Rated Volt 0, 170-480 (V) 0 X/A O I/P p.155
voltage
Depende
Motor nt on
16 0h1210 Efficiency 64-100(%) motor X/A O I/P p.194
efficiency
setting
Load Inertia
17 0h1211 0-8 0 X/A O I/P p.194
inertia rate Rate
329
Table of Functions
Trim power Trim
18 0h1212 70-130(%) 100 O/A O I/P -
display Power %
Input
AC Input 230/400
19 0h1213 power 170-480V O/A O I/P p.244
Volt V
voltage
0 None
All (Rotation
1
type)
ALL (Static
2
Auto Auto type)
20 0h1214 0:None X/A X I/P p.204
Tuning Tuning Rs+Lsigma
3 (Rotation
type)
6 Tr (Static type)
7 All PM
Stator
21 0h1215 Rs X/A X I/P p.204
resistance Depende
Leakage Dependent on nt on
22 0h1216 Lsigma X/A X I p.204
inductance motor setting motor
Stator setting
23 0h1217 Ls X/A X I p.204
inductance
Rotor time
24 7 0h1218 Tr 25-5000(ms) X/A X I p.204
constant
Stator
257 0h1219 inductance Ls Scale 50-150[%] 100 X/A X I -
scale
Rotor time
267 0h121A constant Tr Scale 50-150[%] 100 X/A X I -
scale
28 8 0h121C D-axis
Ld (PM) 0 X/A X P -
[R/O] inductance Settings vary
298 0h121D Q-axis depending on
Lq (PM) 0 X/A X P -
[R/O] inductance the motor
308 0h121E Flux PM Flux specifications.
0.147 X/A X P -
[R/O] reference Ref
Regeneration
Ls Regen
317 0h121F inductance 70-100[%] 80 X/A X I -
Scale
scale
328 0h1220 Q-axis Lq(PM) 50-150[%] 100 X/A X P -
7 Displayed when dr.09 is set to 4(IM Sensorless)

8 Displayed when dr.09 (Control Mode) is set to 6 (PM Sensorless).
330
Table of Functions
[R/O] inductance Scale
scale
PM auto
348 0h1222 Ld,Lq
tuning 20.0-50.0[%] 33.3 X/A X P -
[R/O] Tune Lev
level
PM auto
358 0h1223 Ld,Lq
tuning 80.0-150.0[%] 150.0 X/A X P -
[R/O] Tune Hz
frequency
User User Freq 0.00-Maximum
41 9 0h1229 15.00 X/A O X p.152
frequency1 1 frequency(Hz)
User
429 0h122A User Volt 1 0-100(%) 25 X/A O X p.152
voltage1
0.00-0.00-
User User Freq
439 0h122B Maximum 30.00 X/A O X p.152
frequency2 2
frequency(Hz)
User
449 0h122C User Volt 2 0-100(%) 50 X/A O X p.152
voltage2
User User Freq 0.00-Maximum
459 0h122D 45.00 X/A O X p.152
frequency3 3 frequency(Hz)
User
469 0h122E User Volt 3 0-100(%) 75 X/A O X p.152
voltage3
Maximu
User User Freq 0.00-Maximum m
479 0h122F X/A O X p.152
frequency4 4 frequency(Hz) frequenc
y
User
489 0h1230 User Volt 4 0-100(%) 100 X/A O X p.152
voltage4
Multi-step
Step Freq- 0.00-Maximum
50 10 0h1232 speed 10.00 O/L O I/P p.131
1 frequency(Hz)
frequency1
Multi-step
5110 0h1233 speed 20.00 O/L O I/P p.131
2 frequency(Hz)
frequency2
Multi-step
5210 0h1234 speed 30.00 O/L O I/P p.131
3 frequency(Hz)
frequency3
53 11 0h1235 Multi-step Step Freq- 0.00-Maximum 40.00 O/A O I/P p.131
9 Displayed if either bA.07 or M2.25 is set to 2 (User V/F).

10 Displayed when an LCD keypad is in use.
11 Displayed if one of In.65-71 is set to Speed–L/M/H
331
Table of Functions
speed 4 frequency(Hz)
frequency4
Multi-step
5411 0h1236 speed 50.00 O/A O I/P p.131
5 frequency(Hz)
frequency5
Maximu
Multi-step
Step Freq- 0.00-Maximum m
5511 0h1237 speed O/A O I/P p.131
6 frequency(Hz) frequenc
frequency6
y
Maximu
Multi-step
Step Freq- 0.00-Maximum m
5611 0h1238 speed O/A O I/P p.131
7 frequency(Hz) frequenc
frequency7
y
Multi-step
Acc Time-
70 0h1246 acceleration 0.0-600.0(s) 20.0 O/A O I/P p.144
1
time1
Multi-step
Dec Time-
71 0h1247 deceleration 0.0-600.0(s) 20.0 O/A O I/P p.144
1
time1
Multi-step
Acc Time-
72 12 0h1248 acceleration 0.0-600.0(s) 30.0 O/A O I/P p.144
time2 2
Multi-step
Dec Time-
time2 2
Multi-step
Acc Time-
7412 0h124A acceleration 0.0-600.0(s) 40.0 O/A O I/P p.144
time3 3
Multi-step
Dec Time-
7512 0h124B deceleration 0.0-600.0(s) 40.0 O/A O I/P p.144
3
time3
Multi-step
Acc Time-
7612 0h124C acceleration 0.0-600.0(s) 50.0 O/A O I/P p.144
4
time4
Multi-step
Dec Time-
7712 0h124D deceleration 0.0-600.0(s) 50.0 O/A O I/P p.144
4
time4
Multi-step
Acc Time-
7812 0h124E acceleration 0.0-600.0(s) 40.0 O/A O I/P p.144
5
time5
Multi-step Dec Time-
7912 0h124F 0.0-600.0(s) 40.0 O/A O I/P p.144
deceleration 5
12 Displayed if one of In.65-71 is set to Xcel–L/M/H.
332
Table of Functions
time5
Multi-step
Acc Time-
6
time6
Multi-step
Dec Time-
6
time6
Multi-step
Acc Time-
7
time7
Multi-step
Dec Time-
7
time7
8.4 Expanded Function group (PAR→Ad)

been selected.

Code Comm. LCD Initial
Ad Addr Display Value
Jump
00 - Jump Code 1-99 24 O/A O I/P p.72
Code
Acceleration Acc
01 0h1301 0 Linear X/A O I/P p.147
pattern Pattern
0: Linear
Deceleration Dec
02 0h1302 1 S-curve X/A O I/P p.147
pattern Pattern
S-curve
acceleration Acc S
03 13 0h1303 1-100(%) 40 X/A O I/P p.147
start point Start
gradient
S-curve
acceleration Acc S
0413 0h1304 1-100(%) 40 X/A O I/P p.147
end point End
gradient
13 Displayed when Ad. 01 is set to 1 (S-curve).
333
Table of Functions
S-curve
deceleration Dec S
05 14 0h1305 1-100(%) 40 X/A O I/P p.147
start point Start
gradient
S-curve
deceleration Dec S
0614 0h1306 1-100(%) 40 X/A O I/P p.147
end point End
gradient
Start 0 Acc
07 0h1307 Start Mode 0:Acc X/A O I/P p.155
Mode 1 DC-Start
0 Dec
Stop 1 DC-Brake
08 15 0h1308 Stop Mode 0:Dec X/A O I/P p.157
Mode 2 Free-Run
Power
4
Braking
0 None
Selection of
Forward
prohibited Run 1
09 0h1309 Prev 0: None X/A O I/P p.138
rotation Prevent
Reverse
direction 2
Prev
Starting with Power-on 0 No
10 0h130A 0:No O/A O I/P p.139
power on Run 1 Yes
DC braking
DC-Start
12 16 0h130C time at 0.00-60.00(s) 0.00 X/A O I/P p.155
Time
startup
Amount of DC Inj
13 0h130D 0-200(%) 50 X/A O I/P p.155
applied DC Level
Output
blocking time DC-Block
14 17 0h130E 0.00- 60.00(s) 0.10 X/A O I/P p.157
before DC Time
braking
DC braking DC-Brake
1517 0h130F 0.00- 60.00(s) 1.00 X/A O I/P p.157
time Time
14 Displayed when Ad. 02 is set to 1 (S-curve).

15 DC braking and power braking (Ad.08, stop mode options 1 and 4) are not available when dr.09
(Control Mode) is set to 6 (PM Sensorless).

16 Displayed when Ad. 07 is set to 1 (DC-Start).
17 Displayed when Ad. 08 is set to 1 (DC-Brake).
334
Table of Functions
DC braking DC-Brake
1617 0h1310 0-200(%) 50 X/A O I/P p.157
rate Level
Start
DC braking DC-Brake
1717 0h1311 frequency- 5.00 X/A O I/P p.157
frequency Freq
60Hz
Start
Dwell
Acc Dwell frequency-
20 0h1314 frequency on 5.00 X/A O I/P p.192
Freq Maximum
acceleration
frequency(Hz)
Dwell
operation Acc Dwell
21 0h1315 0.0-60.0(s) 0.0 X/A O I/P p.192
time on Time
acceleration
Start
Dwell
Dec Dwell frequency-
22 0h1316 frequency on 5.00 X/A O I/P p.192
Freq Maximum
deceleration
frequency(Hz)
Dwell
operation Dec Dwell
23 0h1317 0.0-60.0(s) 0.0 X/A O I/P p.192
time on Time
deceleration
Frequency 0 No
24 0h1318 Freq Limit 0:No X/A O I/P p.161
limit 1 Yes
Frequency 0.00-Upper
Freq Limit
25 18 0h1319 lower limit limit 0.50 O/A O I/P p.161
Lo
value frequency(Hz)
Lower limit
Frequency
Freq Limit frequency- maximum
2618 0h131A upper limit X/A O I/P p.161
Hi Maximum frequency
value
frequency(Hz)
Frequency Jump 0 No
27 0h131B 0:No X/A O I/P p.162
jump Freq 1 Yes
0.00-Jump
Jump
frequency
28 19 0h131C frequency Jump Lo 1 10.00 O/A O I/P p.162
upper
lower limit1
limit1(Hz)
Jump Jump
2919 0h131D frequency Jump Hi 1 frequency 15.00 O/A O I/P p.162
upper limit1 lower limit1-
18 Displayed when Ad. 24 is set to 1 (Yes).

19 Displayed when Ad. 27 is set to 1 (Yes).
335
Table of Functions
Maximum
frequency(Hz)
0.00-Jump
Jump
frequency
3019 0h131E frequency Jump Lo 2 20.00 O/A O I/P p.162
upper
lower limit2
limit2(Hz)
Jump
Jump frequency
3119 0h131F frequency Jump Hi 2 lower limit2- 25.00 O/A O I/P p.162
upper limit2 Maximum
frequency(Hz)
Jump 0.00-Jump
frequency
3219 0h1320 frequency Jump Lo 3 30.00 O/A O I/P p.162
upper
lower limit3 limit3(Hz)
Jump
Jump frequency
3319 0h1321 frequency Jump Hi 3 lower limit3- 35.00 O/A O I/P p.162
upper limit3 Maximum
frequency(Hz)
Brake release BR Rls
41 20 0h1329 0.0-180.0(%) 50.0 O/A O I/P p.253
current Curr
Brake release
4220 0h132A BR Rls Dly 0.00-10.00(s) 1.00 X/A O I/P p.253
delay time
Brake release
BR Rls 0.00-Maximum
4420 0h132C Forward 1.00 X/A O I/P p.253
frequency Fwd Fr frequency(Hz)
Brake release
BR Rls Rev 0.00-Maximum
4520 0h132D Reverse 1.00 X/A O I/P p.253
frequency Fr frequency(Hz)
Brake engage BR Eng
4620 0h132E 0.00-10.00(s) 1.00 X/A O I/P p.253
delay time Dly
Brake engage 0.00-Maximum
4720 0h132F BR Eng Fr 2.00 X/A O I/P p.253
frequency frequency(Hz)
0 None
Energy saving E-Save
50 0h1332 1 Manual 0:None X /A O X p.228
operation Mode
2 Auto
Energy saving Energy
51 21 0h1333 0-30(%) 0 O/A O X p.228
level Save
Acc/Dec time Xcel 0.00-Maximum
60 0h133C 0.00 X/A O I/P p.146
transition Change Fr frequency(Hz)
20 Displayed if either OU.31 or OU.33 is set to 35 (BR Control).

21 Displayed if Ad.50 is not set to 0 (None).
336
Table of Functions
frequency
Rotation
Load Spd
61 0h133D count speed 0.1~6000.0[%] 100.0 O/A O I/P -
Gain
gain
0 x1
Rotation 1 x 0.1
Load Spd
62 0h133E count speed 2 x 0.01 0: x 1 O/A O I/P -
Scale
scale 3 x 0.001
4 x 0.0001
Rotation 0 Rpm
Load Spd
63 0h133F count speed 0: rpm O/A O I/P -
Unit 1 mpm
unit
0 During Run
Cooling fan FAN 1 Always ON 0:During
64 0h1340 O/A O I/P p.243
control Control Temp Run
2
Control
Up/down 0 No
U/D Save
65 0h1341 operation 0:No O/A O I/P p.188
Mode 1 Yes
frequency save
0 None
Output
1 V1
contact On/Off
66 0h1342 3 V2 0:None X/A O I/P p.188
On/Off control Ctrl Src
4 I2
options
6 Pulse
Output Output
On-Ctrl
67 0h1343 contact On contact off 90.00 X/A O I/P p.255
Level
level level- 100.00%
Output -100.00-output
Off-Ctrl
68 0h1344 contact Off contact on 10.00 X/A O I/P p.255
Level
level level (%)
Always
0
Safe operation Run En Enable 0:Always
70 0h1346 X/A O I/P p.190
selection Mode DI Enable
1
Dependent
0 Free-Run
Safe operation Run Dis 1 Q-Stop 0:Free-
71 22 0h1347 X/A O I/P p.190
stop options Stop Q-Stop Run
2
Resume
Safe operation Q-Stop
7222 0h1348 0.0-600.0(s) 5.0 O/A O I/P p.190
deceleration Time
22 Displayed when Ad.70 is set to 1 (DI Dependent).
337
Table of Functions
time
Selection of
regeneration 0 No
RegenAvd
74 23 0h134A evasion 0:No X/A O I p.256
function for Sel
1 Yes
press
Voltage level
of 2S/T: 300-400V 350
regeneration RegenAvd
7523 0h134B evasion X/A O I p.256
Level
motion for 4T: 600-800V 700
press
Compensation
frequency
limit of CompFreq
76 24 0h134C 0.00- 10.00Hz 1.00 X/A O I p.256
regeneration Limit
evasion for
press
Regeneration
RegenAvd
7724 0h134D evasion for 0.0- 100.0% 50.0 O/A O I p.256
Pgain
press P gain
Regeneration
RegenAvd
7824 0h134E evasion for 20-30000(ms) 500 O/A O I p.256
Igain
press I gain
2S/T:
DB Unit turn 390[V]
DB Turn Min 25~400[V]
79 0h134F on voltage X/A O I/P -
On Lev 4T:
level 780[V]
Min25~800[V]
80 0h1350 Fire mode Fire Mode 0 None 0:None X/A O I/P p.176
selection Sel 1 Fire Mode
2 Fire Mode
Test
Fire mode Fire Mode
81 26 0h1351 0.00~60.00(Hz] 60.00 X/A O I/P p.176
frequency Freq
Fire mode Fire Mode 0 Forward 0:
8226 0h1352 X/A O I/P p.176
direction Dir 1 Reverse Forward
23 Displayed when dr.09 (Control Mode) is not set to 6 (PM Sensorless).

24 Displayed when Ad.74 is set to 1 (Yes).
25 DC voltage value (convert bA.19 AC Input voltage) + 20V (2S/T type) or + 40V (4T type)
26 Displayed when Ad.80 is set to 1 (Yes).
338
Table of Functions
Fire Mode Fire Mode Can not be
8326 p.176
Count Cnt modified
8.5 Control Function group (PAR→Cn)

been selected.

Code Comm LCD Property
Name Setting Range Initial Value V/F SL Ref.
Cn Addr Display *
Jump
00 - Jump Code 1-99 4 O/A O I/P p.72
Code
V/F:
1.0-
15.0(kHz)
Heavy 27 3.0 p.239
Duty
SL:
2.0-
Carrier Carrier
04 0h1404 15.0(kHz) X/A O I/P
frequency Freq
V/F:
1.0- 5.0
Normal (kHz) 29
2.0 p.239
Duty28 SL:
2.0-
5.0(kHz)
Normal
0
Switching PWM PWM 0:Normal
05 0h1405 X/A O I p.239
mode Mode Lowleaka PWM
1
ge PWM
09 30 0h1409 Initial PreExTim 0.00-60.00(s) 1.00 X/A X I p.211
27 In case of 0.4~4.0kW, the setting range is 2.0~15.0(kHz).

28PM synchronous motor sensorless vector control mode does not support normal duty
operation [when dr.09 (Control Mode) is set to 6 (PM Sensorless)].
29 In case of 0.4~4.0kW, the setting range is 2.0~5.0(kHz).
339
Table of Functions
Cn Addr Display *
excitation time e
Initial
Flux
1030 0h140A excitation 100.0-300.0(%) 100.0 X/A X I p.211
Force
amount
Continued
Hold
1130 0h140B operation 0.00-60.00(s) 0.00 X/A X I p.211
Time
duration
PM S/L speed
controller ASR P
1231 0h140D 0~5000 100 X/A X P
proportional Gain 1
gain1
PM S/L speed
ASR P
13 31
0h140F controller 0~5000 150 X/A X P
Gain 1
integral gain1
PM S/L speed
controller ASR P
1531 0h1410 0~5000 100 X/A X P
proportional Gain 1
gain2
PM S/L speed
ASR P
16 31
0h1410 controller 0~9999 150 X/A x P
Gain 1
integral gain2
Sensorless 2nd 0 No
30 SL2 G
20 0h1414 gain display 0:No O/A X I p.211
View Sel 1 Yes
setting
Sensorless
speed
ASR-SL
2130 0h1415 controller 0-5000(%) O/A X I p.211
P Gain1
proportional Dependent
gain1 on motor
Sensorless setting
speed ASR-SL I
2230 0h1416 10-9999(ms) O/A X I p.211
controller Gain1
integral gain1
Sensorless ASR-SL Dependent
23 32 0h1417 1.0-1000.0(%) O/A X I p.211
speed P Gain2 on motor
30 Displayed when dr.09 (Control Mode) is not set to 6 (PM Sensorless).

32 Displayed when dr.09 is set to 4 (IM Sensorless) and Cn.20 is set to 1 (YES).
340
Table of Functions
Cn Addr Display *
controller setting
proportional
gain2
Sensorless
speed ASR-SL I
2432 0h1418 1.0-1000.0(%) O/A X I p.211
controller Gain2
integral gain2
Sensorless
speed ASR-SL I
2532 0h1419 1.0~999.9(ms) O/A X I -
controller Gain0
integral gain 0
Flux estimator
Flux P
2632 0h141A proportional 10-200(%) O/A X I p.211
Gain
gain
Flux estimator Flux I
2732 0h141B 10-200(%) O/A X I p.211
integral gain Gain
Speed
estimator S-Est P
2832 0h141C 0-32767 O/A X I p.211
proportional Gain1
gain
Speed
S-Est I
2932 0h141D estimator 100-1000 O/A X I p.211
Gain1
integral gain1
Speed
S-Est I
3032 0h141E estimator 100-10000 O/A X I p.211
Gain2
integral gain2
Sensorless
current
ACR SL
3132 0h141F controller 10-1000 O/A X I p.211
P Gain
proportional
gain
Sensorless
current ACR SL I
3232 0h1420 10 -1000 O/A X I p.211
controller Gain
integral gain
PM D-axis
PM
back-EMF
33 33 0h1421 EdGain 0~300.0[%] 100.0 X/A X P -
estimation
Perc
gain [%]
PM Q-axis PM
3433 0h1422 0~300.0[%] 100.0 X/A X P -
back-EMF EqGain
341
Table of Functions
Cn Addr Display *
estimation Perc
gain [%]
Initial pole
PD
position
3533 0h1423 Repeat 0~10 2 X/A X P -
detection retry
Num
number
Initial pole
position Pulse
3633 0h1424 1~100 20 X/A X P -
detection Interval
pulse interval
Initial pole
position Pulse
3733 0h1425 10~100 15 X/A X P -
detection Curr %
current level [%]
Initial pole
position
Pulse
3833 0h1426 detection 100~4000 500 X/A X P -
Volt %
voltage level
[%]
PM dead time PMdead
3933 0h1427 50.0~100.0 100.0 X/A X P -
range [%] Band Per
PM dead time Pmdead
4033 0h1428 50.0~100.0 100.0 X/A X P -
voltage [%] Volt Per
Speed PM
4133 0h1429 estimator P SpdEst 0~32000 100 X/A X P -
gain1 Kp
Speed PM
4233 0h142A estimator I SpdEst 0~32000 10 X/A X P -
gain1 Ki
Speed PM
4333 0h142B estimator P SpdEst 0~32000 300 X/A X P -
gain2 Kp 2
Speed PM
4433 0h142C estimator I SpdEst 0~32000 30 X/A X P -
gain2 Ki 2
Speed
estimator feed PM Flux
4533 0h142D 0~100[%] 30.0 X/A X P -
forward high FF %
speed rate [%]
Initial pole Init 0 None
46 33
0h142E position Angle 1 Angle 1 X/A X P -
detection Sel 2 Align
342
Table of Functions
Cn Addr Display *
options
Current ACR P
4833 0h1430 0-10000 1200 O/A X I/P -
controller P gain Gain
Current ACR I
4933 0h1431 0-10000 120 O/A X I/P -
controller I gain Gain
Voltage V Con
5033 0h1432 0~100.0[%] 10.0 X/A X P -
controller limit HR
Voltage
5133 0h1433 V Con Ki 0~1000.0[%] 10.0 X/A X P -
controller I gain
Torque
Torque
52 0h1434 controller 0-2000(ms) 0 X/A X I/P p.211
Out LPF
output filter
0 Keypad-1
1 Keypad-2
2 V1
Torque limit Torque 4 V2 0:
53 0h1435 X/A X I/P p.211
setting options Lmt Src 5 I2 Keypad-1
6 Int 485
8 FieldBus
12 Pulse
Positive- FWD
direction
54 34 0h1436 +Trq 0.0-200.0(%) 180 O/A X I/P p.211
reverse
torque limit Lmt
Positive- FWD
direction
5534 0h1437 –Trq 0.0-200.0(%) 180 O/A X I/P p.211
regeneration
torque limit Lmt
Negative- REV
direction
5634 0h1438 +Trq 0.0-200.0(%) 180 O/A X I/P p.211
regeneration
torque limit Lmt
Negative- REV
direction
5734 0h1439 reverse –Trq 0.0-200.0(%) 180 O/A X I/P p.211
torque limit Lmt
0 Keypad-1
Speed limit Speed 1 Keypad-2 0:
6234 0h143E X/A X I/P -
Setting Lmt Src 2 V1 Keypad-1
4 V2
34 Displayed when dr.09 is set to 4 (IM Sensorless). This will change the initial value of the
parameter at Ad.74 (Torque limit) to 150%.
343
Table of Functions
Cn Addr Display *
5 I2
6 Int 485
7 FieldBus
Positive- FWD
0.00~ Maximum
6334 0h143F direction Speed
frequency (Hz) 50.00 O/A X I/P -
speed limit Lmt
Negative- REV
0.00~ Maximum
6434 0h1440 direction Speed 50.00 O/A X I/P -
frequency (Hz)
speed limit Lmt
Speed
Speed limit
6534 0h1441 Lmt 100~5000[%] 500 O/A X I/P -
operation gain
Gain
PM speed SS Pulse
69 35 0h1445 search current Curr 10~100 15 O/A X P -
Flying Start-
0
Speed search 1 36 0:
SS Flying Start-
70 0h1446 mode 1 Flying X/A O I/P p.233
Mode 2
selection Start-1
Flying Start-
2
335
bit 0000-1111
Selection of
speed
000
search
1
on
acceleration
When
starting on
Speed search 001
Speed initialization
71 0h1447 operation 0 0000 37 X/A O I/P p.233
Search after fault
selection
trip
When
restarting
010 after
0 instantaneo
us power
interruption
100 When

36 Will not be displayed if dr.09 is set to 4 (IM Sensorless).
37 The initial value 0000 will be displayed on the keypad as .
344
Table of Functions
Cn Addr Display *
0 starting
with power
on
Speed search
SS Sup-
72 38 0h1448 reference 80-200(%) 150 O/A O I/P p.233
Current
current
Flying
Start-1
Speed search : 100
SS P-
73 39 0h1449 proportional 0-9999 Flying O/A O I p.233
gain Gain
Start-2
: 600 40
Flying
Start-1
Speed search SS I- : 200
7439 0h144A 0-9999 O/A O I p.233
integral gain Gain Flying
Start-2
: 1000
Output
blocking time SS Block
7539 0h144B 0.0-60.0(s) 1.0 X/A O I/P p.233
before speed Time
search
Speed search Spd Est
7639 0h144C 50-150(%) 100 O/A O I -
Estimator gain Gain
77 0h144D Energy KEB 0 No 0:No X/A O p.227
buffering Select 1 Yes I/P
selection
Energy KEB
78 41 0h144E buffering Start 110.0-140.0(%) 125.0 X/A O I/P p.227
start level Lev
Energy KEB
7941 0h144F buffering Stop 125.0-145.0(%) 130.0 X/A O I/P p.227
stop level Lev
Energy KEB
8041 0h1450 1-20000 1000 O/A O I/P p.227
buffering gain Gain
38 Displayed when any of the Cn.71 code bits are set to 1 and Cn70 is set to 0 (Flying Start-1).
39 Displayed when any of the Cn.71 code bits are set to 1.
40 The initial value is 1200 when the motor-rated capacity is less than 7.5 kW
41 Displayed when Cn.77 is set to 1 (Yes).
345
Table of Functions
Cn Addr Display *
Flux estimator
Flux P
85 42 0h1455 proportional 100-700 370 O/A X I p.211
Gain1
gain1
Energy
KEB I
8141 0h1451 buffering 1~20000 500 O/A O I/P p.216
Gain
I gain
Energy
KEB Slip
8241 0h1452 buffering 0~2000.0% 30.0 O/A O I p.216
Gain
Slip gain
Energy
buffering KEB Acc
8341 0h1453 0.0~600.0(s) 10.0 O/A O I/P p.216
acceleration Time
time
Flux estimator
Flux P
8543 0h1455 proportional 100-700 370 O/A X I p.211
Gain1
gain1
Flux estimator
Flux P
gain2 Gain2
Flux estimator
Flux P
gain3 Gain3
8842 0h1458 integral gain1 0-200 50 O/A X I p.211
Gain1
8942 0h1459 integral gain2 0-200 50 O/A X I p.211
Gain2
9042 0h145A integral gain3 0-200 50 O/A X I p.211
Gain3
Sensorless
SL Volt
9142 0h145B voltage 0-60 O/A X I p.211
compensation1 Comp1
Sensorless
SL Volt Dependent O/A
9242 0h145C voltage 0-60 X I p.211
Comp2 on motor
compensation2
Sensorless setting
voltage SL Volt
9342 0h145D 0-60 O/A X I p.211
compensation Comp3
3
Sensorless SL FW
9442 0h145E 80.0-110.0(%) 100.0 X/A X I p.207
field Freq
346
Table of Functions
Cn Addr Display *
weakening
start frequency
Sensorless
SL Fc
9542 0h145F gain switching 0.00-8.00(Hz) 2.00 X/A X I p.207
Freq
frequency
8.6 Input Terminal Block Function group (PAR→In)

been selected.

Code Comm. LCD Initial Property
NamI/P Setting Range V/F SL Ref.
In Address Display Value *
Jump
00 - Jump Code 1-99 65 O/A O I/P p.72
Code
Start
Frequency for
Freq at frequency- Maximum
01 0h1501 maximum O/A O I/P p.118
100% Maximum frequency
analog input
frequency(Hz)
Torque at
Torque
02 0h1502 maximum 0.0-200.0(%) 100.0 O/A X X -
at100%
analog input
V1 input
V1
05 0h1505 voltage -12.00-12.00(V) 0.00 -/A O I/P p.118
Monitor(V)
display
V1 input 0 Unipolar
0:
06 0h1506 polarity V1 Polarity X/A O I/P p.118
1 Bipolar Unipolar
selection
Time constant
07 0h1507 of V1 input V1 Filter 0-10000(ms) 100 O/A O I/P p.118
filter
V1 Minimum
08 0h1508 V1 Volt x1 0.00-10.00(V) 0.00 O/A O I/P p.118
input voltage
V1 output at
09 0h1509 Minimum V1 Perc y1 0.00-100.00(%) 0.00 O/A O I/P p.118
voltage (%)
V1 Maximum
10 0h150A V1 Volt x2 0.00-12.00(V) 10.00 O/A O I/P p.118
input voltage
347
Table of Functions
V1 output at
11 0h150B Maximum V1 Perc y2 0.00-100.00(%) 100.00 O/A O I/P p.118
voltage (%)
V1 Minimum V1 –Volt
12 44 0h150C -10.00- 0.00(V) 0.00 O/A O I/P p.122
input voltage x1’
V1output at V1 –Perc
1344 0h150D Minimum -100.00-0.00(%) 0.00 O/A O I/P p.122
voltage (%) y1’
V1 Maximum V1 –Volt
1444 0h150E -12.00- 0.00(V) -10.00 O/A O I/P p.122
input voltage x2’
V1 output at V1 –Perc
1544 0h150F Maximum -100.00-0.00(%) -100.00 O/A O I/P p.122
voltage (%) y2’
V1 rotation 0 No
V1
16 0h1510 direction 0: No O/A O I/P p.118
Inverting 1 Yes
change
V1
V1 0.00 45, 0.04-
17 0h1511 quantization 0.04 X/A O I/P p.118
Quantizing 10.00(%)
level
V2 input
V2
35 46 0h1523 voltage 0.00-12.00(V) 0.00 -/A O I/P p.125
Monitor(V)
display
V2 input filter
3746 0h1525 V2 Filter 0-10000(ms) 100 O/A O I/P p.125
time constant
V2 Minimum
3846 0h1526 V2 Volt x1 0.00-10.00(V) 0.00 O/A X I/P p.125
input voltage
V2 output at
3946 0h1527 Minimum V2 Perc y1 0.00-100.00(%) 0.00 O/A O I/P p.125
voltage (%)
V2 Maximum
4046 0h1528 V2 Volt x2 0.00-10.00(V) 10 O/A X I/P p.125
input voltage
V2 output at
4146 0h1529 Maximum V2 Perc y2 0.00-100.00(%) 100.00 O/A O I/P p.125
voltage (%)
V2 rotation V2 0 No
4646 0h152E 0:No O/A O I/P p.125
direction Inverting 1 Yes
44 Displayed when In.06 is set to 1 (Bipolar).
45 Quantizing is not used when set to 0.
46 Displayed when V is selected on the analog current/voltage input circuit selection switch (SW2).
348
Table of Functions
change
V2
V2 0.0045, 0.04-
4746 0h152F quantization 0.04 O/A O I/P p.125
Quantizing 10.00(%)
level
I2 input
I2 Monitor
50 47 0h1532 current 0-24(mA) 0.00 -/A O I/P p.124
(mA)
display
I2 input filter
5247 0h1534 I2 Filter 0-10000(ms) 100 O/A O I/P p.124
time constant
I2 minimum
5347 0h1535 I2 Curr x1 0.00-20.00(mA) 4.00 O/A O I/P p.124
input current
I2 output at
5447 0h1536 Minimum I2 Perc y1 0.00-100.00(%) 0.00 O/A O I/P p.124
current (%)
I2 maximum
5547 0h1537 I2 Curr x2 0.00-24.00(mA) 20.00 O/A O I/P p.124
input current
I2 output at
5647 0h1538 Maximum I2 Perc y2 0.00-100.00(%) 100.00 O/A O I/P p.124
current (%)
Changing 0 No
I2
6147 0h153D rotation 0:No O/A O I/P p.124
Inverting 1 Yes
direction of I2
I2
I2 0.0045,0.04-
6247 0h153E quantization 0.04 O/A O I/P p.124
Quantizing 10.00(%)
level
0 None
P1 terminal
65 0h1541 function P1 Define 1:Fx X/A O I/P p.133
setting 1 Fx
P2 terminal
66 0h1542 function P2 Define 2 Rx 2:Rx X/A O I/P p.133
setting
P3 terminal
67 0h1543 function P3 Define 3 RST 5:BX X/A O I/P p.292
setting
P4 terminal
External
68 0h1544 function P4 Define 4 3:RST X/A O I/P p.281
setting Trip
P5 terminal
69 0h1545 function P5 Define 5 BX 7:Sp-L X/A O I/P p.291
setting
70 0h1546 P6 terminal P6 Define 6 JOG 8:Sp-M X/A O I/P p.184
47 Displayed when I is selected on the analog current/voltage input circuit selection switch (SW2).
349
Table of Functions
function
setting
P7 terminal
71 0h1547 function P7 Define 7 Speed-L 9:Sp-H X/A O I/P p.131
setting
8 Speed-M p.131
9 Speed-H p.131
11 XCEL-L p.144
12 XCEL-M p.144
RUN
13 p.190
Enable
14 3-Wire p.189
15 2nd Source p.163
16 Exchange p.242
17 Up p.188
18 Down p.188
20 U/D Clear p.188
Analog
21 p.130
Hold
I-Term
22 p.197
Clear
PID
23 p.197
Openloop
24 P Gain2 p.197
25 XCEL Stop p.149
26 2nd Motor p.240
34 Pre Excite -
38 Timer In p.252
40 dis Aux Ref p.179
46 FWD JOG p.186
47 REV JOG p.186
49 XCEL-H p.144
50 User Seq p.168
51 Fire Mode p.176
54 TI 48 p.127
Multi-function P7- P1 in IP20
84 0h1554 input terminal Dl Delay Sel models, 111 111149 O/A O I/P p.164
On filter P5-P1 in IP66
48 Displayed when P5 is selected on Px terminal function. (IP66 models only.)
49 The initial value 111 1111 will be displayed on the keypad as
350
Table of Functions
selection models
0 Disable(Off)
1 Enable(On)
Multi-function
DI On
85 0h1555 input terminal 0-10000(ms) 10 O/A O I/P p.164
On filter Delay
Multi-function
DI Off
86 0h1556 input terminal 0-10000(ms) 3 O/A O I/P p.164
Off filter Delay
P7- P1 in IP20
models,
Multi-function P5-P1 in IP66
input DI NC/NO models 000
87 0h1557 contact X/A O I/P p.164
Sel A contact 0000 50
selection 0
(NO)
B contact
1
(NC)
Multi-step
InCheck
89 0h1559 command 1-5000(ms) 1 X/A O I/P p.131
Time
delay time
P7- P1 in IP20
models,
Multi-function P5-P1 in IP66 000
90 0h155A input terminal DI Status models -/A O I/P p.164
000050
status 0 release(Off )
Connection
1
(On)
Pulse input Pulse
91 0h155B amount Monitor 0.00-50.00(kHz) 0.00 -/A O I/P p.127
display (kHz)
TI input filter
92 0h155C TI Filter 0-9999(ms) 10 O/A O I/P p.127
time constant
TI Minimum
93 0h155D TI Pls x1 0.00-32.00(kHz) 0.00 O/A O I/P p.127
input pulse
TI output at
94 0h155E Minimum TI Perc y1 0.00-100.00(%) 0.00 O/A O I/P p.127
pulse (%)
TI Maximum
95 0h155F TI Pls x2 0.00-32.00(kHz) 32.00 O/A O I/P p.127
input pulse
96 0h1560 TI Output at TI Perc y2 0-100(%) 100.00 O/A O I/P p.127
50 The initial value 000 0000 will be displayed on the keypad as .
351
Table of Functions
Maximum
pulse (%)
TI rotation 0 No
TI
97 0h1561 direction 0:No O/A O I/P p.127
Inverting 1 Yes
change
TI
TI 0.0045, 0.04-
98 0h1562 quantization 0.04 O/A O I/P p.127
Quantizing 10.00(%)
level
Bi
00~11
t
SW1(NPN/PNP)
IO SW 00 NPN, V2
99 0h1563 SW2(V1/V2[I2]) 01 -/A O I/P -
State 01 NPN, I2
status
10 PNP, V2
11 PNP, I2
8.7 Output Terminal Block Function group (PAR→OU)

Code Comm. Initial Prope
Name LCD Display Setting Range V/F SL Ref.
OU Addr Value rty*
Jump
00 - JumpCode 1-99 30 O/A O I/P p.72
Code
0 Frequency
1 Output Current
2 Output Voltage
3 DCLink Voltage
4 Torque
5 Output Power
Analog 6 Idse
0:Freq
01 0h1601 output 1 AO1 Mode 7 Iqse O/A O I/P p.257
uency
item 8 Target Freq
9 Ramp Freq
10 Speed Fdb
12 PID Ref Value
13 PID Fdb Value
14 PID Output
15 Constant
Analog
02 0h1602 AO1 Gain -1000.0-1000.0(%) 100.0 O/A O I/P p.257
output 1
352
Table of Functions
OU Addr Value rty*
gain
Analog
03 0h1603 output 1 AO1 Bias -100.0-100.0(%) 0.0 O/A O I/P p.257
bias
Analog
04 0h1604 output 1 AO1 Filter 0-10000(ms) 5 O/A O I/P p.257
filter
Analog
05 0h1606 constant AO1 Const % 0.0-100.0(%) 0.0 O/A O I/P p.257
output 1
Analog
06 0h1606 output 1 AO1 Monitor 0.0-1000.0(%) 0.0 -/A O I/P p.257
monitor
0 Frequency
1 Output Current
2 Output Voltage
3 DCLink Voltage
4 Torque
5 Output Power
Analog AO2 Mode 6 Idse
07 0h1607 output 2 [0034 model 7 Iqse
item only] 8 Target Freq
9 Ramp Freq
10 Speed Fdb
12 PID Ref Value
13 PID Fdb Value
14 PID Output
15 Constant
Analog AO2 Gain
p.257
08 0h1608 output 2 [0034 model -1000.0~1000.0(%) 100.0 O O I/P
gain only]
Analog AO2 Bias
p.257
09 0h1609 output 2 [0034 model -100.0~100.0(%) 0.0 O O I/P
bias only]
Analog AO2 Filter
p.257
10 0h160A output 2 [0034 model 0~10000(ms) 5 O O I/P
filter only]
Analog AO2 Const %
p.257
11 0h160B constant [0034 model 0.0~100.0(%) 0.0 O O I/P
output 2 only]
Analog AO2 Monitor
p.257
12 0h160C output 2 [0034 model 0.0~1000.0(%) 0.0 O I/P
monitor only]
353
Table of Functions
OU Addr Value rty*
bit 000-111
1 Low voltage
Fault Any faults
Trip Out 2 other than low 010 51 O/A
30 0h161E output O I/P p.266
Mode voltage
item
Automatic
3 restart final
failure
0 None
1 FDT-1
2 FDT-2
3 FDT-3
4 FDT-4
5 Over Load
6 IOL
7 Under Load
8 Fan Warning
9 Stall
10 Over Voltage
11 Low Voltage
12 Over Heat
Multi-
13 Lost Command
function
31 0h161F Relay 1 14 Run 29:Trip O/A O I/P p.262
relay 1
15 Stop
item
16 Steady
17 Inverter Line
18 Comm Line
19 Speed Search
22 Ready
28 Timer Out
29 Trip
31 DB Warn%ED
34 On/Off Control
35 BR Control
36 CAP.Warning
37 FAN Exchange
38 Fire Mode
Multi- 0 None
33 0h1621 Q1 Define 14:Run O/A O I/P p.262
function 1 FDT-1
354
Table of Functions
OU Addr Value rty*
output1 2 FDT-2
item 3 FDT-3
4 FDT-4
5 Over Load
6 IOL
7 Under Load
8 Fan Warning
9 Stall
10 Over Voltage
11 Low Voltage
12 Over Heat
13 Lost Command
14 Run
15 Stop
16 Steady
17 Inverter Line
18 Comm Line
19 Speed Search
22 Ready
28 Timer Out
29 Trip
31 DB Warn%ED
34 On/Off Control
35 BR Control
36 CAP.Warning
37 FAN Exchange
38 Fire Mode
39 TO52
Multi-
function
41 0h1629 DO Status - 00 -/A - - p.262
output
monitor
Multi-
function
50 0h1632 DO On Delay 0.00-100.00(s) 0.00 O/A O I/P p.267
output
On delay
Multi-
function
51 0h1633 DO Off Delay 0.00-100.00(s) 0.00 O/A O I/P p.267
output
Off delay
52 Supported in IP66 models only.
355
Table of Functions
OU Addr Value rty*
Multi- Q1, Relay1
function 0 A contact (NO)
DO
52 0h1634 output 00 53 X/A O I/P p.267
NC/NO Sel
contact 1 B contact (NC)
selection
Fault
TripOut
53 0h1635 output 0.00-100.00(s) 0.00 O/A O I/P p.266
OnDly
On delay
Fault
TripOut
54 0h1636 output 0.00-100.00(s) 0.00 O/A O I/P p.266
OffDly
Off delay
Timer TimerOn
55 h1637 0.00-100.00(s) 0.00 O/A O I/P p.252
On delay Delay
Timer TimerOff
56 0h1638 0.00-100.00(s) 0.00 O/A O I/P p.252
Off delay Delay
Detected FDT 0.00-Maximum
57 0h1639 30.00 O/A O I/P p.262
frequency Frequency frequency(Hz)
Detected
0.00-Maximum
58 0h163A frequency FDT Band 10.00 O/A O I/P p.262
frequency(Hz)
band
0 Frequency
1 Output Current
2 Output Voltage
3 DCLink Voltage
4 Torque
5 Output Power
Pulse 6 Idse 0:
61 0h163D output TO Mode 7 Iqse Freque O/A O I/P p.260
gain 8 Target Freq ncy
9 Ramp Freq
10 Speed Fdb
12 PID Ref Value
13 PID Fdb Value
14 PID Output
15 Constant
Pulse
62 0h163E output TO Gain -1000.0-1000.0(%) 100.0 O/A O I/P p.260
gain
Pulse
63 0h163F TO Bias -100.0-100.0(%) 0.0 O/A O I/P p.260
output
356
Table of Functions
OU Addr Value rty*
bias
Pulse
64 0h1640 output TO Filter 0-10000(ms) 5 O/A O I/P p.260
filter
Pulse
output
65 0h1641 TO Const % 0.0-100.0(%) 0.0 O/A O I/P p.260
constant
output 2
Pulse
66 0h1642 output TO Monitor 0.0-1000.0(%) 0.0 -/A O I/P p.260
monitor
8.8 Communication Function group (PAR→CM)

been selected.

Code Comm. LCD Initial Prope
Name Setting Range V/F SL Ref.
CM Addr Display Value rty*
Jump
00 - Jump Code 1-99 20 O/A O I/P p.72
Code
Built-in
Int485 St
01 0h1701 communication 1-250 1 O/A O I/P p.299
ID
inverter ID
Built-in 0:
Int485
0254 0h1702 communication 0 ModBus RTU ModBus O/A O I/P p.299
Proto
protocol RTU
0 1200 bps
1 2400 bps
2 4800 bps
Built-in 3:
Int485 3 9600 bps
0354 0h1703 communication 9600 O/A O I/P p.299
BaudR 4 19200 bps
speed bps
5 38400 bps
6 56 Kbps
7 115 Kbps 54
54 115,200bps
357
Table of Functions
0 D8/PN/S1
Built-in 0:
Int485 1 D8/PN/S2
0454 0h1704 communication D8/PN/S O/A O I/P p.299
Mode 2 D8/PE/S1
frame setting 1
3 D8/PO/S1
Transmission
Resp
0554 0h1705 delay 0-1000(ms) 5ms O/A O I/P p.299
Delay
after reception
Communication
FBus S/W
06 55 0h1706 option - 0.00 O/A O I/P -
Ver
S/W version
Communication
0755 0h1707 option FBus ID 0-255 1 O/A O I/P -
inverter ID
FIELD BUS
FBUS
0855 0h1708 communication - 12Mbps -/A O I/P -
BaudRate
speed
Communication FieldBus
0955 0h1709 - - O/A O I/P -
option LED status LED
Number of
ParaStatus
30 0h171E output 0-8 3 O/A O I/P
Num
parameters
Output
Para
31 56 0h171F Communication 0000-FFFF Hex 000A O/A O I/P p.304
Stauts-1
address1
Output
Para
3256 0h1720 Communication 0000-FFFF Hex 000E O/A O I/P p.304
Stauts-2
address2
Output
Para
3356 0h1721 Communication 0000-FFFF Hex 000F O/A O I/P p.304
Stauts-3
address3
Output
Para
3456 0h1722 Communication 0000-FFFF Hex 0000 O/A O I/P p.304
Stauts-4
address4
Output
Para
Stauts-5
address5
Output
Para
Stauts-6
address6
55 Displayed only when a communication option card is installed.
56 Only the range of addresses set at COM-30 is displayed.
358
Table of Functions
Output
Para
Stauts-7
address7
Output
Para
Stauts-8
address8
Number of input Para Ctrl
50 0h1732 0-8 2 O/A O I/P
parameters Num
Input
Para
51 57 0h1733 Communication 0000-FFFF Hex 0005 X/A O I/P p.304
Control-1
address1
Input
Para
5257 0h1734 Communication 0000-FFFF Hex 0006 X/A O I/P p.304
Control-2
address2
Input
Para
Control-3
address3
Input
Para
Control-4
address4
Input
Para
Control-5
address5
Input
Para
Control-6
address6
Input
Para
Control-7
address7
Input
Para
5857 0h173A Communication 0000-FFFF Hex 0000 X/A O I/P p.304
Control-8
address8
Field bus data FBus Swap 0 No
68 0h1744 0 X/A O I/P p.304
swap Sel 1 Yes
Communication
Virtual DI
70 0h1746 multi-function 0 None 0:None O/A O I/P p.317
1
input 1
Communication
Virtual DI
71 0h1747 multi-function 1 Fx 0:None O/A O I/P p.317
2
input 2
72 0h1748 Communication Virtual DI 2 Rx 0:None O/A O I/P p.317
57 Only the range of addresses set at COM-50 is displayed.
359
Table of Functions
multi-function 3
input 3
Communication
Virtual DI
73 0h1749 multi-function 3 RST 0:None O/A O I/P p.317
4
input 4
Communication
Virtual DI External
74 0h174A multi-function 4 0:None O/A O I/P p.317
5 Trip
input 5
Communication
Virtual DI
75 0h174B multi-function 5 BX 0:None O/A O I/P p.317
6
input 6
Communication
Virtual DI
76 0h174C multi-function 6 JOG 0:None O/A O I/P p.317
7
input 7
7 Speed-L
8 Speed-M
9 Speed-H
11 XCEL-L
12 XCEL-M
13 RUN Enable
14 3-Wire
15 2nd Source
16 Exchange
17 Up
18 Down
20 U/D Clear
Communication
Virtual DI Analog
77 0h174D multi-function 21 0:None O/A O I/P p.317
8 Hold
input 8
22 I-Term Clear
PID
23
Openloop
24 P Gain2
25 XCEL Stop
26 2nd Motor
34 Pre Excite
38 Timer In
40 dis Aux Ref
46 FWD JOG
47 REV JOG
49 XCEL-H
Communication
Virt DI
86 0h1756 multi-function - 0 X/A O I/P p.302
Status
input monitoring
360
Table of Functions
Selection of data 0 Int485
frame Comm
90 0h175A 0 O/A O I/P -
communication Mon Sel 1 KeyPad
monitor
Data frame Rev
Rcv Frame
91 0h175B 0~65535 0 O/A O I/P -
count Num
Data frame Err
Err Frame
92 0h175C 0~65535 0 O/A O I/P -
count Num
NAK
93 0h175D NAK frame count Frame 0~65535 0 O/A O I/P -
Num
Communication Comm 0 No
94 58 - 0:No -/A O I/P -
data upload Update 1 Yes
0 Disable All
P2P 0:
Int 485 1 P2P Master
95 0h175F communication Disable X/A O I/P p.166
Func 2 P2P Slave
selection All
3 KPD-Ready
Bit 000~111
001 Analog
output
010 Multi-
0h1760 DO setting P2P OUT
96 59 function 0:No O/A O I/P p.166
[RO] selection Sel
relay
100 Multi-
function
output
58 Displayed only when a communication option card is installed.
59 Displayed when AP.01 is set to 2 (Proc PID).
361
Table of Functions
8.9 Application Function group (PAR→AP)

been selected.

Code Comm. Setting Initial Prop V/
Name LCD Display SL Ref.
AP Addr Range Value erty* F
00 - Jump Code Jump Code 1-99 20 O/A O I/P p.72
Application 0 None
0:
01 0h1801 function App Mode 1 - X/A O I/P p.197
None
selection 2 Proc PID
Enable user 0 No
02 0h1802 User Seq En 0:No X/A O I/P p.168
sequence 1 Yes
PID output
16 60 0h1810 PID Output (%) 0.00 -/A O I/P p.197
monitor
PID reference
17 61 0h1811 PID Ref Value (%) 50.00 -/A O I/P p.197
monitor
PID feedback
1861 0h1812 PID Fdb Value (%) 0.00 -/A O I/P p.197
monitor
PID reference -100.00-
1961 0h1813 PID Ref Set 50.00 O/A O I/P p.197
setting 100.00(%)
0 Keypad
1 V1
3 V2
PID reference PID 0:
2061 0h1814 4 I2 X/A O I/P p.197
source Ref Source Keypad
5 Int 485
7 FieldBus
11 Pulse
0 V1
2 V2
PID feedback PID 3 I2
2161 0h1815 0:V1 X/A O I/P p.197
source F/B Source 4 Int 485
6 FieldBus
10 Pulse
PID controller 0.0-
2261 0h1816 PID P-Gain 50.0 O/A O I/P p.197
proportional 1000.0(%)
362
Table of Functions

gain
PID controller
2361 0h1817 PID I-Time 0.0-200.0(s) 10.0 O/A O I/P p.197
integral time
PID controller
2461 0h1818 differentiation PID D-Time 0-1000(ms) 0 O/A O I/P p.197
time
PID controller
feed-forward 0.0-
2561 0h1819 PID F-Gain 0.0 O/A O I/P p.197
compensation 1000.0(%)
gain
Proportional
2661 0h181A P Gain Scale 0.0-100.0(%) 100.0 X/A O I/P p.197
gain scale
PID output
2761 0h181B PID Out LPF 0-10000(ms) 0 O/A O I/P p.197
filter
Process
0
PID
2861 0h181C PID Mode PID Mode 0 X/A O I/P -
Normal
1
PID
PID lower
PID upper limit limit
2961 0h181D PID Limit Hi 50.00 O/A O I/P p.197
frequency frequency-
300.00(Hz)
-300.00 -PID
PID lower limit upper limit
3061 0h181E PID Limit Lo -50.00 O/A O I/P p.197
frequency frequency(Hz
)
PID output 0 No
3161 0h181F PID Out Inv 0:No X/A O I/P p.197
inverse 1 Yes
PID output 0.1-
3261 0h1820 PID Out Scale 100.0 X/A O I/P p.197
scale 1000.0(%)
0.00-
PID controller
Maximum
3461 0h1822 motion Pre-PID Freq 0.00 X/A O I/P p.197
frequency(Hz
frequency
)
PID controller
3561 0h1823 motion level Pre-PID Exit 0.0-100.0(%) 0.0 X/A O I/P p.197
PID controller
3661 0h1824 motion delay Pre-PID Delay 0-9999(s) 600 O/A O I/P p.197
time
PID sleep
3761 0h1825 mode PID Sleep DT 0.0-999.9(s) 60.0 O/A O I/P p.197
delay time
PID sleep 0.00-
PID Sleep
3861 0h1826 mode Freq
Maximum 0.00 O/A O I/P p.197
frequency frequency(Hz
363
Table of Functions

)
PID wake-up PIDWakeUp
3961 0h1827 0-100(%) 35 O/A O I/P p.197
level Lev
Below
0
Level
PID wake-up PID WakeUp Above 0:Belo
4061 0h1828 1 O/A O I/P p.197
mode setting Mod Level w Level
Beyond
2
Level
0 %
1 Bar
2 mBar
3 Pa
4 kPa
5 Hz
PID controller 6 rpm
4261 0h182A PID Unit Sel 0:% O/A O I/P p.197
unit selection 7 V
8 I
9 kW
10 HP
11 °C
12 ℉
0.00-
4361 0h182B PID unit gain PID Unit Gain 100.00 O/A O I/P p.197
300.00(%)
0 x100
1 x10
PID Unit
4461 0h182C PID unit scale 2 x1 2:x 1 O/A O I/P p.197
Scale
3 x 0.1
4 x 0.01
PID 2nd
0.0-
4561 0h182D proportional PID P2-Gain 100.0 X/A O I/P p.197
1000.0(%)
gain
364
Table of Functions
8.10 Protection Function group (PAR→Pr)

been selected.

Pr Address Display Value
Jump
00 - Jump Code 1-99 40 O/A O I/P p.72
Code
Load level Load 0 Normal Duty 1:Heavy

04 0h1B04 X/A O I/P p.275
setting Duty 1 Heavy Duty Duty
bit 00-11
Output open
Input/output 01
Phase phase
05 0h1B05 open-phase 10 62 X/A O I/P p.280
Loss Chk
protection
Input open
10
phase
Input
voltage IPO V
06 0h1B06 1-100(V) 15 X/A O I/P p.280
range during Band
open-phase
Deceleration
Trip Dec
07 0h1B07 time at fault 0.0-600.0(s) 3.0 O/A O I/P -
Time
trip
Selection of 0 No
RST
08 0h1B08 startup on 0:No O/A O I/P p.237
Restart
trip reset 1 Yes
Number of
Retry
09 0h1B09 automatic 0-10 0 O/A O I/P p.237
Number
restarts
365
Table of Functions
Automatic
Retry
10 63 0h1B0A restart 0.0-60.0(s) 1.0 O/A O I/P p.237
Delay
delay time
0 None
Motion 1 Free-Run
at speed Lost Cmd 2 Dec
12 0h1B0C 0:None O/A O I/P p.283
command Mode 3 Hold Input
loss 4 Hold Output
5 Lost Preset
Time to
decide
Lost Cmd
13 64 0h1B0D speed 0.1-120(s) 1.0 O/A O I/P p.283
Time
command
loss
Operation
frequency Start frequency-
Lost
1464 0h1B0E at speed Maximum 0.00 O/A O I/P p.283
Preset F
command frequency(Hz)
loss
Analog input 0 Half x1
AI Lost 0:Half of
1564 0h1B0F loss decision O/A O I/P p.283
Level 1 Below x1 x1
level
Overload 0 No
OL Warn
17 0h1B11 warning 0:No O/A O I/P p.275
Select 1 Yes
selection
Overload OL Warn
18 0h1B12 30-180(%) 150 O/A O I/P p.275
alarm level Level
Overload
OL Warn
19 0h1B13 warning 0.0-30.0(s) 10.0 O/A O I/P p.275
Time
time
0 None
Motion at
OL Trip 1 Free-Run 1:Free-
20 0h1B14 overload O/A O I/P p.275
Select Run
fault 2 Dec
Overload OL Trip
21 0h1B15 30-200(%) 180 O/A O I/P p.275
fault level Level
22 0h1B16 Overload OL Trip 0.0-60.0(s) 60.0 O/A O I/P p.275
63 Displayed when Pr.09 is set higher than 0.
64 Displayed when Pr.12 is not set to 0 (NONE).
366
Table of Functions
fault time Time
Underload 0 No
UL Warn
25 0h1B19 warning 0:No O/A O I/P p.286
Sel 1 Yes
selection
Underload
UL Warn
26 0h1B1A warning 0.0-600.0(s) 10.0 O/A O I/P p.286
Time
time
Underload 0 None
UL Trip
27 0h1B1B fault 1 Free-Run 0:None O/A O I/P p.286
Sel
selection 2 Dec
Underload UL Trip
28 0h1B1C 0.0-600.0(s) 30.0 O/A O I/P p.286
fault time Time
Underload
UL LF
29 0h1B1D lower limit 10-30(%) 30 O/A O I/P p.286
Level
level
Underload
UL BF
30 0h1B1E upper limit 30-100(%) 30 O/A O I/P p.286
Level
level
No motor
No Motor 0 None
31 0h1B1F motion at 0:None O/A O I/P p.293
Trip 1 Free-Run
detection
No motor
No Motor
32 0h1B20 detection 1-100(%) 5 O/A O I p.293
Level
current level
No motor
No Motor
33 0h1B21 detection 0.1-10.0(s) 3.0 O/A O I p.293
Time
delay
Electronic 0 None
ETH Trip
40 0h1B28 thermal fault 1 Free-Run 0:None O/A O I/P p.273
Sel
selection 2 Dec
Motor 0 Self-cool
Motor 0:Self-
41 0h1B29 cooling fan O/A O I/P p.273
Cooling 1 Forced-cool cool
type
Electronic
thermal 1
42 0h1B2A ETH 1min 120-200(%) 150 O/A O I/P p.273
minute
rating
Electronic
thermal
43 0h1B2B ETH Cont 50-150(%) 120 O/A O I/P p.273
continuous
rating
367
Table of Functions
0 Free-Run
45 0h1B2D BX trip mode BX Mode 0 X/A O I/P -
1 Dec
bit 0000-1111
0001 Accelerating
Stall
prevention Stall At constant
50 0h1B32 0010 0000 X/A O X p.276
motion and Prevent speed
flux braking
At
0100
deceleration
1000 FluxBraking
Start frequency-
Stall Stall Freq
51 0h1B33 Stall 50.00 O/A O X p.276
frequency1 1
frequency2(Hz)
Stall
52 0h1B34 Stall level1 30-250(%) 180 X/A O X p.276
Level 1
Stall frequency1-
Stall Stall Freq
53 0h1B35 Stall 50.00 O/A O X p.276
frequency2 2
frequency3(Hz)
Stall
Level 2
Stall frequency2-
Stall Stall Freq
55 0h1B37 Stall 50.00 O/A O X p.276
frequency3 3
frequency4(Hz)
Stall
Level 3
Stall frequency3-
Stall Stall Freq
57 0h1B39 Maximum 50.00 O/A O X p.276
frequency4 4
frequency(Hz)
Stall
58 0h1B3A Stall level4 30-250(%) 180 X/A O X p.276
Level 4
Flux braking Flux
59 0h1B3B Brake Kp 0 ~ 150[%] 0 O/A O I -
gain
CAP
CAP.
60 0h1B3C diagnosis 10 ~ 100[%] 0 O/A O I/P -
Diag Perc
level
368
Table of Functions
0 None
CAP
1 Ref Diag
61 65 0h1B3D diagnosis CAP. Diag 0 X/A O I/P -
mode 2 Pre Diag
3 Init Diag
CAP CAP
6265 0h1B3E Exchange Exchange 50.0 ~ 95.0[%] 0 X/A O I/P -
Level Level
CAP Diag CAP Diag
6365 0h1B3F 0.0~100.0[%] 0.0 -/A O I/P -
Level Level
DB resistor
DB Warn
66 0h1B42 warning 0-30(%) 0 O/A O I/P p.285
%ED
level
Speed 0 No
Speed
73 0h1B22 deviation 0:No O/A O I/P
Dev Trip 1 Yes
trip
Speed
Speed
74 66 0h1B23 deviation Dev Band 1 ~ 20 5 O/A O I/P
band
Speed
Speed
7566 0h1B24 deviation Dev Time 0 ~ 120 60 O/A O I/P
time
Cooling fan 0 Trip
FAN Trip 1:
79 0h1B4F fault O/A O I/P p.288
Mode 1 Warning Warning
selection
Motion 0 None
Opt Trip 1:Free-
80 0h1B50 selection 1 Free-Run O/A O I/P p.292
Mode Run
at option trip 2 Dec
Low voltage
fault LVT
81 0h1B51 0.0-60.0(s) 0.0 X/A O I/P p.288
decision Delay
delay time
LV2 LV2 0 No
82 0h1B52 0 X/A O I/P -
Selection Enable 1 Yes
Accumulated
Fan Time
86 0h1B56 percent of 0.0~100.0[%] 0.0 -/A O I/P -
Perc
fan usage
65 The Pr.61-63 codes are displayed when the Pr.60(CAP.DiagPrec) is set to more than 0.
66 Displayed when Pr.73 is set to 1(YES)
369
Table of Functions
Fan
Fan
exchange
87 0h1B57 Exchange 0.0~100.0[%] 90.0 O/A O I/P -
warning
level
level
Fan reset Fan Time 0 No
88 67 0h1B58 0 X/A O I/P -
time Rst 1 Yes
Bit 00~10
CAP, FAN CAP, FAN 00 -
89 0h1B59 0 -/A O I/P -
Status State 01 CAP Warning
10 FAN Warning
Warning
9067 0h1B5A - - - -/7 O I/P -
information
Fault history
9167 0h1B5B - - - -/7 O I/P -
1
Fault history
9267 0h1B5C - - - -/7 O I/P -
2
Fault history
9367 0h1B5D - - - -/7 O O -
3
Fault history
9467 0h1B5E - - - -/7 O O -
4
Fault history
9567 0h1B5F - - - -/7 O O -
5
Fault history 0 No
9667 0h1B60 - 0:No -/7 O O -
deletion 1 Yes
8.11 2nd Motor Function group (PAR→M2)

The 2nd Motor function group will be displayed if any of In.65-71 in IP20 models, In.65-69 in
IP66 models are set to 26 (2nd MOTOR). In the following table, the data shaded in grey will
be displayed when a related code has been selected.

M2 Addr Display Value
00 - Jump Code Jump Code 1-99 14 O/A O I p.72
04 0h1C04 Acceleration M2-Acc 0.0-600.0(s) 20.0 O/A O I p.240
67 Will not be displayed when an LCD keypad is in use.
370
Table of Functions
time Time
Deceleration M2-Dec
05 0h1C05 0.0-600.0(s) 30.0 O/A O I p.240
time Time
0 0.2 kW
1 0.4 kW
2 0.75 kW
3 1.1 kW
4 1.5 kW
5 2.2 kW
6 3.0 kW
Motor M2- 7 3.7 kW
06 0h1C06 - X/A O I p.240
capacity Capacity 8 4.0 kW
9 5.5 kW
10 7.5 kW
11 11.0 kW
12 15.0 kW
13 18.5 kW
14 22.0 kW
15 30.0 kW
30.00-
400.00(Hz)
[V/F, Slip
Compen]
40.00-
Base M2-Base 120.00(Hz)
07 0h1C07 50.00 X/A O I p.240
frequency Freq [IM
Sensorless]
30.00-
180.00(Hz)
[PM
Sensorless]
0 V/F
Slip
2
Compen
M2-Ctrl
08 0h1C08 Control mode IM 0:V/F X/A O I p.240
Mode 4
Sensorless
PM
6
Sensorless
Number of M2-Pole
10 0h1C0A 2-48 4 X/A O I p.240
motor poles Num
Rated slip M2-Rated Dependent
11 0h1C0B 0-3000(rpm) X/A O I p.240
speed Slip on motor
371
Table of Functions
Motor rated M2-Rated settings
12 0h1C0C 1.0-1000.0(A) X/A O I p.240
current Curr
Motor no- M2-Noload
13 0h1C0D 0.5-1000.0(A) X/A O I p.240
load current Curr
Motor rated M2-Rated
14 0h1C0E 0, 170-480(V) X/A O I p.240
voltage Volt
Motor M2-
15 0h1C0F 64-100(%) X/A O I p.240
efficiency Efficiency
Load inertia M2-Inertia
16 0h1C10 0-8 X/A O I p.240
rate Rt
0h1C11 Stator
17 M2-Rs X/A O I p.240
[R/O] resistance
Dependent
0h1C12 Leakage
18 M2-Lsigma on motor X/A O I p.240
[R/O] inductance
settings
0h1C13 Stator
19 M2-Ls X/A O I p.240
[R/O] inductance
0h1C14 Rotor time
20 68 M2-Tr 25-5000(ms) X/A O I p.240
[R/O] constant
0 Linear
M2-V/F
25 0h1C19 V/F pattern 1 Square 0: Linear X/A O I p.240
Patt
2 User V/F
Forward M2-Fwd
26 0h1C1A 0.0-15.0(%) X/A O I p.240
Torque boost Boost
2.0
Reverse M2-Rev
27 0h1C1B 0.0-15.0(%) X/A O I p.240
Torque boost Boost
Stall
M2-Stall
28 0h1C1C prevention 30-150(%) 150 X/A O I p.240
Lev
level
Electronic
M2-ETH
29 0h1C1D thermal 1 100-200(%) 150 X/A O I p.240
1min
minute rating
Electronic
thermal M2-ETH
30 0h1C1E 50-150(%) 100 X/A O I p.240
continuous Cont
rating
Rotation
Load Spd
40 0h1C28 count speed 0~6000.0[%] 100.0 O/A O I -
Gain
gain
68 Displayed when M2.08 is set to 4 (IM Sensorless).
372
Table of Functions
0 x1
Rotation 1 x 0.1
Load Spd
41 0h1C29 count speed 2 x 0.01 0: x 1 O/A O I -
Scale
scale 3 x 0.001
4 x 0.0001
Rotation 0 Rpm
Load Spd
42 0h1C2A count speed 0: rpm O/A O I -
Unit 1 mpm
unit
8.12 User Sequence group (US)

This group appears when AP.02 is set to 1 (Yes) or CM.95 is set to 2 (P2P Master). The
parameter cannot be changed while the user sequence is running.
SL: Sensorless vector control function (dr.09) , I – IM Sensorless, P – PM Sensorless

*O/X: Write-enabled during operation, 7/L/A: keypad/LCD keypad/common
Code Comm. Name LCD Display Setting Initial Proper V/F SL Ref.
US Add Range Value ty*
00 - Jump code Jump Code 1-99 31 O/A O I/P p.72
01 0h1D01 User sequence User Seq Con 0 Stop 0:Stop X/A O I/P p.168
operation 1 Run
command 2 Digital In
Run
02 0h1D02 User sequence US Loop 0 0.01s 1:0.02s X/A O I/P p.168
operation loop Time 1 0.02s
time 2 0.05s
3 0.1s
4 0.5s
5 1s
11 0h1D0B Output address Link 0-0xFFFF 0 X/A O I/P p.168
link1 UserOut1
12 0h1D0C Output address Link 0-0xFFFF 0 X/A O I/P p.168
link2 UserOut2
13 0h1D0D Output address Link 0-0xFFFF 0 X/A O I/P p.168
link3 UserOut3
14 0h1D0E Output address Link 0-0xFFFF 0 X/A O I/P p.168
link4 UserOut4
15 0h1D0F Output address Link 0-0xFFFF 0 X/A O I/P p.168
link5 UserOut5
16 0h1D10 Output address Link 0-0xFFFF 0 X/A O I/P p.168
link6 UserOut6
link7 UserOut7
373
Table of Functions
link8 UserOut8
link9 UserOut9
link10 UserOut10
link11 UserOut11
link12 UserOut12
link13 UserOut13
link14 UserOut14
link15 UserOut15
26 0h1D1A Output address Link 0-0xFFFF 0 X/A O I/P p.168
link16 UserOut16
27 0h1D1B Output address Link 0-0xFFFF 0 X/A O I/P p.168
link17 UserOut17
28 0h1D1C Output address Link 0-0xFFFF 0 X/A O I/P p.168
link18 UserOut18
31 0h1D1F Input constant Void Para1 -9999-9999 0 X/A O I/P p.168
setting1
32 0h1D20 Input constant Void Para2 -9999-9999 0 X/A O I/P p.168
setting2
setting3
setting4
setting5
setting6
setting7
setting8
setting9
setting10
374
Table of Functions
setting11
42 0h1D2A Input constant Void Para12 -9999-9999 0 X/A O I/P p.168
setting12
43 0h1D2B Input constant Void Para13 -9999-9999 0 X/A O I/P p.168
setting13
44 0h1D2C Input constant Void Para14 -9999-9999 0 X/A O I/P p.168

setting14
45 0h1D2D Input constant Void Para15 -9999-9999 0 X/A O I/P p.168
setting15
46 0h1D2E Input constant Void Para16 -9999-9999 0 X/A O I/P p.168
setting16
47 0h1D2F Input constant Void Para17 -9999-9999 0 X/A O I/P p.168
setting17
setting18
setting19
setting20
setting21
setting22
setting23
setting24
setting25
setting26
setting27
58 0h1D3A Input constant Void Para28 -9999-9999 0 X/A O I/P p.168
setting28
59 0h1D3B Input constant Void Para29 -9999-9999 0 X/A O I/P p.168
setting29
60 0h1D3C Input constant Void Para30 -9999-9999 0 X/A O I/P p.168
setting30
80 0h1D50S Analog input 1 P2P In V1 0-12,000 -/A O I/P p.168
81 0h1D51 Analog input2 P2P In I2 -12,000- -/A O I/P p.168
12,000
375
Table of Functions
82 0h1D52 Digital input P2P In DI 0-0x7F -/A O I/P p.168
85 0h1D55 Analog output P2P OutAO1 0-10,000 0 X/A O I/P p.168
88 0h1D58 Digital output P2P OutDO 0-0x03 0 X/A O I/P p.168
8.13 User Sequence Function group(UF)

This group appears when AP.02 is set to 1 (Yes) or CM.95 is set to 2 (P2P Master). The
parameter cannot be changed while the user sequence is running.
SL: Sensorless vector control function (dr.09)
*O/X: Write-enabled during operation, 7/L/A: keypad/LCD keypad/common
Code Comm. Name LCD Setting Range Initial Property* V/F SL Ref.
UF Address Display Value
00 - Jump codeJump 1-99 41 O/A O I/P p.72
Code
01 0h1E01 User function1 User 0 NOP 0:NOP X/A O I/P p.168
Func1 1 ADD
2 SUB
3 ADDSUB
4 MIN
5 MAX
6 ABS
7 NEGATE
8 MPYDIV
9 REMAINDER
10 COMPARE-GT
11 COMPARE-GEQ
12 COMPARE-
EQUAL
13 COMPARE-
NEQUAL
14 TIMER
15 LIMIT
16 AND
17 OR
18 XOR
19 ANDOR
20 SWITCH
21 BITTEST
376
Table of Functions
22 BITSET
23 BITCLEAR
24 LOWPASSFILTER
25 PI_CONTORL
26 PI_PROCESS
27 UPCOUNT
28 DOWNCOUNT
02 0h1E02 User function User 0-0xFFFF 0 X/A O I/P p.168
input1-A Input1-A
input1-B Input1-B
input1-C Input1-C
05 0h1E05 User function User -32767-32767 0 -/A O I/P p.168
output1 Output1
06 0h1E06 User function 2 User 0 NOP 0:NOP X/A O I/P p.168
Func2 1 ADD
2 SUB
3 ADDSUB
4 MIN
5 MAX
6 ABS
7 NEGATE
8 MPYDIV
9 REMAINDER
10 COMPARE-GT
11 COMPARE-GEQ
12 COMPARE-
EQUAL
13 COMPARE-
NEQUAL
14 TIMER
15 LIMIT
16 AND
17 OR
18 XOR
19 ANDOR
377
Table of Functions
20 SWITCH
21 BITTEST
22 BITSET
23 BITCLEAR
24 LOWPASSFILTER
25 PI_CONTORL
26 PI_PROCESS
27 UPCOUNT
28 DOWNCOUNT
input2-A Input2-A
input2-B Input2-B
input2-C Input2-C
10 0h1E0A User function User -32767-32767 0 -/A O I/P p.168
output2 Output2
11 0h1E0B User function3 User 0 NOP 0:NOP X/A O I/P p.168
Func3 1 ADD
2 SUB
3 ADDSUB
4 MIN
5 MAX
6 ABS
7 NEGATE
8 MPYDIV
9 REMAINDER
10 COMPARE-GT
11 COMPARE-GEQ
12 COMPARE-
EQUAL
13 COMPARE-
NEQUAL
14 TIMER
15 LIMIT
16 AND
17 OR
378
Table of Functions
18 XOR
19 ANDOR
20 SWITCH
21 BITTEST
22 BITSET
23 BITCLEAR
24 LOWPASSFILTER
25 PI_CONTORL
26 PI_PROCESS
27 UPCOUNT
28 DOWNCOUNT
12 0h1E0C User function User 0-0xFFFF 0 X/A O I/P p.168
input3-A Input3-A
13 0h1E0D User function User 0-0xFFFF 0 X/A O I/P p.168
input3-B Input3-B
14 0h1E0E User function User 0-0xFFFF 0 X/A O I/P p.168
input3-C Input3-C
15 User function User -32767-32767 0 -/A O I/P p.168
0h1E0F
output3 Output3
Func4 1 ADD
2 SUB
3 ADDSUB
4 MIN
5 MAX
6 ABS
7 NEGATE
8 MPYDIV
9 REMAINDER
10 COMPARE-GT
11 COMPARE-GEQ
12 COMPARE-
EQUAL
13 COMPARE-
NEQUAL
14 TIMER
15 LIMIT
379
Table of Functions
16 AND
17 OR
18 XOR
19 ANDOR
20 SWITCH
21 BITTEST
22 BITSET
23 BITCLEAR
24 LOWPASSFILTER
25 PI_CONTORL
26 PI_PROCESS
27 UPCOUNT
28 DOWNCOUNT
17 User function User 0-0xFFFF 0 X/A O I/P p.168
0h1E11
input4-A Input4-A
0h1E12
input4-B Input4-B
0h1E13
input4-C Input4-C
0h1E14
output4 Output4
Func5 1 ADD
2 SUB
3 ADDSUB
4 MIN
5 MAX
6 ABS
7 NEGATE
8 MPYDIV
9 REMAINDER
10 COMPARE-GT
11 COMPARE-GEQ
12 COMPARE-
EQUAL
13 COMPARE-
NEQUAL
14 TIMER
15 LIMIT
380
Table of Functions
16 AND
17 OR
18 XOR
19 ANDOR
20 SWITCH
21 BITTEST
22 BITSET
23 BITCLEAR
24 LOWPASSFILTER
25 PI_CONTORL
26 PI_PROCESS
27 UPCOUNT
28 DOWNCOUNT
0h1E16
input5-A Input5-A
0h1E17
input5-B Input5-B
0h1E18
input5-C Input5-C
0h1E19
output5 Output5
26 0h1E1A User function6 User 0 NOP 0:NOP X/A O I/P p.168
Func6 1 ADD
2 SUB
3 ADDSUB
4 MIN
5 MAX
6 ABS
7 NEGATE
8 MPYDIV
9 REMAINDER
10 COMPARE-GT
11 COMPARE-GEQ
12 COMPARE-
EQUAL
13 COMPARE-
NEQUAL
381
Table of Functions
14 TIMER
15 LIMIT
16 AND
17 OR
18 XOR
19 ANDOR
20 SWITCH
21 BITTEST
22 BITSET
23 BITCLEAR
24 LOWPASSFILTER
25 PI_CONTORL
26 PI_PROCESS
27 UPCOUNT
28 DOWNCOUNT
0h1E1B
input6-A Input6-A
0h1E1C
input6-B Input6-B
0h1E1D
input6-C Input6-C
0h1E1E
output6 Output6
31 User function7 User 0 NOP 0:NOP X/A O I/P p.168
Func7 1 ADD
2 SUB
3 ADDSUB
4 MIN
5 MAX
0h1E1F 6 ABS
7 NEGATE
8 MPYDIV
9 REMAINDER
10 COMPARE-GT
11 COMPARE-GEQ
12 COMPARE-
382
Table of Functions
EQUAL
13 COMPARE-
14 TIMER
15 LIMIT
16 AND
17 OR
18 XOR
19 ANDOR
20 SWITCH
21 BITTEST
22 BITSET
23 BITCLEAR
24 LOWPASSFILTER
25 PI_CONTORL
26 PI_PROCESS
27 UPCOUNT
28 DOWNCOUNT
0h1E20
input7-A Input7-A
0h1E21
input7-B Input7-B
0h1E22 input7-C Input7-C
0h1E23
output7 Output7
Func8 1 ADD
2 SUB
3 ADDSUB
4 MIN
0h1E24 5 MAX
6 ABS
7 NEGATE
8 MPYDIV
9 REMAINDER
10 COMPARE-GT
383
Table of Functions
11 COMPARE-GEQ
12 COMPARE-
EQUAL
13 COMPARE-
NEQUAL
14 TIMER
15 LIMIT
16 AND
17 OR
18 XOR
19 ANDOR
20 SWITCH
21 BITTEST
22 BITSET
23 BITCLEAR
24 LOWPASSFILTER
25 PI_CONTORL
26 PI_PROCESS
27 UPCOUNT
28 DOWNCOUNT
0h1E25 input8-A Input8-A
0h1E26
input8-B Input8-B
0h1E27
input8-C Input8-C
0h1E28
output8 Output8
Func9 1 ADD
2 SUB
3 ADDSUB
0h1E29 4 MIN
5 MAX
6 ABS
7 NEGATE
8 MPYDIV
384
Table of Functions
9 REMAINDER
10 COMPARE-GT
11 COMPARE-GEQ
12 COMPARE-
EQUAL
13 COMPARE-
NEQUAL
14 TIMER
15 LIMIT
16 AND
17 OR
18 XOR
19 ANDOR
20 SWITCH
21 BITTEST
22 BITSET
23 BITCLEAR
24 LOWPASSFILTER
25 PI_CONTORL
26 PI_PROCESS
27 UPCOUNT
28 DOWNCOUNT
0h1E2A
input9-A Input9-A
0h1E2B
input9-B Input9-B
0h1E2C
input9-C Input9-C
0h1E2D
output9 Output9
46 User User 0 NOP 0:NOP X/A O I/P p.168
function10 Func10 1 ADD
2 SUB
0h1E2E 3 ADDSUB
4 MIN
5 MAX
6 ABS
385
Table of Functions
7 NEGATE
8 MPYDIV
9 REMAINDER
10 COMPARE-GT
11 COMPARE-GEQ
12 COMPARE-
EQUAL
13 COMPARE-
NEQUAL
14 TIMER
15 LIMIT
16 AND
17 OR
18 XOR
19 ANDOR
20 SWITCH
21 BITTEST
22 BITSET
23 BITCLEAR
24 LOWPASSFILTER
25 PI_CONTORL
26 PI_PROCESS
27 UPCOUNT
28 DOWNCOUNT
0h1E2F input10-A Input10-
A
0h1E30 input10-B Input10-
B
0h1E31 input10-C Input10-
C
0h1E32
output10 Output10
51 User User 0 NOP 0:NOP X/A O I/P p.168
0h1E33 function11 Func11 1 ADD
2 SUB
386
Table of Functions
3 ADDSUB
4 MIN
5 MAX
6 ABS
7 NEGATE
8 MPYDIV
9 REMAINDER
10 COMPARE-GT
11 COMPARE-GEQ
12 COMPARE-
EQUAL
13 COMPARE-
NEQUAL
14 TIMER
15 LIMIT
16 AND
17 OR
18 XOR
19 ANDOR
20 SWITCH
21 BITTEST
22 BITSET
23 BITCLEAR
24 LOWPASSFILTER
25 PI_CONTORL
26 PI_PROCESS
27 UPCOUNT
28 DOWNCOUNT
0h1E34 input11-A Input11-
A
B
C
55 0h1E37 User function User -32767-32767 0 -/A O I/P p.168
387
Table of Functions
output11 Output11
56 0h1E38 User User 0 NOP 0:NOP X/A O I/P p.168
2 SUB
3 ADDSUB
4 MIN
5 MAX
6 ABS
7 NEGATE
8 MPYDIV
9 REMAINDER
10 COMPARE-GT
11 COMPARE-GEQ
12 COMPARE-
EQUAL
13 COMPARE-
NEQUAL
14 TIMER
15 LIMIT
16 AND
17 OR
18 XOR
19 ANDOR
20 SWITCH
21 BITTEST
22 BITSET
23 BITCLEAR
24 LOWPASSFILTER
25 PI_CONTORL
26 PI_PROCESS
27 UPCOUNT
28 DOWNCOUNT
A
0h1E3A
input12-B Input12-
388
Table of Functions
B
0h1E3B input12-C Input12-
C
0h1E3C
output12 Output12
61 0h1E3D User User 0 NOP 0:NOP X/A O I/P p.168
2 SUB
3 ADDSUB
4 MIN
5 MAX
6 ABS
7 NEGATE
8 MPYDIV
9 REMAINDER
10 COMPARE-GT
11 COMPARE-GEQ
12 COMPARE-
EQUAL
13 COMPARE-
NEQUAL
14 TIMER
15 LIMIT
16 AND
17 OR
18 XOR
19 ANDOR
20 SWITCH
21 BITTEST
22 BITSET
23 BITCLEAR
24 LOWPASSFILTER
25 PI_CONTORL
26 PI_PROCESS
27 UPCOUNT
28 DOWNCOUNT
389
Table of Functions
0h1E3E input13-A Input13-
A
0h1E3F input13-B Input13-
B
C
0h1E41
output13 Output13
2 SUB
3 ADDSUB
4 MIN
5 MAX
6 ABS
7 NEGATE
8 MPYDIV
9 REMAINDER
10 COMPARE-GT
11 COMPARE-GEQ
12 COMPARE-
EQUAL
13 COMPARE-
NEQUAL
14 TIMER
15 LIMIT
16 AND
17 OR
18 XOR
19 ANDOR
20 SWITCH
21 BITTEST
22 BITSET
23 BITCLEAR
24 LOWPASSFILTER
390
Table of Functions
25 PI_CONTORL
26 PI_PROCESS
27 UPCOUNT
28 DOWNCOUNT
A
B
C
0h1E46
output14 Output14
2 SUB
3 ADDSUB
4 MIN
5 MAX
6 ABS
7 NEGATE
8 MPYDIV
9 REMAINDER
10 COMPARE-GT
11 COMPARE-GEQ
12 COMPARE-
EQUAL
13 COMPARE-
NEQUAL
14 TIMER
15 LIMIT
16 AND
17 OR
18 XOR
19 ANDOR
20 SWITCH
391
Table of Functions
21 BITTEST
22 BITSET
23 BITCLEAR
24 LOWPASSFILTER
25 PI_CONTORL
26 PI_PROCESS
27 UPCOUNT
28 DOWNCOUNT
A
B
0h1E4A input15-C Input15-
C
0h1E4B
output15 Output15
76 0h1E4C User function User 0 NOP 0:NOP X/A O I/P p.168
16 Func16 1 ADD
2 SUB
3 ADDSUB
4 MIN
5 MAX
6 ABS
7 NEGATE
8 MPYDIV
9 REMAINDER
10 COMPARE-GT
11 COMPARE-GEQ
12 COMPARE-
EQUAL
13 COMPARE-
NEQUAL
14 TIMER
15 LIMIT
16 AND
392
Table of Functions
17 OR
18 XOR
19 ANDOR
20 SWITCH
21 BITTEST
22 BITSET
23 BITCLEAR
24 LOWPASSFILTER
25 PI_CONTORL
26 PI_PROCESS
27 UPCOUNT
28 DOWNCOUNT
0h1E4D input16-A Input16-
A
0h1E4E input16-B Input16-
B
0h1E4F input16-C Input16-
C
0h1E50
output16 Output16
81 0h1E51 User function User 0 NOP 0:NOP X/A O I/P p.168
17 Func17 1 ADD
2 SUB
3 ADDSUB
4 MIN
5 MAX
6 ABS
7 NEGATE
8 MPYDIV
9 REMAINDER
10 COMPARE-GT
11 COMPARE-GEQ
12 COMPARE-
EQUAL
13 COMPARE-
393
Table of Functions
NEQUAL
14 TIMER
15 LIMIT
16 AND
17 OR
18 XOR
19 ANDOR
20 SWITCH
21 BITTEST
22 BITSET
23 BITCLEAR
24 LOWPASSFILTER
25 PI_CONTORL
26 PI_PROCESS
27 UPCOUNT
28 DOWNCOUNT
A
B
C
0h1E55
output17 Output17
86 User function User 0 NOP 0:NOP X/A O I/P p.168
18 Func18 1 ADD
2 SUB
3 ADDSUB
4 MIN
0h1E56
5 MAX
6 ABS
7 NEGATE
8 MPYDIV
9 REMAINDER
394
Table of Functions
10 COMPARE-GT
11 COMPARE-GEQ
12 COMPARE-
EQUAL
13 COMPARE-
NEQUAL
14 TIMER
15 LIMIT
16 AND
17 OR
18 XOR
19 ANDOR
20 SWITCH
21 BITTEST
22 BITSET
23 BITCLEAR
24 LOWPASSFILTER
25 PI_CONTORL
26 PI_PROCESS
27 UPCOUNT
28 DOWNCOUNT
A
B
C
0h1E5A
output18 Output18
395
Table of Functions
8.14 Groups for LCD Keypad Only
8.14.1 Trip Mode (TRP Last-x)

Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Initial Value Ref.
00 Trip type display Trip Name(x) - - -
Frequency reference at
01 Output Freq - - -
trip
02 Output current at trip Output Current - - -
Acceleration/Deceleration
03 Inverter State - - -
state at trip
04 DC section state DCLink Voltage - - -
05 NTC temperature Temperature - - -
06 Input terminal state DI Status - 0000 0000 -
07 Output terminal state DO Status - 000 -
08 Trip time after Power on Trip On Time - 0/00/00 00:00 -
09 Trip time after operation
Trip Run Time - 0/00/00 00:00 -
10 start
0 No
10 Delete trip history Trip Delete?
1 Yes
8.14.2 Config Mode (CNF)

00 Jump code Jump Code 1-99 42 p.72
Keypad language
01 Language Sel 0 : English 0 : English p.268
selection
LCD constrast
02 LCD Contrast - - p.251
adjustment
03 Multi keypad ID Multi KPD ID 3-99 3 p.167
10 Inverter S/W version Inv S/W Ver - - p.251
11 LCD keypad S/W version Keypad S/W Ver - - p.251
12 LCD keypad title version KPD Title Ver - - p.251
Status window display
20 Anytime Para 0 Frequency 0: Frequency p.269
item
396
Table of Functions

Monitor mode display
21 Monitor Line-1 1 Speed 0: Frequency p.269
item1
Monitor mode display Output 2:Output
22 Monitor Line-2 2 p.269
item2 Current Current
3 Output
4 l
Output
5 WHour
6 DCLink
7 DI lState
8 DO State
9 V1
10 V1
13 V2 ( )
Monitor mode display 3:Output
23 Monitor Line-3 p.269
item3 14 V2 Voltage
15 I2
16 ( )
I2 Monitor(%)
17 PID Output
18 PID Ref Value
19 PID Fdb Value
20 Torque
21 Torque Limit
23 Speed Limit
Monitor mode 0 No
24 Mon Mode Init 0:No p.269
initialization 1 Yes
Option slot 1 type
30 Option-1 Type 0 None 0:None p.251
display
Option slot 2 type
31 Option-2 Type 6 Ethernet 0:None p.251
display
Option slot 3 type
32 Option-3 Type 9 CANopen 0:None p.251
display
0 No
1 All Grp
2 DRV Grp
40 Parameter initialization Parameter Init 3 BAS Grp p.245
4 ADV Grp
5 CON Grp
6 IN Grp
397
Table of Functions

7 OUT Grp
8 COM Grp
9 APP Grp
12 PRT Grp
13 M2 Grp
Display changed 0 View All
41 Changed Para 0:View All p.248
Parameter 1 View
0 h
None d
1 JOG Key
2 Local/Remote
42 Multi key item Multi Key Sel 0:None p.248
UserGrp
3
SelKey
4 Multi KPD
43 Macro function item Macro Select 0 None 0:None -
0 No
44 Trip history deletion Erase All Trip 0:No p.251
1 Yes
User registration code 0 No
45 UserGrp AllDel 0:No p.248
deletion 1 Yes
0 No
46 Read parameters Parameter Read 0:No p.244
1 Yes
Parameter 0 No
47 Write parameters 0: No p.244
Write 1 Yes
0 No
48 Save parameters Parameter Save 0:No p.244
1 Yes
50 Hide parameter mode View Lock Set 0-9999 Un-locked p.246
Password for hiding
51 View Lock Pw 0-9999 Password p.246
parameter mode
52 Lock parameter edit Key Lock Set 0-9999 Un-locked p.247
Password for locking
53 Key Lock Pw 0-9999 Password p.247
parameter edit
0 No
60 Additional title update Add Title Up 0:No p.251
1 Yes
Simple parameter 0 No
61 Easy Start On 1:Yes p.248
setting 1 Yes
Power consumption 0 No
62 WHCount Reset 0:No p.251
398
Table of Functions

Accumulated inverter Year/month/day
70 On-time - p.271
motion time hour:minute
Accumulated inverter Year/month/day
71 Run-time - p.271
operation time hour:minute
0 No 0:No
Accumulated inverter
72 operation time Time Reset p.271
Accumulated cooling Year/month/day

74 Fan Time - p.271
fan operation time hour:minute
Reset of accumulated 0 No
75 cooling fan operation Fan Time Rst 0:No p.271
1 Yes
time
399
Troubleshooting
9 Troubleshooting
This chapter explains how to troubleshoot a problem when inverter protective functions,
fault trips, warning signals, or a fault occurs. If the inverter does not work normally after
following the suggested troubleshooting steps, please contact the Elettronica Santerno
customer service center.
9.1 Trips and Warnings

When the inverter detects a fault, it stops the operation (trips) or sends out a warning
signal. When a trip or warning occurs, the keypad displays the information briefly. If the LCD
keypad is used, detailed information is shown on the LCD display. Users can read the
warning message at Pr.90. When more than 2 trips occur at roughly the same time, the
keypad (basic keypad with 7-segment display) displays the higher priority fault trip
information, while the LCD keypad shows the information for the fault trip that occurred
first.
The fault conditions can be categorized as follows:
• Level: When the fault is corrected, the trip or warning signal disappears and the fault is
not saved in the fault history.
• Latch: When the fault is corrected and a reset input signal is provided, the trip or warning
signal disappears.
• Fatal: When the fault is corrected, the fault trip or warning signal disappears only after
the user turns off the inverter, waits until the charge indicator light goes off, and turns
the inverter on again. If the the inverter is still in a fault condition after powering it on
again, please contact the supplier or the Elettronica Santerno customer service center.
9.1.1 Fault Trips

Protection Functions for Output Current and Input Voltage
Keypad LCD Type Description

Display Display
OLT Over Load Latch Displayed when the motor overload trip is activated and
the actual load level exceeds the set level. Operates
when Pr.20 is set to a value other than 0.
ULT Under Latch Displayed when the motor underload trip is activated
Load and the actual load level is less than the set level.
400
Troubleshooting

Display Display
Operates when Pr.27 is set to a value other than 0.
OCT Over Latch Displayed when inverter output current exceeds 200%
Current1 of the rated current.
OVT Over Latch Displayed when internal DC circuit voltage exceeds the
Voltage specified value.
LVT Low Level Displayed when internal DC circuit voltage is less than
Voltage the specified value.
LV2 Low Latch Displayed when internal DC circuit voltage is less than
Voltage2 the specified value during inverter operation.
GFT Ground Latch Displayed when a ground fault trip occurs on the output
Trip* side of the inverter and causes the current to exceed the
specified value. The specified value varies depending on
inverter capacity.
ETH E-Thermal Latch Displayed based on inverse time-limit thermal
characteristics to prevent motor overheating. Operates
when Pr.40 is set to a value other than 0.
POT Out Phase Latch Displayed when a 3-phase inverter output has one or
Open more phases in an open circuit condition. Operates
when bit 1 of Pr.05 is set to 1.
IPO In Phase Latch Displayed when a 3-phase inverter input has one or
Open more phases in an open circuit condition. Operates only
when bit 2 of Pr.05 is set to 1.
IOL Inverter Latch Displayed when the inverter has been protected from
OLT overload and resultant overheating, based on inverse
time-limit thermal characteristics. Allowable overload
rates for the inverter are 150% for 1 min and 200% for 4
sec. Protection is based on inverter rated capacity, and
may vary depending on the device’s capacity.
NMT No Motor Latch Displayed when the motor is not connected during
Trip inverter operation. Operates when Pr.31 is set to 1.
* Sinus H inverters rated for 4.0kW or less (models 0007 and below) do not support the
ground fault trip (GFT) feature. Therefore, an over current trip (OCT) or over voltage trip
(OVT) may occur when there is a low-resistance ground fault.
Protection Functions Using Abnormal Internal Circuit Conditions and External Signals
Keypad LCD Display Type Description

Display
OHT Over Heat Latch Displayed when the tempertature of the inverter heat
sink exceeds the specified value.
OC2 Over Latch Displayed when the DC circuit in the inverter detects a
Current2 specified level of excessive, short circuit current.
401
Troubleshooting
Keypad LCD Display Type Description

Display
EXT External Trip Latch Displayed when an external fault signal is provided by
the multi-function terminal. Set one of the multi-
function input terminals at In.65-71 in IP20 models,
In.65-69 in IP66 models to 4 (External Trip) to enable
external trip.
BX BX Level Displayed when the inverter output is blocked by a
signal provided from the multi-function terminal. Set
one of the multi-function input terminals at In.65-71 in
IP20 models, In.65-69 in IP66 models to 5 (BX) to enable
input block function.
HWT H/W-Diag Fatal Displayed when an error is detected in the memory
(EEPRom), analog-digital converter output (ADC Off Set),
or CPU watchdog (Watch Dog-1, Watch Dog-2).
EEP Err: An error in reading/writing parameters due to

keypad or memory (EEPRom) fault.
ADC Off Set: An error in the current sensing circuit

(U/V/W terminal, current sensor, etc.).
NTC NTC Open Latch Displayed when an error is detected in the temperature
sensor of the Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor (IGBT).
FAN Fan Trip Latch Displayed when an error is detected in the cooling fan.
Set Pr.79 to 0 to activate fan trip (for models below 22kW
capacity).
PID Pre-PID Fail Latch Displayed when pre-PID is operating with functions set
at AP.34–AP.36. A fault trip occurs when a controlled
variable (PID feedback) is measured below the set value
and the low feedback continues, as it is treated as a load
fault.
XBR Ext-Brake Latch Operates when the external brake signal is provided by
the multi-function terminal. Occurs when the inverter
output starting current remains below the set value at
Ad.41. Set either OU.31 or OU.32 to 35 (BR Control).
SFA Safety A(B) Level Displayed when at least one of the two safety input
Err signals is off.
SFB
402
Troubleshooting
Protection Functions for Communication Options

Display Display
LOR Lost Level Displayed when a frequency or operation command
Command error is detected during inverter operation by
controllers other than the keypad (e.g., using a terminal
block and a communication mode). Activate by setting
Pr.12 to any value other than 0.
IOT IO Board Latch Displayed when the I/O board or external
Trip communication card is not connected to the inverter or
there is a bad connection.
ERRC Displayed when the error code continues for more than
5 sec.
(‘Errc’ -> ’-rrc’ -> E-rc’ -> ’Er-c’ -> ‘Err-‘ -> ’- -rc’ -> ‘Er- -‘ -> ’-
- - -‘
-> ’Errc’ -> …)
PAR ParaWrite Latch Displayed when communication fails during parameter
Trip writing. Occurs when using an LCD keypad due to a
control cable fault or a bad connection.
OPT Option Trip- Latch Displayed when a communication error is detected
1 between the inverter and the communication board.
Occurs when the communication option card is
installed.
9.1.2 Warning Messages

Keypad LCD Display Description
Display
OLW Over Load Displayed when the motor is overloaded. Operates when Pr.17 is
set to 1. To operate, select 5. Set the digital output terminal or relay
(OU.31 or OU.33) to 5 (Over Load) to receive overload warning
output signals.
ULW Under Load Displayed when the motor is underloaded. Operates when Pr.25 is
set to 1. Set the digital output terminal or relay (OU.31 or OU.33) to
7 (Under Load) to receive underload warning output signals.
IOLW INV Over Displayed when the overload time equivalent to 60% of the
Load inverter overheat protection (inverter IOLT) level, is accumulated.
Set the digital output terminal or relay (OU.31 or OU.33) to 6 (IOL)
403
Troubleshooting
to receive inverter overload warning output signals.
LCW Lost Lost command warning alarm occurs even with Pr.12 set to 0. The
Command warning alarm occurs based on the condition set at Pr.13- 15. Set
the digital output terminal or relay (OU.31 or OU.33) to 13 (Lost
Command) to receive lost command warning output signals. If the
communication settings and status are not suitable for P2P, a Lost
Command alarm occurs.
FANW Fan Warning Displayed when an error is detected from the cooling fan while
Pr.79 is set to 1. Set the digital output terminal or relay (OU.31 or
OU.33) to 8 (Fan Warning) to receive fan warning output signals
EFAN An alarm occurs when the value set at PRT-86 is less than the value
Fan set at PRT-87. To receive fan exchange output signals, set the
Exchange digital output terminal or relay (OUT-31 or OUT-33) to 38 (Fan
Exchange).
ECAP An alarm occurs when the value set at PRT-63 is less than the value
CAP set at PRT-62 (the value set at PRT-61 must be 2 (Pre Diag)). To
Exchange receive CAP exchange signals, set the digital output terminal or
relay (OUT-31 or OUT-33) to 36 (CAP Exchange).
DBW DB Warn Displayed when the DB resistor usage rate exceeds the set value.
%ED Set the detection level at Pr.66.
TRTR Retry Tr Tr tune error warning alarm is activated when Dr.9 is set to 4. The
Tune warning alarm occurs when the motor’s rotor time constant (Tr) is
either too low or too high.
9.2 Troubleshooting Fault Trips

When a fault trip or warning occurs due to a protection function, refer to the following table
for possible causes and remedies.
Type Cause Remedy

Over Load The load is greater than the motor’s Ensure that the motor and inverter
rated capacity. have appropriate capacity ratings.
The set value for the overload trip level Increase the set value for the overload
(Pr.21) is too low. trip level.
Under Load There is a motor-load connection Replace the motor and inverter with
problem. models with lower capacity.
The set value for underload level (Pr.29, Reduce the set value for the
Pr.30) is less than the system’s minimum underload level.
load.
Over Acc/Dec time is too short, compared to Increase Acc/Dec time.
Current1 load inertia (GD2).
The inverter load is greater than the Replace the inverter with a model that
rated capacity. has increased capacity.
404
Troubleshooting
Type Cause Remedy

The inverter supplied an output while Operate the inverter after the motor
the motor was idling. has stopped or use the speed search
function (Cn.60).
The mechanical brake of the motor is Check the mechanical brake.
operating too fast.
Over Voltage Deceleration time is too short for the Increase the acceleration time.
load inertia (GD2).
A generative load occurs at the inverter Use the braking unit.
output.
The input voltage is too high. Determine if the input voltage is
above the specified value.
Low Voltage The input voltage is too low. Determine if the input voltage is
below the specificed value.
A load greater than the power capacity is Increase the power capacity.
connected to the system (e.g., a welder,
direct motor connection, etc.)
The magnetic contactor connected to Replace the magnetic contactor.
the power source has a faulty
connection.
Low Voltage2 The input voltage has decreased during Determine if the input voltage is
the operation. above the specified value.
An input phase-loss has occurred. Check the input wiring.
The power supply magnetic contactor is Replace the magnetic contractor.
faulty.
Ground Trip A ground fault has occurred in the Check the output wiring.
inverter output wiring.
The motor insulation is damaged. Replace the motor.
E-Thermal The motor has overheated. Reduce the load or operation
frequency.
The inverter load is greater than the Replace the inverter with a model that
rated capacity. has increased capacity.
The set value for electronic thermal Set an appropriate electronic thermal
protection is too low. level.
The inverter has been operated at low Replace the motor with a model that
speed for an extended duration. supplies extra power to the cooling
fan.
Output Phase The magnetic contactor on the output Check the magnetic contactor on the
Open side has a connection fault. output side.
The output wiring is faulty. Check the output wiring.
Input Phase The magnetic contactor on the input Check the magnetic contactor on the
Open side has a connection fault. input side.
The input wiring is faulty. Check the input wiring.
The DC link capacitor needs to be Replace the DC link capacitor. Contact
replaced. the retailer or the Elettronica Santerno
405
Troubleshooting
Type Cause Remedy

Inverter OLT The load is greater than the rated motor Replace the motor and inverter with
capacity. models that have increased capacity.
The torque boost level is too high. Reduce the torque boost level.
Over Heat There is a problem with the cooling Determine if a foreign object is
system. obstructing the air inlet, outlet, or
vent.
The inverter cooling fan has been Replace the cooling fan.
operated for an extended period.
The ambient temperature is too high. Keep the ambient temperature below
50°C.
Over Output wiring is short-circuited. Check the output wiring.
Current2 There is a fault with the electronic Do not operate the inverter. Contact
semiconductor (IGBT). the retailer or the Elettronica Santerno
NTC Open The ambient temperature is too low. Keep the ambient temperature above
-10°C.
There is a fault with the internal Contact the retailer or the Elettronica
temperature sensor. Santerno customer service center.
FAN Lock A foreign object is obstructing the fan’s Remove the foreign object from the
air vent. air inlet or outlet.
The cooling fan needs to be replaced. Replace the cooling fan.
IP54 FAN Trip The fan connector is not connected. Connect the fan connector.
The fan connector needs to be replaced. Replace the fan connector.
9.3 Troubleshooting Other Faults

When a fault other than those identified as fault trips or warnings occurs, refer to the
following table for possible causes and remedies.
Type Cause Remedy

Parameters The inverter is in operation (driving Stop the inverter to change to
cannot be set. mode). program mode and set the
parameter.
The parameter access is incorrect. Check the correct parameter access

level and set the parameter.
The password is incorrect. Check the password, disable the
parameter lock and set the
parameter.
Low voltage is detected. Check the power input to resolve the
406
Troubleshooting
Type Cause Remedy

low voltage and set the parameter.
The motor does The frequency command source is set Check the frequency command
not rotate. incorrectly. source setting.
The operation command source is set Check the operation command
incorrectly. source setting.
Power is not supplied to the terminal Check the terminal connections R/S/T
R/S/T. and U/V/W.
The charge lamp is turned off. Turn on the inverter.
The operation command is off. Turn on the operation command
(RUN).
The motor is locked. Unlock the motor or lower the load
level.
The load is too high. Operate the motor independently.
An emergency stop signal is input. Reset the emergency stop signal.
The wiring for the control circuit Check the wiring for the control
terminal is incorrect. circuit terminal.
The input option for the frequency Check the input option for the
command is incorrect. frequency command.
The input voltage or current for the Check the input voltage or current
frequency command is incorrect. for the frequency command.
The PNP/NPN mode is selected Check the PNP/NPN mode setting.
incorrectly.
The frequency command value is too Check the frequency command and
low. input a value above the minimum
frequency.
The [STOP/RESET] key is pressed. Check that the stoppage is normal, if
so resume operation normally.
Motor torque is too low. Change the operation modes (V/F,
IM, and Sensorless). If the fault
remains, replace the inverter with a
model with increased capacity.
The motor The wiring for the motor output cable Determine if the cable on the output
rotates in the is incorrect. side is wired correctly to the phase
opposite (U/V/W) of the motor.
direction to the The signal connection between the Check the forward/reverse rotation
command. control circuit terminal wiring.
(forward/reverse rotation) of the
inverter and the forward/reverse
rotation signal on the control panel
side is incorrect.
The motor only Reverse rotation prevention is selected. Remove the reverse rotation
rotates in one prevention.
direction. The reverse rotation signal is not Check the input signal associated
provided, even when a 3-wire with the 3-wire operation and adjust
407
Troubleshooting
Type Cause Remedy

sequence is selected. as necessary.
The motor is The load is too heavy. Reduce the load.
overheating. Increase the Acc/Dec time.
Check the motor parameters and set
the correct values.
Replace the motor and the inverter
with models with appropriate
capacity for the load.
The ambient temperature of the motor Lower the ambient temperature of
is too high. the motor.
The phase-to-phase voltage of the Use a motor that can withstand
motor is insufficient. phase-to-phase voltages surges
greater than the maximum surge
voltage.
Only use motors suitable for
apllications with inverters.
Connect the AC reactor to the
inverter output (set the carrier
frequency to 2 kHz).
The motor fan has stopped or the fan is Check the motor fan and remove any
obstructed with debris. foreign objects.
The motor stops The load is too high. Reduce the load.
during Replace the motor and the inverter
acceleration or with models with capacity
when appropriate for the load.
connected to
load.
The motor does The frequency command value is low. Set an appropriate value.
not accelerate. The load is too high. Reduce the load and increase the
/The acceleration time. Check the
acceleration mechanical brake status.
time is too long. The acceleration time is too long. Change the acceleration time.
The combined values of the motor Change the motor related
properties and the inverter parameter parameters.
are incorrect.
The stall prevention level during Change the stall prevention level.
acceleration is low.
The stall prevention level during Change the stall prevention level.
operation is low.
Starting torque is insufficient. Change to vector control operation
mode. If the fault is still not
corrected, replace the inverter with a
model with increased capacity.
Motor speed There is a high variance in load. Replace the motor and inverter with
408
Troubleshooting
Type Cause Remedy

varies during models with increased capacity.
operation. The input voltage varies. Reduce input voltage variation.
Motor speed variations occur at a Adjust the output frequency to avoid
specific frequency. a resonance area.
The motor The V/F pattern is set incorrectly. Set a V/F pattern that is suitable for
rotation is the motor specification.
different from
the setting.
The motor The deceleration time is set too long. Change the setting accordingly.
deceleration The motor torque is insufficient. If motor parameters are normal, it is
time is too long likely to be a motor capacity fault.
even with Replace the motor with a model with
Dynamic increased capacity.
Braking (DB)
The load is higher than the internal Replace the inverter with a model
resistor
torque limit determined by the rated with increased capacity.
connected.
current of the inverter.
Operation is The carrier frequency is too high. Reduce the carrier frequency.
difficult in Over-excitation has occurred due to an Reduce the torque boost value to
underload inaccurate V/F setting at low speed. avoid over-excitation.
applications.
While the Noise occurs due to switching inside Change the carrier frequency to the
inverter is in the inverter. minimum value.
operation, a Install a micro surge filter in the
control unit inverter output.
malfunctions or
noise occurs.
When the An earth leakage breaker will interrupt Connect the inverter to a ground
inverter is the supply if current flows to ground terminal.
operating, the during inverter operation. Check that the ground resistance is
earth leakage less than 100Ω for 2S/T inverters and
breaker is
activated. less than 10Ω for 4T inverters.
Check the capacity of the earth
leakage breaker and make the
appropriate connection, based on
the rated current of the inverter.
Lower the carrier frequency.
Make the cable length between the
inverter and the motor as short as
possible.
The motor Phase-to-phase voltage of 3-phase Check the input voltage and balance
vibrates power source is not balanced. the voltage.
severely and Check and test the motor’s
409
Troubleshooting
Type Cause Remedy

does not rotate insulation.
normally.
The motor Resonance occurs between the motor's Slightly increase or decrease the
makes natural frequency and the carrier carrier frequency.
humming, or frequency.
loud noises. Resonance occurs between the motor's Slightly increase or decrease the
natural frequency and the inverter’s carrier frequency.
output frequency. Use the frequency jump function to
avoid the frequency band where
resonance occurs.
The motor The frequency input command is an In situations of noise inflow on the
vibrates/hunts. external, analog command. analog input side that results in
command interference, change the
input filter time constant (In.07).
The wiring length between the inverter Ensure that the total cable length
and the motor is too long. between the inverter and the motor
is less than 200m (50m for motors
rated 2.2kW or lower).
The motor does It is difficult to decelerate sufficiently, Adjust the DC braking parameter.
not come to a because DC braking is not operating Increase the set value for the DC
complete stop normally. braking current.
when the Increase the set value for the DC
inverter output braking stopping time.
stops.
The output The frequency reference is within the Set the frequency reference higher
frequency does jump frequency range. than the jump frequency range.
not increase to The frequency reference is exceeding Set the upper limit of the frequency
the frequency the upper limit of the frequency command higher than the frequency
reference. command. reference.
Because the load is too heavy, the stall Replace the inverter with a model
prevention function is working. with increased capacity.
The cooling fan The control parameter for the cooling Check the control parameter setting
does not rotate. fan is set incorrectly. for the cooling fan.
410
Maintenance
10 Maintenance
This chapter explains how to replace the cooling fan, the regular inspections to complete,
and how to store and dispose of the product. An inverter is vulnerable to environmental
conditions and faults also occur due to component wear and tear. To prevent breakdowns,
please follow the maintenance recommendations in this section.
• Before you inspect the product, read all safety instructions contained in this manual.
• Before you clean the product, ensure that the power is off.
• Clean the inverter with a dry cloth. Cleaning with wet cloths, water, solvents, or
detergents may result in electric shock or damage to the product.
10.1 Regular Inspection Lists
10.1.1 Daily Inspections

Inspection Inspection Inspection Inspection Judgment Inspection
area item details method standard equipment
All Ambient Is the ambient refer to 1.3 No icing Thermometer,
environment temperature and Part Names for (ambient hygrometer,
humidity within IP66 on page temperature: - recorder
the design range, 21. 10 - +40) and
and is there any no
dust or foreign condensation
objects present? (ambient
humidity
below 50%)
Inverter Is there any Visual No
abnormal inspection abnormality
vibration or
noise?
Power Are the input and Measure refer to 11.1 Digital
voltage output voltages voltages Input and multimeter
normal? between R/ S/ Output tester
T-phases in. Specification
the inverter on page 416.
terminal
block.
411
Maintenance

Input/Output Smoothing Is there any Visual No -
circuit capacitor leakage from the inspection abnormality
inside?
Is the capacitor
swollen?
Cooling Cooling fan Is there any Turn off the Fan rotates -
system abnormal system and smoothly
vibration or check
noise? operation by
rotating the
fan manually.
Display Measuring Is the display Check the Check and Voltmeter,
device value normal? display value manage ammeter, etc.
on the panel. specified
values.
Motor All Is there any Visual No -
abnormal inspection abnormality
vibration or
noise?
Is there any Check for
abnormal smell? overheating
or damage.
10.1.2 Annual Inspections

Inspection Inspection Inspection Inspection Judgement Inspection
Input/Output All Megger test Disconnect Must be DC 500 V Megger
circuit (between inverter and above 5 MΩ
input/output short
terminals and R/S/T/U/V/W
and earth terminals, and
terminal) then measure
from each
terminal to
the ground
terminal using
a Megger.
Is there Tighten up all No
anything screws. abnormality
loose in the
412
Maintenance

device?
Is there any Visual
evidence of inspection
parts
overheating?
Cable Are there any Visual No -
connections corroded inspection abnormality
cables?
Is there any
damage to
cable
insulation?
Terminal Is there any Visual No -
block damage? inspection abnormality
Smoothing Measure Measure with Rated Capacity meter

condenser electrostatic capacity capacity over
capacity. meter. 85%
Relay Is there any Visual No -

chattering inspection abnormality
noise during
operation?
Is there any Visual
damage to the inspection
contacts?
Braking Is there any Visual No Digital multimeter
resistor damage from inspection abnormality / analog tester
resistance?
Check for Disconnect Must be
disconnection. one side and within ±10%
measure with
of the rated
a tester.
value of the
resistor.
Control Operation Check for Measure Balance the Digital multimeter
circuit check output voltage voltage or DC voltmeter
Protection voltage between the between
circuit imbalance inverter phases:
while the output within 4V for
inverter is in terminal U/ V/ 2S/T series
operation. W. and within
8V for 4T
series.
413
Maintenance

Is there an Test the The circuit
error in the inverter ouput must work
display circuit
protection in according to
after the both short the
sequence and open sequence.
protection circuit
test? conditions.
Cooling Cooling fan Are any of the
Check all No -
system fan parts connected abnormality
loose? parts and
tighten all
screws.
Display Display device Is the display Check the Specified and Voltmeter,
value normal? command managed Ammeter, etc.
value on the values must
display match.
device.
10.1.3 Bi-annual Inspections

Motor Insulation Megger test Disconnect Must be DC 500 V Megger
resistance (between the the cables for above 5 MΩ
input, output terminals U/V/
and earth W and test the
terminals). wiring.
Do not run an insulation resistance test (Megger) on the control circuit as it may result in
damage to the product.
414
Maintenance
10.2 Storage and Disposal
10.2.1 Storage
If you are not using the product for an extended period, store it in the following way:
• Store the product in the same environmental conditions as specified for operation (refer
to 1.3 Part Names for IP66 on page 21).
• When storing the product for a period longer than 3 months, store it between 10˚C and
30˚C, to prevent depletion of the electrolytic capacitor.
• Do not expose the inverter to snow, rain, fog, or dust.
• Package the inverter in a way that prevents contact with moisture. Keep the moisture
level below 70% in the package by including a desiccant, such as silica gel.
10.2.2 Disposal
When disposing of the product, categorize it as general industrial waste. Recyclable
materials are included in the product, so recycle them whenever possible. The packing
materials and all metal parts can be recycled. Although plastic can also be recycled, it can
be incinerated under contolled conditions in some regions.
If the inverter has not been operated for a long time, capacitors lose their charging
characteristics and are depleted. To prevent depletion, turn on the product once a year and
allow the device to operate for 30-60 min. Run the device under no-load conditions.
415
Technical Specification
11 Technical Specification
11.1 Input and Output Specification

Sinus H 2S IP20
Model SINUS H xxxx 2S- 0001 0002 0003 0005

Applied Heavy load HP 0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0
motor kW 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2
Normal load HP 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0
kW 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7
Rated Rated Heavy 1.0 1.9 3.0 4.2
output capacity (kVA) load
Normal 1.2 2.3 3.8 4.6
load
Rated current Heavy 2.5 5.0 8.0 11.0
(A) load
Normal 3.1 6.0 9.6 12.0
load
Output frequency 0-400 Hz
(IM Sensorless: 0-120 Hz; PM Sensorless: 0-180 Hz)
Output voltage (V) 3-phase 200-240 V
Rated input Working voltage (V) Single phase 200-240 V AC (-15% to +10%)
Input frequency 50-60 Hz (±5%)
(A) load
Normal 5.8 11.7 19.7 24.0
load
Weight (lb /kg) 2.5/1.14 3.9/1.76 3.9/1.76 4.9/2.22
• The standard motor capacity is based on a standard 4-pole motor.
• The rated output current is limited based on the carrier frequency set at Cn.04 and
on the input supply voltage. See Continuous Rated Current Derating.
416
Sinus H 2T (0.4-4kW) IP20
Model SINUS H xxxx 2T- 0001 0002 0003 0005 0007
Applied Heavy load HP 0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.4

motor
kW 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 4.0
Normal load HP 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5
kW 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5
Rated Rated capacity Heavy 1.0 1.9 3.0 4.2 6.5
output (kVA) load
Normal 1.2 2.3 3.8 4.6 6.9
load
Rated current Heavy 2.5 5.0 8.0 11.0 17.0
(A) load
Normal 3.1 6.0 9.6 12.0 18.0
load
Rated Working voltage (V) 3-phase 200-240 VAC (-15% to +10%)
input
(A) load
Normal 3.0 6.3 10.8 13.1 19.4
load
Weight (lb /kg) 2/0.9 2/0.9 2.86/1.3 3.3/1.5 4.4/2.0

417
Model SINUS H xxxx 2T- 0011 0014 0017 0020
Applied Heavy load HP 7.5 10 15 20

motor
kW 5.5 7.5 11 15
Normal load HP 10 15 20 25
kW 7.5 11 15 18.5
Rated Rated Heavy 9.1 12.2 17.5 22.9
output capacity load
(kVA) Normal 11.4 15.2 21.3 26.3
load
Rated Heavy 24.0 32.0 46.0 60.0
current (A) load
Normal 30.0 40.0 56.0 69.0
load
Output voltage (V) 3 phase 200-240V
Rated Working voltage (V) 3 phase 200-240VAC (-15% to +10%)
input
Rated Heavy 25.8 34.9 50.8 66.7
current (A) load
Normal 32.7 44.2 62.3 77.2
load
Weight (lb /kg) 7.3/3.3 7.3/3.3 10/4.6 16/7.1
• The standard motor capacity is based on a standard 4-pole motor

418

motor
kW 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 4.0
Normal load HP 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.5
kW 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5
Rated Rated Heavy 1.0 1.9 3.0 4.2 6.5
(kVA) Normal 1.5 2.4 3.9 5.3 7.6
load
Rated Heavy 1.3 2.5 4.0 5.5 9.0
current (A) load
Normal 2.0 3.1 5.1 6.9 10.0
load
(IM Sensorless: 0-120 Hz; PM Sensorless: 0-180
Output voltage (V) 3-phase 380-480V
Rated Working voltage (V) 3-phase 380-480VAC (-15% to +10%)
input
Rated Heavy 1.1 2.4 4.2 5.9 9.8
current (A) load
Normal 2.0 3.3 5.5 7.5 10.8
load
Weight (lb /kg) 2.6/1.18 2.6/1.18 3.9/1.77 4/1.80 4.9/2.23
419
Model SINUS H xxxx 4T- 0011 0014 0017 0020 0025 0030
Applied Heavy load HP 7.5 10 15 20 25 30

motor
kW 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22
Normal load HP 10 15 20 25 30 40
kW 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30
Rated Rated Heavy 9.1 12.2 18.3 22.9 29.7 34.3
(kVA) Normal 12.2 17.5 22.9 29.0 33.5 44.2
load
Rated current Heavy 12.0 16.0 24.0 30.0 39.0 45.0
(A) load
Normal 16.0 23.0 30.0 38.0 44.0 58.0
load
input
(A) load
Normal 17.5 25.4 33.4 42.5 49.5 65.7
load
Weight (lb /kg) 7.3/3.3 7.5/3.4 10.1/4.6 10.5/4.8 16.5/7.5 16.5/7.5

420
Sinus H 4T (30kW) IP20
Model SINUS H xxxx 4T- 0034

HP 40
Heavy load
Applied kW 30
motor HP 50
Normal load
kW 37
Rated Heavy load 46
capacity (kVA) Normal load 55
Rated current Heavy load 61
Rated
(A) Normal load 75
output
0-400 Hz
Output frequency
Working voltage (V) 3-phase 380-480 VAC (-15% to +10%)
Rated Input frequency 50-60 Hz (±5%)
input Rated current Heavy load 56
(A) Normal load 69
Weight (lb /kg) 26/11.8
*Sinus H inverter rated at 30kW (model 0034) does not support I/O extensions or IP66
certification.
421
SINUS H 2T Sizes IP66_A, IP66_B

motor
kW 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 4.0
Rated Rated capacity Heavy 1.0 1.9 3.0 4.2 6.5
output (kVA) load
(A) load
Rated Working voltage (V) 3-phase 200-240 VAC (-15% to +10%)
input
(A) load
Weight (lb /kg) 7.9/3.6 7.9/3.6 11.5/5.2 11.7/5.3 12.3/5.6

422
SINUS H 2T Sizes IP66_C, IP66_D, IP66_E
Model SINUS H xxxx 2T- 0011 0014 0017 0020
Applied Heavy load HP 7.5 10 15 20

motor
kW 5.5 7.5 11 15
Rated Rated capacity Heavy 9.1 12.2 17.5 22.9
output (kVA) load
(A) load
Output frequency 0-400 Hz (IM Sensorless: 0-120 Hz; PM Sensorless: 0-180 Hz)
Output voltage (V) 3 phase 200-240V
Rated Working voltage (V) 3 phase 200-240VAC (-15% to +10%)
input
(A) load
Weight (lb /kg) 19.8/9.0 19.8/9.0 21.2/9.6 26.7/12.1

423
SINUS H 4T, Sizes IP66_A,IP66_B

motor
kW 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 4.0
Rated Rated Heavy 1.0 1.9 3.0 4.2 6.5
output capacity (kVA) load
(A) load
input
(A) load
Weight (lb /kg) 8.2/3.7 8.2/3.7 11.7/5.3 12.1/5.5 12.3/5.6
• The standard motor capacity is based on a standard 4-pole motor

424
SINUS H 4T, Sizes IP66_C, IP66_D, IP66_E
Model SINUS H xxxx 4T- 0011 0014 0017 0020 0025 0025
Applied Heavy load HP 7.5 10 15 20 25 30

motor
kW 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22
Rated Rated Heavy 9.1 12.2 18.3 22.9 29.7 34.3
(A) load
input
(A) load
Weight (lb /kg) 19.4/8.8 19.6/8.9 21.2/9.6 21.6/9.8 27.3/12.4 27.3/12.4

425
11.2 Product Specification Details

Items Description
Control Control method V/F control, slip compensation, sensorless vector
Frequency settings Digital command: 0.01 Hz
power resolution Analog command: 0.06 Hz (60 Hz standard)
Frequency accuracy 1% of maximum output frequency
V/F pattern Linear, square reduction, user V/F
Overload capacity Heavy load rated current: 150% 1 min, normal load rated
current: 120% 1 min, Peak current: 200% 4 sec (0034 model
excluded)
Torque boost Manual torque boost, automatic torque boost
Operation Operation type Select key pad, terminal strip, or communication operation
Frequency settings Analog type: -10~10V, 0~10V, 4~20mA
Digital type: key pad, pulse train input
Operation function • PID control • Up-down operation
• 3-wire operation • DC braking
• Frequency limit • Frequency jump
• Second function • Slip compensation
• Anti-forward and reverse • Automatic restart
direction rotation • Automatic tuning
• Commercial transition • Energy buffering
• Speed search • Flux braking
• Power braking • Fire Mode
• Leakage reduction
Input Multi Select PNP (Source) or NPN (Sink) mode. Functions can be
function set according to In.65- In.71 codes and parameter settings
terminal in IP20 models, to In.65- In.69 codes and parameter
P1-P7 in settings in IP66 models.
IP20 • Forward direction operation • Reverse direction
models, operation
• Reset
P1-P5 in
• Emergency stop • External trip
IP66
models • Multi step speed frequency- • Jog operation
high/med/low • Multi step acc/dec-
• DC braking during stop high/med/low
• Frequency increase • Second motor
selection
426
Items Description
• 3-wire • Frequency reduction
• Local/remote operation • Fix analog command
mode transition frequency
• Select acc/dec/stop • Transition from PID to
general operation
Pulse train 0-32 kHz, Low Level: 0-0.8V, High Level: 3.5-12V
Output Multi Fault output and inverter Less than DC 24V, 50mA
function operation status output
open
collector
terminal
Multi Less than (N.O., N.C.) AC250V 1A,
function Less than DC 30V, 1A
relay
terminal
Analog 0-12Vdc (0-24mA): Select frequency, output current, output
output voltage, DC terminal voltage and others
Pulse train Maximum 32 kHz, 10-12V
Protection Trip • Over current trip • Over voltage trip
function
• External signal trip • Temperature sensor
• ARM short circuit current trip
trip • Inverter over heat
• Over heat trip • Option trip
• Input imaging trip • Output imaging trip
• Ground trip • Inverter overload trip
• Motor over heat trip • Fan trip
• I/O board link trip • Pre-PID operation
• No motor trip failure
• Parameter writing trip • External break trip
• Emergency stop trip • Low voltage trip
during operation
• Command loss trip
• Low voltage trip
• External memory error
• Safety A(B) trip
• CPU watchdog trip
• Analog input error
• Motor normal load trip
• Motor overload trip
Alarm Command loss trip alarm, overload alarm, normal load
alarm, inverter overload alarm, fan operation alarm,
resistance braking rate alarm, number of corrections on
rotor tuning error
Instantaneous Heavy load less than 15 ms (normal load less than 8 ms):
427
Items Description
blackout continue operation (must be within the rated input voltage
and rated output range)
Heavy load more than 15 ms (normal load more than 8
ms): auto restart operation
Structure/ Cooling type Forced fan cooling structure
working Forced cooling type
environment Protection structure IP 20 (standard), UL Open & Enclosed Type 1 (standard up
to 0030 model, option for 0034 model)
(UL Enclosed Type 1 is satisfied by conduit installation
option. See 15W0176B100 Sinus H - Conduit Kit and Flange
Kit Manual)
IP66 (NEMA 4X Indoor Only)
Ambient Heavy load: -10-50°C (14–122°F), normal load: -10-40°C
temperature
(14–104°F)
No ice or frost should be present.
Working under normal load at 50°C (122°F), it is
recommended that less than 80% load is applied.
Ambient humidity Relative humidity less than 90% RH (to avoid condensation
forming)
Storage -20°C-65°C (-4–149°F)
temperature.
Surrounding Prevent contact with corrosive gases, inflammable gases,
environment oil stains, dust, and other pollutants (Pollution Degree 2
Environment).
Operation No higher than 1000m (3280ft). Less than 9.8m/sec2 (1G).
altitude/oscillation
Pressure 70-106 kPa
428
11.3 External Dimensions (IP 20 Type)

Sizes Eu_A, A1, A2
SINUS H Size W1 W2 H1 H2 H3 D1 A B Φ
0001 2T A1 68 61.1 128 119 5 123 3.5 4 4.2
(2.68) (2.41) (5.04) (4.69) (0.20) (4.84) (0.14) (0.16) (0.17)
0002 2T A2 68 61.1 128 119 5 128 3.5 4 4
(2.68) (2.41) (5.04) (4.69) (0.20) (5.04) (0.14) (0.16) (0.16)
0001 2S Eu_A 68 63.5 180 170.5 5 130 4.5 4.5 4.2
0001 4T (2.68) (2.50) (7.09) (6.71) (0.20) (5.12) (0.18) (0.18) (0.17)
0002 4T
Units: mm (inches)
429
Sizes Eu_B, B1, B2
SINUS H Size W1 W2 H1 H2 H3 D1 A B Φ
0003 2T B1 100 91 128 120 4.5 130 4.5 4.5 4.5

(3.94) (3.58) (5.04) (4.72) (0.18) (5.12) (0.18) (0.18) (0.18)
0005 2T B2 100 91 128 120 4.5 145 4.5 4.5 4.5
(3.94) (3.58) (5.04) (4.72) (0.18) (5.71) (0.18) (0.18) (0.18)
0002 2S Eu_B 100 91 180 170 5 140 4.5 4.5 4.2
0003 2S (3.94) (3.58) (7.09) (6.69) (0.20) (5.51) (0.18) (0.18) (0.17)
0003 4T
0005 4T
Units: mm (inches)
430
Sizes C, Eu_C
SINUS H Size W1 W2 H1 H2 H3 D1 A Φ
0007 2T C 140 132.2 128 120.7 3.7 145 4.4 4.5

(5.51) (5.21) (5.04) (4.75) (0.15) (5.71) (0.17) (0.18)
0005 2S Eu_C 140 132 180 170 5 140 4 4.2

0007 4T (5.51) (5.20) (7.09) (6.69) (0.20) (5.51) (0.16) (0.17)
Units: mm (inches)
431
Sizes D, E, F
SINUS H Size W1 W2 H1 H2 H3 D1 A B
0011 2T D 160 137 232 216.5 10.5 140 5 5
0014 2T (6.30) (5.39) (9.13) (8.52) (0.41) (5.51) (0.20) (0.20)
0011 4T
0014 4T
0017 2T E 180 157 290 273.7 11.3 163 5 5
0017 4T (7.09) (6.18) (11.4) (10.8) (0.44) (6.42) (0.20) (0.20)
0020 4T
0020 2T F 220 193.8 350 331 13 187 6 6
0025 4T (8.66) (7.63) (13.8) (13.0) (0.51) (7.36) (0.24) (0.24)
0030 4T
Units: mm (inches)
432
Size G
SINUS H Size W1 W2 H1 H2 H3 D1 A Φ
0034 4T G 275 232 450 428.5 14 284 7 7
(10.8) (9.1) (17.7) (16.9) (0.55) (11.2) (0.28) (0.28)
Units: mm (inches)
433
11.4 External Dimensions (IP 66 Type)

Sizes IP66_A, IP66_B
SINUS H Size W1 W2 H1 H2 H3 D1 D2 A Φ T1 T2
0001 2T IP66_A 180 170 256.6 245 8.2 174.2 188.2 4.5 4.5 22.3 -
0002 2T (7.09) (6.69) (10.10) (9.65) (0.32) (6.86) (7.41) (0.18) (0.18) (0.88)
0001 4T
0002 4T
0003 2T IP66_B 220 204 258.8 241 11.8 201 215 5.5 5.5 22.3 28.6
0005 2T (8.66) (8.03) (10.19) (9.49) (0.46) (7.91) (8.46) (0.22) (0.22) (0.88) (1.13)
0007 2T
0003 4T
0005 4T
0007 4T
Units: mm (inches)
434
Size IP66_C
SINUS H Size W1 W2 H1 H2 H3 D1 D2 A Φ T1 T2
0011 2T IP66_C 250 232 328 308 11 227.2 241.2 6 6 22.3 28.6
0014 2T (9.84) (9.13) (12.91) (12.13) (0.43) (8.94) (9.50) (0.24) (0.24) (0.88) (1.13)
0011 4T
0014 4T
Units: mm (inches)
435
Sizes IP66_D, IP66_E
SINUS Size W1 W2 H1 H2 H3 D1 D2 A Φ T1 T2
0017 2T IP66_D 260 229 399.6 377 14.6 245.4 259.6 6 - 22.3 34.9
0017 4T (10.24) (9.02) (15.73) (14.84) (0.57) (9.66) (10.22) (0.24) (0.88) (1.37)
0020 4T
0020 2T IP66_E 300 270.8 460 436.5 15.5 250 264 6 - 22.3 44.5
0025 4T (11.81) (10.66) (18.11) (17.19) (0.61) (9.84) (10.39) (0.24) (0.88) (1.75)
0030 4T
Units: mm (inches)
436
11.5 Peripheral Devices Specification

Circuit Breaker (MCCB) , Leakage Breaker and Magnetic Contactor (MC) recommended
features.
Sinus H Model Circuit Leakage Magnetic

(Voltage Class / Code / kW) Breaker Breaker Contactor
(MCCB) (MC)
Current (A) Current (A) Current (A)
0001 0.4 5 5 9
0002 0.75 10 10 11
0003 1.5 15 15 18
2S 0005
0007
2.2
4
20
30
20
30
22
32
2T 0011 5.5 50 50 55
0014 7.5 60 60 65
0017 11 100 100 85
0020 15 125 125 130
0001 0.4 3
5 7
0002 0.75 5
0003 1.5 9
10 10
0005 2.2 12
0007 4 20 20 18
0011 5.5 22
4T 0014 7.5
30 30
32
0017 11 50 50 50
0020 15 60 60 65
0025 18.5 75 75 75
0030 22 100 100 85
0034 30 125 125 105
437
11.6 Fuse and Reactor Specifications

Sinus H Model AC Input Fuse AC Reactor DC Reactor
(Voltage Class / Code / Current (A) Voltage (V) Code Code
kW)
2S 0001 0.4 10 600 IM0126002 -
0002 0.75 IM0126044 -
0003 1.5 15 IM0126084 -
0005 2.2 20 -
2T 0001 0.4 10 600 IM0126000 IM0140054

0002 0.75 IM0126002
0003 1.5 15 IM0126004 IM0140104
0005 2.2 20 IM0126044 IM0140154
0007 4 50 IM0126084
0011 5.5
0014 7.5 63 IM0126124 IM0140204
0017 11 80 IM0126144 IM0140254
0020 15 100 IM0126164 IM0140284
4T 0001 0.4 10 600 IM0126000 -

0002 0.75 -
0003 1.5 IM0126002 -
0005 2.2 15 IM0140054
0007 4 32 IM0126004 IM0140104
0011 5.5 IM0126044
0014 7.5 35 IM0126084 IM0140154
0017 11 50 IM0126124
0020 15 63 IM0140204
0025 18.5 70 IM0126144 IM0140254
0030 22 100
0034 30 125 IM0126164 -
438
• AC Reactors
INDUCTANCE
DIMENSIONS HOLE WGT LEAKAGE
INDUCTANCE MODEL RATINGS
mH A TYPE* L H P M E G mm kg W
IM0126000 4,20 5,25 Contact Elettronica Santerno
IM0126002 2,63 8,4
IM0126004 2.00 11 A 120 125 75 25 67 55 5 2.9 29
IM0126044 1.27 17 A 120 125 75 25 67 55 5 3 48
IM0126084 0.70 32 B 150 130 115 50 125 75 7x14 5.5 70
IM0126124 0.51 43 B 150 130 115 50 125 75 7x14 6 96
IM0126144 0.30 68 B 180 160 150 60 150 82 7x14 9 150
IM0126164 0.24 92 B 180 160 150 60 150 82 7x14 9.5 183
Inductance A and B type are defined in the following Figures
439
• DC Reactors
INDUCTANCE
INDUCTANCE DIMENSIONS HOLE WGT LEAKAGE
RATINGS
MODEL
mH A L H P E G mm kg W
IM0140054 8 10.5
Contact Elettronica Santerno
IM0140104 5.1 17
IM0140154 2.8 32.5 160 140 120 100 100 7x10 8 50
IM0140204 2 47 160 210 160 97 120 7x14 13 80
IM0140254 1.2 69 160 210 160 97 120 7x14 13.5 90
IM0140274 0.96 94
Contact Elettronica Santerno
IM0140284 0.96 100
Only use Class H or RK5, UL listed input fuses and UL listed circuit breakers. See the table
above for the voltage and current ratings for fuses and circuit breakers.
440
11.7 Terminal Screw Specification

Input/Output Terminal Screw Specification
Sinus H Model Terminal Screw Size Screw Torque (Nm / kfg∙cm)

(Voltage / Code / kW)
2S 0001
0002
0.4
0.75
M3.5 0.2-0.6
(2.1~6.1)
0003 1.5
0005 2.2 M4
2T 0001
0002
0.4
0.75
M3.5
0003 1.5
0005 2.2
0007 4 M4
0011 5.5
0014 7.5
0017 11 M5 0.4-1.0
0020 15 (4.0~10.2)
4T 0001
0002
0.4
0.75
M3.5 0.2-0.6
(2.1~6.1)
0003 1.5
0005 2.2
0007 4 M4
0011 5.5
0014 7.5
0017 11 M5 0.4-1.0
0020 15 (4.0~10.2)
0025 18.5
0030 22
0034 30 M8 6.1-9.2
(62~94)
Control Circuit Terminal Screw Specification
Terminal Terminal Screw Size Screw Torque (Nm / kfg∙cm)

P1-P7*/CM/VR/V1/I2 /AO/AO2 M2 0.22-0.25
[0034 model only]/ (2.2~26)
Q1/EG/24/TI/TO*
/SA,SB,SC/S+,S-,SG
A1/C1/B1, M2.6 0.4
A2/C2 [0034 model only] (4)
441
* IP66 models do not support P6/P7/TI/TO terminal. Refer to Step 4 Control Terminal Wiring on
page 47.
Apply the rated torque when tightening terminal screws. Loose screws may cause short circuits
and malfunctions. Overtightening terminal screws may damage the terminals and cause short
circuits and malfunctions. Use copper conductors only, rated at 600V, 75°C for power terminal
wiring, and rated at 300V, 75°C for control terminal wiring.
11.8 Braking Resistor Specification

Sinus H Model
Elettronica IP
(Voltage / Code / Resistance (Ω) Rated Capacity (W)
Santerno P/N Rating
kW)
2S 0001 0.4 RE2644200
RE2644150
200 350 55
0002 0.75 150 350 55
2T 0003 1.5 RE2643560 56 350 55
0005 2.2 RE3063500 50 550 33
0007 4 RE3063330 33 550 33
0011 5.5 RE3083200 20 1,100 55
0014 7.5 RE3083150 15 1,100 55
0017 11 RE3113100 10 2,200 54
0020 15 RE3113100 10 2,200 54
4T 0001 0.4 RE2644400

RE2644400
400 350 55
0002 0.75 400 350 55
0003 1.5 RE2644250 250 350 55
0005 2.2 RE3064200 200 550 33
0007 4 RE3064100 100 550 33
0011 5.5 RE3083820 82 1,100 55
0014 7.5 RE3083500 50 1,100 55
0017 11 RE3113400 40 2,200 54
0020 15 RE3113330 33 2,200 54
0025 18.5 RE3483200 20 4,000 20
0030 22 RE3483200 20 4,000 20
0034 30 RE3763120 12 8,000 20
442
• The standard for braking torque is 150% and the working rate (%ED) is 5%. If the
working rate is 10%, the rated capacity for braking resistance must be calculated at
twice the standard.
• Braking Resistors with higher IP degrees may be available. Please Contact Elettronica
Santerno.
Dimensions
Model 350W - IP55
Overall Dimensions, Resistor 350W – IP55
Model 550W – IP33
2.5 mm2
174
ø4.8
57 68
300 13
195
443
Model 1100W - IP55
80-84 95
30
240
320
M00619-0
Model 2200W – IP54
A (mm) B (mm) L (mm) I (mm) P (mm)

190 67 380 177-182 300
444
Model 4000/8000W – IP20
Power (W) A (mm) B (mm) L (mm) H (mm) P (mm)

4000 620 600 100 250 40
8000 620 600 160 250 40
Overall Dimensions, Resistor 4000/8000W – IP20
11.9 Continuous Rated Current Derating

Derating by Carrier Frequency (up to 0030 model)
The continuous rated current of the inverter is limited based on the carrier frequency and
on the heavy or normal load. Refer to the following graphs.
445
2S / 2T 4T
Carrier Frequency Constant-rated Carrier Frequency Constant-rated
(kHz) Current (%) (kHz) Current (%)
1-6 100 1-6 100
9 84.4 9 81.1
12 76.7 12 71.7
15 72.0 15 66.0
2S / 2T 4T
Model (Code / DR (%) Model (Code / DR (%)
kW) kW)
0011 5.5 85 0011 5.5 81.3
0014 7.5 85 0014 7.5 77.2
0017 11 86.6 0017 11 85
0020 15 90.2 0020 15 84.2
0025 18.5 91.5
0030 22 83.2
Derating by Carrier Frequency (0034 model)
The continuous rated current of the inverter is limited based on the carrier frequency. Refer
to the following graph.
Item Unit
fs, ND 2
fs, c [kHz] 6
fs, max 10
% of DR [%] 70
446
Derating by Input Voltage
The continuous rated current of the inverter is limited based on the input voltage. Refer to
the following graphs.
447
Derating by Ambient Temperature and Installation Type (IP20 models only)
The constant-rated current of the inverter is limited based on the ambient temperature and
installation type. Refer to the following graph.
11.10 Heat Emission

The following table shows the inverters’ heat emission characteristics (by product capacity).
Heat emission data is based on operations with default carrier frequency settings, under
normal operating conditions. For detailed information on carrier frequency, refer to 5.17
Operational Noise Settings (carrier frequency settings) on page 239.
[ Test Condition ]
Operation at 50Hz
Load 100% (M-G Set load, Corresponding motor to drive)
Operation at room temperature
Carrier Frequency (Default value: 3 kHz HD, 2 kHz ND)
[ Definition ]
Total losses = Internal losses + Heat losses
Internal losses: based on design standard such as SMPS Rated Capacity, Fan and
so forth
Heat losses: depending on the Output Current
1Wh = 3600 J; 1kcal = 4186 J
448
Heavy Duty (HD) Normal Duty (ND)

Rated
Voltage Rated Total Internal Heat Rated Total Internal Heat
Code Power
Class Output Losses Losses Losses Output Losses Losses Losses
(kW)
Current(A) (W) (W) (kcal) Current(A) (W) (W) (kcal)
0001 2S 0.4 2.5 16 13 3 3.1 18 13 5
0002 2S 0.75 5 41 13 25 6 42 13 26
0003 2S 1.5 8 54 13 36 9.6 64 13 45
0005 2S 2.2 11 74 13 53 12 81 13 59
0001 2T 0.4 2.5 24 13 10 3.1 25 13 8
0002 2T 0.75 5 24 13 9 6 26 13 12
0003 2T 1.5 8 56 17 34 9.6 60 17 37
0005 2T 2.2 11 59 17 36 12 62 17 39
0007 2T 4 17 108 19 77 18 110 19 74
0011 2T 5.5 24 176 39 118 30 208 39 146
0014 2T 7.5 32 188 39 128 40 236 39 170
0017 2T 11 46 230 39 164 56 272 39 201
0020 2T 15 60 340 39 260 69 428 39 335
0001 4T 0.4 1.3 21 13 7 2 22 13 8
0002 4T 0.75 2.5 17 13 4 3.1 19 13 5
0003 4T 1.5 4 45 17 24 5.1 55 17 27
0005 4T 2.2 5.5 64 17 22 6.9 76 17 27
0007 4T 4 9 68 21 40 10 131 21 41
0011 4T 5.5 12 138 43 82 16 163 43 103
0014 4T 7.5 16 131 43 75 23 179 43 117
0017 4T 11 24 197 43 133 30 207 43 141
0020 4T 15 30 212 43 145 38 232 43 162
0025 4T 18.5 39 320 43 238 44 353 43 267
0030 4T 22 45 330 43 247 58 425 43 329
0034 4T 30 61 432 107 280 75 505 107 343
449
Single Phase Supply
12 Applying 2T and 4T Drives to Single-

Phase Input Application
12.1 Introduction
Sinus H 2T and 4T is a three-phase standard variable frequency drive(VFD). When applying
single-phase power to a three-phase VFD, there are several constraints that need to be
considered. Standard Pulse-Width-Modulated (PWM) VFDs use a 6-pulse diode rectifier. The
6-pulse rectification results in 300 Hz DC bus ripple when used with a three-phase 50 Hz
supply.
However, under single-phase use, the DC bus ripple becomes 100 Hz and the VFDs DC bus
circuit is subject to higher stress in order to deliver equivalent power.
Additionally, input currents and harmonics increase beyond those encountered with three-
phase input.
Input current distortion of 90% THD and greater can be expected under single-phase input,
compared to approximately 40% with three-phase input as indicated in Figure 2.
Therefore, single-phase use requires the three-phase VFD power rating be reduced
(derated) to avoid over stressing the rectifier and DC link components.
Figure-1 Typical Three-Phase Configuration
450
Single Phase Supply
Figure-2 Typical Single-Phase Configuration
12.2 Power(HP), Input Current and Output Current

When using a three-phase VFD with single-phase input, derating the drive’s output current
and horsepower will be necessary because of the increase in DC bus ripple voltage and
current. In addition, the input current through the remaining two phases on the diode
bridge converter will approximately double, creating another derating consideration for the
VFD. Input current harmonic distortion will increase beyond that with a three-phase supply
making the overall input power factor low. Input current distortion over 100% is likely under
single-phase conditions without a reactor.
Therefore, the reactor is always required.
When using a motor that is selected by the three-phase drive rating criteria when using
single-phase input, it may result in poor performance or premature drive failure. The
selected drive of single-phase current ratings must meet or exceed the motor current
rating.
451
Single Phase Supply
12.3 Input Frequency and Voltage Tolerance

The single-phase current ratings are valid for 50Hz input only. The AC supply voltage must
be within the required voltage range of 240/480Vac +10% to –5% to maximize motor power
production. Standard product with three-phase voltage input has an allowable range of
+10% to –15%. Therefore, a stricter input voltage tolerance of +10 to –5% applies when
using the drive with a single-phase supply. The average bus voltage with single-phase input
is lower than the equivalent of a three-phase input. Therefore, the maximum output voltage
(motor voltage) will be lower with a single-phase input. The minimum input voltage must
be no less than 228Vac for 240 volt models and 456Vac for 480 volt models, to ensure motor
voltage production of 207Vac and 415Vac, respectively.
Thus, if full motor torque must be developed near base speed (full power) it will be
necessary to maintain a rigid incoming line voltage so that adequate motor voltage can be
produced. Operating a motor at reduced speed (reduced power), or using a motor with a
base voltage that is lower than the incoming AC supply rating (ex. 208Vac motor with a
240Vac supply), will also minimize the effect of voltage deprivation. ( 240Vac Input 208V
motor, 480Vac Input  400V motor ).
Note
Elettronica Santerno is not responsible for the use of Sinus H 2T and 4T drives with a single-
phase supply.
452
Marking
13 Marking
13.1 UL mark
The UL mark applies to products in the United States and Canada. This mark indicates that
UL has tested and evaluated the products and determined that the products satisfy the UL
standards for product safety. If a product received UL certification, this means that all
components inside the product had been certified for UL standards as well.
13.2 CE mark
The CE mark indicates that the products carrying this mark comply with European safety
and environmental regulations. European standards include the Machinery Directive for
machine manufacturers, the Low Voltage Directive for electronics manufacturers and the
EMC guidelines for safe noise control.
13.2.1 Low Voltage Directive

We have confirmed that our products comply with the Low Voltage Directive (EN 61800-5-
1).
13.2.2 EMC Directive

The Directive defines the requirements for immunity and emissions of electrical equipment
used within the European Union. The EMC product standard (EN 61800-3) covers
requirements stated for drives.
453
Marking
EMI / RFI POWER LINE FILTERS
THE ES RANGE OF POWER LINE FILTERS FFM (Footprint) AND FV SERIES, HAVE BEEN
SPECIFICALLY DESIGNED WITH HIGH FREQUENCY ES INVERTERS. THE USE OF ES FILTERS,
WITH THE INSTALLATION ADVICE OVERLEAF HELP ENSURE TROUBLE FREE USE ALONG
SIDE SENSITIVE DEVICES AND COMPLIANCE TO CONDUCTED EMISSION AND IMMUNITY
STANDARDS EN61800-3.
CAUTION
IN CASE OF LEAKAGE CURRENT, A PROTECTIVE DEVICE IS USED ON POWER SUPPLY, THAT
COULD BE DAMAGED WHEN POWERING ON/OFF THE DEVICE. TO AVOID THIS, THE SENSE
CURRENT OF THE PROTECTIVE DEVICE SHOULD BE LARGER THAN THE VALUE OF THE
LEAKAGE CURRENT. SEE TABLE BELOW.
RECOMMENDED INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
To conform to the EMC directive, it is necessary that these instructions be followed as

closely as possible. Follow the usual safety procedures when working with electrical
equipment. All electrical connections to the filter, inverter and motor must be made by a
qualified electrical technician.
1-) Check the filter rating label to ensure that the current, voltage rating and part number
are correct.
2-) For best results the filter should be fitted as closely as possible to the incoming mains
supply of the wiring enclosure, usually directly after the enclosures circuit breaker or
supply switch.
3-) The back panel of the wiring cabinet of board should be prepared for the mounting
dimensions of the filter. Care should be taken to remove any paint etc... from the mounting
holes and face area of the panel to ensure the best possible earth connection of the filter.
4-) Mount the filter securely.
5-) Connect the mains supply to the filter terminals marked LINE, connect any earth cables
to the earth stud provided. Connect the filter terminals marked LOAD to the mains input of
the inverter using short lengths of appropriate gauge cable.
454
Marking
6-) Connect the motor and fit the ferrite core ( output ferrite ring ) as close to the inverter as
possible. Armoured or screened cable should be used with the 3 phase conductors only
threaded twice through the center of the ferrite core. The earth conductor should be
securely earthed at both inverter and motor ends. The screen should be connected to the
enclosure body via and earthed cable gland.
7-) Connect any control cables as instructed in the inverter instructions manual.
IT IS IMPORTANT THAT ALL LEAD LENGTHS ARE KEPT AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE AND
THAT INCOMING MAINS AND OUTGOING MOTOR CABLES ARE KEPT WELL SEPARATED.
W
Y L
FFM Filters (Footprint) INVERTER

SHIELDED CABLE
MOTOR
FILTER
SHIELDED CABLE
INVERTER
MOTOR
Standard Filters FILTER
H H
FFM Filters (Footprint) Standard Filters

Y
W X
455
Marking
FFM Filters (Footprint)
Sinus H Elettronica LEAKAGE

CURRENT VOLTAGE DIMENSIONS MOUNTING OUTPUT
(Voltage / Code / Santerno CURRENT WEIGHT MOUNT
(A) (V) L H W (cm) Y X (cm) FERRITE (*)
kW) P/N (mA)
Nom
2T 0001 0.4
AC1710122 10 0.3-18 176x71.5x45 162x50 1.6 M4 AC1810302
0002 0.75
200-
0003 1.5 176x103.5x4
AC1710236 20 480 0.3-18 162x82 1.6 M4 AC1810302
0005 2.2 5
0007 4 AC1710342 30 0.3-27 176x143.5x4 162x122 1.8 M4 AC1810302
0011 5.5
0014 7.5
Not available (see Standard Filters)
0017 11
0020 15
Nom
4T 0001 0.4
(**) AC1710120 6 0.3-18 176x71.5x45 162x50 1.6 M4
0002 0.75
0003 1.5 AC1710122 10 200-480 0.3-18 176x71.5x45 162x50 1.6 M4 AC1810302
0005 2.2 AC1710234 16 0.3-18 176x103.5x4 162x82 1.6 M4
176x103.5x4
0007 4 AC1710236 20 0.3-27 162x122 1.8 M4
5
0011 5.5
0014 7.5
0017 11
Not available
0020 15
0025 18.5
0030 22
Domestic and industrial environment EN55011 Group 1 Class A = EN 61800-3 C2
(*) Output Ferrite required for models with built-in filters as well.
(**) In order to add this filter A1=C2 to a 4T (already internally A2=C3) you need to
disconnect the internal filter as per the procedure described under the heading Step 6
Disabling the EMC Filter for Power Sources with Asymmetrical Grounding.
456
Marking
STANDARD Filters
Sinus H Elettronica LEAKAGE

CURRENT VOLTAGE DIMENSIONS MOUNTING OUTPUT
(Voltage / Santerno CURRENT WEIGHT MOUNT
(A) (V) L H W (cm) Y X (cm) FERRITE (*)
Code / kW) P/N (mA)
Nom
2T 0001 0.4
AC1710123 10 0.5-27 255x50x126 25 x 240 1.1
0002 0.75
0003 1.5 AC1810302
AC1710237 20 0.5-27 335x60x150 35 x 320 1.8
0005 2.2
0007 4.0 AC1710343 30 0.5-27 335x60x150 35 x 320 1.8
0011 5.5 AC1710511 42 250 0.5-27 330x70x185 45 x 314 2.8 -
AC1810402
0014 7.5 AC1710601 55 0.5-27 330x80x185 55 x 314 3.1 -
0017 11 AC1710810 75 0.5-27 330x80x220 55 x 314 4.0 -
0020 15 AC1711006 100 0.5-27 380x90x220 65 x 364 5.5 -
AC1810603
0025 18.5
AC1711410 130 0.5-27 440x110x240 80 x 414 7.5 -
0030 22
Domestic and industrial environment EN55011 Group 2 Class A = EN61800-3 C3
(*) Output Ferrite required for models with built-in filters as well.
457
Index
Index
3-phase 4T IP20 (0.4~4 kW) ................................ 419; 448
[
3-phase 4T IP20 (30 kW) .................................................... 421
[DOWN] key..................................................................................... 88 3-phase 4T IP20 (5.5~22 kW) ......................................... 420
[ESC] key ............................................................................................. 88 3-phase 4T IP66 (0.4~4 kW) ............................................ 424
[HAND] key....................................................................................... 88 3-phase 4T IP66 (5.5~22 kW) ......................................... 425
[LEFT] key............................................................................................ 88 3-Wire operation ....................................................................... 189
[MODE] key ...................................................................................... 88
[MULTI] key ....................................................................................... 88 ４
[OFF] key............................................................................................. 88 4-pole standard motor .........416; 419; 420; 421; 422;
[PROG / Ent] key........................................................................... 88 425
[RIGHT] key ....................................................................................... 88
[STOP/RESET] key......................................................................... 88 ７
[UP] key................................................................................................ 88
7-segment display....................................................................... 68
letters................................................................................................68
１ numbers .........................................................................................68
1-phase 2S IP20 ......................................................................... 416
Ａ
２ A terminal (Normally Open) ............................................. 165
2 square reduction................................................................... 115 AC power input terminal .......... refer to R/S/T terminal
24 terminal ............................................................................... 54; 56 Acc/Dec pattern ............................................................. 114; 147
2nd Motor Function group... refer to M2 (2nd Motor linear pattern............................................................................. 147
S-curve pattern ........................................................................147
Function group ) group
Acc/Dec reference .................................................................... 143
2nd Motor group............refer to M2(2nd Motor) group
Delta Freq.................................................................................... 142
2nd motor operation ............................................................. 240 Max Freq ...................................................................................... 142
2nd operation mode.............................................................. 163 Acc/Dec reference frequency .......................................... 141
2nd command source ............................................................164 Ramp T Mode............................................................................ 141
shared command (main source) ....................................164 Acc/Dec stop ................................................................................ 149
Acc/Dec time................................................................................ 141
３ Acc/Dec time switch frequency......................................146
3-phase 2T IP20 (0.4~4 kW) ............................................ 417 configuration via multi-function terminal ................144
maximum frequency............................................................141
3-phase 2T IP20 (5.5~15 kW) ......................................... 418
operation frequency .............................................................143
3-phase 2T IP66 (0.4~4 kW) ............................................ 422 accumulated electric energy initialize ....................... 251
3-phase 2T IP66 (5.5~15 kW) ......................................... 423
458
Index
Ad (Expanded function group)....................................... 333 auxiliary frequency ................................................................... 179

Ad(Advanced) group ................................................................. 70 auxiliary frequency reference configuration ...........180
auxiliary reference ..................................................................179
add user group
auxiliary reference gain .......................................................181
UserGrp SelKey ........................................................................ 249
configuration ............................................................................ 179
advanced features group....................................................... 95 final command frequency calculation ........................182
Advanced function group ....refer to ADV (advanced) main reference .........................................................................179
function group
Advanced group .................refer to Ad(Advanced) group Ｂ
analog frequency hold.......................................................... 130
B terminal (Normally Closed) .......................................... 165
Analog Hold............................................................................... 130
bA(Basic function group) .................................................... 328
Analog Hold........................refer to analog frequency hold
bA(Basic group) ............................................................................. 70
analog input................................................................... 52; 70; 95
Basic group . refer to BAS (Basic function group); refer
I2 current input ........................................................................ 124
I2 voltage input........................................................................ 125 to bA(Basic) group
TI Pulse input ............................................................................. 127 basic operation .............................................................................. 67
V1 voltage input ...................................................................... 118
bit 165
analog input selection switch(SW2) .................. 49; 125
bit (Off) ......................................................................................... 165
analog output............................................................ 53; 70; 257 bit (On) .......................................................................................... 165
AO terminal ...................................................................................53 bit setting .................................................................................... 165
AO2 terminal ................................................................................53 multi-function input setting .............................................165
pulse output .............................................................................. 260 multi-function output setting..........................................267
voltage and current output ..............................................257 speed search setting .............................................................235
analog output selection switch(SW3)............... 49; 257 stall prevention ........................................................................277
AO terminal .............................................................. 53; 139; 257 bootlace ferrule ............................................................................. 55
analog output selection switch(SW3) ............................49 brake control ................................................................................ 253
AO2 terminal ................................................................................... 53 BR control.................................................................................... 253
brake engage sequence .....................................................254
AP(Application Function group) .................................... 362
brake release sequence.......................................................254
AP(Application group).............................................................. 70
brake resistor ................................................................................... 46
Application group..........refer to AP(Application) group
brake unit ........................................................................................ 256
ARM short current fault trip...refer to Over Current2
braking resistance
asymmetric ground power ................................................... 58 braking torque .........................................................................443
asymmetric ground structure braking resistors............................................................................ 31
EMC filter ........................................................................................58 BU200.................................................................................................... 61
asynchronous communications system................... 297
built-in communication ..............................refer to RS-485
auto restart settings................................................................ 237
BX 295; 402
auto torque boost .................................................................... 154
auto tuning ..................................................................... 154; 204
Ｃ
auto tuning ........................................................................ 204; 330
all(rotating) ................................................................................. 206 cable..................................................28; 38; 40; 41; 42; 43; 47
all(static) ....................................................................................... 206 ground specifications..............................................................28
Tr(static) ........................................................................................ 206 power I/O cable specifications ...........................................28
459
Index
selection............................................ 28; 38; 40; 41; 42; 43; 47 config (CNF) mode .................................................................. 251
shielded twisted pair ...............................................................64
Considerations for the installation
signal(control) cable specifications ..................................29
Air Pressure....................................................................................23
cable tie ............................................................................................... 55
Altitude/Vibration......................................................................23
carrier frequency............................................................... 46; 239 Ambient Humidity ....................................................................23
derating............................................................................. 445; 446 Ambient Temperature.............................................................23
factory default .......................................................................... 240 Environmental Factors ............................................................23
charge indicator .................................................... 36; 400; 407 contact
charge lamp ..................................................................................... 36 A contact...................................................................................... 282
B contact...................................................................................... 282
cleaning ............................................................................................ 411
Control group refer to CON (Control Function group);
CM terminal ............................................................................ 51; 56
refer to Cn(Control) group
CM(Communication Function group)....................... 357
control terminal board wiring ....................... 41; 47; 452
CM(Communication group)................................................. 70
cooling fan ..................................................................................... 243
Cn (Control Function group)............................................ 339
fan control................................................................................... 243
Cn(Control) group ....................................................................... 70 fan operation accumulated time ...................................271
CNF (configuration mode).................................................... 94 fan operation accumulated time initialization .......271
code number input .................................................................... 72 cooling fan malfunction....................................................... 288
command........................................................................................ 133 CPU Watch Dog fault trip .................................................. 295
Cmd Source ............................................................................... 133 cursor keys ........................................................................................ 88
configuration ............................................................................ 133 [DOWN] key ..................................................................................88
command source [LEFT] key .......................................................................................88
fwd/rev command terminal .............................................134 [RIGHT] key....................................................................................88
keypad .......................................................................................... 133 [UP] key ...........................................................................................88
RS-485 ........................................................................................... 136
run command/rotational direction configuration135 Ｄ
commercial power source transition ......................... 242
DB resistor
common terminal .............................. refer to EG terminal
braking resistor circuit..........................................................285
communication........................................................................... 297 DB Warn %ED............................................................................ 285
command loss protective operation ...........................301 DB Warn %ED.................................. refer to DB Warn %ED
communication address.....................................................305
DC braking after start............................................................ 156
communication line connection....................................298
communication parameters.............................................299 DC braking after stop............................................................ 157
communication speed ........................................................299 DC braking frequency ........................................................... 157
communication standards ................................................297
DC link voltage ............................................................... 178; 227
memory map ............................................................................ 303
PLC .................................................................................................. 297 delta wiring ....................................................................................... 58
protocol........................................................................................ 305 derating ............................................................................................ 240
saving parameters defined by communication ....302 digital output................................................................................ 262
setting virtual multi-function input ..............................302
digital source ................................................................................ 137
Communication function group............. refer to COM
(communication function group) display................................................................................................... 90
Communication groupCM (refer to Communication) display mode table ...................................................................94
display modes .............................................................................93
group
460
Index
disposal ................................................................................. 411; 415 0.8~1.5kW(Single Phase), 1.5~2.2kW(3 Phase)......430;

435; 436
dr(Drive group) .................................................................. 70; 323
External Trip ....................................................................... 295; 402
draw operation ........................................................................... 178
external trip signal.................................................................... 281
Drive group........... refer to DRV (Drive group); refer to
dr(Drive) group
Dwell operation .......................................................................... 192
Ｆ
Acc/Dec dwell frequency ...................................................192 factory default .............................................................. 80; 82; 83
acceleration dwell ..................................................................192
fan trip ............................................................................................... 288
deceleration dwell..................................................................192
Fan Trip.................................................................................. 295; 402
Ｅ fan warning.................................................................................... 288

Fan Warning...................................................................... 296; 404
earth leakage breaker............................................................ 409
fatal ...................................................................................................... 400
EEP Rom Empty.......................................................................... 244
fault ...................................................................................................... 294
EG terminal ....................................................................................... 54
fatal ................................................................................................. 400
electronic thermal overheating protection (ETH) fault/warning list .....................................................................294
.......................................................................................................... 273 latch................................................................................................ 400
level ................................................................................................ 400
EMC filter............................................................................................ 58
major fault .................................................................................. 295
asymmetric power ....................................................................58
fault monitoring ......................................................................... 109
disable..............................................................................................58
disabling .........................................................................................59 multiple fault trips .................................................................. 110
enable ..............................................................................................59 fault trip mode............................................................................... 94
enabling..........................................................................................59 ferrite...................................................................................................... 55
emergency stop fault trip..................................refer to BX fieldbus ..........................................116; 133; refer to fieldbus
energy buffering operation............................................... 227 communication option .......................................................163
energy saving operation ..................................................... 232 filter time constant................................................................... 119
automatic energy saving operation .............................232 filter time constant number.............................................. 164
manual energy saving operation...................................232
flux braking .................................................................................... 276
ESC key ................................................................................................ 69
free run stop ................................................................................. 159
[ESC] key configuration .......................................................187
[ESC] key setup......................................................................... 136 frequency jump .......................................................................... 162
cancel input ..................................................................................69 frequency limit ............................................................................ 160
Jog key.............................................................................................74 frequency jump .......................................................................162
local/remote switching........................................................137 frequency upper and lower limit value ......................161
multi-function key..................................................................136 maximum/start frequency ................................................160
remote/local operation switching.................................137 frequency reference .................................................... 117; 156
ETH .....refer to electronic thermal overheating protection
frequency setting ...................................................................... 116
(ETH)
I2 current input ........................................................................124
E-Thermal ........................................................................................ 295 I2 voltage input........................................................................125
excitation current....................................................................... 210 keypad .......................................................................................... 117
external 24V power terminal....... refer to 24 terminal RS-485 ........................................................................................... 129
TI Pulse input ............................................................................. 127
external dimensions
V1 voltage input ...................................................................... 118
461
Index
variable resistor ...........................................................................81 I2 terminal ......................................................................................52
frequency setting (pulse train) terminal ...refer to TI P1–P5 terminal ............................................................................51
terminal P1–P7 terminal ............................................................................51
SA terminal ....................................................................................52
frequency setting(voltage) terminal........... refer to V1
SB terminal ....................................................................................52
terminal
SC terminal ....................................................................................52
fuse....................................................................................................... 440 TI terminal ......................................................................................52
V1 terminal ....................................................................................52
Ｇ VR terminal ....................................................................................52
Input terminal function group ..........refer to IN (Input
ground.................................................................................................. 42 terminal function group)
class 3 ground..............................................................................43 Input Terminal group ............ refer to In(input terminal)
ground terminal .........................................................................42
group
ground cable specifications .................................................28
inspection
ground fault trip ...................................refer to Ground Trip
annual inspection...................................................................412
Ground Trip........................................................................ 295; 401 bi-annual inspection)............................................................414
ground fault trip ......................................................................401 installation.......................................................................................... 30
installation flowchart ...............................................................30
Ｈ mounting the inverter ............................................................32
wiring ...............................................................................................36
half duplex system ................................................................... 297
installation considerations..................................................... 23
Heavy Duty ....................................................................................... 23
heavy load .......................................................................... 240; 416
Ｊ
hunting.................................................................................. 214; 224
Jog operation............................................................................... 184
FWD Jog....................................................................................... 185
Ｉ
Jog frequency ........................................................................... 185
I2 52; 124 keypad .......................................................................................... 187
analog input selection switch(SW2)................................52 Jog Operation
frequency setting(current/voltage) terminal .............52 [ESC] key configuration ..........................................................74
In Phase Open................................................................. 295; 401 jump frequency .......................................................................... 162
In(Input Terminal Block Function group) ................ 347
In(Input Terminal) group......................................................... 70 Ｋ
input and output specification keypad .................................................................................................. 67
applied motor........................................................................... 416 [ESC] key .........................................................................................88
rated input .................................................................................. 416 [HAND] key....................................................................................88
rated output .............................................................................. 416 [MODE] key ...................................................................................88
input open-phase fault trip.....refer to In Phase Open [MULTI] key ....................................................................................88
input phase open [OFF] key .........................................................................................88
input open-phase protection ..........................................281 [PROG / Ent] key..........................................................................88
[STOP/RESET] key ......................................................................88
input power frequency ......................................................... 244
configuration mode .................................................................94
input power voltage ............................................................... 244 cursor keys .....................................................................................88
input terminal ................................................................................. 51 display ..............................................................................................90
CM terminal ..................................................................................51 display ..............................................................................................67
462
Index
display mode................................................................................93 command loss fault trip warning...................................296
keypad language ....................................................................268 command loss trip .................................................................295
monitor mode .............................................................................94 low voltage ............................................................ 291; 295; 401
navigating between groups ................................................93 low voltage fault trip .................................................. 291; 295
parameter mode ........................................................................94 low voltage trip 2 ....................................................................294
S/W version ................................................................................ 251
LowLeakage PWM ................................................................... 239
trip mode .......................................................................................94
keypad display....................................................................... 68; 90
Ｍ
keypad features
fault monitoring ......................................................................109 M2(2nd Motor Function group).................................... 370
selecting a display mode .......................................................96 M2(2nd Motor) group ............................................................. 70
keypad key ........................................................................................ 69
magnetic contactor...................................................... 47; 437
[▲]/[▼]/[◀]/[▶] key ...............................................................69
[ESC] key .........................................................................................69 maintenance ................................................................................. 411
[RUN] key........................................................................................69 manual torque boost ............................................................. 153
[STOP/RESET] key ......................................................................69 master ................................................................................................ 298
master inverter ............................................................................ 167
Ｌ
master unit ..................................................................................... 166
latch ..................................................................................................... 400 MCCB.............................................................................................v; 437
LCD display ....................................................................................... 90 megger test ................................................................................... 412
LCD keypad.................................................41; 67; 87; 90; 452 micro surge filter .......................................................................... 46
LCD brightness/contrast adjustment ..........................251 momentary power interruption............. 227; 235; 237
operation keys ..................................................................... 87; 90
monitor ................................................................................................ 84
wiring length................................................................................55
operation state monitor......................................................269
leakage breaker .......................................................................... 437
operation time monitor ......................................................271
level...................................................................................................... 400
monitoring
lifetime diagnosis of components monitor mode .............................................................................94
lifetime diagnosis for fans ..................................................290 monitor mode display ............................................................90
lift-type load...............................................147; 153; 154; 192 motor output voltage adjustment............................... 155
linear pattern ................................................................................ 147 motor protection....................................................................... 273
linear V/F pattern operation............................................. 150 motor rotational direction..................................................... 65
base frequency ........................................................................ 150 motor thermal protection(ETH)
start frequency ......................................................................... 150
ETH trip ......................................................................................... 273
local operation ............................................................................ 137 E-Thermal .................................................................................... 273
[ESC] key ...................................................................................... 137 mounting bolt ................................................................................ 32
Local/Remote mode switching.......................................136
mounting bracket ........................................................................ 34
remote peration ......................................................................137
locating the installation site................................................. 24 multi function input terminal
location............................................................................................24 In.65~71 ....................................................................................... 349
Px terminal function setting .............................................349
loop...................................................................................................... 168
multi function input terminal
loop time ......................................................................................... 172
Px Define ..................................................................................... 349
Lost Command ................................................... 295; 403; 404
multi keypad
463
Index
multi KPD .................................................................................... 167 NPN mode(Sink)........................................................................... 57
multi keypad(multi-keypad)
slave parameter ....................................................................... 167 Ｏ
Multi-drop Link System........................................................ 297
open-phase protection......................................................... 280
Multi-function (open collector) output terminal
Multi-function output item1(Q1 Define) ...................354 operation frequency ................ refer to frequency setting
Multi-function relay 1 item(Relay 1) .............................354 operation group................................................................ 70; 321
multi-function input terminal ............................................. 51 operation noise .......................................................................... 239
factory default .............................................................................51 carrier frequency .....................................................................239
multi-function input terminal off filter ........................164 frequency jump .......................................................................162
multi-function input terminal On filter .......................164 operation time ............................................................................ 271
P1–P5................................................................................................ refer operation accumulated time ...........................................271
P1–P7................................................................................................ refer operation accumulated time initialization ...............271
multi-function input terminal control ....................... 164 option trip....................................293; refer to Option Trip-x
multi-function key .............................................................. 68; 74 Option Trip-x ................................................................................ 295
[ESC] key .........................................................................................74 option trip ................................................................................... 295
Multi Key Sel .............................................................................. 398 OU(Output Terminal Block Function group)........ 352
multi-function key options................................................398 OU(Output Terminal) group ................................................ 70
multi-function output terminal
Out Phase Open ............................................................ 295; 401
multi-function output on/off control ..........................255
multi-function output terminal and relay settings output block by multi-function terminal................ 291
.................................................................................................... 262 output open-phase fault trip..........refer to Out Phase
multi-function output terminal delay time settings Open
.................................................................................................... 267 output terminal................................. refer to R/S/T terminal
trip output by multi-function output terminal and
Output terminal function group ..............refer to OUT
relay ......................................................................................... 266
(Output terminal function group)
multi-function(open collector) output terminal
Output Terminal group.. refer to OU(output terminal)
..................................................................... refer to Q1 terminal
group
multi-keypad................................................................................. 167
output/communication terminal...................................... 53
master parameter...................................................................167
24 terminal ....................................................................................54
setting ........................................................................................... 167
AO terminal ...................................................................................53
multi-step frequency AO2 terminal ................................................................................53
Speed-L/Speed-M/Speed-H .............................................132 EG terminal....................................................................................54
Q1 terminal ...................................................................................54
Ｎ S+/S-/SG terminal ......................................................................54
TO terminal....................................................................................53
N- terminal(- DC link terminal) ......................................... 46 over current trip ............................... refer to Over Current1
no motor trip ....................................................... 293; 295; 401 Over Current1 .................................................................. 295; 401
noise........................................................................................... 58; 121 Over Current2 .................................................................. 295; 401
Normal Duty .................................................................................... 23 Over Heat............................................................................ 295; 401
normal load ....................................................................... 240; 416 over heat fault trip ..................................refer to Over Heat
Normal PWM ............................................................................... 239 Over Load ........................................................................... 295; 400
overload fault trip ...................................................................295
464
Index
overload warning ........................................................ 296; 403 PID reference ............................................................................. 198
Over Voltage..................................................................... 295; 401 PID switching ............................................................................ 203
Pre-PID operation ...................................................................202
over voltage trip ................................. refer to Over Voltage
PNP mode(Source) ..................................................................... 56
overload............................................................. refer to Overload
PNP/NPN mode selection switch(SW1) ..................... 49
overload overload trip .........................................................275
overload warning ...................................................................275 NPN mode(Sink).........................................................................57
PNP mode(Source)....................................................................56
overload rate ................................................................................ 240
post-installation checklist ....................................................... 63
overload trip................................................ refer to Over Load
power consumption ................................................... 269; 271
power slot....................................................................................... 252
Ｐ
power terminal............................................................................... 46
P/Igain................................................................................................ 237 N- terminal.....................................................................................46
P1+ terminals(+ DC link terminals) ............................... 46 P2+/B terminal ............................................................................46
P2P ....................................................................................................... 166 U/V/W terminal ...........................................................................46
communication function ...................................................166 power terminal board wiring .............................................. 43

master parameter...................................................................166 power terminals
setting ........................................................................................... 166 R/S/T terminals ............................................................................46
slave parameter ....................................................................... 166 power-on run ................................refer to start at power-on
parameter........................................................................................... 73
Pr(Protection Function group) ........................................ 365
display changed parameter..............................................248
Pr(Protection) group .................................................................. 70
hide parameters ......................................................................246
initialization................................................................................ 245 pre-exciting time ....................................................................... 211
initializing the parameters ................................................. 112 press regeneration prevention ....................................... 256
parameter lock ......................................................................... 247 P gain/I gain ............................................................................... 256
parameter setting........................................................... 73; 104
Protection group ............... refer to Pr(Protection) group
password .......................................................................... 246; 247
read/write/save ........................................................................ 244 protocol ............................................................................................ 305
parameter mode........................................................................... 94 pulse output terminal ..................... refer to TO terminal
parameter setting mode .......................................................95 PWM ................................................................................................... 239
parameter view lock ............................................................... 246 frequency modulation.........................................................239
part names ........................................................18; 21; 411; 415
parts illustrated ..................................................................... 18; 21 Ｑ
password.................................................................. 246; 247; 320 Q1 terminal....................................................................................... 54
phase-to-phase voltage....................................................... 408 quantizing ....................................................................................... 121
PID control ..................................................................................... 196 noise............................................................................................... 121
basic PID operation................................................................197
configuration ............................................................................ 196 Ｒ
Differential time(PID D-Time) ...........................................199
integral time(PID I-Time) .....................................................199 R/S/T terminal............................................................ 46; 47; 407
oscillation .................................................................................... 200 rated .................................................................................................... 422
Pgain .............................................................................................. 199
braking resistance rated capacity ..................................442
PID feedback ............................................................................. 402
rated input....................................................................... 417; 422
PID operation sleep mode .................................................202
rated output ................................................................... 417; 422
PID output .................................................................................. 198
465
Index
rated torque current ............................................................... 258 S-curve pattern ........................................................................... 147

rating actual Acc/Dec time...............................................................149
rated motor current...............................................................194 sensorless vector control..................................................... 207
rated motor voltage ..............................................................204 configuration ............................................................................ 210
rated slip frequency...............................................................195 hold time ..................................................................................... 211
rated slip speed........................................................................ 194 Igain................................................................................................ 212
reactor....................................................................................... 31; 440 IM sensorless ............................................................................. 210
Pgain .............................................................................................. 212
regenerated energy..................................................... 159; 227
PM synchronous motor settings ....................................219
remote operation...................................................................... 137 PM synchronous motors ....................................................216
[ESC] key ...................................................................................... 137 pre-exciting time..................................................................... 211
local operation ......................................................................... 137 sensorless vector control operation guide .... 214; 215
Local/Remote mode switching.......................................136 sequence common terminal ......refer to CM terminal
resonance frequency .............................................................. 162
setting virtual multi-function input............................. 302
carrier frequency .....................................................................239
Single-Phase Input Application...................................... 450
frequency jump ....................................................................... 162
RS-485 ............................................................................................... 297 Sinus H expansion common area parameter
communication ....................................................................... 298 control area parameter(Read/Write) ............................316
converter ..................................................................................... 298 memory control area parameter(Read/Write)........318
integrated communication...............................................129 monitor area parameter (read only) ............................. 311
signal terminal .................................................................. 54; 129 slave..................................................................................................... 298
RS-485 signal input terminal .......... refer to S+/S-/SG slave inverter................................................................................. 167
terminal slave unit.......................................................................................... 166
run prevention slip......................................................................................................... 194
Fwd ................................................................................................. 138
slip compensation operation........................................... 194
Rev .................................................................................................. 138
speed command loss ............................................................ 283
Ｓ speed search operation ....................................................... 233

flying start-1............................................................................... 234
S/W version ................................................................................... 251 flying start-2............................................................................... 234
keypad .......................................................................................... 251 options.......................................................................................... 235
product......................................................................................... 251 P/Igain ........................................................................................... 237
S+/S-/SG terminal ....................................................................... 54 speed unit selection (Hz or Rpm) ................................ 131
SA terminal ....................................................................................... 52 square reduction
Safe operation mode............................................................. 190 square reduction load ..........................................................151
V/F pattern operation...........................................................151
safety information ......................................................................... iii
stall ....................................................................................................... 276
safety input power terminal .........refer to SC terminal
bit on/off ...................................................................................... 277
safety inputA terminal ....................... refer to SA terminal stall prevention ........................................................................276
safety inputB terminal ....................... refer to SB terminal start at power-on ...................................................................... 139
SB terminal ........................................................................................ 52 start mode...................................................................................... 155
SC terminal........................................................................................ 52 acceleration start.....................................................................156
screw specification start after DC braking ...........................................................156
control circuit terminal screw...........................................441 station ................................................................................................ 167
466
Index
station ID ......................................................................................... 305 torque boost................................................................................. 153

stop mode...................................................................................... 157 auto torque boost ..................................................................154
DC braking after stop ...........................................................157 manual torque boost............................................................153
deceleration stop ....................................................................157 overexcitation ........................................................................... 154
free run stop .............................................................................. 159 trip ........................................................................................................ 400
power braking .......................................................................... 159 erase trip history......................................................................251
storage .............................................................................................. 415 fault/warning list .....................................................................294
trip condition monitor ............................................................85
Storing Temperature .................................................................. 23
trip mode .......................................................................................94
surge killer ................................................................................ 47; 63 trip status reset.........................................................................292
SW1 ......refer to PNP/NPN mode selection switch(SW1); troubleshooting ......................................................................404
refer to PNP/NPN mode selection switch(SW1) troubleshooting.......................................................................... 400
SW2 ............... refer to analog input selection switch(SW2) other faults ................................................................................. 406
troubleshooting fault trips ................................................. 404
SW3 ........... refer to analog output selection switch(SW3)
switch..................................................................................................... 49
analog input selection switch(SW2)................................49
Ｕ
analog output selection switch(SW3) ............................49 U&M mode ................................................................................... 249
PNP/NPN mode selection switch(SW1) ........................49
U/V/W terminal ........................................................ 46; 47; 407
UF 376
Ｔ
UF(User Sequence Function) group .............................. 70
target frequency
under load
Cmd Frequency ....................................................................... 323
under load trip.......................................................................... 286
technical specification............................................................ 416 under load warning...............................................................286
terminal............................................................................................. 165 Under Load .................................................................................... 295
A terminal ......................................................................... 165; 268 underload trip................................................................ 295; 400
B terminal ......................................................................... 165; 268 underload warning..................................................... 296; 403
terminal for frequency reference setting ....... refer to underload fault trip ............................ refer to Under Load
VR terminal update ............................................................................................... 251
test run ................................................................................................. 65
Up-Down operation................................................................ 188
TI terminal.............................................................................. 52; 127
US373
time scale
US(User Sequence) group..................................................... 70
0.01sec .......................................................................................... 142
USB....................................................................................................... 298
0.1sec............................................................................................. 142
1sec................................................................................................. 142 communication .......................................................................298
time scale setting ...................................................................... 141 user group...................................................................................... 248
delete parameters ..................................................................249
timer .................................................................................................... 252
parameter registration.........................................................249
protection features group ..... PRT (protection features)
User mode......................................................................................... 93
group
user sequence ............................................................................. 168
TO terminal ........................................................................... 53; 260
function block parameter ..................................................173
torque.................................................................................................... 46 setting ........................................................................................... 168
torque control........................................................................... 228 UF group...................................................................................... 168
torque reference setting option .....................................230 US group...................................................................................... 168
467
Index
user function operation condition ................................173 I2 voltage input........................................................................125
void parameter ............................................................. 168; 173 variable resistor .............................................................................. 81
User Sequence Function group.......refer to UF(User variable torque load.................................................... 151; 228
Sequence Function) group
voltage drop .................................................................................... 46
User Sequence group......... refer to US(user sequence)
voltage/current output terminal.................. refer to AO
group
terminal
user V/F pattern operation................................................ 152
VR terminal ........................................................................... 52; 118
using the keypad................................................................. 71; 96
groups/codes...............................................................................71
Jog Operation key .....................................................................74
Ｗ
moving directly to a code .....................................................72 warning ............................................................................................. 400
navigating through the codes (functions)................101
fault/warning list .....................................................................294
parameter setting........................................................... 73; 104
switching between groups in parameter display weight ................................................................................................ 416
mode ...................................................................................... 100 wiring..................................................................................................... 36
3 core cable ...................................................................................46
Ｖ control terminal board wiring...........................41; 47; 452
copper cable.................................................................................36
V/F control...................................................................................... 150 cover disassembly .....................................................................37
linear V/F pattern operation..............................................150 ferrite ................................................................................................55
square reductionV/F pattern operation .....................151 ground.............................................................................................42
user V/F pattern operation ................................................152 power terminal board wiring ..............................................43
V1 terminal............................................................................ 52; 118 re-assembling the covers ......................................................62
torque...............................................................................................36
V2
wiring length................................................................................55
analog input selection switch(SW2)................................52
V2 input............................................................................................ 125
468

Santerno

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document informationThis manual is integrant and essential to the product. Carefully read the instructions contained herein as they provide important hints for use and maintenance safety

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Santerno

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Santerno

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

• 15P0176B100 •

Elettronica Santerno S.p.A.

Santerno User Manuals mentioned in this

Safety symbols in this manual

• This equipment must be grounded for safe and proper operation.

ABB Tmax LSIS Susol LSIS Metasol

Quick Reference Table

3.3.6 Frequency Setting (Potentiometer) and Operation (Keypad) ................... 82

4.5 Command Source Configuration ......................................................................................133

4.17.3 Free Run Stop .................................................................................................................... 159

5.11 Sensorless Vector Control for PM (Permanent-Magnet) Syn Motors ..............216

5.34.2 Analog Pulse Output ..................................................................................................... 260

7.2 Communication System Configuration .........................................................................298

8.14.1 Trip Mode (TRP Last-x) .................................................................................................. 396

13 Marking ...................................................................................................................... 453

1 Preparing the Installation

1.1 Product Identification

A2= Integrated Filter for Second Environment, C3 Category

A1= Integrated Filter for First Environment, C2 Category

B= Brake included X=Brake not included

0005 2.2 B2 IP66_B 2T 3 phase B I K 2/6

1.2 Part Names for IP20 models

Sizes Eu_A, Eu_B, Eu_C1, Eu_C2, A1, A2, B1, B2, C2

1.3 Part Names for IP66 models

Do not operate Disconnect Switch when motor is operating.

Cooling fan is only supported to 5.5~7.5kW products.

Front cover removed

1.4 Installation Considerations

1.5 Selecting and Preparing a Site for Installation

1.6 Cable Selection

Terminals Signal Cable

2 Installing the Inverter

Installation Flowchart (Basic Configuration Diagram)

Select the Installation Location (p.21)

Mounting the Inverter (p.32)

Wiring the Ground Connection (p.42)

Power and Signal Wiring (p.43)

Post-Installation Checks (p.63)

Turning on the Inverter

Parameter Configuration (p.76)

2.1 Mounting the Inverter

2.2 Cable Wiring

• Install the inverter before carrying out wiring connections.

Step 1 Front Cover, Control Terminal Cover and Cable Guide

Sizes A, A1, A2, B, C

For the Inverter Size definition refer to page 16.

For the Inverter Size identification refer to page 16.

For the Inverter Size identification refer to page 16.

Step 2 Ground Connection

• 2T products require Class 3 grounding. Resistance to ground must be < 100Ω.

Step 3 Power Terminal Wiring

Sizes B, B1, B2, C

Terminal Labels Name Description

Step 4 Control Terminal Wiring

<Terminals in IP20 models except for 0034 model (Multiple I/O)>

<Terminals in IP20 model 0034 only (Standard I/O (M))>

< Terminals in IP66 models (Standard I/O) >

< Terminals in IP20 models except for 0034 model >